Professional Documents
Culture Documents
General Orders
LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
GENERAL ORDER
A. The Little Rock Police Department is committed to protecting life and property through
Teamwork with the community while embracing mutual Respect and Understanding. Our mission
is to provide professional Service that is unbiased, consistent and Transparent. (T.R.U.S.T.)
B. In order to fulfill this mission, every member of the Department must continually direct his efforts
toward:
1. Realizing that the employees of our Department are the most important part of the
organization, and constantly striving to help them in their performance and development,
in the spirit of departmental cooperation.
2. Recognizing that the spirit of the Little Rock Police Department is one of helping people
and providing assistance at every opportunity.
3. Enlightening citizen attitudes toward public safety, and striving to gain community
support in the suppression of criminal activity.
6. Consistently demanding the highest degree of integrity and professionalism from all
employees.
C. All personnel, prior to assuming sworn status, will take and subsequently abide by an Oath of
Office to enforce the laws of the City and State, and to uphold the Constitution of the United States
and the Constitution of the State of Arkansas.
Trust from the community we serve is essential for long term success. Every interaction with the public is
an opportunity to build a relationship with the community. Public safety must be a collaboration between
law enforcement and the citizens we serve. The value statement for the Department utilizing the acronym
CONNECT is as follows:
O – Objectivity
The Little Rock Police Department is committed to providing law enforcement services in a fair, consistent,
and unbiased manner.
N – Networking
The Little Rock Police Department works tirelessly to build bridges to establish relationships with
community partners in order to provide a safe environment and enhance the quality of life.
C – Committed to excellence
The Little Rock Police Department is dedicated to providing outstanding service through continuous
improvement while utilizing industry best practices.
T – Trustworthy
The Little Rock Police Department seeks to ensure officers perform their duties with professionalism while
maintaining a police culture that is ethical and responsive to the community we serve.
III. The Oath of Office will be administered according to the Arkansas Constitution Article 19 section 20
B. Signed Oaths of Office will be maintained in files located in the Office of the Chief of Police.
A. Employees of the Little Rock Police Department will conduct themselves in a manner, which is consistent
with the policies and philosophies of the Little Rock Police Department. During the performance of their
duties, they will strive to project a professional image and abide by a Code of Ethics to govern their
conduct. Ethics training will be conducted biennially for all personnel by the Training Division.
1. The employee will obey all lawful orders and truthfully answer questions pertaining to all
Departmental investigations, as required by the Little Rock Police Department Rules and
Regulations.
2. I will keep my private life unsullied, as an example to all, maintain courageous calm in
the face of danger, scorn or ridicule, develop self-restraint, and be constantly mindful of
the welfare of others. I will be honest in thought and deed in both my personal and
official life, and I will be exemplary in obeying the laws of the land and the regulations of
my department. Whatever I see or hear of a confidential nature or that which is confided
to me in my official capacity will be kept ever secret unless revelation is necessary in the
performance of my duty.
4. I recognize the badge of my office as a symbol of public faith, and I accept it, as a public
trust to be held so long as I am true to the ethics of the police service. I will constantly
strive to achieve these objectives and ideals, dedicating myself before God to my chosen
profession of law enforcement.
1. Conduct themselves in their public and private activities in a manner which deserves the
respect and confidence of fellow employees and the public.
5. Not accept or solicit gifts or favors nor use the prestige of public employment for private
gain. Understand that personal gain or profit obtained by disclosing confidential
information or by use of government equipment or supplies is dishonest.
7. Make it our duty to improve operations and productivity and use time wisely so that full
value is received for each tax dollar spent.
8. Be courteous, pleasant and tactful in our contacts with the public and fellow employees.
Courtesy builds good will that money cannot purchase.
9. Be loyal to the organization whose wages support us; speak well of and support its
policies.
D. Signed Codes of Ethics will be maintained in files located in the Office of the Chief of Police.
I. Definitions
A. Goal - A relatively broad statement of the end or result that one intends ultimately to achieve. A
goal usually requires a relatively long time span to achieve and, whenever possible should be
stated in a way that permits measurement.
B. Objective - An objective is an end or result that one intends to attain in order to achieve partial
fulfillment of a goal. An objective is a subgoal or an element of a goal and, therefore, requires a
shorter time to accomplish, than does a goal. Objectives should be specific, measurable and
attainable. The objective should tie in with the attainment of its defined goal.
A. In January of each year, the Department and each organizational component shall formulate and
update written goals and objectives for the upcoming year.
B. By January 15 of each year, written goals and objectives shall be submitted, through the Chain of
Command, to the respective Assistant Chief of Police for review and revision.
C. Once approved, goals and objectives shall be posted in each organizational component for view by
personnel. A copy of each component’s goals and objectives shall be forwarded to the
Accreditation Management Unit.
D. Division Commanders may assign Unit Supervisors part of the work plan, as a basis for
formulating goals and objectives. Divisional work plans will be promulgated by the Office of the
Chief of Police annually.
A. For the first three-quarters of the calendar year (ending in March, June, and September),
component supervisors will submit a written evaluation of progress toward the attainment of goals
and objectives. These quarterly reviews shall be submitted, through the Chain of Command to the
respective Assistant Chief of Police by the 10th of the following month.
B. The final quarterly review, due January 10, shall include an overview of progress made towards
the attainment of goals and objectives for the entire year.
C. As objectives are fully completed, the goal(s) should be reviewed and objectives updated as
needed. New objectives shall be submitted along with the quarterly review, and posted for
personnel.
D. A copy of each component’s quarterly review shall be forwarded to the Accreditation Management
and Staff Inspections Unit.
A. The Administrative Services Manager, at the direction of the Chief of Police, shall prepare the
Department’s multi-year plan.
C. The plan shall be reviewed and updated, as directed by the Chief of Police.
I. Department Jurisdiction
A. A detailed official map, including the boundaries of the jurisdiction, may be observed in the
following locations:
1. Communications Center;
2. Downtown Division;
3. Southwest Division;
4. Northwest Division;
B. Concurrent Jurisdiction
1. The department recognizes and acknowledges that the Little Rock Police Department
shares concurrent jurisdiction with other local, state and Federal agencies. Other
departments, having jurisdiction within the City of Little Rock, include the Pulaski
County Sheriff’s Department, the Arkansas State Police and various Federal and state
agencies that derive their jurisdiction by law.
2. The Little Rock Police Department has primary jurisdiction in all incidents and motor
vehicle accidents, within the defined boundaries of the City of Little Rock. The Little
Rock Police Department has concurrent jurisdiction with the Arkansas State Police in the
investigation of motor vehicle accidents, criminal incidents and traffic enforcement on
the Interstate Highway Systems within the City. The State Police has primary
jurisdiction, but will be assisted by this department, when requested. The Arkansas
Highway Police have the authority to enforce all laws pertaining to unlawful operation of
motor vehicles over the highways of this state, giving them concurrent jurisdiction on
certain streets/highways within the City of Little Rock.
3. U.A.M.S. Police and U.A.L.R. Police are restricted to the confines of their respective
university campuses for enforcement purposes.
4. The Little Rock Police Department has concurrent jurisdiction with the Arkansas State
Capitol Police. Officers of the State Capitol Police shall have the authority to act in their
official capacities and exercise their powers anywhere within the boundaries of the State
of Arkansas. The Little Rock Police Department has concurrent jurisdiction with the
Veteran’s Administration Police, within the boundaries of the John L. McClellan
Veteran’s Administration Hospital and adjoining property. The Department also has
concurrent jurisdiction with the Federal Protection Service on the property of the Federal
Building at 700 West Capitol. The Federal Court Building located at 600 West Capitol is
the only recognized Federal Reservation, within the boundaries of the City of Little Rock.
The Department also has concurrent jurisdiction with the United States Marshall's
Service on the property of the Federal Court Building at 600 West Capitol for
enforcement of criminal offenses.
5. The Little Rock Police Department has no jurisdiction within the City of Cammack
Village, nor does its Police Department have authority within the City of Little Rock.
6. The general exercise of law enforcement service by these departments is one of implicit
approval and cooperation. Employees of this department will offer complete
cooperation, when situations arise, where these departments must exercise their authority
within the city limits of Little Rock.
7. Inter-agency cooperation and effective law enforcement is not a solitary effort, but
requires the cooperation and interaction of many departments. The Little Rock Police
Department supports the concept and will cooperate fully with other departments in the
discharge of enforcement duties.
8. In the event of an emergency or police investigation, other departments may request the
assistance of the Little Rock Police Department. Acting within the provisions of state
law (A.C.A.§16-81-106) and Federal law, officers of the Little Rock Police Department
are authorized to cross jurisdictional lines and assist other departments.
c) During the course of providing assistance, members of the Little Rock Police
Department will abide by the General Orders and Rules and Regulations of the
Little Rock Police Department.
A. There are occasions when law enforcement officers from jurisdictions outside Little Rock become
involved in police actions within the City of Little Rock. The following should be considered by
Little Rock Police Department personnel when faced with these circumstances;
1. A.C.A. 16-81-106 provides that a certified law enforcement officer who is outside his or
her jurisdiction may arrest without a warrant, a person who commits an offense within
the officer’s presence or view if the offense is a felony or misdemeanor.
a) A certified law enforcement officer making an arrest shall notify the law
enforcement agency having jurisdiction where the arrest was made as soon as
practicable following the arrest.
b) The law enforcement agency having jurisdiction shall then take custody of the
person committing the offense.
B. Officers of this Department should be aware that statewide arrest powers for law enforcement
officers will be in effect only when the officer is working outside his or her jurisdiction at the
C. Law enforcement agencies exercising statewide arrest powers must have a written policy on file
regulating the actions of its employees relevant to law enforcement activities outside its
jurisdiction.
D. A list of agencies that have been granted permission by the Chief of Police will be maintained by
the Office of the Chief of Police and will be provided to the front desk at Headquarters.
E. Agencies that have not complied with A.C.A. 16-18-106 should be treated as civilians without
arrest authority.
F. Should an officer of this Department respond to an incident involving an officer(s) from another
jurisdiction, an on-duty supervisor will respond to the scene to evaluate the need or necessity of
Little Rock Police Department involvement. The supervisor will contact a supervisor with the
applicable agency and advise them of the incident and the actions of the Little Rock Police
Department. The supervisor will document this contact with the other agency supervisor and will
forward through the chain of command.
I. Purpose
A. The purpose of this Order is to ensure a consistent application of terms and abbreviations used in
all Departmental Orders.
6. Department Officer or Departmental Officer - Any sworn member of the Little Rock
Police Department.
10. Employee – Sworn police officers and civilian personnel of the Department.
11. Gender terms – Any words used in the masculine, feminine or neuter, shall be construed
as also used in another gender, where applicable.
12. General Orders – Orders issued by the Chief of Police that apply to all employees.
13. Must – Indicate that a requirement has to be completed in order to validate a particular
procedure or to comply with a particular legal requirement.
17. Officer – Any sworn member of the Little Rock Police Department.
22. Police Officer - A rank of a sworn employee, unless noted otherwise in the context.
23. Policy – A generic term applied to Orders, which govern all employees.
24. Procedure – A generic term applied to Divisional Operating Procedures; may also mean
the process by which a task is accomplished.
25. Procedure Guideline – An administrative order issued by the City Manager to establish an
administrative policy for the City. (May also be referred to as The City of Little Rock
Administrative Personnel Policy and Procedure Manual.)
27. Responsibility – Denotes a duty, obligation, and the accountability that is ascribed to an
individual, who is answerable to superiors for specified actions and/or conduct.
29. Senior Officer – A sworn officer with longer service in an equal rank.
30. Shall, Will and May – Shall and Will are mandatory; May is permissive.
33. Should – Indicates a certain procedure or policy is preferred to obtain a desired result.
35. Command Staff – The Chief of Police, the Assistant Chiefs of Police, and Captains.
37. Supervisor – An officer or civilian employee, who has supervisory classification and
responsibility for the instruction and direction of a subordinate’s work.
38. Suspension – The temporary separation of an employee from his position for disciplinary
reasons. (A suspended employee is subject to disciplinary action for his conduct during
the period of suspension.)
40. Sworn Officer or sworn Employee – An employee who has the authority to make an
arrest pursuant to Federal or State Statute, or city Ordinances.
10. P.P.P.M. – The City of Little Rock Administrative Personnel Policy and Procedure
Manual
I. General
A. Departmental written directives are operational and administrative in the form of General Orders,
Rules and Regulations, Divisional Operating Procedures, Informational Directives, Standard
Orders, and Memorandums used to clarify the purpose, policies, and objectives of the Department.
These are based on facts of law, requirements of city, state and federal governments, court
decisions and experiences of other police organizations, as well as the Little Rock Police
Department.
B. The Chief of Police has the authority to issue, modify, approve and/or rescind the Department’s
written directives and may authorize memorandums that supersede directives until revisions are
made.
C. It is the responsibility of all personnel to familiarize themselves with departmental directives and
conduct themselves accordingly.
A. Little Rock Police Department Personnel are governed by two types of procedural guidelines:
2. Departmental - The Little Rock Police Department guidelines for written directives are
established as follows:
f) Special Order - A written order issued by the Chief of Police to all personnel
announcing any appointments, promotions, retirements, leaves of absence,
transfers or other similar personnel actions concerning departmental employees.
Recipients may discard Special Orders after dissemination of all pertinent
information. The Office of the Chief of Police will maintain original Special
Orders for five years, after which they may be discarded. Training Bulletin - An
instructional or informational bulletin or video addressing training matters.
III. Guidelines
A. Employees are directed to adhere to the Rules and Regulations, the General
Orders, appropriate Divisional Operating Procedures and other directives
affecting their performance and to strive to use proper judgment and discretion
in situations not specifically covered in the orders.
1. Employees should base their actions on the needs of the citizens and the
best interests of the Department.
a) The necessity to deviate from established orders and procedures should rarely
occur; and,
2. When time permits, employees should obtain supervisory approval for any deviation
from orders and procedures.
3. Employees will report deviations from orders and procedures to their supervisors as soon
as possible.
1. If contradictions occur between the General Orders and Divisional Operating Procedures,
the General Orders will take precedence.
a) If contradictions occur between the orders and procedures of this Department and
any provision of state or Federal law or rulings of the various courts of
jurisdiction over the City of Little Rock, such laws or judicial rulings will take
precedence over the provisions of Departmental Orders or Procedures. Officers
should be cognizant of the Department’s authority to further restrict the
provisions of such court rulings and laws within the parameters of the
Constitution of the United States and the State of Arkansas.
A. Employees must acknowledge, through electronic signature, receipt and review of all issued
General Orders, Divisional Operating Procedures, and Rules and Regulations.
B. The Accreditation Unit is responsible for coordinating and overseeing the review, modification,
formulation, and distribution of all General Orders and Divisional Operating Procedures as
directed by the Chief of Police.
1. Suggestions for new policies or revisions to existing General Orders and Divisional
Operating Procedures may be initiated/drafted by any employee or organizational
component.
a) Any such suggestion/draft will be sent through the chain of command to the
Division Commander for approval.
b) Upon approval, the Division Commander shall forward the suggestion/draft to the
Professional Standards Section for implementation of Staff Review and
solicitation of input from affected personnel, other knowledgeable organizations,
or the City Attorney, as appropriate.
2. The Accreditation Unit will format the draft and initiate the Staff Review process through
the use of the electronic policy program, to the appropriate command staff and
appropriate personnel possessing expertise in the subject matter as necessary for review
and comments.
3. Once the Staff Review process has been completed, the draft and comments will be
forwarded to the Chief of Police or appropriate Bureau Commander for final revision and
approval.
a) The Chief of Police has final authority for any changes in the General Orders.
b) The affected Bureau Commander has final authority for any changes to their
Divisional Operating Procedure.
4. Upon final approval, the General Order or Divisional Operating Procedure will be posted
in the electronic policy program.
C. All General Orders and Divisional Operating Procedures will be identified by a unique control
number and will contain:
1. A subject title.
3. An effective date.
4. Annotations within the text referencing applicable City Ordinances and Arkansas State
Statutes.
2. Maintain a file of all cancelled and previous versions of revised General Orders and
Divisional Operating Procedures. All such documents will be retained indefinitely in the
Accreditation Unit.
F. Before publishing, new, revised and rescinded General Orders, Rules and Regulations and
Divisional Operating Procedures shall be reviewed by the Professional Standards Section to ensure
compliance with all standards mandated by the Commission on Accreditation for Law
Enforcement Agencies (CALEA).
a) Division Commanders shall ensure that all members of their division are issued a
copy of their Divisional Operating Procedures within 5 days of assignment to
their division. The primary means of distribution will be through the use of the
electronic policy software program.
2. All Divisional Operating Procedures will be reviewed periodically by each unit supervisor
for deletions, revisions and/or additions.
a) Any proposed changes shall be forwarded through the Chain of Command to the
Division Commander for approval.
V. Accessibility
A. A printed copy of all General Orders, Rules and Regulations, and Divisional Operating Procedures
shall be maintained in an area readily accessible to all employees. The Division Commander will
assign an individual to be responsible for maintaining and updating these manuals. These areas
include but are not limited to:
2. Communications Division.
9. Training Division.
1. All written directives shall clearly list the distribution for the item.
b) It will be the responsibility of each supervisor to ensure that all employees under
their direction have read and understood each new or revised directive, and
electronically sign for all changes by utilizing the electronic policy software
program.
2. Employees will be given training (e.g., recruit training, roll call training, In-service
training) on all General Orders and Divisional Operating Procedures.
(2) Supervisors shall conduct roll call training on all newly issued or
revised directives, ensuring that all personnel under their command are
aware of the policy change.
3. The Training Division will ensure that all recruits are issued an updated printed copy of the
General Orders/Rules and Regulations and any other required written directives while
attending the Training Academy.
4. All new employees will be trained so they are familiar with all General Orders/Rules and
Regulations.
1. All employees shall regularly check their Policy Program Inbox for additions or changes
to departmental directives.
1. If any discrepancy is found between Orders, the Master Copy will be considered the
correct version and final authority.
2. The Accreditation Unit will be the custodian of the General Orders, Rules and
Regulations, Divisional Operating Procedures, and will be responsible for maintaining the
Master Copies.
3. The Training Division Commander will be the custodian of all Training Bulletins and will
be responsible for maintaining the Master Copies.
4. The Office of the Chief of Police will be the custodian of all Special Orders and
Informational Directives and will be responsible for maintaining the Master Copies.
A. The Chief of Police has the ultimate responsibility within the Police Department for the protection of life
and property, preservation of law and order, investigation and suppression of all crimes and the
enforcement of State Laws and City Ordinances.
B. In the absence of the Chief of Police, the designated Assistant Chief of Police will assume the duties of
the Police Chief.
C. The specific responsibilities and duties of the Departmental units described herein may be expanded or
modified at any time by the Chief of Police.
D. Whenever used within Departmental Orders, the phrase “Office of the Chief of Police” shall mean only
the Chief of Police and any or all Assistant Chiefs of Police.
E. Whenever used within Departmental Orders, the title “Assistant Chief of Police” is synonymous with
Bureau Chief or Bureau Commander.
F. Whenever used within Departmental Orders, the title “Captain” is synonymous with Division
Commander.
1. The Assistant Chief of Police – Executive Bureau shall report to the Chief of Police.
2. The Assistant Chief of Police – Executive Bureau shall supervise the Training Division, the
Headquarters Division, the Records and Support Division, the Professional Standards Section
and the Administrative Services Section which collectively shall comprise the Executive
Bureau.
1. The Assistant Chief of Police – Field Services Bureau shall report to the Chief of Police.
2. The Assistant Chief of Police – Field Services Bureau shall supervise the Downtown Division,
the Southwest Division, the Northwest Division, and the Special Operations Division which
collectively shall comprise the Field Services Bureau.
1. The Assistant Chief of Police – Investigative Bureau shall report to the Chief of Police.
2. The Assistant Chief of Police – Investigative Bureau shall supervise the Special Investigations
Division, the Major Crimes Division, and the Public Affairs Section which collectively shall
comprise the Investigative Bureau.
1. The Records and Support Division is under the direction of a Division Commander who shall
report to the Assistant Chief of Police - Executive Bureau.
2. The Records and Support Division is comprised of the Records Section, the Technology and
Equipment Section, and the Accreditation Unit.
a) The Records Section is under the supervision of a civilian supervisor and shall be
responsible for the following:
(2) Ensuring the timely submission and control of all records in a secure, orderly,
and systematic manner.
b) The Technology and Equipment Section is under the direction of a Lieutenant and
shall be responsible for the following:
(2) ACIC/NCIC validations and audits section, responsible for compliance with
all ACIC/NCIC regulations.
(3) Assisting command staff in the coordination of Crime Analysis activities and
reporting.
(4) The Crime Analyst Supervisor shall be responsible for the Crime Analysts
assigned to each of the Field Services Divisions.
(5) Conducting project research analysis and compiling monthly, quarterly and
yearly reports as directed by the Chief of Police.
(8) Serving as a liaison with the Office of Information Technology and the
Communications Center.
c) The Accreditation Unit is under the direction of a Sergeant who shall report to the
Records and Support Division Commander.
B. Headquarters Division
1. The Headquarters Division is under the command of a Division Commander who reports to the
Assistant Chief of Police – Executive Bureau.
a) Operations Support Section shall be under the supervision of a Lieutenant and shall be
responsible for the Warrants Unit and the Property Room.
(1) The Warrants Unit is under the direction of a Sergeant and shall be
responsible for:
(b) The entry of accurate arrest information into the municipal court
docket.
(c) Serving as a liaison for both the court and the jail.
(2) The management of property in the custody of the Department under the
direction of a Sergeant.
b) The Communications Section is under the direction of a Civilian Manager who shall
report to the Headquarters Division Commander.
(a) Providing the citizens of Little Rock with a Public Safety Answering
Point for 9-1-1 and 3-1-1 communications.
(b) Dispatching field support and informational services for all public
safety agencies in the City.
1. The Professional Standards Section is commanded by a Lieutenant who shall report to the
Assistant Chief of Police – Executive Bureau.
(d) Initiate and/or compile Early Intervention files which have been
activated either by the IA Pro system or a supervisor.
1. The Administrative Services Section is under the direction of a Civilian Supervisor who shall
report to the Assistant Chief of Police – Executive Bureau.
(1) Administration of the overall budgetary activities and fiscal affairs of the
Department.
(2) Maintaining the position classification system, processing payroll records and
personnel action forms.
(3) Supervising the Financial Services Assistant, Purchasing Clerk, and Payroll
Specialist.
E. Training Division
1. The Training Division is under the direction of a Division Commander, who shall report to the
Assistant Chief of Police – Executive Bureau.
d) Assisting the City of Little Rock Human Resources Department with the police
applicant testing process.
g) Ensuring Departmental compliance with the Rules and Regulations of the Commission
on Law Enforcement Standards and Training.
1. The Downtown, Northwest and Southwest Divisions collectively comprise the Field Services
Divisions each under the direction of a Division Commander, each of whom shall report to the
Assistant Chief of Police – Field Services Bureau.
a) The deployment of forces consistent with the needs of the City in order to maintain
public order, provide preventive patrol, respond to calls for service and conduct
investigations of crimes and incidents to include the arrest of offenders.
b) The coordination of police activities between the various geographic areas of the City
and the other Divisions of the Department.
3. Each Field Services Division is staffed with a Special Assignments Section which consists of:
4. Each Field Services Division is assigned a Crime Analyst. The Crime Analyst:
b) Provides statistical crime patterns and maps to various Departmental units and public
organizations.
5. The Downtown Division is assigned the River Market Section which is under the direction of a
Lieutenant, who shall report to the Downtown Division Commander and is responsible for:
1. The Special Operations Division is under the direction of a Division Commander who shall
report to the Assistant Chief of Police – Field Services Bureau.
2. The Special Operations Division is comprised of the Traffic Services Section, the Special Units
Section, the Special Events Section, and the SWAT Unit.
a) The Traffic Services Section Lieutenant, shall report to the Special Operations
Division Commander, and shall be responsible for the following units:
(1) The START Unit is responsible for selective traffic enforcement specializing
in the apprehension of alcohol and drug impaired drivers and respond to
specific citizen complaints of traffic violations.
(2) The Canine Unit is responsible for assisting in the apprehension of violent
offenders; protect officers or others from death or serious physical injury;
track suspects; locate lost or missing persons; detect the presence of
concealed narcotics or hidden instruments of crime.
b) The Special Units Section Lieutenant, shall report to the Special Operations Division
Commander, and shall be responsible for the following units:
(1) The SRO Unit is responsible for the administration and day to day
management of officers assigned to schools within the Little Rock School
District.
(2) The Youth Programs Unit is responsible for the supervision of the GEMS and
Our Kids Programs.
c) The Special Events Section Lieutenant, shall report to the Special Operations Division
Commander, and shall be responsible for the following units:
(1) Airport Unit responsible for all law enforcement activities at the Bill and
Hillary Clinton National Airport to include the Airport Canine Unit.
(2) Special Events Unit will coordinate all City-wide or other major operational
events, will be responsible for all Hit and Run investigations, and will be the
contact point for all off-duty employment.
d) The Special Weapons and Tactics (SWAT) Unit Lieutenant, shall report to the Special
Operations Division Commander and is responsible for:
1. The Major Crimes Division is under the direction of a Division Commander who shall report to
the Assistant Chief of Police – Investigative Bureau.
1. The Special Investigations Division is under the direction of a Division Commander who shall
report to the Assistant Chief of Police – Investigative Bureau.
(1) The Narcotics and Interdiction Units are responsible for follow-up
investigations of narcotics information reported by other units within the
Division, other Divisions, and the public.
(c) The detection, investigation, and arrest of violators for vice related
crimes.
(a) Investigating organized crime and any other cases as directed by the
Chief of Police or Assistant Chief of Police – Investigative Bureau.
1. The Public Affairs Section is commanded by a Lieutenant who shall report to the Assistant
Chief of Police – Investigative Bureau.
a) The Public Affairs Section is comprised of Crime Stoppers, the FOI Unit, the
Neighborhood Watch and Public Affairs Coordinator, Crime Prevention, and the
Chaplains Program.
b) The Public Affairs Section is responsible for the supervision and direction of the
below listed units:
(b) Working with citizens and businesses that have special needs related
to crime issues and safety concerns to help them with these issues as
directed by the Chief of Police and the Public Affairs Lieutenant.
A. Attached are organizational charts depicting the Department’s organizational structure and Chain of
Command.
B. All employees shall familiarize themselves with these charts for effective communication within the
Department.
CHIEF OF
POLICE
ASSISTANT
CHIEF
DIVISION
COMMANDER
LIEUTENANT
SERGEANT
POLICE
OFFICER
LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
ORGANIZATIONAL CHART
Chief of Police
Administrative
Assistant
Executive
Secretary
Special
Training Division Operations
Division
Administrative
Services
LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
MAJOR CRIMES DIVISION
Chief of Police
Assistant Chief
Investigative
Bureau
Major Crimes
Division
Commander
Executive
Secretary
Office Assistant 1
File Clerk
Victim Services
Detectives Detectives Detectives Detectives Detectives Specialists Officers
Supervisor
Assistant Chief
Investigative Bureau
Special Investigations
Division Commander
Administrative Assistant
Administrative Technicians
File Clerk
Chief of Police
Assistant Chief
Investigative
Bureau
Public Affairs
Lieutenant
Neighborhood
Crime Stoppers Crime Prevention
FOI Unit Sergeants Watch and Public Chaplains
Officer Officer
Affairs Coordinator
LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
RECORDS & SUPPORT DIVISION
Chief of Police
Assistant Chief
Executive Bureau
Records and
Support
Commander
Technology and
Accreditation Records
Equipment
Sergeant Supervisor
Lieutenant
Information
Accreditation Technology/ Senior Vehicle Crime Analyst Assistant
Systems
Officers Equipment Officer Coordinator Supervisor Supervisor
Coordinator
Downtown Records
Crime Analyst
Vehicle Compliance Office Assistants
Northwest
Coordinator Specialist
Southwest
Crime Analyst
Vehicle Transcriptionists
Downtown
Coordinator
Northwest
Crime Analyst
Vehicle
Southwest
Coodinator
LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
PROFESSIONAL STANDARDS SECTION
Chief of Police
Assistant Chief of
Police
Executive Bureau
Professional
Standards Section
Lieutenant
Administrative
Assistant
Transcriptionist
Assistant Chief
Executive Bureau
Headquarters
Division
Commander
Executive
Secretary
Operations Emergency
Communications
Support Management
Section Manager
Lieutenant Section Lieutenant
Communications
Property Room Warrants/Front
Center 311 Supervisor
Technicians Desk Officers
Administrator
Emergency
0630-1430 Watch 1430-2230 Watch 2230-0630 Watch
Warrant Clerks Communications Call Takers
Supervisors Supervisors Supervisors
Trainer Supervisor
Court Emergency
Liaison/Subpoenas Call Takers Call Takers Call Takers Communications
Officer Trainers
Facility
Maintenance Dispatchers Dispatchers Dispatchers
Coordinator
LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
TRAINING DIVISION
Chief of Police
Assistant Chief
Executive Bureau
Training Division
Commander
Executive
Secretary
Training Division
Lieutenant
Quartermaster
Officer
Minimum
Standards Officer
LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES SECTION
Chief of Police
Assistant Chief
Executive Bureau
Financial
Services
Manager
Financial
Services Purchasing Clerk Payroll Specialist
Assistant
LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
DOWNTOWN DIVISION
Chief of Police
Assistant Chief
Field Services
Bureau
Downtown
Division
Commander
Executive
Secretary
Special
0700-1500 1500-2300 2300-0700 River Market
Relief Lieutenant Assignments
Lieutenant Lieutenant Lieutenant Lieutenant
Lieutenant
Detectives Officers
LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
NORTHWEST DIVISION
Chief of Police
Assistant Chief
Field Services
Bureau
Northwest
Division
Commander
Executive
Secretary
Special
0700-1500 1500-2300 2300-0700
Relief Lieutenant Assignments
Lieutenant Lieutenant Lieutenant
Lieutenant
Detective Unit
Officers Officers Officers
Sergeant
Detectives
COP Officers
LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
SOUTHWEST DIVISION
Chief of Police
Assistant Chief
Field Services
Bureau
Southwest
Division
Commander
Executive
Secretary
Special
0700-1500 1500-2300 2300-0700
Relief Lieutenant Assignments
Lieutenant Lieutenant Lieutenant
Lieutenant
Detective Unit
Officers Officers Officers
Sergeant
Detectives
COP Officers
LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
SPECIAL OPERATIONS DIVISION
Chief of Police
Assistant Chief
Field Services Bureau
Special Operations
Division Commander
Executive Secretary
Aviation (Part-time)
Motorcycle Unit Airport 0530-1330 Airport 1330-2130 Airport 2130-0630 Airport Relief/K9 Special Events Youth Programs
START Sergeant K9 Sergeant SRO Sergeants Pilots Sergeants
Sergeant Sergeant Sergeant Sergeant Sergeant Sergeant Sergeant
Observers
Mechanic
I. Chain of Command
A. In normal day-to-day agency operations, the Department will utilize a Chain of Command for
communications, supervision, command and direction of the employees of the Department. Each
level of supervision will carry commensurate responsibility and authority. Every employee will
be held accountable for the use or failure to use that authority either delegated to or structured for
that position.
B. Unless otherwise designated by the Chief of Police, in the absence of the Chief of Police or in
exceptional situations, command precedence shall be by order of rank and seniority in grade.
Circumstances that dictate the use of personnel of different functions engaged in a single operation
in the commanding authority shall be by order of rank and seniority in grade.
1. Chief of Police;
3. Captain;
4. Lieutenant;
5. Sergeant;
6. Police Officer;
7. Civilian Employee;
8. Reserves; and,
9. Volunteers.
D. Civilian employees who are assigned to supervisory positions will exercise the same authority and
responsibility over their work area as that of a sworn supervisor in the same capacity.
E. Police Training Interns are civilian employees and will be assigned to a police officer or sergeant
for supervision.
1. The Training Division Commander shall be responsible for the selection, training, and
Divisional assignment of all Training Interns.
2. Individual Division Commanders shall designate the specific duties and work
responsibilities of Training Interns assigned to their Divisions and determine supervisory
responsibility for their activities.
F. Volunteers are citizens who offer assistance to the police department. They will be assigned to a
civilian, police officer or Sergeant for supervision.
G. Reserves are sworn voluntary personnel and will be assigned to a Sergeant for supervision.
A. Each organizational component is under the direct command of only one supervisor.
A. To achieve effective direction, coordination, and control, the number of personnel under the
immediate control of a supervisor will not be excessive. The exact number of subordinates will
depend upon the nature and complexity of the assigned duties and the nature and extent of
demands upon the service unit. Each supervisory officer will continually monitor the number of
personnel being supervised by those under his command to ensure that appropriate limits are not
exceeded.
B. Supervision will decrease proportionally up through the Chain of Command to the Chief of Police
as a pyramid structure.
C. Employees will obey the lawful orders of a supervisor including any order relayed from a
supervisor by an employee of the same or lesser rank.
D. When an employee receives an order that conflicts with federal, state, or local laws or a previously
issued order, the employee will inform the supervisor of the conflict. The supervisor will then
resolve the conflict in accordance with all laws and Departmental or Divisional guidelines.
A. Supervisory personnel are accountable for the performance of employees under their immediate
control.
B. Supervisors will direct their efforts toward the intelligent and efficient performance of the
functions of the Police Department and will require their subordinates to do the same.
1. Actively monitor, direct, and supervise employees of lesser rank to ensure the proper and
efficient performance of their assigned duties.
2. Assume command of any situation coming to the supervisor’s attention that requires his
involvement.
4. Ensure that subordinates make all required reports promptly, accurately and completely
on proper forms.
6. Promptly obey orders of superiors and ensure that subordinates do the same.
7. With the exception of supervisors of the rank of sergeant, appoint a supervisor of the next
lower rank to act in their place when they are absent from duty. A supervisor so
appointed will have the same authority as the appointing supervisor. (A Division
Commander may request another captain to act in his behalf when he is absent from
duty.)
8. When a supervisor appoints someone to act in his place he will designate an acting
supervisor through a memorandum to his supervisor, for distribution to supervisors and
affected employees and the Office of the Chief of Police, specifying:
b) The duration
1. It shall be the duty of all commanders, supervisors, and officers to take corrective action
and submit a written report to an immediate supervisor whenever they learn through
personal observation or report, any violation of these General Orders, the Divisional
Operating Procedures, the L.R.P.D. Rules and Regulations, the Civil Service
Commissions Rules and Regulations, the ordinances of the City of Little Rock, and/or
laws of the State of Arkansas or the United States by any employee of the Department.
4. When a violation does not involve gross misconduct but could cause discredit to the
Department or any member thereof, a report shall be made in writing setting out the
known facts of the case and an investigation initiated to determine the nature and degree
of the violation. The supervisor who first learns of a violation will be responsible to
initiate the investigation.
5. Minor violations which do not involve gross misconduct and which will not reflect
discredit upon the Department, but which indicate a need for some form of discipline
and/or training, may be handled by the offender’s commander or supervisor.
6. Pursuant to the authority granted by the legislative body of the City of Little Rock, the
Chief of Police shall have the right to suspend any employee who may be under his
jurisdiction and control for incompetence, neglect of duty, immorality, drunkenness, the
improper use of any substance that modifies behavior to the extent that it is noticeable or
affects job performance, or failure or refusal to obey orders given by proper authority or
the Orders, Rules and Regulations and directives promulgated by the Chief of Police.
7. Anytime an employee is relieved of duty for any reason, the employee’s official duty
hours and days off will be 0800 to 1600 with Saturday and Sunday days off. During the
time they are relieved of duty, they will answer all calls from the Department and will be
available at the Departments convenience for any meeting as directed between the hours
of 0800 to 1600 Monday through Friday.
I. Limits of Authority
A. Officers of the Little Rock Police Department shall at all times enforce the laws, resolutions,
and ordinances of the City of Little Rock and the laws of the State of Arkansas relating to
crimes committed within the City and take appropriate enforcement action.
B. In cases where circumstances indicate a violation of Federal Law has been committed the
appropriate Federal agency will be notified. Officers of the Little Rock Police Department
have the authority to enforce Federal law where concurrent jurisdiction exists.
C. For the purposes of protecting life and property, officers shall always be considered on duty
while in the City of Little Rock and shall be prepared to act any time circumstances indicate
their services are required.
D. All officers shall perform their duties as required or directed by law, departmental rule,
policy, directive, or by order from a supervisory officer.
E. All personnel, while representing themselves to be acting in an official capacity, shall provide
official agency photo identification, upon request from any individual questioning their
identity. Exception: when the withholding of that information is necessary for the
performance of police duties or is authorized by proper authority.
F. Pursuant to ACA 5-73-104 and 5-73-120, a law enforcement officer may carry and use
weapons, which would otherwise be illegal.
G. All newly employed recruits will be required to satisfactorily complete the basic recruit
training program, prior to being sworn in as a police officer for the Little Rock Police
Department. Only upon completion of this program, will a probationary officer be allowed
to carry a weapon or be placed in a position to make an arrest.
A. Little Rock Police Department personnel who are engaging in criminal investigations or law
enforcement actions shall make sure that all persons are afforded the rights and protection
guaranteed by the Constitution of the United States. Sworn personnel shall not perform their
duties in any manner that shall cause a suspect to be coerced to admit or involuntarily confess
to a crime.
B. Little Rock Police Department personnel shall not cause any unnecessary delay in
arraignment nor shall they fail to inform defendants of their rights against self-incrimination.
C. Little Rock Police Department personnel shall not deprive any person counsel or contribute
to any pretrial publicity that would tend to prejudice a fair trial.
D. Whenever a member of the Little Rock Police Department initiates a custodial interview of a
suspect, the individual shall immediately be read the “Miranda Warning” from the Little
Rock Police Department form which states:
2. Anything you say can and will be used against you in court.
3. You have the right to talk to a lawyer and have him present with you while you are
being questioned.
4. If you can not afford to hire a lawyer, one will be appointed to represent you before
any questioning at no cost to you, if you wish.
5. You can decide at any time to exercise these rights and not answer any questions or
make any statements.
E. After the warning has been read and signed, the “Waiver of Rights” on the Little Rock Police
Department form should be read to the suspect. The “Waiver of Rights” states:
1. I have read the above statement of my rights and fully understand each and every
right. No promises or threats have been made to induce me into making this
statement. With full knowledge of my rights, I hereby waive those rights and agree
to answer questions concerning the offense which I am suspected of committing.
F. Should the suspect state he will not answer any questions, all questioning of the suspect will
cease immediately.
G. Should the suspect agree to answer questions but wishes to talk to an attorney or have an
attorney present:
2. The suspect shall be allowed to contact his attorney, or if the suspect wishes an
attorney but he cannot afford an attorney, the Public Defender’s Office shall be
immediately notified by the officer handling the case. The Public Defender will be
allowed to establish whether or not the suspect fits the criteria for assistance from
the Public Defender’s Office. All questioning of the suspect will cease until the
attorney arrives and confers with the suspect.
H. Should the suspect agree to talk to the officer, whether the suspect is in custody, not in
custody, or has an attorney present, the questioning of the suspect shall be deemed an official
interview.
A. An officer may request any person to furnish information or otherwise cooperate in the
investigation or prevention of crime. Officers may request the person to respond to
questions, to appear at the nearest appropriate police facility, or comply with any other
reasonable request.
B. In making a request, no officer shall indicate that a person is legally obligated to furnish
information or to otherwise cooperate if no such legal obligation exists. Compliance with the
request for information or other cooperation shall not be regarded as involuntary or coerced
solely on the ground that such a request was made by a law enforcement officer.
C. Officers requesting any person to come to or remain at the nearest appropriate police facility,
Prosecuting Attorney’s Office or other similar place, shall take such steps as are reasonable to
make it clear that there is no legal obligation to comply with such a request.
A. An officer lawfully present in any place may, in the performance of their duties, stop and
detain any person who they reasonably suspect is committing, has committed, or is about to
commit a felony or a misdemeanor involving danger of forcible injury to persons or of
appropriation of or damage to property, if such action is reasonably necessary either to obtain
or verify the identification of the person or to determine the lawfulness of his conduct. An
officer may require the person to remain in or near such place in the officer’s presence for a
period of not more than fifteen minutes or for such time as is reasonable under the
circumstances. At the end of such period the person detained shall be released without
further restraint, or arrested and charged with an offense.
B. Officers who have detained a person shall immediately advise that person of their official
identity and the reason for the detention.
C. Officers may use such nondeadly force as may be reasonably necessary under the
circumstances to stop and detain any person for the purpose authorized in this General Order.
D. If an officer has detained a person he reasonably suspects is armed and presently dangerous
to the officer or others, the officer or someone designated by him may search the outer
clothing of such person and the immediate surroundings for, and seize, any weapon or other
dangerous thing which may be used against the officer or others. In no event shall this search
be more extensive than is reasonably necessary to ensure the safety of the officer or others.
E. Whenever an officer has reasonable cause to believe that any person found at or near the
scene of a felony is a witness to the offense, he may stop that person. After having identified
himself, the officer must advise the person of the purpose of the stopping and may then
demand of him his name, address, and any information he may have regarding the offense.
Such detention shall in all cases be reasonable and shall not exceed 15 minutes unless the
person shall refuse to give such information, in which case the person, if detained further,
shall immediately be brought before any judicial officer or Prosecuting Attorney to be
examined with reference to his name, address, or the information he may have regarding the
offense.
1. A decision not to arrest when there are grounds to arrest is, at times, considered
good law enforcement practice. Public empathy can be enhanced by the careful use
of discretion, and potential ill will can be avoided between police contacts and
officers of the department.
2. If an arrest is not made at the time of the offense, officers, if they find it necessary,
may obtain a warrant of arrest against the offender at a later date.
3. If an officer makes a decision not to arrest, his decision should be based on but not
limited to:
a) The arrest would cause greater danger to the public than not attempting to
arrest the offender.
b) The arrest would cause harm to an offender who poses no threat of danger
to the public; such as a juvenile offender whose wrong doing could best be
handled by a warning or informal discussion with parents.
c) The officer should always consider the seriousness of the offense and its
consequences.
A. A law enforcement officer may encounter motorists whom, in his opinion, are incapable of
exercising reasonable care while operating a motor vehicle. The motorist may be
incompetent, have a physical disability or mental disease which affects that persons ability to
operate a motor vehicle. When that occurs the officer should:
1. Complete all reports related to the action or incident for which the motorist was
stopped.
VI. The Issuance of Written Warning for the Violations of Act 247 and 197
A. A law enforcement officer will issue warning citations on the Arkansas Uniform Traffic
Citation for violations of A.C.A. 27-51-1603 and 27-51-1604, which are secondary offenses.
3. The law enforcement officer will note the violation on the Arkansas Uniform Traffic
Citation and denote it is a warning if a first offense. The law enforcement officer
will not set a court date for the warning.
4. The warning citation will be processed in the same manner as regular citations. The
Little Rock Municipal Traffic Court will forward the warning citations to the State
Traffic Violation Records.
5. When it is determined that the operator has had a warning issued for violation of
either statute, the operator shall be issued an Arkansas Uniform Traffic Citation in
accordance with current departmental policy.
1. A law enforcement officer may arrest a person without a warrant if the officer has
reasonable cause to believe that such person has committed:
a) A felony;
2. A private person may make an arrest where he has reasonable grounds for believing
that the person arrested has committed a felony.
3. An arrest shall not be deemed to have been made on insufficient cause hereunder
solely on the ground that the officer or private citizen is unable to determine the
particular offense which may have been committed.
B. Any law enforcement officer may arrest a person pursuant to a warrant in any county in the
state.
C. An officer is not required to have a warrant in his possession at the time of an arrest, but upon
request he shall show the warrant to the accused as soon as possible. If the officer does not
have the warrant in his possession at the time of arrest, he shall inform the accused of the fact
that the warrant has been issued.
E. Procedures on Arrest
2. Any person arrested shall be brought promptly to the Pulaski County Regional Jail,
nearest appropriate police facility, or other similar place. The arresting officer may,
however, first take the person to some other place, if:
b) Such action is reasonably necessary for the purpose of having the person
identified;
(2) By a person near the place of the arrest or near the scene of a
recently committed offense.
F. No officer shall question an arrested person if the person has indicated in any manner that he
does not wish to be questioned, or that he wishes to consult counsel before submitting to any
questioning.
1. An officer in the field acting without a warrant who has reasonable cause to believe
that a person has committed any misdemeanor may issue a citation in lieu of arrest
or continued custody.
2. When a person is arrested for any misdemeanor, the ranking officer on duty at the
place of detention to which the arrested person is taken may issue a citation in lieu
of continued custody.
3. Any suspect arrested for an offense related to Domestic Abuse will not be issued a
Citation to Appear.
4. Upon the recommendation of the Prosecuting Attorney, the ranking officer on duty
at the place of detention to which the arrested person is taken may issue a citation in
lieu of continued custody when the person has been arrested for a felony.
b) Family relationships;
c) References;
A. A supervisor shall be contacted in the event an officer is required to enter the property of an
educational institution under the following condition.
1. In the event that officers are called to respond to any educational institution where
criminal allegations are made against school personnel, they shall immediately
notify their supervisor.
2. Officers will notify their supervisor prior to the attempted service of a warrant on
any school personnel currently on the property of an educational institution.
3. Except under emergency conditions, school personnel will not be arrested and/or
forcibly removed from a classroom until a supervisor has arrived and evaluated the
circumstances. If possible, an arrest will not be made in the presence of children.
4. A supervisor will be notified and will respond to the scene of any Little Rock school
campus where felony criminal allegations are made against school personnel.
1. An officer may conduct searches and make seizures without a search warrant or
other color of authority if consent is given to the search or seizure.
2. Prior to a search by consent, officers of the Little Rock Police Department will
whenever possible have the person consenting to the search sign a Little Rock Police
Department Consent to Search Form.
3. A verbal consent may be given under certain circumstances when a written consent
to search form is not practical. Wherever possible two sworn officers should
witness consent, and a written report will immediately be prepared listing facts
surrounding the verbal consent and any and all witness of the consent. A supervisor
will immediately be notified of the circumstances involving the consent to search
and the documentation involved.
B. The consent justifying a search and seizure can only be given, in the case of:
2. Search of a vehicle, by the person registered as its owner or in apparent control of its
operation or contents at the time consent is given; and,
C. A search based on consent shall not exceed, in duration or physical scope, the limits of the
consent given.
D. A consent given may be withdrawn or limited at any time prior to the completion of the
search, and if so withdrawn or limited, the search under authority of the consent shall cease,
or be restricted to the new limits, as the case may be. Things discovered and subject to
seizure prior to such withdrawal or limitation of consent shall remain subject to seizure
despite such change or termination of the consent.
A. An officer who is making a lawful arrest may, without a search warrant, conduct a search of
the person or property of the accused for the following purposes only:
4. To obtain evidence of the commission of the offense for which the accused has been
arrested or to seize contraband, the fruits of crime, or other things criminally
possessed or used in conjunction with the offense.
B. An officer making an arrest and the authorized officials at the police station or other place of
detention to which the accused is brought may conduct a search of the accused’s garments
and personal effects ready at hand, the surface of his body, and the area within his immediate
control.
1. When time, conditions, and circumstances permit a search warrant will be obtained
before continuing any strip or search or body cavity search.
3. When a body cavity search is performed, the arresting officer must justify, in
writing, the circumstances for the search. A supervisor will be notified as soon as
possible and the circumstances involving the search will be documented.
4. When a strip search is deemed necessary, the officer conducting the strip search will
be of the same sex as the person being searched, and will be conducted out of public
view. Any time a person is strip searched, a supervisor will be notified as soon as
possible and the circumstances involving the strip search will be documented.
5. Any search pursuant to this section shall be conducted in a location where the
privacy of the individual is assured.
1. If, at the time of arrest of a recent occupant of a vehicle, the arresting officer may
search the vehicle if the arrestee is within reaching distance of the passenger
compartment at the time of the search or if it is reasonable to believe that the vehicle
contains things which are connected with the offense for which the arrest was made.
Under these circumstances, the arresting officer may seize any things subject to
seizure that are discovered during the course of the search.
1. The arresting officer may search such premises or part thereof for such things, and
seize any things subject to seizure, if at the time of arrest:
b) In view of the circumstances, the officer has reason to believe that such
premises or part thereof contain things which are:
(2) Connected with the offense for which the arrest is made; and,
1. Things not subject to seizure which are found in the course of a search of the person
of an accused may be taken from his possession if reasonably necessary for custodial
purposes. Documents or other records may be read or otherwise examined only to
the extent necessary for such purposes, including identity checking and ensuring the
physical well being of the person arrested.
G. Vehicular Searches
1. An officer who has reasonable cause to believe that a moving or readily movable
vehicle is or contains things subject to seizure may, without a search warrant, stop,
detain and search the vehicle and may seize things subject to seizure discovered in
the course of the search where the vehicle is:
2. The officer may search the suspected occupants (except that this subsection shall not
apply to individuals traveling as passengers in a vehicle operating as a common
carrier) if the officer does not find the things subject to seizure by his search of the
vehicle, and if:
a) The things subject to seizure are of such a size and nature that they could
be concealed on the person; and,
b) The officer has reason to suspect that one or more of the occupants of the
vehicle may have the things subject to seizure so concealed;
2. All rules of criminal procedure regarding search and seizure shall be observed.
e) If the designated on-call personnel are not on the scene, Communications will
be notified to dispatch personnel from a call-out list. The designated on-call
personnel are trained in computer seizures; and,
f) If the designated on-call personnel determines that the seized equipment will not
fit in the property room lockers, the property room supervisor will be called out
for storage in the main property room.
4. Documentation of the circumstances of the search and seizure and the storage of the
computer and its components are the responsibility of the officer(s) conducting the
search.
I. An officer may, without a search warrant, enter and search such premises and vehicles, and
the persons therein, to the extent reasonably necessary for the prevention of such death,
bodily harm, or destruction, if he has reasonable cause to believe that the premises or a
vehicle contain:
2. Things imminently likely to burn, explode, or otherwise cause death, serious bodily
harm, or substantial destruction of property; and/or,
3. Things subject to seizure which will cause or be used to cause death or serious
bodily harm if their seizure is delayed.
A. When attempting to resolve various types of problems, officers are encouraged to seek
alternatives to physical arrest when no hazard(s) to the community, victim, suspect or officer
will occur. The decision not to arrest will be guided by law, departmental policy and facts of
the situation.
A. The Operations Support Section Lieutenant shall be responsible for the issuance of security
access cards and the documentation pertaining to access cards.
2. As there are varying levels of access, the Operations Support Section Lieutenant
shall be notified of all departmental and divisional transfers or assignments to
ensure access is granted to the various buildings of the police facility.
3. Employees will be held accountable for the proper use of security equipment and
the safekeeping of their access card.
B. The Operations Support Section Lieutenant shall ensure that the Sonitrol Security System is
operational each day.
1. Public access doors to all police department buildings will be electronically locked
and unlocked at predetermined times.
2. Only personnel with the rank of Sergeant and above will have access to the Police
Equipment Storage Areas by means of their Sonitrol Access card. Sworn personnel
below the rank of Sergeant are not authorized in these areas. The employee assigned
as the vehicle/equipment coordinator will be the only exception to this order. This
employee will have access to the equipment storage area of their division by means
of their Sonitrol Access Card.
3. All electronically controlled employee entrance doors will remain closed and locked
at all times. Access to these areas will be permitted by Sonitrol Access cards or
persons being escorted by personnel having proper Sonitrol access. All visitors to
these areas must log in and out on the log in sheet available for this purpose. All
electronically controlled doors are equipped with emergency pulls. These
emergency pulls will not be used to override the control device unless an actual
emergency exists. Electronically controlled doors shall not be propped open and
left unattended, unless an actual emergency exists. The exception to this will be
those entry doors programmed to open to the public during normal business hours.
5. All supervisors are responsible for monitoring these doors for compliance with this
policy. Upon request, the Operations Support Section Lieutenant will provide
supervisors with a copy of the activity log of specific doors for investigative
purposes.
A. The City of Little Rock may defend an employee in a court action, brought against him for
an act or alleged act, which was performed as a result of his responsibilities and consistent
with his regularly assigned duties, as an employee of the City of Little Rock. This policy is
subject to the following considerations:
1. In certain cases, the City may or may not defend an employee and/or pay damages.
All cases will be investigated and evaluated on an individual basis by the City
Attorney and Police Department Staff. These types of lawsuits generally fall into
the below described categories:
a) Situations arising from conduct that occurs while the employee is off-duty
and working for a private employer (e.g. security guard, etc.);
d) Situations that occur off-duty and are not job related (e.g. motor vehicle
accidents in privately owned vehicles); or,
1. The employee will complete a Litigation Service of Process form. This form will be
submitted by the employee along with a copy of the complaint and any other
associated documentation through his Chain of Command within forty-eight (48)
hours of being served with civil process.
2. The Division Commander will review the information for completeness and forward
all forms to the Office of the Chief of Police.
3. The Office of the Chief of Police shall forward the information to the City
Attorney’s Office.
A. In the course of duty it is sometimes necessary for officers to take action that results in
damage to property of citizens. When this occurs, the officer will immediately notify a
supervisor, who will respond and investigate the circumstances.
B. To ensure that all incidents of damage are investigated and documented, the following
guidelines shall be followed:
1. An Incident Report shall be completed with a detailed account as to the type, nature
and extent of the damage;
2. The officer(s) involved will submit an Officer’s Report Form, detailing the
circumstances surrounding the damage, for review and approval by the investigating
supervisor;
3. The investigating supervisor will evaluate the damages, officer’s actions, estimate
the cost of damage, document his recommendations, and forward this information
through the Chain of Command; and,
4. The Division Commander will review the file and make his recommendation to the
Office of the Chief of Police for a final decision on liability.
C. Officers will not advise citizens that the City will assume responsibility for any injury,
damages or medical expenses.
A. Sick Leave is approved, paid, time-off from work that may be used for personal illness or
injury, and medical, dental, or optical examinations, as well as pregnancy or any related
disabilities. Sick Leave may also be used for any documented serious illness or disability
requiring hospitalization or emergency treatment of the employee’s immediate family, up to
prescribed limits. Immediate family is defined as mother, father, spouse (as defined by
Arkansas law), and children or children who live with the employee.
1. It shall be the responsibility of officers who cannot report for duty due to illness
(sick personal or sick in family) to notify an on-duty supervisor, within their
division, at least one (1) hour prior to their scheduled reporting time. It will be the
supervisor's responsibility who receives the sick leave call to relay the information
to the first relieving supervisor on whose shift the officer is assigned. That
supervisor will contact the officer to confirm the nature of the illness and approve
the type of leave for payroll purposes.
2. In cases of a non-job related injury or illness for which the employee is absent more
than three (3) consecutive work days, the employee shall be required to provide the
Department with a physician’s statement indicating length of disability and dates of
treatment.
3. Any employee absent from duty due to a non-job related injury or illness who has
been assigned to the Extended Leave Unit or meets the requirements for transfer to
the Extended Leave Unit should be provided an application for leave in accordance
with the Family Medical Leave Act. Employees are responsible for complying with
all requests for information in accordance with the Family and Medical Leave Act.
Failure to comply may result in disciplinary action up to and including termination.
6. When an employee is released to return to work, full duty status, his/her supervisor
will monitor and evaluate the employee to ensure he/she is capable of performing
his/her normal duties.
7. The Chief of Police reserves the right to order the examination of any employee
absent from, or returning to, duty due to illness or injury to determine the status of
the employee’s physical condition. The Chief of Police also reserves the right to
specify the physician to complete the examination which will be at the City’s
expense.
V. Worker’s Compensation
A. All police employees are covered for job related injuries by the City of Little Rock’s
Worker’s Compensation Insurance (A.C.A. § 11-9-101 et seq.). In the event a police officer
is injured when performing a law enforcement function, in compliance with Departmental
policy, while employed in a departmentally approved off-duty employment, a standard
worker’s compensation file will be prepared and forwarded through the officer’s chain of
command. A law enforcement function is defined as: an action taken in the maintenance of
law and order and the detection and prevention of crime by a sworn member of the Little
Rock Police Department. As soon as safely and practical, after the injury, the injured officer
or designee shall notify a supervisor and advise either overtime or compensatory time status
for the remaining hours of the off duty assignment. The injured officer will remain in an
Injured on Duty (IOD) status until they have received initial medical treatment for the injury
and have been treated and released by a physician or workers comp. benefits through the City
of Little Rock begin. The supervisor that has been notified will ensure the affected officer’s
chain of command is immediately notified of the incident. Police personnel of the rank of
Lieutenant and above are exempt from Overtime/Compensatory Time compensation, except
for limited, specific situations. These situations and guidelines are outlined in the City of
Little Rock Compensation Manual.
If an officer is injured while performing a non-law enforcement function while employed by
an off-duty employer, the claim must be filed with that employer’s workers comp. plan. If
the off-duty employer refuses to honor the claim, the officer must file through his/her
applicable insurance plan.
1. Employees who, during the performance of their official duties, sustain a non-
life/limb threatening injury on duty, shall notify a supervisor immediately. For
reporting purposes, any officer reporting an injury in a departmentally approved off
duty employment will be considered on duty at the time of injury.
a) Upon the initial notification of the injury the supervisor will immediately
contact “The Company Nurse” at 1-877-854-6877, a toll-free number.
b) The supervisor and the involved employee will describe the incident and
the nature of the injury to the Company Nurse staff who are specially
trained in handling Worker’s Compensation injuries.
c) The Company Nurse staff will provide a case reference number, triage the
injury in accordance with the City’s medical protocol, provide immediate
treatment information and if necessary, recommend emergency follow-up.
d) The Company Nurse staff receiving City of Little Rock calls are aware of
the clinics approved for initial treatment and will direct employees to those
facilities as needed.
f) If the employee has to go to the emergency room for treatment, he/she will
contact the Safety/Loss Specialist, the following business day, in order to
arrange for follow-up treatment at the designated clinic.
3. If after initial contact with “The Company Nurse” the involved employee’s medical
condition changes, the employee will immediately contact the Safety/Loss Control
Specialist at 501-371-4756, advise name, case reference number and medical
changes. The employee will then notify their supervisor.
4. The Company Nurse should only be contacted one time to report the initial incident.
Follow-up calls, questions, or concerns should be made to the Safety/Loss Control
Specialist. If the Safety/Loss Control Specialist is unable to be reached, Risk
Management Resources should be contacted at 501-614-1141.
b. If the supervisor who is making the call is not the employee’s actual supervisor,
he/she shall indicate during the call the correct supervisor. This information
will save time in determining the employee’s return to work and any additional
information needed during the claim.
B. The following procedures will be followed anytime an employee is treated for any on duty
injury that results in the employee receiving medical duty restrictions or it is necessary for
the employee to miss work for their recovery.
1. If the employee is given duty restrictions or must miss work (classified “IOD”) for
their recovery, he/she must be offered modified duty. The employee has the right to
accept or decline modified duty after an injury. If the employee declines modified
duty, he/she must use their available leave time to cover days lost.
3. A Modified Duty Form shall be completed by the employee’s supervisor each time
the restrictions of the injured employee changes.
4. The completed form shall be forwarded through chain of command to the Office of
the Chief of Police. The evaluating supervisor will make two copies of the form,
one for addition to the original file and one to forward by email to the Safety/Loss
Control Specialist to give notice of the employee’s return to work date.
5. The copy of the Modified Duty Form must be submitted to the Safety/Loss Control
Specialist within twenty-four (24) hours after the employee has received any type of
restrictions.
7. The employee shall be responsible for obtaining proper documentation from the
authorized attending physician, authorizing their return to work with or without
restrictions. The employee shall notify a supervisor of his/her current division prior
to reporting for his/her next regularly scheduled workday.
C. All medical treatment and/or injuries will be documented and forwarded through chain of
command to the Office of the Chief of Police for review.
1. The reporting supervisor shall ensure the following forms are completed:
D. Procedures:
1. The Incident Report, and all Workers Compensation forms, will be assembled into a
file and forwarded, through the chain of command, to the Office of the Chief of
Police.
c) The initial evaluating supervisor shall be responsible for ensuring that the
necessary documentation is obtained and properly placed in the file, before
routing it through the chain of command.
2. All files documenting personnel injured on duty will be entered into the Blue Team
program as a Divisional - Injured on Duty report for documentation and tracking.
a) Prior to the end of the supervisor’s tour of duty, they will enter the basic
components of the Injured on Duty Report into the Blue Team program,
which will include the involved officer(s), involved citizen(s), location of
the incident, and the incident number.
3. The Division Commander will review the documents and forward all forms to the
Office of the Chief of Police no later than the next business day.
A. Any employee whose actions or use of force results in serious physical injury or death shall
be removed from their line of duty assignment and placed on Administrative Leave until
after the officer(s) has attended mandatory EAP sessions, a thorough administrative review
has been completed or a decision by the Chief of Police, or designee, has been made to return
to work. During this time the officer(s) will make themselves available to assist with the
Professional Standards investigation.
A. All employees shall keep their current address, (both mailing address and the physical
location of the residence, if different from the mailing address) and personal telephone
number (home or mobile) on file with the Office of the Chief of Police. Employees will
provide the Department with the contact information for two individuals, to include their
physical address and telephone number, they wish to be contacted in the case of an
emergency.
B. Employees will not use the address of any Department facility on any identification issued by
any organization or agency other than the Little Rock Police Department. Employees will
not use the address of any Department facility to receive personal mail or publications, not
associated with their duties and responsibilities as an employee of the Little Rock Police
Department.
C. Employees will not disclose any employee’s personal telephone numbers or address, unless a
verified member of the Little Rock Police Department makes the request.
A. Telephone Directory Assistance - Requests for directory assistance shall not be made, except
in emergency instances or where the number does not appear in the telephone directory.
1. Long distance telephone calls will be made for official City business only. No
personal telephone calls will be charged to the City.
1. Employees shall introduce themselves by title, name, and agency when making
phone contact with citizens. This does not apply to circumstances that would
jeopardize an investigation.
2. Employees shall not use business telephones for personal calls, unless absolutely
necessary; such calls shall not exceed one minute.
3. In an emergency, supervisors shall make telephone time available for the employee
to handle the problem.
1. Departmental cellular phones may be used to conduct official business when the use
of radio communication or hard line telephones is inappropriate, unavailable or
inadequate to meet communications needs.
2. Employees may not operate a city vehicle while using a cellular phone unless
emergency circumstances exist and other means of communications are not
available or suitable. When possible, employees shall pull off the highway in a safe
location when using cellular phones unless hands-free operational devices are
available.
3. Use of personal or city owned cellular phones either in voice or data transmission
while on duty shall be restricted to essential communications and should be limited
in length. Engagement in multiple or extended conversations unrelated to police
business or similar use that interferes with the performance of duty is prohibited.
4. Employees will not use cellular phones during contact with members of the public
unless directly related to a call for service.
A. All written communications, addressed to the Chief of Police, will be forwarded through the
chain of command to the Office of the Chief of Police. This Order applies to all
correspondence, including material generated by City or Departmental employees.
B. Supervisors will take appropriate actions and attach endorsements, comments, or explanatory
materials, regarding their actions or findings, to any such forwarded communications, as
deemed necessary, but in no event, will delivery to the Office of the Chief of Police be
stopped. (This pertains to business correspondence and does not include routine
A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C. terminal messages, facsimile machine transmissions, not designed to
represent business correspondence, or form letters previously approved by the Office of the
Chief of Police.)
X. Administrative Reporting
The Administrative Reporting System is established to provide a continuous and accurate flow of
information between management and operational units and to provide management officials
information on the activities of the Department. Each Division Commander will ensure that the
appropriate reports are compiled and submitted to the Office of the Chief of Police in a timely
manner. The components of the Administrative Reporting System include:
1. Daily Reports - Daily reports are a summary of noteworthy incidents, occurring during the
previous 24-hour period. The Field Services, Major Crimes and Special Investigations
Divisions shall compile daily summary reports. Daily Reports shall be routed through the
appropriate Bureau Chief, with copies distributed to each Division Commander and the
Research & Analysis Unit. Daily reports are maintained in each Division.
b) Patrol officers may count on their daily log sheets the number of criminal arrest and
traffic offenses that required their participation. This log will give an itemized
recap of daily activities, as well as a statistical recap of each officer’s daily activity.
2. Monthly Reports - Monthly reports are a means of recapping the activity of the operational
components of the Department. Monthly recaps of relevant statistics will be compiled by
each division, routed to the Office of the Chief of Police, and maintained in the Office of the
Chief of Police.
b) Divisional Monthly reports must be received by the Office of the Chief of Police no
later than the tenth day following the reporting period. Should the tenth day fall on
a Saturday or Sunday, the monthly reports are due the next business day.
(1) The monthly reports will reflect the actual number of people
arrested and cited for criminal and traffic offenses.
5. Annual Reports - The Annual Report is to be completed for each calendar year of
operation of the Little Rock Police Department. The Annual Report shall be
compiled by the Technology Support Section and made available to all employees
and citizens of Little Rock. The annual reports will be a means of assessing
activity/crime trends and providing management a method of gauging activities of
each Division.
(2) Information on crime statistics and crime trends for the City of
Little Rock;
(3) A crime trend comparison for the current year and the previous
year;
(4) Fiscal activity recaps for the Little Rock Police Department; and,
(5) Any other pertinent statistics or activities for the operation of the
Little Rock Police Department.
A. All requests for legal opinions shall be routed, through the chain of command, to the Office
of the Chief of Police.
B. The Chief, or his designee, shall review the request, determine the necessity for an opinion,
and forward the request to the City Attorney’s Office, if approved.
4. Ensuring that the proper documentation (officer’s employee number and citation
book number) is entered into the computer database.
B. The employee, signing out a traffic or criminal citation book, will be responsible for the
proper processing of all citations contained in the book.
1. No more than two traffic citation books and two criminal citation books can be
signed out to an officer at any one time. (The Traffic Services Section is excluded
from this limitation).
3. In the event a citation is lost or stolen, the officer responsible for the citations will
immediately complete an Officer’s Report (5600-2), detailing the circumstances of
the loss. Division Commanders will route the report, through the chain of command,
to the Office of the Chief of Police. For audit purposes, a copy of this report shall
be forwarded through the chain of command to the Operations Support Section
Lieutenant.
4. In the event of a stolen citation(s), an Incident Report and an Officer’s Report will
be immediately completed for investigative purposes. Division Commanders will
route a copy of the report, through the chain of command, to the effected Bureau
Chief of Police. For audit purposes, a copy of this report shall be forwarded
through the chain of command to the Operations Support Section Lieutenant.
C. Officers will set court dates for all traffic citations no sooner than thirty days from the date of
issuance, and no longer than sixty days from the date of issuance. This requirement will not
apply to specific court requirements for DWI cases.
D. The copies of all traffic citations, which require an offender’s signature, will be turned in to a
supervisor at the end of each officer’s tour of duty.
1. The supervisor will be responsible for maintaining all citations in a secure location
until they are turned in to the Desk Officer.
2. Before the end of each tour of duty, a supervisor will record all traffic citations,
issued during that tour of duty, on a traffic submission form (LRPD form 5600-95).
This form, along with all the citations, will be turned over to the Desk Officer at the
main police building.
b) The officer copies of all citations will be maintained by the officer issuing
the citation, for a period of one year from the date of issuance to a violator.
3. The Desk Officer will place all traffic citations and Traffic Ticket Submission
Forms in the Traffic Ticket Box, where they will remain secure until retrieved by
the Court Clerk.
4. The Court Clerk receiving the traffic citations will verify that all citations, listed on
the form, are attached and sign the Traffic Ticket Submission Form. This form will
then be forwarded to the Court Liaison Officer. Any discrepancies will be noted by
the Court Clerk and verified by the Desk Officer.
5. The Court Liaison Officer will notify the Operations Support Section Lieutenant,
through the chain of command, of any discrepancies noted on the Traffic Ticket
Submission Form. The Operations Support Section Lieutenant will notify the
affected officer’s Division Commander. The Division Commander will
immediately initiate an investigation into the circumstances involved, and report
back to the Operations Support Section Lieutenant, within five days of notification.
E. The Operations Support Section Lieutenant will conduct a monthly audit of all traffic
citations. Any citations, identified as missing during this audit, will be documented,
identifying the officer who signed for the citation. The officer’s Bureau Commander will be
notified by the Operations Support Section Lieutenant, identifying the officer and the citation
number missing. The officer’s Division Commander will be responsible for conducting an
investigation into the circumstances involving the missing citation. All documentation
involving the missing citation will be forwarded, through the chain of command, to the
Operations Support Section Lieutenant for disposition.
A. This policy establishes a uniform procedure for requesting a court void of a citation.
1. Issued in error;
2. Officers requesting a citation be voided must submit all copies, except the officer’s
copy, along with a detailed Officer’s Report. The report will include the reason for
the request and a photocopy of the reissued citation, if applicable.
3. The supervisor reviewing the documents will ensure that the request is in
compliance with this policy and forward it through the chain of command.
4. The request will be reviewed and evaluated at each level and forwarded to the
Office of the Chief of Police for review and submission to the appropriate court.
5. Officers who wish to void an eCite Citation will void the citation using the eCite
program unless the citation has been accepted by the courts. Once the citation has
been accepted by the courts, the officer must follow the established procedures.
1. Officers who work past their regular shift shall submit an overtime/compensatory
time slip.
(1) Sick leave usage or any form of unpaid leave during the
workweek will reduce the overtime/compensatory time worked to
straight time, hour for hour.
2. Officers who are required to appear and/or testify before any court, board,
commission, or grand jury, when under subpoena, during their off-duty hours and in
furtherance of any Departmental interest, shall submit an overtime/compensatory
time slip for the time actually spent before such body.
a) Procedure – Insert the actual start date and start time (the appearance time
on the subpoena) and the end date and end time the activity actually
concluded (the time when released by the court, Prosecuting Attorney, or
other judicial official).
c) Officers may not use Vacation or other forms of leave and then work a
police activity during their normal workday for overtime/compensatory
time. Only in rare occasions (pre-approved by a Division Commander or
above) will this procedure be allowed.
3. The provisions of this Section shall also apply to all job-related activities performed
by an officer for whom he is not otherwise compensated by an authorized off-duty
employer and for which the officer believes he is entitled to overtime or
compensatory time from the Department.
B. Overtime/Compensatory Time for Canine Officers – Officers who are assigned to the Canine
Unit will be compensated a minimum of three (3) hours weekly for maintenance and care of
their canines.
1. To ensure that officers are compensated for their three hours the following schedule
will be followed and noted on the daily worksheet:
a) First day of work period—7 hours regular duty/1 hour canine care;
c) Third day of work period—7 hours regular duty/1 hour canine care;
e) Fifth day of work period—7 hours regular duty/1 hour canine care.
3. Should circumstances prevent the officer from leaving after seven hours on the
designated days, the officer shall submit an overtime/compensatory time form to his
respective shift supervisor in accordance with departmental procedures.
C. Overtime Rosters - In the event that a large number of officers are scheduled to work
overtime for the same event/day, a standard overtime roster shall be submitted for each day
worked, listing the officers working overtime. Daily work sheets shall not be used for this
purpose.
D. Police personnel of the rank of Lieutenant and above are exempt from
Overtime/Compensatory Time compensation, except for limited, specific situations.
1. These situations and guidelines are outlined in the City of Little Rock
Compensation Manual.
E. Overtime/Compensatory Time slips and Overtime Rosters should be submitted to the Police
Payroll Specialist on a daily basis, but not later than 1000 hours the following business day.
All Overtime/Compensatory Time slips and Overtime Rosters must be submitted no later
than 0900 hours on the Monday, following the close of each pay period, for payment to be
made with the closed payroll.
F. A Police Lieutenant (or equivalent civilian supervisor) or above shall approve all
Overtime/Compensatory/Off-Duty Time Forms (5600-86) and Overtime Rosters (5100-07
and 5500-12).
A. Military Leave Procedure Guidelines are codified in the Administrative Personnel Policy and
Procedure Manual.
B. The City of Little Rock and the Little Rock Police Department are proud supporters of the
National Guard and Reserves. Supervisors should make all appropriate efforts to
accommodate the Guardsman or Reservist by rescheduling their workweek to allow them to
be off one (1) weekend a month for drills without the employees using Vacation or other
form of leave.
C. Police personnel who have received military orders to attend annual drills or are mobilized
for periods longer than their two (2) week drill shall submit a copy of those orders to the
Operations Support Section Lieutenant as soon as they become available to the employee.
1. While under military orders or during the scheduled weekend drill, Police personnel
shall not participate in any overtime or off-duty activity.
2. While an employee is under military orders, including weekend drills, the employee
may not work in a Police position in lieu of using accrued Military Leave or
available City leave.
3. Police personnel who have received Military orders should contact the Human
Resources Benefits Section to ensure all benefits are in place and the employee
understands their benefit options.
A. Employees are responsible for the proper use, maintenance, care and inventory accounting of
all City property issued to them, provided for their use, or assigned to their area of
responsibility. Employees, utilizing personally owned and departmentally approved
equipment, will be responsible for the proper use, maintenance, and care of such equipment.
1. Employees who have been assigned a laptop computer, or other issued equipment
and/or accessories unique to their assignment shall relinquish such equipment to the
Division Commander upon transferring to another division.
2. Employees who have been assigned cell phones or pagers will relinquish these to
their Division Commander if transferred. The Division Commander will then notify
the appropriate office of these changes.
B. Employees will immediately submit for inspection or testing, or will otherwise immediately
surrender any and all City property, as directed by a supervisor. Employees utilizing
personally owned and departmentally approved equipment will immediately submit such
equipment for inspection or testing, as directed by a supervisor.
C. In the event that it should become necessary to recover City property from an employee, the
employee will be instructed to physically return the property to Departmental custody within
a timeframe set by the Office of the Chief of Police.
A. The hiring of all civilian employees will be in accordance with the City of Little Rock’s
Administrative Policy and Procedures Manual.
B. Based on the results of the assessment process the City of Little Rock’s Human Resources
Department will provide a list of applicants to the hiring authority. The hiring authority will
ensure that the below steps are followed:
D. Once a decision has been made, recommendations shall be sent through the chain of
command for authorization to hire.
E. All necessary documentation will be forwarded to the City of Little Rock’s Human
Resources Department.
F. The hiring authority will in writing, notify all applicants not selected for employment.
G. All background files shall be retained for a period of one year of the date position was filled.
A. The City of Little Rock provides certain employee “fringe benefits”, as the result of
management policies of the City, Arkansas State law, and/or contract agreements with
recognized employee bargaining units. Such “fringe benefits” may include, depending upon
the employee’s classification and labor affiliation, but are not necessarily limited to:
4. Maternity Leave;
5. Funeral Leave;
9. Grievance Procedures;
B. Employee “fringe benefits” and/or employee rights are further specifically described in the
following current publications:
1. Statement of Agreement, the City of Little Rock and the Fraternal Order of Police,
Lodge #17 (Police Sergeant and Police Officer classifications);
4. Police Lieutenants, and above, and certain classifications of civilian employees are
governed by the City’s Employee Performance Appraisal System (E.P.A.S.);
5. The City of Little Rock Administrative Personnel Policy and Procedure Manual.
C. Salary scales (compensation classification and ranges) are detailed in each Statement of
Agreement and in the City’s Compensation Classification Manual.
D. The Staff Support Section shall maintain a current copy of all applicable publications.
A. The City of Little Rock provides a counseling and referral service, at no cost, to all
employees through the Employee Assistance Program (E.A.P.).
B. Dependents and spouses of employees may also contact the E.A.P. for assistance.
C. All contacts with the E.A.P. will be held in confidence, unless the employee signs a specific
waiver of release.
D. Any employee, in need of the service, may contact the Southwest E.A.P. directly to make an
appointment (663-1797).
A. The audio and/or visual recording of an employee (without his knowledge) by another
employee is prohibited, except with the prior authorization from the Office of the Chief of
Police.
A. Sworn personnel who work a straight eight (8) or ten (10) hour shift (i.e. 0700-1500, 0800-
1800, etc.) shall be allotted a maximum of thirty (30) minutes, when time permits, for a meal
per duty shift. Officers may be recalled to duty at any time a supervisory officer deems it
necessary.
B. No more than two (2) police vehicles will be allowed at any one location at the same time.
A. The Juvenile Squad maintains the registration records of the Sex and Child Offenders. The
notifications, regarding sex offenders living in the community are pursuant to Act 989 of
1997, Arkansas Annotated 12-12-901 thru 12-12-920. Coordinated efforts of all divisions
will be required for ensuring accurate and efficient notification in maintaining compliance
with Arkansas Annotated 12-12-901 thru 12-12-920. This order provides information
regarding the process that will be followed by the Department in this matter.
1. The Major Crimes Division Commander will be responsible for the community
notification process and the Juvenile Squad will manage the process. All questions
regarding the process or the offenders, offenders seeking to register, or in response
to Departmental correspondence, should be referred to the Juvenile Squad Sergeant
at 404-3018.
a) Notification for Level 1 Low Risk offenders will include law enforcement
agencies and the household where the offender resides.
b) Notification for Level 2 Moderate Risk offenders will include that for
Level 1 offenders, plus schools (public, private and colleges); day care
centers; Neighborhood Crime Watches; known community and youth
groups; Parent Teachers Organizations; Boy and Girl Scout offices; sports
leagues and facilities; summer camps; religious facilities; libraries; state
agencies licensing or hiring individuals dealing with women, children, or
shelters; malls and shopping centers, parks, convenience stores or other
places known to be frequented by children or the offender within a one-
mile radius of the offender’s residence.
c) Notification for Level 3 High Risk offenders will include that for both
Level 1 and Level 2 offenders, plus a door-to-door canvas of all
households, within a three-block radius of the offender’s residence.
Prospective employers known to the Department will also be notified
regardless of location.
d) Notification for Level 4 Sexual Violent Predator will include that for
Levels 1 through 3. A public meeting will be conducted for Level 4
Offenders.
3. Officers from all divisions and in all assignments may be utilized, as necessary, for
community notifications. Officers participating in notifications will be briefed by
Juvenile Squad personnel and will complete the necessary documentation and return
it to the unit for maintenance.
A. It is the policy of the Little Rock Police Department to foster cooperation and coordination
among all components by facilitating communication with these procedures:
4. Periodic staff meetings between Division Commanders and the Office of the Chief
of Police; and,
5. Meetings conducted by the Chief of Police with all levels of personnel, including
civilians.
1. Hot Sheets;
C. Officers who wish to obtain information or services from a Crime Analyst shall submit a
written request, through their chain of command, to their Division Commander.
2. The submitting officer’s Division Commander shall review the request and either
reject it or forward it, with his/her written approval, to the Technology Support
Lieutenant.
3. The Technology and Equipment Section Lieutenant shall examine the request and
either reject it or forward it to a Crime Analyst for scheduling and assignment.
4. The Technology and Equipment Section Lieutenant may reject a request if:
a) The request does not contain sufficient information for processing; or,
c) The requested deadline for the information or services cannot be met; or,
5. The Technology and Equipment Section Lieutenant, or his designee, may contact
any person in the requesting officer’s chain of command, if necessary, for
clarification or assistance in accomplishing the assigned task.
1. Officers, who receive requests from private citizens or businesses for statistical
information, or other data compilation, shall direct such inquiries to the Public
Affairs/Crime Prevention Section.
A. The Chief of Police is responsible for requisitioning equipment, as approved by the annual
budget. Equipment must be maintained in serviceable condition and documents must be
prepared to transfer equipment, certify authenticity of annual inventory and account for
missing equipment.
B. All Divisions will assist the Administrative Services Manager with the physical inventory
and make their equipment, files and personnel available for inventory finalization.
C. The Little Rock Police Department adopts the City of Little Rock Procedure Guideline,
Index 3040, which establishes procedures for inventory of equipment. This Department will
follow those procedures.
D. Each Division Commander, or his designate, will ensure that all equipment assigned to his
Division be maintained in a state of operational readiness. “Operational readiness” includes
care and cleaning, preventive maintenance, repair, workability and responsiveness.
Supervisors will inspect equipment at regular intervals, designated by the Division
Commander, to ensure operational readiness.
A. To provide for efficient record keeping and information flow, it is necessary to establish a
system for creating, editing, numbering, finalizing, modifying and dissemination of all
departmental forms.
B. Departmental forms shall be created by the unit needing or proposing the form. The Staff
Support Section shall coordinate the editing, numbering, and formatting of all departmentally
generated forms.
C. For the purpose of this Order, a form shall be defined as a printed document with blank
spaces for insertion of requested, required or desired information in the Little Rock Police
Department format.
D. The L.R.P.D. format will include an assigned form control number. This number shall be
located in the lower right corner of the page following the letters “L.R.P.D.”. Forms shall be
of four digits, a hyphen and digits to the right of the hyphen; digits to the right of the hyphen
will be sequentially numbered by form. The following 4-digit format to the left of the
hyphen will be used:
E. Divisional forms shall be defined as forms unique to a particular division. Divisional forms
will require the approval of the proposing division’s commander.
F. Departmental forms shall be defined as forms utilized by more than one division.
Departmental forms shall require staff review and approval of the Chief of Police.
G. After a new or revised divisional form has final approval, the Professional Standards Section
shall:
3. Forward to the requesting Division Commander for final review. The Division
Commander shall be responsible for sending the request to the print shop and for
maintaining an adequate supply of forms used exclusively by the division.
I. After a departmental form has final approval, the Professional Standards Section shall:
K. Any forms, determined no longer in use or necessary, will be removed from the master list
and placed in a dead file, maintained by the Professional Standards Section.
L. The Technology and Equipment Section Lieutenant shall be notified when a departmental
form is determined to be dead. This form shall be removed from stock and forwarded for
destruction or recycling.
M. As a divisional form becomes obsolete, the Division Commander shall be responsible for
notifying the Professional Standards Section. This form shall be removed from stock and
forwarded for destruction or recycling.
A. The Little Rock Police Department may, at the discretion of the Chief of Police, offer police
services through a contractual agreement.
B. Any time the Little Rock Police Department enters into a contractual agreement to provide
police services the written agreement will include:
4. Language dealing with the duration, modification, and termination of the contract;
6. Stipulation that the provider agency maintains control over its personnel;
C. Officers providing services through a contractual agreement shall have all employment
rights, promotional opportunities, training opportunities and benefits protected.
D. The Administrative Services Manager shall ensure that all contractual agreements for police
services, entered into by the Little Rock Police Department, comply with these provisions.
A. Any employee of this Department, who is either charged in any jurisdiction with a criminal
offense or incarcerated for any reason, will immediately notify a supervisor.
B. The supervisor being notified will make an appropriate inquiry into the circumstances
surrounding the matter and will forward a report, in writing, to the Office of the Chief of
Police, prior to the end of the current shift.
1. City printed business cards shall be available only for authorized civilian personnel
and sworn employees. These cards may only be ordered from the City Print Shop
with the approval of the appropriate Division Commander.
3. Information contained on business cards must be police related only, and will not
include any other information that is not police related or related to an employee’s
off-duty employment or business(s).
4. Upon request of the appropriate Division Commander, generic business cards may
be obtained from the print shop for use by employees of their division.
5. A Division Commander, or his designate, shall place orders for printing from the
City Print Shop. No officer shall place an order directly to the Print Shop, without
authorization from the Division Commander.
1. Any sworn employee, or authorized civilian personnel, may purchase business cards
from a private vendor at the employee’s expense.
2. If cards are purchased, non-police information shall not be included on any card
with Little Rock Police Department information. An example or description of the
card must be supplied with written request to the appropriate Division Commander
for approval.
A. The Ride Along Program allows interested citizens to accompany officers during their duties
so participants may gain a realistic view of the Little Rock Police Department’s line
operations. To provide this opportunity in a safe and responsible manner, the following
procedures are established:
B. The following persons are eligible to participate in the Ride Along Program:
2. Members of concerned adult or youth groups over fifteen (15) years of age;
1. Family members, relatives, persons with whom the officer has a close personal or
intimate relationship, ex-spouses and any involved children from any former
marriage or relationship (adopted or not) are prohibited from participating in the
Ride Along program with the involved officer.
2. Persons named in this section who are interested in participating in the Ride Along
program will be required to ride with another officer on a different shift or on the
involved officer’s day off following approval.
3. These restrictions are hereby mandated as a means to protect family and personal
relationships. Division Commanders and/or Shift Commanders will be held
responsible for ensuring strict compliance to these restrictions and will deny any
request that contradicts it or is otherwise questionable.
1. Authorization
1. Prior to participation, a waiver of liability form and instructions to the Ride Along
participants must be completed.
2. If the applicant is under 18, the parent or guardian must sign the waiver.
F. Record Check
1. A criminal record and active warrant check shall be conducted on all Ride Along
applicants other than law enforcement officials.
1. Advise the participant that the officer is subject to respond to all types of situations
from routine to dangerous;
2. Advise the participant that he must obey any legal order given by the officer;
3. Assess each situation and take every possible step to minimize any risk to the Ride
Along participant;
4. Prohibit Ride Alongs from accompanying an officer into the scene of any
potentially dangerous situation (Robberies in progress, burglaries in progress,
disturbances, felony warrant arrests, hostage or barricaded suspects, mentally ill
persons, etc.); and,
A. The following Departmental issued equipment: firearms, radios, computers, badges, and
identification/access cards will be subject to the following storage guidelines.
2. Unmarked and Undercover Department Vehicles - The storage of these items in the
passenger compartment of unmarked and undercover department vehicles is
prohibited, except during emergency situations when the officer is required to
rapidly exit the vehicle in the performance of their duties. Even under emergency
situations, the vehicle and contents should be secured as soon as practical.
Equipment may be secured in the trunk for a short period of time if the remote trunk
access in the passenger compartment has been disabled; storage of these items in the
trunk overnight or during any other extended period of time is prohibited.
B. Personnel who are found negligent may be required to reimburse the Department for the cost
of replacing the equipment, and will be subject to the appropriate disciplinary action.
A. Certain equipment and electronic communication devices including, but not limited to squad
cars, computers and cellular telephones issued to employees by the Department for business
use are the property of the City of Little Rock and subject to search at any time it is deemed
necessary for maintenance of discipline, security purposes, or Internal Affairs investigations.
Employees are expressly notified that no right of privacy exists for searches of such City-
owned property. Additionally, there may be occasions, depending on the specific facts and
circumstances, when employee lockers and desks may be subject to search in order to
facilitate investigations. This also applies to cellular telephones that are owned by an
employee who conducts Department business on the cellular telephone. Employees should
also be aware that business related emails, texts, and telephone records stored on employee-
owned cellular telephones are subject to the provisions of the Arkansas Freedom of
Information Act.
A. Upon retirement and request by the officer, the Department may release an officer’s badge,
weapon and credentials under the following circumstances:
1. When an officer retires from the Department after serving a full term of employment
of 20 years for officers on the old pension plan and 28 years for officers on the
LOPFI retirement plan. This would also include officers on the LOPFI retirement
plan who have the combination of service years and age to qualify for an immediate
full-benefit retirement. Officers shall provide a copy of the LOPFI Retirement
Verification Letter to the Office of the Chief of Police; and submit LRPD retirement
form (5000-17) or,
B. Upon retirement and request by the officer, the Department may release an officer’s
credentials and badge under the following circumstances:
1. When an officer retires upon receiving a non-duty related medical disability which
physically prevents them from being able to function as a police officer.
C. The Department will not release an officer’s badge, weapon or credentials under the
following circumstances:
D. Any request from an officer to purchase their weapon or badge that does not fall into one of
the above categories will be denied.
E. The Chief of Police, or his/her designee, will review each request and make the final
determination.
I. Purpose
A. This Order shall establish guidelines for relations with members of the media, the release of police
information and response to F.O.I. Act requests.
B. In all matters of interest to the public, the Little Rock Police Department will maintain open
communications emphasizing a balance between the citizen's right to know and the constitutional
rights of the accused.
C. The Department will work with the media to ensure that information is provided on a timely and
factual basis whenever possible by arranging for, and assisting at, news conferences.
D. Contacts between the news media and the police will be conducted in a courteous, professional
manner.
E. Whenever changes are made concerning public information policies and procedures, the Public
Affairs Section may seek input from the news media in order to establish a more effective working
relationship.
F. The Public Affairs Section, when requested, shall assist in crisis situations within the Department
as well as outside the Department.
1. The Public Affairs Officer (P.A.O.) will serve as the primary point of contact for staff
information and notification of critical incidents, as detailed in this Policy.
2. It is the responsibility of on-duty supervisors to notify the P.A.O. of the following listed
events. The P.A.O. will then notify the Chief of Police of these incidents.
a) All murders;
e) All traffic accidents involving fatalities and City vehicle accidents which results
in death or serious injury to any person;
g) Any incident where there may be a question as to the agency’s liability or those
which may result in heightened community interest.
3. The P.A.O. will notify the City Manager, or designee, of the facts by telephone
immediately, if before 2100, or at 0600 hours the following morning. The P.A.O. will
also ensure that a brief summary of the incident is provided to the Chief of Police by
0900 hours the same day. This summary shall indicate that City Manager notification was
made pursuant to this Order.
5. In the event the P.A.O. is not available, the Assistant Public Affairs Officer will be the
point of contact.
B. Media Safety
1. If an incident may attract media attention, a supervisor will respond to the scene, evaluate
the situation, and determine the need for notification of the P.A.O. or their designee.
a) The P.A.O. or their designee should be notified whenever their services will
assist the on-scene officers in handling media requests.
b) When the Little Rock Police Department is not the primary investigating agency,
information concerning the investigation will be referred to the primary
investigating agency.
2. If media representatives are at the scene, a supervisor and/or the P.A.O. or their designee
shall determine the best assembly point for media members.
a) For safety, media members will be directed to an area adjacent to the command
post, if one has been established, or to the on-scene commander or P.A.O. or
their designee.
a) Yellow crime scene tape should be used to define all restricted areas.
c) Media access may be limited when the presence of the media would interfere
with a police operation.
2. Media representatives should not be excluded from the general vicinity of crime scenes,
accident scenes, major fires, natural disasters and other catastrophic events. For safety
purposes, the news media should coordinate their activities with the P.A.O. or their
designee. The P.A.O. will act as a liaison during these types of incidents. The P.A.O. will
be responsible for the information gathering, preparation, and dissemination of
information to the news media representatives.
3. Photographers will not be restricted from taking pictures at a crime or accident scene.
4. The media shall not be denied access to an area where the public is allowed.
a) There are no restrictions that apply to taking pictures from public property.
5. Photographs may be taken of a suspect in transit but the suspect will not be posed by an
employee.
6. Officers at the scene of an incident may answer general questions from the media
concerning the facts surrounding the incident. This information should be restricted to
that detailed in this General Order.
1. A copy of Offense Reports concerning the following types of incidents will be forwarded
to the P.A.O. immediately after completion:
a) Homicide;
b) Bank robbery;
c) Fatal accidents;
e) Major fires;
f) Disasters or catastrophes;
A. Departmental Operations
2. Employees shall not make a public address or write for publication concerning the affairs
of the Department without the written authorization of the Chief of Police.
3. Employees, both sworn and civilian, will not communicate, disclose or release
information involving departmental matter(s) that may lead to public scrutiny without
authorization by the Office of the Chief of Police or their designee. At no time shall;
employees comment on any rumor(s) relating to any Departmental activities or matters.
Any violation(s) of this General Order may result in discipline, up to and including
termination
a) The facts and circumstances of an arrest including time and place, any resistance,
pursuit and the use of weapons by either the suspect or the officer;
b) The suspect’s name, age, residence and occupation (except related to juveniles
as outlined in this Order);
c) The identity of the arresting and investigating officer if it does not compromise
the officer and/or a police operation;
d) The charges on the suspect and a brief description of the elements of the offense;
and,
e) Any victim and/or witness information listed on a police incident report, except
for sexual assault victims.
7. Employees shall not instruct a victim or complainant not to talk to the media unless
special circumstances exist that would affect the prosecution of the case. The Public
Affairs Section shall be notified to facilitate media liaison relating to the particular
incident and the special circumstances.
e) The names of victims, both civilians and officers, injured or killed until the next
of kin has been notified.
9. The Chief of Police may authorize the release of any information deemed appropriate.
A. Employees shall not release information from Departmental files except in the following cases:
2. Accident Reports;
3. Conviction information;
5. No report will be copied for distribution outside the Department until a supervisor has
signed it, listed on a submission form and verified that the original report has been
received in the Records Section.
B. Arrest information related to juveniles shall not be disclosed to the public unless:
2. The arrest or proceedings result in the juvenile being formally charged in Circuit Court
for a felony; or,
C. Offense Reports involving juveniles may be released only when the name and all pertinent
identifying information has been deleted or authorized under the guidelines of this order.
A. Inquiries into personnel investigations shall be referred to the Office of the Chief of Police.
A. News releases concerning the Department will be coordinated with the Public Affairs Section. All
information released will be documented and forwarded to the office of the P.A.O. before the end
of the shift.
B. Routine newsworthy information should be released by the Public Affairs Section. In their
absence, a supervisor may release routine newsworthy information. This section shall not apply to
officers at the scene of an incident described in section II, B, of this Order.
A. The Arkansas Freedom of Information Act (“FOIA”) requires that all public records not subject to
an exemption from the FOIA be made available immediately upon request unless the records are in
active use or in storage. If in use or in storage, the public records must be made available within
three working days of the time the request is received. The following guidelines will govern all
FOIA requests.
1. The Police Chief is the custodian of Little Rock Police Department records. Any
department personnel who receive a written request for documents under the FOIA, with
the exception of police reports, which will continue to be handled at the divisional level,
shall immediately forward the request directly to the Chief’s office using the quickest
method of delivery. If possible, the request should be transmitted by fax machine so as
not to delay the decision as to whether the records must be released. Upon receipt of the
request by the Chief’s office, it shall be immediately referred to the Public Affairs Section
for further handling.
2. If the FOIA request is made orally, the employee receiving the request shall ask that the
request be made in writing in order to expedite the department’s response. However, if
the person making the request refuses to do so, the employee shall complete an Officer’s
Report Form containing the date and time of the request, the identity of the person making
the request, a means of contacting the person and the information requested. This form
shall then be forwarded to the Chief’s Office in the same manner as written requests.
B. Upon receipt of the FOIA request, the Public Affairs Section shall determine the type of records
requested. If the request is for the personnel records of department employees, the person making
the request shall be informed that the department maintains some personnel records which may be
subject to disclosure but that the City of Little Rock Human Resources Department is the custodian
of the official personnel files of all City employees. The person should also be advised that before
personnel records maintained by the department can be disclosed, the employee whose records are
requested must be notified and the City Attorney’s Office consulted. The person should also be
informed that this process will be handled according to the provisions of the FOIA. If they have
immediate questions about that process, they may call the City Attorney’s Office.
C. If the request is for documents contained in an ongoing criminal investigative file or a file
compiled by the Internal Affairs Division, the Public Affairs Section shall follow the following
guidelines:
1. Files involving ongoing criminal investigations are not subject to disclosure; however,
when the investigation is closed by administrative action, or closed by arrest, the records
become subject to disclosure. Any F.O.I.A. request for a case file will be forwarded by
the Public Affairs Section to the investigating unit’s Division Commander who will
inquire as to the status of the file. The Division Commander will determine the following:
a) If the case is open, open case files are not releasable under F.O.I.A. Open cases
are cases where arrest(s) have not been made, arrests have been made but more
are anticipated, or the case has been transferred to other agency investigators for
further investigation. If the case is open, the Division Commander will forward a
memo to the Public Affairs Section stating the reason the file is not releasable at
this time. The memo will be attached to the original F.O.I.A. request and the
Public Affairs Section will notify the requestor of the outcome of the request in
writing, if necessary.
b) If the case is closed and releasable, the Division Commander will forward a copy
of the file to the Public Affairs Section. The Division Commander will make
sure all ACIC, NCIC, and other protected information is redacted from the
copied file before forwarding. The Public Affairs Section will also review the
file for information that is not releasable under the F.O.I.A. laws.
D. Official F.O.I.A. requests should not be confused with normal questions asked by news reporters
on a daily basis. Questions concerning crime, accidents and other normal police operations will
continue to be handled as established by policy.
E. If a F.O.I.A. request is made and there is some uncertainty about whether the information is subject
to release, the request will be forwarded as soon as possible to the Public Affairs Section. The
Public Affairs Section will inform the Chief of Police of the request and the request will be
forwarded to the City Attorney for determination if the documents requested are releasable under
F.O.I.A. If the City Attorney determines the information requested is releasable, the information
will be released according to this policy. If the City Attorney determines the information is not
releasable, the Public Affairs Section will attach the opinion of the City Attorney to the original
F.O.I.A. request and notify the requestor in writing, if necessary, of the City Attorney’s decision.
A. Employees will attend at the time and place indicated when served in person or by telephone with
a subpoena.
B. Attire
1. Male employees shall wear the police uniform or a suit and tie when appearing in court in
a capacity related to official duties. A dress shirt and tie is acceptable for extremely
warm weather.
2. Female employees shall wear the police uniform or a dress, skirt and blouse or pants suit
when appearing in court in a capacity related to official duties.
3. Jeans, denims and casual clothing are not acceptable for court appearances.
4. No identifiable part of the uniform will be worn when appearing in court as litigants or
witnesses in personal matters which are not related to official duties (e.g. divorce, child
custody hearing, etc.).
5. Employees may carry their weapons when appearing in court. (Exceptions: The Federal
Courts require all police officers to surrender their weapon to the U.S. Marshall prior to
entering the courtroom. Officers will surrender their weapon to a court official if any
judge so orders.)
C. Procedure
2. Employees who have a pending felony case in any court shall contact the appropriate
Prosecuting Attorney to discuss the facts and circumstances surrounding the case.
3. Officers will not discuss the facts and circumstances of any case with any defense
attorney unless authorized by the Prosecuting Attorney handling the case.
4. Employees will be responsible for obtaining related evidence from the Property Room
and shall return the evidence when released by the court. Evidence held by the court will
require the employee to obtain a court receipt which will be returned to the Property
Room.
5. Employees will not linger in court after their release by the court. If the case is
rescheduled, the employee shall return to his assignment until his appearance is needed.
Any deviation from this Policy requires the approval of a supervisor.
D. Absence
1. Employees who are going to be on military leave, attending an out of city school or on
vacation for more than five consecutive working days shall submit a written notification
of their absence. The notice will be on an Officer’s Report which will be submitted
through the Chain of Command, at least four weeks prior to the requested dates. The
notice will be submitted to the Subpoena Service Officer for processing.
3. Employees who are on authorized leave as a result of an on the job injury shall honor all
subpoenas unless the injury physically incapacitates the employee to the extent that his
appearance is impossible.
II. Subpoenas
A. Employees will accept all subpoenas legally served and will be available at the designated time.
Suspended employees are required to testify when subpoenaed and will be compensated.
B. The Headquarters Division Commander is responsible for ensuring the proper handling of all
subpoenas for the Department.
C. The Subpoena Service Officer will be responsible for the actual receipt, distribution and return of
all subpoenas.
1. The Subpoena Service Officer will forward the subpoenas to the appropriate Division or
Shift, where a supervisor will serve the subpoenas to the designated employee(s). Upon
receipt of the subpoena(s), the employee will immediately sign and date the top copy of
the subpoena(s) then return the signed copy to the issuing supervisor. The supervisor will
return the signed copy to the Subpoena Service Officer.
2. The Subpoena Service Officer will make every effort to serve the officer even when a
subpoena is received that is three days or less from the court date. The service may be
made by calling the officer collect if necessary to make proper notification.
3. The Subpoena Service Officer shall return the subpoena unserved to the court issuing the
subpoena if all reasonable efforts to serve the subpoena have failed.
D. No employee of the Little Rock Police Department will accept a civil subpoena for service upon
another employee.
E. The Subpoena Service Officer shall not accept any civil subpoena for service.
A. Any employee who is subpoenaed or volunteers to testify for the defense in any criminal or civil
trial or hearing or any case against the City or Department, shall notify his Division Commander
in writing.
1. The notification will be on an Officer’s Report Form and will be completed immediately
upon the receipt of the subpoena or upon his intention to testify or prior to this
appearance as a witness.
2. This Section does not apply to the appeal of Departmental disciplinary actions.
B. Any employee who is subpoenaed to give a deposition or affidavit to anyone other than the City
Attorney or Prosecuting Attorney shall immediately notify his Division Commander in writing.
1. The notification will be on an Officer’s Report Form and will be completed immediately
upon the receipt of the subpoena.
2. The notification will immediately be forwarded to the Office of the Chief of Police.
3. This Section does not apply to the appeal of Departmental disciplinary actions.
A. Officers will be allowed overtime or compensatory time off as mandated by the existing Statement
of Agreement.
B. Restrictions
1. For the purpose of this Section, the term “court” shall be defined as appearances in
Municipal Court, Circuit Court (Civil or Chancery Court appearances which are a result
of employment with the City), Federal District Court, Juvenile Court, Probate Court,
Parole Revocation Hearings or before a Grand Jury when under subpoena. It does not
include personal appearances not related to police duties.
C. Procedures - Municipal, Circuit, Federal, Juvenile, Chancery, Probate Courts and Parole
Revocation Hearings.
1. Officers shall complete a Little Rock Police Department Daily Overtime Form for their
appearance in Municipal, Circuit, Federal, Juvenile, Chancery, Probate Court and Parole
Revocation Hearings.
2. The “time in” will be the appearance time indicated on the subpoena.
3. Officers shall show the “time out” as soon as they are released by the court and/or the
Prosecuting Attorney.
4. The overtime form will be presented to the court bailiff for approval.
5. Should an Officer desire “Compensatory Time Worked” in lieu of overtime for their
court appearance, they should properly fill out their Overtime Form.
6. Officers will route court overtime forms to their supervisor for approval and submission
to the payroll clerk.
I. Purpose
A. The Little Rock Police Department shall maintain an inspection function to ensure compliance
and uniformity in the conduct of Departmental operations.
B. To establish guidelines for conducting line inspections. Inspections shall encompass areas
including agency administrative and operational activities, facilities, property, equipment and
personnel.
A. The inspection function serves as an information-gathering mechanism for the Chief of Police.
The Inspector, as the designee of the Chief of Police, shall have the same access to information
as would be afforded to the Chief of Police, when acting within the context of the inspection
function.
B. The following principles shall guide the conduct of all inspections. An inspection is a service
to the unit being inspected. The process will focus on operations, systems and procedures, not
individuals. The process will be accomplished with a positive approach. The process will be
conducted fairly, impartially, and objectively.
III. Definitions
C. Inspections Coordinator – The Chief of Police has designated the Professional Standards
Section Lieutenant to act as the Inspections Coordinator, managing the inspections function.
The Inspections Coordinator shall be organizationally located to ensure accessibility to the
Office of the Chief of Police and of sufficient rank to function effectively.
B. Areas subject to inspection may include, but will not be limited to:
5. Policy compliance.
D. A copy of all inspections, monthly reports, and reports documenting deficiencies that have
been corrected will be forwarded to the Inspections Coordinator.
E. The Inspections Coordinator may conduct follow-up spot inspections to ensure deficiencies
have been corrected.
I. General
A. All police computer systems, (including but not limited to the Records Management System
(RMS), Computer Aided Dispatch system, Mobile Data Computers, Workstations, Laptops,
Notebooks and the City-wide network, hardware and software, are for the official use of Police
Department employees and are intended to improve the efficiency and effectiveness of
departmental operations.
B. Operation of the above systems must be in accordance with established security measures as
described in Administrative Policy and Procedures, Section IX and as outlined below. Access
shall be limited by security settings as determined by the employee’s Division Commander and
training level. Records and information maintained by the Little Rock Police Department are
for the exclusive use of departmental employees only and shall not be disseminated to persons
who are not affiliated with a bona fide law enforcement agency or as directed by command
supervisors.
A. Each employee must complete the Network Users Agreement and will be required to complete
the appropriate application forms for a User-ID number in order to gain access to the systems
they will need to accomplish their assigned tasks. The completed forms shall be forwarded to
the Technology and Equipment Section.
B. Technology and Equipment Section personnel shall be the only departmental employees
authorized to issue User-ID numbers and shall determine, based upon the employee’s duties
and level of training, the level of access to the R.M.S., Arkansas Crime Information System and
National Crime Information System, Computer Aided Dispatch System, and Mobile Data
Computers (M.D.C.).
C. Each employee who seeks access to any police system shall do so with their own unique User-
ID number and password and shall access only those files and records as specified by their
security level and job description. When not in use, systems shall be locked using the
Windows software application or logged off to prevent unauthorized entry.
1. No employee shall attempt to modify any record or file which would be illegal or
which tends to impair the operation of this department in its administration of justice.
No employee shall attempt to make changes, delete any file or record contained in the
R.M.S., the Arkansas Crime Information System, the National Crime Information
System, or the Computer Aided Dispatch System without proper authorization.
2. All entries, inquiries, modifications and attempted deletions are recorded in electronic
logs which are maintained by the Office of Information Technology and reviewed on a
semi-annual basis by an employee designated by the Chief of Police.
3. Any discovered attempt to modify or delete any file or record, or the removal or
disabling of any security software installed, which tends to impair the operation of this
department, will be documented and forwarded through the Chain of Command to the
Technology and Equipment Section.
D. No employee shall use another employee’s Network User-ID and password or local account
User-ID and password nor shall any employee attempt to secure the User-ID and password of
another employee. Only the employee or his/her supervisors, after verification of identity,
shall receive User-ID and password information. Unauthorized attempts to obtain such
information shall be reported to the offender’s Division Commander for investigation.
1. Passwords, access code assignments, file permissions and access violations shall be
audited on an annual basis.
E. Those employees who have State and National computer system security shall access those
files and records in accordance with specific training provided for the use of the State and
National computer systems.
1. Information retrieved from State and National computer files and the National Law
Enforcement Telecommunications System (N.L.E.T.S.) is intended for official police
use only and the dissemination of this information to non-criminal justice individuals
is strictly prohibited and could subject the offender to criminal and civil penalties
[A.C.A. § 12-12-212].
2. Each employee who has State and National computer access must be re-certified every
two years to maintain security authorization. Failure will result in immediate
suspension of access and the employee will be required to attend the basic Terminal
Operator course to obtain certification.
3. Any employee who disseminates Criminal History information from any State or
National computer system must log that dissemination into a Criminal History log that
shall be maintained within areas where State and National Criminal History
information may be gained.
4. All requests for new R.M.S. programs or applications, the modification of current
programs or applications or the addition of information to code tables effecting any
5. The Records Compliance Specialist will ensure compliance with all requirements set
forth by A.C.I.C and N.C.I.C. Policies and Procedures, Departmental General Orders,
CALEA Standards, and will review all requests.
6. All requests for assistance, investigation of file activity or mistakes on the part of any
employee or specific user information, from the Office of Information Technology,
shall be routed through the Technology and Equipment Lieutenant.
F. Any supervisor who needs additional training for their employees or any employee who desires
additional training on the R.M.S., Arkansas Crime Information System, the National Crime
Information System, the Computer Aided Dispatch System, or the Mobile Data Computer,
should contact the Technology and Equipment Lieutenant to schedule the requested training.
B. The Systems Administrator shall be the only division employee authorized to issue user login
and passwords and shall determine, based upon the user’s duties, the level of access to
computer systems unique to the Special Investigations Division.
1. The Systems Administrator will maintain and audit on a quarterly basis the login files
for unauthorized access and the completeness of the password list.
C. The Systems Administrator shall be responsible for backing up computer systems located in the
Special Investigations Division on a weekly basis. Other backup routines may be performed as
needed. Backup tapes will be stored off premise in a lock box maintained by the Special
Investigations Division.
A. General
1. Mobile Data Computers have been installed in police vehicles to assist officers in the
execution of efficient police functions and to reduce the amount of radio traffic
necessary to conduct police operations.
2. Officers have been trained in the use and care of the Mobile Data Computer and are
expected to use this equipment in accordance with instructions provided. Mobile Data
Computers were designed and have been programmed to provide information from
local, State and National computer files on persons, vehicles and other property.
b) The only exceptions to this Order will be when an officer needs a printout of
the information for inclusion with other reports or does not have a Mobile
Data Computer or the Mobile Data Computer is not functioning properly.
c) If the unit is not functioning properly, officers are expected to request repairs
as soon as possible during the normal working hours of the Office of
Information Technology or the next business day the Office of Information
Technology is open.
d) Employees will not change any settings on the computer which disable or
interfere with its normal functions.
3. Officers shall log on with their designated User-ID and password. Officers shall not
use another employee’s User-ID and password to obtain access to the system. At the
end of shift, officers shall log off the Mobile Data Computer system.
A. The use of all departmental computer systems shall be for official police business only.
B. Employees shall ensure all computer equipment is kept clean and shall request necessary
repairs or replacement through the Special Assignments Lieutenant, or any person authorized
to submit a Help Desk ticket, who shall submit a Help Desk ticket to the Office of Information
Technology.
1. Employees who experience difficulties logging into the City-wide network may call
918-5288 and ask the Help Desk person to assist the employee gaining access to the
Network.
C. Many departmental workstations and laptops have been designated to be used by specific
individuals. The unauthorized use of departmental workstations or laptops or the unauthorized
deletion of files or applications is not permitted without authorization from a supervisor.
D. The introduction of non-City approved computers into the City-wide network or the
introduction of unauthorized programs, applications or viruses into any City computer system
is strictly prohibited.
E. All departmental workstation computers and laptops are subject to be inventoried by authorized
employees and all programs on any departmental workstation computer or laptop must be
authorized and have appropriate documentation to verify license authenticity.
I. Records Retention
A. This Section establishes the procedure for the retention of reports and records produced by this
Department and their destruction in accordance with State statutes and Departmental
procedures.
B. Accountability
2. Authorized personnel shall log the date and time of entry and exit from the Archives
on an Archives Entry/Exit Log form.
3. The Headquarters Division Commander will be responsible for enforcing this policy.
4. No records will leave the Archives unless they have been properly documented as set
forth in this procedural guideline.
II. Policy
A. Any employee needing records from the Archives must request the records in writing, 24 hours
in advance. This request should be made through the Headquarters Division Commander.
B. When an instance arises in which a record is needed from the Archives room within a 24-hour
period and no authorized personnel are on duty, the officer’s immediate supervisor will
evaluate the necessity of obtaining the file. If the supervisor determines the file is necessary,
he will contact the appropriate Headquarters Division personnel.
A. All memorandums, correspondence and special projects financed with City funds shall be
maintained within each Division for a period of two (2) years following the date the documents
were produced.
c) Any electronic message that does not meet the criteria of a public record
according to Ark. Code Ann. § 25-19-103, unless it has become part of an
official record through a special circumstance.
C. All news or press releases issued by the department shall be maintained for a period of one (1)
year.
D. All documents relating to a retired police officer’s insurance policy shall be maintained for a
period of two (2) years after the death of the retired officer.
E. All equipment lease agreements or contracts shall be maintained for a period of one (1) year
after the expiration of the agreement or contract.
F. All building security computer logs shall be maintained for a period of one (1) year.
1. All building surveillance camera’s digital information shall be maintained for thirty
(30) days.
G. All hazardous material safety data shall be maintained by the department until the chemical’s
level has been completely depleted.
H. All ticket and incident report submission forms shall be kept by the department for one (1) year
from the date of submission.
I. All Mobile Video Recordings (MVR) taken from a police officer’s vehicle shall be stored for
thirty (30) days or until litigation has been closed.
1. “MVR” shall mean, for purposes of the Record Retention Policy, all elements of the
mobile video/audio recording equipment.
J. All 9-1-1 computer print out reports and voice recorder tapes shall be kept for thirty (30) days.
K. All civilian applicant information shall be maintained with each Division for a period of one
(1) year following the date that the position was filled.
L. Other general records and reports which the Division may generate during the year shall be
reviewed by the Division Commander or his designee for retention or destruction.
A. The following is a list of records, reports and files that will be retained in the Police
Department Archives (PDA) and the length of time each will be retained.
1. Internal Affairs
a) All Internal Affairs files shall be maintained for a period of fifty-four (54)
months or until litigation is concluded, whichever period is longer.
(1) All Internal Affairs files involving the use of deadly force shall be
maintained indefinitely.
b) Off duty forms shall be maintained for a period of three (3) years, or until
litigation is concluded, whichever is longer.
c) Early warning files shall be maintained for a period of three (3) years, or
until litigation is concluded, whichever is longer.
(1) After ten (10) years, these files will be stored electronically in
numerical order and held in accordance with Ark. Code Ann. § 14-
2-203 (2011).
c) All closed police case files that do not fit the criteria above shall be
maintained for a period seven (7) years or until conviction and/or appeals are
exhausted, whichever period is longer. Ark. Code Ann § 14-2-204 (2011).
(1) All photographs associated with case files above shall be stored in
numerical order by incident number and maintained in archives for
a period of seven years (7) or until conviction and/or appeals are
exhausted, whichever period is longer.
d) All investigative files which have been adjudicated and are subject to storage
as defined in the Major Crimes Division procedures, must have all Arkansas
Crime Information Center and National Crime Information Center records
and National Law Enforcement Telecommunications System, Inc. messages
removed from the case file.
(1) All case files, which have been adjudicated, are subject to the
Arkansas Freedom of Information Act. A.C.I.C. and N.C.I.C.
records and N.L.E.T.S. messages are not subject to disclosure and
must be destroyed in accordance with A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C. policies
and procedures.
(1) The department shall maintain all DNA evidence for seven years
(7) following any conviction for any felony for which the
defendant’s genetic profile was taken and submitted for comparison
to the State DNA Data Base for unsolved offenses, or until the
exhaustion of all of the defendant’s appeals or the completion of the
defendant’s sentence, including any probation or parole that was
imposed on defendant as part of their sentence, whichever period is
longer. Ark. Code Ann. § 12-12-104.
3. Training Division
a) All original files pertaining to resisting arrest and use of force shall be
maintained by the department for five (5) years or until litigation is
concluded, whichever is longer.
b) All files relating to dog bites shall be maintained by the department for three
(3) years or until litigation is concluded, whichever is longer.
c) All files relating to pursuits shall be maintained for three (3) years or until
litigation is concluded, whichever is longer.
5. Headquarters Division
a) All files maintained for the Chief of Police relating to the criminal docket
shall be maintained by the department indefinitely.
e) All traffic records shall be maintained by the department for three (3) years
or until litigation is concluded, whichever period is longer.
f) All original tow vehicle reports showing that a vehicle had been towed and
impounded shall be maintained for three (3) years or until litigation is
concluded, whichever is longer.
c) All paperwork, concerning property that has been listed as evidence shall be
maintained for three (3) years. The released information should be scanned
as soon as possible after release or destruction onto digital medium. The
digital medium shall be kept indefinitely for property listed as evidence.
7. Administrative Services
b) All financial records of the department shall be maintained for ten (10) years
or until litigation is concluded, whichever period is longer.
c) All payroll records, time sheets, employment records, and leave requests
shall be maintained by the department for three (3) years or until litigation is
concluded, whichever is longer.
d) Computer software licenses and all documents relating to the licenses shall
be maintained for ten (10) years after the license has been superseded by a
new license.
a) The following is the retention period for electronic mail (e-mail) messages.
For short term retention, please refer to the Short Term Retention section of
this policy.
(3) All weekly and monthly reports, including, but not limited to,
documents relating to the status of on-going investigations.
(1) All e-mails that are of significant administrative, legal, and/or fiscal
value shall be marked as permanent and categorized under their
appropriate record series according to this policy.
(c) Any e-mail that reflects when an official action has been
taken.
V. Storage Procedures
A. Records presented for storage in Archives will not be accepted unless stored in accordance
with the below listed procedures:
1. Records, reports, and files to be stored in the Police Department Archives for three (3)
or more years, following the year the documents were produced, will be placed
numerically in a storage box. The date of destruction must be printed on the exterior
of the box along with the division number.
2. A list of the contents will be made at the time of storage. One copy shall be placed
inside the lid of the box and the original list forwarded to the Operations Support
Lieutenant.
3. Each division will be assigned a specific location within the Archives area to store
their records.
5. Optical disks shall be stored in the Headquarters Division safe located in the Records
Section.
A. A formal letter shall be sent to the State Historian in January each year outlining the broad
nature of records, reports and files the Department intends to destroy.
B. In February of each year, all Division Commanders shall designate a supervisor and additional
personnel as necessary to review the records, reports and files in storage that are eligible for
destruction and assist in their removal from the Archives. The purging process will be
supervised by personnel authorized access to the Archives.
C. On the date of destruction, a city vehicle will be assigned to transport the material to a facility
with an incinerator. The records taken will be burned, under the supervision of the Operations
Support Lieutenant.
D. Computer records shall be updated to show the date of record destruction, these records will be
maintained indefinitely.
I. Purpose
A. This Order establishes the procedure for determining who will attend Assessment Centers as an
Assessor at other police departments.
A. Placing a request does not assure an assignment but will assure consideration based upon an
officer’s placement on a standing list.
B. Requests will be ranked by the date the requesting officer’s supervisor dates his/her
recommendation.
1. Two or more requests with the supervisor’s recommendation having the same date
will be ranked by seniority as a sworn officer.
C. Any officer desiring to withdraw his/her name from consideration for an assignment to an
Assessment Center shall submit an officer’s report form making such a request through the
chain of command.
D. Officers who have received a written reprimand, disciplinary suspension or demotion are
prohibited from submitting an assignment request or being considered for assignment for a
period of six (6) months from the date of the order of suspension or demotion.
1. Officers may also be prohibited from consideration for assignment by the Chief of
Police when extenuating circumstances exist.
E. Normally, one officer will be sent to each Assessment Center. An Assistant Chief of Police
may approve additional officers being sent.
F. Officers will be limited to two (2) assessment center assignments per calendar year.
G. The assignment of police personnel is ultimately a management right vested in the Chief of
Police. If the needs of the department require any deviation from this order, the Chief of Police
or designee may waive these requirements and make any necessary assignments.
A. Applicability
1. This General Order will apply to all Captains, Lieutenants, and Sergeants in the police
department.
2. A supervisor must serve at least one year in his/her present rank before serving as an
assessor for that rank. This restriction does not apply if the Assessment Center is for
the rank one step lower than that held by the assessor.
B. Procedure
C. Filling Vacancies
1. When an Assessment Center becomes available, officers ranked at the top of the
request list will be contacted to accept or decline the assignment.
2. If an officer declines the position, the next person on the list will be contacted.
a) If all officers on the list decline, the position will be offered to officers who
have previously served as an assessor already during the calendar year.
3. If the requesting agency asks for a specific rank, race, or sex, a candidate on the list
will be automatically passed over if he/she does not fit in that category.
4. If the requesting agency makes no specific request, sergeants will be selected from the
sergeant’s list to attend a Sergeant’s Assessment Center, Lieutenants will be selected
for a Lieutenant’s Assessment Center, and Captains selected for a Captain’s
Assessment Center. If no candidate is available for a target rank, then one will be
selected from the next higher rank.
2. Three lists shall be maintained which shall include Captain, Lieutenant, and Sergeant.
3. When a supervisor serves as an assessor at another police department, his name will
be moved to the bottom of the list.
4. All completed assignments will be entered into the officer’s personnel training file in
the Records Management System.
A. Representatives of the Department’s collective bargaining team will consist of the following:
4. Other City representatives, as the City Manager or his designee may deem appropriate.
B. The department is committed to good faith bargaining with the duly recognized bargaining unit(s)
recognized by members of the department. The Fraternal Order of Police Lodge #17 is the
currently recognized bargaining agent for officers of the Little Rock Police Department of the rank
of Officer and Sergeant.
A. The Department is committed to abide by the ground rules for collective bargaining that arise out
of the collective bargaining process or labor arbitration; and,
B. The Department is further committed to abide, in both letter and spirit, by the negotiated labor
agreement that has been signed by management, labor representatives, and ratified by the
bargaining unit.
A. When a new contract is negotiated or amended, the following actions should take place to assure
compliance with the terms of the agreement:
1. Review and amend, if necessary, all written directives and procedures to coincide with
the terms of the agreement. This will be accomplished by the Professional Standards
Section of the department.
2. Information about the new agreement with modifications to existing agreements noted
should be disseminated to all administrative and supervisory members of the department
using procedures similar to those established for distribution of policies and procedures.
I. Purpose
A. It is the purpose of this policy to provide investigative officers and others with general knowledge
of, guidance and procedures for the use of polygraph examinations.
II. Policy
A. The polygraph examination is a valuable investigative aid as used in conjunction with, but not as a
substitute for, a thorough investigation. The polygraph may be employed, consistent with this
policy, to verify, corroborate or refute statements; obtain additional investigative leads; narrow or
focus criminal investigations; serve to screen candidates for positions with this or other criminal
justice agencies; and assist in the conducting of internal police investigations, among other
authorized purposes.
III. Definition
A. Polygraph: The polygraph is an instrument that records certain physiological changes in a person
undergoing questioning in an effort to ascertain truth or deception. A polygraph simultaneously
records a minimum of respiratory activity, galvanic skin resistance or conductivity, and
cardiovascular activity.
IV. Procedures
2. Polygraph examinations may be authorized when consistent with state law and
Department General Orders. Situations in which authorization may be requested and
approved include, but may not be limited to:
c) Requests from other criminal justice agencies consistent with the specified
requirements of this Order;
3. The polygraph should not be used to verify a victim's allegation without sufficient
grounds for suspecting that the victim has given false or misleading statements.
4. Requests for polygraph examinations from other law enforcement agencies pursuant to an
internal investigation must be in writing and be approved by the Office of the Chief of
Police.
1. The requesting officer is responsible for providing the examiner with all pertinent
information concerning the case and for reviewing, clarifying or elaborating on
information as the examiner may deem necessary. This includes, but may not be limited
to:
a) Information obtained in the investigation that supports and justifies the use of
the polygraph;
2. If the subject is hearing impaired or does not speak English, the requesting officer will
make arrangements for a sign language interpreter or translator as determined by the
polygraph examiner.
4. Officers shall not attempt to explain procedures that will be used in the examination but
shall advise subjects that these will be explained fully by the examiner. Subjects may be
advised of the following:
b) The results of the examination are not admissible in a court of law unless all
parties agree in advance; and,
5. Should the subject be late for or cancel the appointment, the requesting officer shall
immediately notify the polygraph examiner.
6. If possible, the requesting officer shall report with the subject and any other authorized
persons, such as attorneys, parents or legal guardians, to the examination location of the
test. The polygraph examiner shall be solely responsible for authorizing any persons
inside the examination or observation rooms.
1. Only fully trained polygraph examiners or intern polygraph examiners under the direction
of a certified polygraph examiner are authorized to administer polygraph examinations.
2. The polygraph examiner shall make such inquiries of the subject's health, medical history
and/or use of medications as may be reasonably necessary to determine his ability to take
the examination. Polygraph examinations shall not be conducted on any person whom the
examiner reasonably believes to be physically or emotionally unsuitable for testing. This
may include, but is not limited to, persons with heart conditions, women who are
pregnant and individuals taking certain types of medication that may interfere with test
results. When in doubt, the examiner may request the examinee to obtain a medical
certificate from an appropriate health care provider.
3. An examiner shall not conduct a polygraph examination upon a subject if it is felt for any
reason that an unbiased examination cannot be given.
4. Where appropriate, the examiner shall read Miranda rights to the subject and obtain a
waiver of rights. The examiner shall also explain the voluntary nature of the test and
obtain a signed release form prior to administering the examination.
6. Prior to the test, the examiner shall explain the polygraph procedure to the subject and
prepare him for the examination.
7. The examiner shall be responsible for preparing all questions used in the examination.
8. Prior to the examination, each test question shall be reviewed with the person being
tested.
9. In criminal and Internal Affairs polygraphs, the examiner shall independently interpret
the chart tracings and render an opinion on the findings that include, but is not limited to,
one of the following conclusions:
a) No Deception Indicated;
c) Inconclusive.
a) No Significant Reactions/Responses;
b) Significant Reactions/Responses;
c) No Opinion or Inconclusive:
11. The polygraph examiner shall determine if a second polygraph examination is necessary
and appropriate.
12. Juveniles being polygraphed will be given the same constitutional protection as adults.
Requesting officers will notify the parent or legal guardian prior to administering the
polygraph examination.
D. Pre-Employment Examinations.
1. The polygraph examiner shall review all relevant applicants screening reports, applicant
personal history summaries and any prior polygraph examination reports prepared by this
Department before conducting the examination.
3. Polygraph examinations shall not be used as the sole determinant of suitability for
employment.
4. Candidates shall be provided with a list of questions that may be used in the examination.
1. The polygraph examiner is responsible for the maintenance, safekeeping and the integrity
of the polygraph equipment.
2. The polygraph examiner shall provide such summary activity or statistical reports as may
be directed by the Office of the Chief of Police.
3. Unless otherwise provided in this Order or by state law, the polygraph examiner shall
maintain copies of each polygraph report, together with polygraph charts and all
associated papers, for a period of three (3) years and indefinitely in capital offenses.
F. Examination Rooms.
1. Tests and interviews shall be conducted in a clean, neat environment free of audible and
visual distractions.
2. Certificates, diplomas and such shall be displayed so as not to be in the sight of subjects
during testing.
3. Examiners will be neat and well groomed, and will dress in a manner consistent with
standards of the professional business community.
a) Duty uniforms, badges and other emblems of authority shall not be worn. This
does not include departmental identification cards, where required.
b) Service weapons may be worn if required but should not be openly displayed.
G. Equipment.
2. Calibration:
I. Purpose
A. The purpose of this General Order is to promulgate the Department’s policy prohibiting the use
and/or practice of bias based profiling tactics against any individual or group based solely on
the individual or group’s race, color, creed, religion, sex, national origin, age, disability,
marital status, sexual orientation, gender identity, genetic information, political opinions or
affiliation or socio-economic status (real or perceived).
II. Policy
A. It is the policy of the Little Rock Police Department to patrol in a proactive manner, to
aggressively investigate suspicious persons and circumstances and to actively enforce the law.
The Little Rock Police Department neither condones nor tolerates the practice of bias based
profiling tactics in its enforcement efforts.
III. Definition
A. Bias based profiling- When a police officer stops, detains, takes investigative or enforcement
action against a citizen, or group of citizens, based solely on the individual or group’s race,
color, creed, religion, sex, national origin, age, disability, marital status, sexual orientation,
gender identity, genetic information, political opinions or affiliation or socio-economic status.
Bias based profiling is inclusive of racial profiling.
Bias based profiling- may also be the characterization of any of the aforementioned groups
with a preconceived tendency or propensity to engage in criminal activity.
B. Racial profiling A.C.A.§ 12-12-1402 is the practice of a law enforcement officer relying to any
degree on race, ethnicity, national origin or religion in selecting which individuals to subject to
routine investigatory activities or in deciding upon the scope and substance of law enforcement
activity following the initial routine investigatory activity.
Racial profiling does not include reliance on these criteria in combination with other
identifying factors when the law enforcement officer is seeking to apprehend a specific suspect
whose race, ethnicity or national origin is part of the description of the suspect and the
description is thought to be reliable and locally relevant.
IV. Procedure
1. Sworn personnel are prohibited from using the race, color, creed, religion, sex,
national origin, age, disability, marital status, sexual orientation, gender identity,
genetic information, political opinions or affiliation or socio-economic status of a
person as the sole reasoning for stopping a vehicle, making an arrest, conducting a
field interview, investigative detention, seizing assets, seeking asset forfeiture, or
conducting a search.
2. All investigatory detentions, traffic stops, arrests, searches and seizures shall be based
upon the standards of reasonable suspicion or probable cause as required by the
Fourth Amendment of the U. S. Constitution, State Statutes, Arkansas Rules of
Criminal Procedure, and/or subsequent court rulings. Traffic stops shall be conducted
in accordance with General Order 107, Limits of Authority and General Order 316,
Mobile Video Recording Equipment.
3. Sworn personnel shall treat all citizens with courtesy and respect when making
contact. Officers are forbidden from using language or displaying symbols and
gestures that are commonly viewed as offensive to, or are indicative of bias towards
any group.
4. No employee shall retaliate against any individual reporting incidents of bias based
profiling.
5. Officers shall identify themselves by their full name and Department. All persons
stopped by an officer shall be provided with an explanation for why they were
stopped, unless disclosure of such information would undermine an investigation or
jeopardize the officer’s safety. Providing citizens with an explanation of why they
were stopped fosters better relations with the community and reduces the perception
of bias on the part of the police.
B. Supervisory Responsibility
1. Supervisors shall:
a) Ensure that subordinates are familiar with this policy and adhere to its
provisions;
C. Training
1. The Training Division shall conduct annual training with sworn personnel on subjects
that include, but are not limited to, bias based profiling, cultural diversity, interaction
with citizens, policies, ethics, legal aspects, and related topics. Training may be
conducted through in-service training, special courses, or roll-call training.
2. The Training Division shall be responsible for coordinating special training for a
particular unit or officer when requested by a Division Commander or the Office of
the Chief of Police.
D. Professional Standards
1. The Professional Standards Section shall submit a monthly report to the Chief of
Police that summarizes complaints alleging bias based profiling on the part of
departmental personnel during the previous month.
Subsequent to a review by the Office of the Attorney General, this policy has been amended to conform
to specific terms set forth in Arkansas Act 1207 of 2003 establishing requirements to prohibit racial
profiling.
I. General
A. It is the policy of the Little Rock Police Department to recognize and support the rights of all
employees to engage in personal Internet-based activities including Social Networking and Media
while off duty to the extent that those private or personal activities do not infringe upon the
integrity or security of the Department’s operations, objectives, employees, or clients. The Little
Rock Police Department highly values and acknowledges the benefits of employee participation in
law enforcement social media or networking sites and hence, nothing in this general order is
intended to deter or prohibit employees from participating, accessing or posting on those sites to
accomplish a law enforcement objective.
II. Purpose
A. Social networking has, with the abundant availability of Internet access to end-users and the
increase of portable digital devices, become an intricate part of everyday communication. This
general order is intended to provide clear guidelines for all employees of the Little Rock Police
Department who desire to participate in those networks and to preserve and protect the
professional interest of the Department.
1. As an employee of the Little Rock Police Department, the use and application of good
judgment, decency, and common sense is expected both on and off duty. This expectation
also applies while performing official duties of the Little Rock Police Department
and/or engaging in various computer or digital media activities both on and off duty.
3. The absence of, or lack of explicit reference to a specific site, does not limit the extent of
the application of this policy. Where no policy or guidelines exist, employees should use
their professional judgment and take the most prudent action possible, which includes,
but is not limited to, consultation with supervision or administration.
5. All employees of the Department are to refrain from posting on social personal
networking sites or media, photographs of Department personnel wearing agency
distinguishable uniforms, any logos, shields, badges or weapons or writings that readily
identify one as a member of the Little Rock Police Department or the City of Little Rock.
6. Employees shall guard themselves accordingly and shall not participate in any conduct
that is likely to have an adverse affect on the reputation, the integrity or the operations
of the Little Rock Police Department. Violations of this order are subject to disciplinary
action up to and including termination.
B. Definitions
1. Blog - A blog (short for web-log) is a personal online journal that is frequently updated
and intended for general public consumption. Blogs are defined by their format: a
series of entries posted to a single page in reverse chronological order. Blogs generally
represent the personality of the author or reflect the purpose of the Website that hosts
the blog. Topics sometimes include brief philosophical musings, commentary on Internet
and other social issues, and links to other sites the author favors, especially those that
support.
2. Tweets – Brief text messaging of one-hundred forty (140) characters or less posted on a
social media site.
C. Online Etiquette
1. Personal blogs should have clear disclaimers that the views expressed by the author in
the blog are the author’s alone and do not represent the views of the Department. The
person should write clearly and in first person making the writing clear that the views
expressed are personal and do not represent the Little Rock Police Department.
5. Employees shall not reference or cite any information relative to victims, witnesses,
court cases or sentencing, current or past criminal investigations, inmates, fellow
employees, witness testimony, confidential investigations, witness protection matters,
traffic investigations, or provide any information on citizens that was acquired in the
performance of duty without their express written consent. In all cases, employees will
not publish any sensitive Departmental information regarding any matter that may
impede Departmental operations or compromise officer safety.
6. Employees shall adhere to copyright laws, and reference or cite sources appropriately.
Plagiarism applies online as well.
A. Computers and Cell Phones - Employees are prohibited from using Department owned computers
or cell phones with Internet connection to post, write or respond to blogs, tweets or any other
written communication relative to social networking, social dating, or social media for personal
use. Allowable exceptions are:
1. Participation in an active criminal investigation and the postings are part of the
investigation;
A. Department personnel will not use personal mobile phones, cameras, or any other device to
capture photographs and or video of any police controlled scene or persons in police custody.
1. In the event of exigent circumstances where evidence of significant value could be lost,
destroyed, or is time sensitive due to environmental conditions if photographic evidence
is not obtained immediately, Department personnel may elect to use a personally owned
device to capture evidence in the performance of the investigation. The use of the device
will be reported to a supervisor and must be articulated in an Officer’s Report. The
mere convenience for the Department personnel or waiting for the response of a
Department owned device does not constitute exigent circumstances.
A. No Expectation of Privacy
1. Employees are cautioned that all communications, websites, e-mail, and text messaging
over Department owned computers, MDCs, and phones are subject to review for
administrative purposes.
2. Employees shall not post any private or personal information of fellow employees or
supervisors without their written consent, including but not limited to, their names,
family members’ names, addresses, numerical identifiers or photographs.
1. Employees are prohibited from viewing, responding to, or updating personal social
media networking sites while on duty, which includes the use of personally owned
devices. An exception will be granted for those employees utilizing personal devices
while on authorized breaks only.
2. The accessing of law enforcement social media or networks during duty hours to
accomplish a law enforcement objective is authorized.
4. Text messaging or posting blogs or tweets while operating Department owned or leased
vehicles is strictly prohibited, whether on or off duty.
I. General
A. This Order establishes Departmental procedures to provide recognition of sworn and civilian
employees for his/her heroic or meritorious acts performed while serving in an official police
capacity.
B. Publicity provided by the City of Little Rock will give public recognition to those who have
brought honor to themselves and the Police Department.
1. The Medal of Valor is awarded for conspicuous acts of valor performed during a police
related act, on or off-duty, which involved a risk of life and the knowledge of that risk.
2. The act must clearly delineate valor from lesser forms of courage by being of such a grave
nature that the non-performance of the act would not subject the individual to any
justifiable criticism and which is clearly above and beyond the call of duty.
a) A strong possibility existed at the time the employee acted that he could have
suffered serious injury or death, or the employee was seriously or fatally injured
in the performance of this act;
c) The employee did not use poor judgment or violate procedures which created the
necessity for his actions.
B. Medal of Merit - The Medal of Merit is awarded for an act of exceptional courage and dedication
to duty while performing a police related act, on or off-duty, which involves a substantial risk to
the officer’s personal safety.
1. The Police Shield is presented to any police officer that is wounded or seriously injured in
the line of duty.
2. The injury may occur on or off-duty while the officer is performing a police related task
and the officer exercises good judgment and procedures, which do not create unnecessary
risk to his safety nor create a situation which otherwise would not develop.
3. The Police Shield may be awarded in addition to the awarding of a higher award where
the facts show the recipient is entitled to such award.
4. The Department’s Award Review Committee shall not consider injuries sustained from
falls on ice, motor vehicle accidents or similar occurrences unless the evidence clearly
indicates the employee had exhausted all reasonable safety precautions and had no control
of the circumstances.
1. The Police Commendation Bar is awarded for acts of heroism beyond those acts normally
required by the bounds of duty, but do not necessarily expose the officer to the degree of
risk established for the Medal of Valor or Medal of Merit.
2. The Police Commendation Bar may also be awarded for outstanding contributions to law
enforcement through the success of difficult police projects, programs, or situations with
such contributions being made in a highly professional manner.
3. A Unit Commendation may be awarded to any distinct work group of employees when the
actions of the group meet the qualifications as outlined in Subsection 2 above. The
Commendation shall be presented to the Unit and shall remain with the Unit. Individual
employees will not receive a certificate or bar, but a copy of the nominating letter will be
placed in each employee’s personnel file. An employee may be cited separately for
exceptional work per any award.
1. The Lifesaving Award is awarded for an act that results in the saving or preservation of a
life or lives which would otherwise have expired without the direct action undertaken by
the rescuer.
2. The rescuer need not have been subjected to personal risk through his involvement.
3. The rescuer is eligible to receive only one Lifesaving Award for each incident regardless
of the number of victims involved.
G. Noel Don McGuire Memorial Award - This award is given to the Little Rock Police Recruit who
attains the highest overall average score during a calendar year from Basic Recruit Schools.
1. The Civic Achievement Award is awarded to members of the Department who bring
favorable recognition to the Department through their involvement in civic affairs.
2. The recipient of the award may be sworn or civilian, but must be acting in the capacity as
a member or representative of the Little Rock Police Department.
1. This award is given to a sworn member of the Department who has rendered a service
beyond the course of duty and/or because of diligence, tenacity, and perseverance; or,
2. Acts in a manner that brings credit to the Little Rock Police Department and supports the
goals of the organization; or,
1. All officers who have received or who have been nominated for a Department award
during the same calendar year for which the Officer of the Year Award is being given are
automatically considered for this award.
2. Any officer may be nominated for this award for acts of heroism and dedication to duty,
lifesaving, or outstanding contributions to law enforcement through the success of
difficult police projects, programs, or situations.
1. This award is given to a civilian employee of the Department who has rendered a service
beyond the course of duty and/or because of diligence, tenacity, and perseverance; or,
2. Acts in a manner that brings credit to the Little Rock Police Department and supports the
goals of the organization.
1. All civilian employees who have received or who have been nominated for a Department
award during the same calendar year for which the Civilian of the Year Award is being
given are automatically considered for this award.
2. Any civilian member of the Department may be nominated for this award for outstanding
contributions to law enforcement through the success of difficult police projects,
programs, or situations with such contributions being made in a highly professional
manner.
M. Community Service Award - The Community Service Award is awarded each year to a sworn or
civilian member of the Department who throughout the year demonstrated a commitment to invest
time in the community that is outside what is normally expected of him/her.
1. This award is given to a police supervisor who has demonstrated outstanding law
enforcement supervision throughout a calendar year. Nominations will be submitted to the
Public Affairs Officer by the 10th of January for the previous year.
2. The nomination will be in memo form and include detailed facts with supporting
documentation demonstrating how the nominee’s leadership exceeded the normal
parameters of their assignment for the year. This award is not for one specific event
unless that event was an unusual or special assignment beyond the normal job routines
that continued for the majority of the year nominated.
3. The Public Affairs Officer will present the nominations to the Assistant Chiefs for
recommendations. Each Assistant Chief will indicate on the nomination form the
candidate of their choice and detail why they believe this supervisor should receive this
award. The Public Affairs Officer will collect the nomination forms from the three
Assistant Chiefs once they have made their choice and submit them to the Chief of Police
by January 15th who will select the award winner.
4. The winner of the award will be presented a plaque in recognition for their leadership at a
ceremony held in January or February by the Chief of Police.
5. Police Youth Live in Camp Award Criteria - The award is given to officers that have
worked at the departmentally approved youth camp as a counselor for a minimum of
three (3) years. The officer must have been in attendance for all camp activities.
B. When a member of the Department nominates an officer or civilian for consideration, the
following procedures shall be followed:
1. The nominating member will complete an Awards Nomination Form #5000-10 with a
detailed account of the act that deserves recognition within thirty (30) days of the date of
the incident or within thirty (30) days of the conclusion of the investigation. One form
shall be filled out for each person being nominated, but only one narrative is required.
2. The form shall include the circumstances and actions surrounding the act, all witnesses to
the act, and any other information that may be used for consideration.
4. After each Awards Review Committee meeting, the Public Affairs Office will notify the
nominee’s Commander of the committee’s action on each nomination. The nominee’s
Commander shall be responsible for notifying the nominee.
C. The Chief of Police shall appoint an eight-member Departmental Awards Review Committee on an
annual basis to evaluate all award nominations and recommend recipients to the Chief of Police for
final approval. The Public Affairs Officer shall serve as Chairman of the Committee and the
remainder of the Committee shall be composed of the following:
A. Medal of Valor - The recipient of the Medal of Valor shall receive a medallion, ribbon bar and
certificate denoting the award.
B. Medal of Merit - The recipient of the Medal of Merit shall receive a medallion, ribbon bar and
certificate denoting the award.
C. Police Shield - The recipient of the Police Shield shall receive a ribbon bar and certificate denoting
the award.
D. Police Commendation Bar - The recipient of the Police Commendation Bar shall receive a ribbon
bar and certificate denoting the award.
E. Lifesaving Award - The recipient of the Lifesaving Award shall receive a ribbon bar and certificate
denoting the award.
F. Civic Achievement Award - The recipient of the Civic Achievement Award shall receive a ribbon
bar and certificate denoting the award.
G. Officer of the Month Award - The recipient of the Officer of the Month Award shall receive a
ribbon bar and certificate denoting the award. The recipient’s name will also be added to the
Officer of the Month plaque displayed at Police Headquarters.
H. Officer of the Year Award - The recipient of the Officer of the Year Award shall receive a ribbon
bar and plaque denoting the award.
I. Civilian Employee of the Month Award - The recipient of the Civilian Employee of the Month
Award shall receive a certificate denoting the award.
J. Civilian Employee of the Year - The recipient of the Civilian Employee of the Year Award shall
receive a plaque denoting the award.
K. Community Service Award - The recipient of the Community Service Award shall receive a plaque
denoting the award.
L. Noel Don McGuire Award - The recipient of the Noel Don McGuire Award shall receive a
medallion, a ribbon bar, and his name shall be added to the award plaque maintained by the
Department.
M. Chief Lawrence Johnson Leadership Award – The recipient of the Chief Lawrence Johnson
Leadership Award will receive a ribbon bar and a plaque denoting the award.
V. Presentation of Awards
A. Medal of Valor
1. The Chief of Police shall make a recommendation to the City Board of Directors through
the City Manager that the nominee be presented the Medal of Valor.
2. The approval by the Board normally shall be in the form of a Resolution, made by the
Mayor, during the public presentation of the award to the recipient.
3. The Chief of Police shall present the medallion, ribbon bar and certificate to the recipient.
B. Other Awards - Upon approval and during a public presentation, the Chief of Police shall present
the recipient with the medallion, ribbon bar, and certificate; ribbon bar and certificate; or
medallion, whichever is appropriate.
A. The Citizen’s Achievement Award is established as a special Departmental award which may be
presented for exceptional service by a member of the public who has made an outstanding
contribution to the police profession and whose efforts are appreciated and recognized by the
Department.
B. This Award may be presented as a result of the award nomination procedures detailed in Section
III of this Order or by decision of the Office of the Chief of Police.
C. The recipient of the Citizen’s Achievement Award shall receive a certificate denoting the award in
a public ceremony.
I. Purpose
A. The purpose of this Order is to establish a career development program and familiarize
Department personnel with its benefits.
B. It shall be the policy of the Little Rock Police Department to maintain and support a career
development program in which the principle elements will be career counseling and development
for all personnel.
A. The Career Development Program will be administered under the direction of the Training
Division Commander, with the Training Division Lieutenant designated as the Career
Development Coordinator. The program will be reviewed on a continual basis in relation to the
organizational goals and objectives of the Department and revised as necessary.
B. The goal of the Career Development Program is to provide all personnel with the opportunity to
be proficient in their duties and enhance the employee’s potential for lateral and upward mobility.
2. To provide in-service, advanced, and remedial training designed to enhance the employee’s
proficiency.
4. To advertise grants/scholarships available for law enforcement personnel and assist officers in
completing their applications.
2. Specialization: Directed toward a specific job function on which an individual wishes to focus
and further develop expertise.
A. An employee’s first line supervisor will be responsible for conducting Career Development
counseling in conjunction with completion of each employee’s performance evaluation.
1. A Career Development Counseling Form will be completed on each employee even if assistance
is not requested. The form shall be forwarded to the Training Division Lieutenant for review
and coordination.
2. If during the course of the year, an employee desires career counseling, he/she may contact their
immediate supervisor who will provide them appropriate guidance or referral to a
knowledgeable source.
1. Basic training;
2. Roll-call training;
3. Proficiency training;
6. Promotional training;
B. Training may be provided, when available, through a variety of resources that include, but are not
limited to:
5. Private industry;
C. Proficiency training is training designed to keep employees up to date on job duties and
responsibilities. Proficiency training will be used to enhance the officer’s skills and enhance the
potential of lateral and upward mobility within the Department. Employees may be required to
participate in remedial proficiency training as a part of Career Development.
D. Specialized training will be provided to personnel after their transfer to a specialized assignment to
enhance the employee’s job knowledge and potential for upward mobility within the Department.
E. Job related training should be provided to all newly promoted personnel either prior to promotion
or within the first year following promotion.
2. Fiscal management;
3. Organizational behavior;
4. Decision making;
5. Basic supervision;
G. Advanced management training will be made available to the appropriate level of supervision or
management personnel to impart higher levels of training to participants who possess exceptional
leadership abilities. Advanced management training may include attending a national training
institution or the FBI National Academy if applicable to the employee’s position.
V. Records Management
A. The Training Division will be responsible for maintaining records of all proficiency, career
specialty, management, or supervisory training received by every member of the Department.
Information about training will include at a minimum:
1. Course title;
2. Type of training;
3. Source of training;
B. An employee’s in-service training record may be reviewed by the employee and their immediate
supervisor or counselor in order to assess the training progress of each employee in achieving
career objectives.
A. Temporary duty assignments are ideally a part of the Career Development process. Temporary
assignments are made by the Chief of Police in order to enhance career development or to
accomplish specific short-term projects. This section applies to sworn personnel.
B. Temporary assignments are an integral part of the career development for those in the
officer/detective classification when applicable and pertinent to the Department’s mission.
E. Officers accepted for temporary assignment shall be returned in good standing to their prior
assignment upon completion of the temporary assignment.
1. Training Division;
4. Headquarters Division;
b) Airport.
G. Temporary assignments shall be utilized at the discretion of the Chief of Police as a means of
cross-training officers to enhance officer job performance and gain additional experience. The
following conditions must be met:
2. Officers must have met with their respective Division Commanders and been recommended for
temporary assignment.
3. Division Commanders must assess the feasibility of the officer being assigned to the temporary
assignment as well as a need for the temporary assignment. Operational considerations should
be taken into account.
1. Officers must complete three years in the Field Services Division prior to being eligible for the
temporary assignment and job rotation program.
2. Officers desiring a temporary assignment must submit an Officer’s letter through his Chain of
Command to be forwarded to the Career Development Coordinator.
3. The Career Development Coordinator shall contact the Commander of the Division to which the
officer seeks temporary assignment in order to assess the feasibility of the assignment. The
Officer’s letter shall be forwarded to the requested Division’s Commander.
4. The Division Commander (or his designee) shall either notify the officer in writing of the lack
of availability of the temporary assignment at this time or schedule the officer for an interview.
5. The Division Commander (or his designee) shall conduct an interview with the officer to
familiarize him with the daily operations of the Division and to specify the responsibilities of
the temporary assignment.
6. The Division Commander shall forward a letter to the Career Development Coordinator
accepting or declining the officer for temporary assignment.
7. The Career Development Coordinator shall forward this letter to the Chief of Police for final
approval.
8. Upon final approval, the Career Development Coordinator shall forward a copy of the letter to
the officer’s current Division Commander for notification of the officer.
9. All scheduling of the officer to a temporary assignment shall be resolved between the current
Division Commander and the Commander responsible for the temporary assignment.
10. The officer shall be notified, in writing, of the start date, duration and tour of duty for the
temporary assignment by his current Division Commander. A copy shall be forwarded to the
Career Development Coordinator for retention in the officer’s file.
11. The Career Development Coordinator shall be responsible for notifying both Division
Commanders and the officer of the last scheduled day of the temporary assignment to ensure a
smooth return of the officer to his permanent assignment.
I. Evaluations
1. All officers shall have their performance evaluated by the supervisor responsible for the
temporary assignment.
2. A copy of the evaluation shall be forwarded to the Career Development Coordinator within two
(2) weeks of the completion of the assignment.
A. Leave for educational purposes will be classified under administrative leave and all applicable
Civil Service and Departmental Rules and Regulations will apply. Leave may be authorized for
attending outside workshops, seminars, state training academies, or formal educational programs.
The Department may support the employee who pursues the educational opportunity by providing
a flexible work schedule where possible.
B. Application for leave or shift adjustments shall be made through the Chain of Command up to the
Bureau Commander who, upon approval, will submit the application to the Chief of Police for
final approval.
C. The application shall include a justification of the subjects to be studied and their relationship to
the employee’s career development and job relationships, as well as the need for a shift exception.
A. The Department encourages employees to pursue higher education and realizes that the
Department is strengthened through continuing education.
B. Employees hired before December 31, 1990, are paid according to their selection of one of two
plans listed below. Employees hired after this date are eligible to be compensated based on the
college plan only.
1. College Plan
# College Hours Years Employed Monthly Pay
Less than 15 Less than 2 years $0
15 to 30 2 years $20.00
31 to 63 3 years $50.00
Assoc. Degree or
64 to 123 3 years $75.00
Bachelors Degree or 124 4 $100.00
Graduate 10 $125.00
2. Certificate Plan
Certificate Level College Hours Additional Hours Pay Per Month
Basic 0 0 0
General 0 1 year + 3 hrs. 20
Excluding English
Intermediate 6 hrs English 6 hrs. related studies 50
Advanced 15 0 75
Senior 45 0 100
I. Purpose
A. This Order establishes procedures for the transfer of personnel from one Division to another
with the exception of internal movement between Field Services Bureau.
B. This Order establishes procedures for the transfer of personnel physically incapable of
reporting to work for an indefinite period of time.
D. This Order establishes procedures for the assignment or movement of personnel within the
Field Services Bureau and sets guidelines for requesting assignment to a particular shift, squad
and/or days off.
A. The transfer of police personnel is ultimately a management right vested in the Chief of Police.
The Chief of Police or his/her designee reserves the right to deviate from the provisions of this
policy if it is in his/her determination in the best interest of the Department.
B. For the purpose of this order, transfer is defined as the movement of personnel from one
Division within the Department to another with the exception of internal movement between
Field Services Divisions. For the purpose of transfer, the three (3) geographical Field Services
Divisions will be inclusive in the term “Field Services Bureau".
C. Transfers will be determined based on effective utilization of manpower, special needs of the
Department and the interest of the employee.
A. Officers who have received a disciplinary suspension or demotion are prohibited from
submitting transfer requests or being considered for transfer for a period of six (6) months from
the date of the order of suspension or demotion.
B. Officers who have received a written reprimand may be prohibited from submitting transfer
requests or being considered for transfer for a period of six (6) months from the date of such
reprimand. In these instances, the Division Commander shall:
C. Officers’ sick leave usage, past performance, disciplinary history (with special emphasis on
sustained untruthfulness allegations), seniority, prior work experience, education and training
will be factors in transfer considerations.
D. Unless an overriding Departmental need exists, all personnel shall be required to serve in the
Field Services Bureau for three (3) years from the date of graduation from the Training
Academy.
A. Applicability
1. This Section will apply only to the transfer of sworn personnel of the rank of Sergeant
and below.
B. Procedures
2. If the position is filled from within the Division, the final resulting vacancy will be
advertised. The Division shall post an announcement, via departmental mail, bulletin
boards, and in roll calls for a period of 10 working days (Monday through Friday)
prior to the selection process to enable all interested personnel to submit a request for
transfer. The announcement shall describe the selection criteria for the position to be
filled.
3. Sworn personnel who are interested in applying for a listed vacancy will submit a
Skills Knowledge Abilities (SKA) form through their Chain of Command. Placing a
request does not guarantee a transfer but will ensure consideration.
4. The supervisors in the chain will evaluate the applicant’s performance, disciplinary
record, and sick leave usage and make a recommendation for transfer or denial based
on his/her evaluation.
5. The respective Division Commander, or their designee, shall conduct oral interviews
in order to select a qualified candidate for the position. These interviews shall be
conducted in such a manner that only essential material is included in the interviews.
7. The final decision on all transfers will be made by the Chief of Police.
A. Employees who are temporarily unable to perform their full duties, but who expect to be able to
return to full duty status in a reasonable period of time, may be eligible for placement in a
restricted duty assignment within their Division.
1. For the purpose of this section, the term “reasonable period of time” applies when an
employee is able to return to full duty status within 10 consecutive workdays.
2. If an employee is not able to return to full duty status within the designated timeframe,
the Division Commander shall forward all documentation pertaining to the employee’s
limitations to the Office of the Chief of Police for review. The Office of the Chief of
Police will determine if the employee meets the criteria for transfer to the
Headquarters Division.
3. All personnel who have been transferred to the Extended Leave Unit as a result of
extended leave and who are temporarily assigned to a restricted duty assignment will
report their presence daily to the Extended Leave Unit Lieutenant in a manner
prescribed by that Lieutenant. Personnel who have been transferred to the Extended
Leave Unit and who are working a restricted duty assignment in another Division will
be shown on the Extended Leave Unit worksheets only.
B. Employees satisfying criteria set forth in this Section may be placed in restricted duty
assignments by their Division Commander, as needed.
1. The Division Commander will clearly define the work to be performed and will ensure
that the assignment does not compromise the officer’s anticipated physical recovery.
c) The Division Commander will ensure that the circumstances surrounding the
initiation or termination of a restricted duty assignment is properly
documented.
A. Any employee who reports that he or she is physically incapable of reporting to work in a
normal duty assignment for an indefinite period of time will be transferred to the Extended
Leave Unit.
b) Catastrophic leave;
2. For the purpose of this Order, the term “indefinite period of time” applies when an
employee is absent from his or her regular duties for more than 10 consecutive
workdays and a return to full status is unknown and/or questionable.
B. Personnel assigned to the Extended Leave Unit will be offered the option of accepting a
restricted or modified duty assignment. The employee has the right to accept or decline modified
duty after an injury. If the employee declines modified duty, he/she must use their available
leave time to cover days lost.
1. Personnel on the Extended Leave Unit will be utilized to assist with manpower
shortages by performing suitable tasks in areas that have identified needs.
2. In an effort to meet the needs of the Department, increase efficiency, and improve
performance; the assignments, duty hours, and days off will be rotated monthly.
C. Whenever a supervisor is notified by an employee that they are physically or mentally incapable
of reporting to work in a normal duty assignment and meets the requirements for assignment to
the Extended Leave Unit, the supervisor shall submit a written recommendation that shall detail
the reason why the employee is no longer capable of performing their job assignment.
1. Should the employee display or indicate any type of emotional or mental distress or
illness, the supervisor shall immediately take possession of the employee’s city owned
weapon(s) and store the weapon(s) pursuant to policy. The Training Division shall be
notified and retrieve the weapon(s) for storage in the Departmental Armory. The
supervisor shall document taking possession of the weapon(s) in his initial evaluation.
3. The employee’s Division Commander will ensure that all documentation is forwarded
to the Office of the Chief of Police for review and implementation.
4. Upon transfer to the Extended Leave Unit, the employee will report to the Extended
Leave Unit Lieutenant who will be the single point of contact for the employee.
6. When it is determined that the employee can return to a “restricted duty” assignment,
the Extended Leave Unit Lieutenant will make the assignment and will monitor each
employee’s performance until release to full duty status.
7. Once the employee is determined able to return to work without limitations, the
Extended Leave Unit Lieutenant will coordinate with the Office of the Chief of Police
to determine the employee’s work assignment and arrange for a transfer to the
appropriate Division.
8. The Chief of Police may, at his discretion, extend a restricted duty assignment to an
officer who has applied to LOPFI for a non-duty disability retirement.
D. Sworn personnel placed on restricted duty or transferred to the Extended Leave Unit because of
extended leave are not permitted to exercise police power, except in extreme emergencies, self-defense
or in the defense of other parties. In addition,
1. Officers placed in restricted duty assignments will not wear a uniform and will report for duty
in appropriate business attire.
2. The Office of the Chief of Police reserves the right to suspend or revoke accouterments
associated with the officer’s original duties, i.e., clothing allowance, city vehicle, etc., while an
officer is in an extended leave or restricted duty status.
3. Any employee assigned to Extended Leave will not be permitted to perform any volunteer
work/activity in which they receive any form of compensation unless approved by the Office of
the Chief of Police.
E. Active Duty
1. When an employee in the armed forces is activated to service either for annual training or any
other official military assignment requiring absence from Departmental duties, the employee
will provide their Chain of Command a copy of the military orders for each assignment. The
military orders will be reviewed at each level of the employee’s chain of command and
forwarded to the Office of the Chief of Police.
2. The Office of the Chief of Police will forward all appropriate military communications, orders,
transfer letters or approved leave requests for such employees to the Administrative Services
Manager who will ensure that proper payroll entries are made.
3. All employees assigned to active military duty in excess of 30 consecutive days, or who
are granted a leave of absence in excess of 30 days for any reason, will be transferred to
the Extended Leave Unit for accountability and tracking. The Extended Leave Unit
Lieutenant will conduct an exit interview with the employee to ensure all appropriate
paperwork has been completed.
a) The Extended Leave Unit Lieutenant, acting as the point of contact for the
agency will ensure the employee is notified of agency news, significant
events and promotions or promotional opportunities.
4. All employees returning from military duty or leaves of absence that are in excess of
30 days will report to the Extended Leave Unit Lieutenant for in processing, including
an interview to ensure all appropriate paperwork has been completed.
a) The returning employee will provide the Extended Leave Unit Lieutenant
with documentation showing their discharge from active military duty.
b) The Extended Leave Unit Lieutenant will ensure that all documentation
pertaining to the employee’s discharge and date of return is forwarded to the
Administrative Services Manager for proper payroll entry.
5. Employees not assigned to the Extended Leave Unit but who have been on military
leave shall provide their Chain of Command with the appropriate discharge
documentation. The Division Commander shall ensure that all documentation along
with the employee’s return date is forwarded to the Administrative Services Manager
for payroll entry.
F. Exception-Personnel of the rank of Captain or Assistant Chief, who meet the guidelines for
transfer to the Extended Leave Unit, will continue to report to their appropriate supervisor in a
manner prescribed by that supervisor, in accordance with the Department’s sick leave policy.
A. Unless an overriding Departmental need exists, all recruit officers will be assigned to the Field
Services Bureau upon graduation from the Training Academy.
1. Recruits successfully finishing the Field Training Program will be assigned to unfilled
vacancies.
B. The Field Services Bureau Commander will be responsible for personnel assignments within
and between the various Field Services Divisions. Assignment of civilian employees and sworn
personnel above the rank of Sergeant will be made at the discretion of the Chief of Police.
C. For the purpose of this section, assignment is defined as the movement of personnel within a
Field Services Division, particularly assignment to a specific shift, squad or days off. The term
also includes the movement of personnel from one Field Services Division to another, i.e.,
Downtown, Southwest, or Northwest.
D. The Field Services Bureau Commander will consider the distribution of experience when
assigning or re-assigning personnel to a particular shift, squad or days off.
1. Officers desiring assignment to another Field Services Division, shift, squad or days
off may submit a request on an officer’s report through their Chain of Command.
Placing a request does not guarantee re-assignment, but will ensure consideration
when an open position becomes available.
2. The officer’s report will be forwarded to the Field Services Bureau Commander for
placement on a re-assignment list.
3. Consideration for re-assignment will be made not only on the basis of seniority but
also on the availability of a vacant position and the needs of the department.
E. Patrol workload factors will be monitored and assignments may be adjusted as necessary to
reflect these workload factors.
1. The distribution of personnel among the geographical Field Services Divisions and among the
shifts may be adjusted. Additionally, squad size and days-off configurations may be changed to
improve patrol deployment.
2. Assignments will be reviewed on at least an annual basis and, if adjustments are deemed
appropriate by the Field Services Bureau Commander, a patrol “sign-up” will be conducted.
Generally, there will be an annual sign-up, which will be conducted approximately two months
in advance of the beginning of the first pay period in January (when the sign-up will become
effective).
3. The Field Services Bureau Commander will determine the number of senior officers or officers
with specialized training which will be assigned to each shift and squad. Seniority will then be
given consideration as officers bid for positions.
F. When the Office of the Chief of Police determines that it is necessary to make any changes to
assignment of employees, shift and/or days-off during this process or at any other time, the Office of the
Chief of Police may make such assignments and such decisions will be final.
I. Purpose
A. This Order establishes the requirements for personal appearance of employees and the proper
wearing of departmentally issued or approved uniforms and accessories.
B. Employees will wear only those articles of uniform clothing and accessories as authorized in this
Order. Uniforms will be issued by the Department.
C. The personal appearance and grooming standards for all employees are specified in this Order.
II. General
A. The Chief of Police will approve all changes in the police uniform.
C. Officers may only wear their uniforms while enroute to or from or during any scheduled on-duty
assignment, specifically authorized off-duty employment, subpoenaed court appearance in which
an officer expects to testify on behalf of the city or prosecution for criminal cases, or where such
uniform is specially authorized by the Office of the Chief of Police.
A. Scope
1. This section establishes the structural and operational guidelines of the Little Rock Police
Department Uniform and Equipment Committee.
2. The Little Rock Police Department Uniform and Equipment Committee serves as an
advisory committee making recommendations to the Assistant Chief of Police in charge
of the Training Division for changes in uniforms and equipment.
1. The Assistant Chief of Police, in charge of the Training Division, shall appoint the Little
Rock Police Department Uniform and Equipment Committee, which will serve for a
period of two years. The committee will be comprised of the following:
C. Committee members are appointed for a two-year term by the Assistant Chief of Police, in charge
of the Training Division. Should a member wish to be released prior to the end of their term, they
shall submit a letter through their chain of command making such request.
D. Should any member miss two consecutive meetings, the committee chairman shall request his
removal and immediate appointment of replacement.
E. The committee shall meet twice a year to discuss issues related to the uniforms and equipment of
departmental personnel.
1. Any officer that would like to present a recommendation to the committee should do so in
writing and forward it to a committee member or the Training Division Lieutenant.
F. The committee chairman shall prepare a written report after each meeting, which will be forwarded
to the Assistant Chief of Police, in charge of the Training Division and the Chief of Police.
A. Males in Uniform
1. The hair must be combed in an orderly manner and maintained under all but the most
adverse conditions.
2. The hairstyle shall present a tapered appearance on the sides and back. No style or
texture of hair shall be permitted to extend outward in excess of one (1) inch. The “Block
Cut” is permitted as long as a tapered appearance is maintained. The length and/or bulk of
the hair shall not present a ragged, unkempt or extreme appearance and shall not interfere
with the wearing of the uniform cap.
3. When combed, the hair length shall not touch the top of the shirt collar, the front shall not
protrude from under the front of the uniform cap and the length on the sides shall be no
lower than the middle of the ear.
4. Wigs are acceptable, provided they meet the requirements set out above.
5. Sideburns shall be neatly trimmed, tapered and shall not extend below the bottom of the
earlobe. Sideburns shall not be flared or wider at the bottom than their natural width at the
top. Sideburns shall end in a clean-shaven, horizontal line.
6. Mustaches must be trimmed and shall not be allowed to grow or hang below the corner of
the mouth nor shall they be twisted or curled at the ends.
B. Females in Uniform
1. Females in uniform shall wear their hair in styles which permit the proper wearing of the
uniform cap.
2. The hair must be neat and shall not extend below the bottom of the shirt collar. The
grooming style must be maintained under all but the most adverse conditions.
3. Hairstyles such as pigtails, ponytails, braids and large bouffants are not acceptable.
4. Wigs are acceptable as long as they meet the prescribed requirements for hairstyles.
C. Non-sworn uniformed personnel (except Reserve Officers) will wear a light gray or white shirt as a
part of their uniform.
1. Sworn officers who are authorized to wear civilian clothing shall adhere to the hairstyle
regulations prescribed for uniform personnel.
2. Personnel who are assigned to special duties that require them to have hairstyles different
from those required for uniform personnel must receive approval from their Division
Commander to deviate from this General Order.
1. Uniformed employees may wear a wristwatch and/or identification bracelet. Only one
ring per hand is permitted. (A wedding set is considered as one ring.) Necklaces or other
decorative jewelry are prohibited.
2. Earrings, one in each earlobe, may only be worn by females, providing the earrings do not
hang below the earlobe. Earrings must be identical. Personnel who are assigned to
special duties that require them to deviate from this policy must have permission from
their Division Commander. The Department will not be liable for the loss or damage of
earrings.
3. Items used by female officers to hold their hair in place shall be concealed as much as
possible and shall be of a color and style that blends with the hair. Decorative items such
as ribbons are prohibited.
F. Make-up for Female Employees - The use of make-up by sworn female employees, whether in
uniform or plain clothes, shall be conservative. This does not imply a plain look, but is meant to
eliminate gaudiness.
G. Body Piercing - With the exception of pierced ears (see section IV. E. 2), body piercing of the
face, head, tongue, mouth or any other body part that is not concealed by the authorized uniform or
plain clothes is prohibited for wear by any personnel when representing the Little Rock Police
Department.
H. Dental Ornamentation – The use of gold, platinum, silver or other veneer caps for the purpose of
ornamentation is prohibited. Teeth whether natural, capped or veneered will not be ornamented
with designs, jewels, initials, etc.
1. Any tattoo, body art, intentional body mutilation, or branding that displays any design,
logo or wording will be regulated in the following manner:
b) Tattoos, body art, intentional body mutilation, and branding of the head, face,
neck, and hands are prohibited.
(2) Foreign objects inserted under the skin to create a design, effect or
pattern;
(3) Enlarged or stretched out holes in the earlobes (other than normal
piercing holes); and,
2. Personnel with an existing tattoo, body art, intentional body mutilation, branding or
scarring which would be visible with the wearing of the uniform, shall have the following
options:
b) If in business attire, the employee will wear suitable long sleeved clothing; or
c) If the tattoo is on the leg(s), the employee will wear authorized full-length,
uniform or business attire pants; or
d) Cover the surface of the tattoo, etc. with a skin-tone bandage/patch not to exceed
4”x6”. (No more than one bandage/patch may be worn on an individual’s arm or
leg.); or
e) Wear a cover-up sleeve (TatJacket) that will completely conceal and cover the
tattoo, etc. The sleeve should be of a color as close to the employee’s skin
tone as possible; or
A. Employees of the Major Crimes Division, the Special Investigations Division, and any other
employees/units designated by the Chief of Police shall receive a quarterly clothing allowance.
B. Certain employees (e.g. property personnel and Training Division personnel) may wear work
clothing appropriate to the nature of their assignment. Work clothing shall not be considered as
uniform and shall not be worn in lieu of the regulation uniform when such is required.
1. Class “A” Uniform will consist of the long sleeve uniform shirt and tie. This will be the
dress uniform and shall be worn for official ceremonies, funerals or when directed by a
Division Commander and/or the Office of the Chief of Police.
2. Standard Duty Uniform – The Standard Duty Uniform will consist of the short or long
sleeve shirt without a tie. This will be the standard uniform issued to all sworn personnel
and worn when the officer is working in a uniform assignment.
3. A complete uniform shall be worn when required and no item of the uniform shall be
worn except as part of the complete uniform.
4. All uniforms worn by Department personnel shall present a clean and professional
appearance. The Standard Duty Uniform, Class A Uniform, and BDU uniforms will be
pressed or laundered to present a pressed appearance at all times when worn.
B. No substitutions for uniform equipment shall be allowed unless specifically approved by the Chief
of Police.
A. Accessories for personnel below the rank of Sergeant shall be silver in color and accessories for
supervisory personnel shall be gold in color.
B. All uniforms and equipment referenced in this Order are issued by the Department unless
otherwise specified.
C. Uniform Cap
1. The uniform cap shall be worn level on the head when viewed from the front or the back
and the front tip of the bill shall be level with the top of the eyebrows when viewed from
the side.
2. The uniform cap will be optional except when worn with the Class “A” uniform or
directed by a supervisor.
D. Ties
E. T-Shirts
1. A white or black T-shirt may be worn with the winter and summer duty uniform.
3. The Training Division will maintain the specifications for the optional turtleneck.
Officers who purchase the optional turtleneck must ensure that it meets the Department’s
established specifications.
F. Shirts
1. All buttons on the uniform shirt shall be buttoned at all times except the shirt collar button
on the duty uniform.
2. Sleeves shall not be rolled up or turned under on the long sleeve uniform shirt.
4. Field Training Officers (FTO) shall wear FTO insignia on each sleeve.
G. Trousers
1. Trousers shall be no shorter than two (2) inches above the top of the sole of the footwear
at the heel and no longer than the top of the heel when standing erect.
H. Socks
2. White socks may be worn for health reasons when supported by a physician’s statement.
I. Shoes
1. Shoes worn with the uniform must be black smooth-grained leather or similar synthetic
material having an acceptable likeness to leather.
2. They may be low-cut, high-cut, or high top and must have black stitching and black
leather or synthetic soles.
3. The heel, measured from the top of the sole to the bottom of the heel, shall not exceed l
1/2 inches in height.
4. Shoes shall be plain-toed. (Loafers, wing tips, tennis shoes or shoes with ornamental
designs, buckles or straps are not acceptable.)
J. Boots
1. Motorcycle officers may wear black boots of a style and design approved by the Chief of
Police.
2. Wellington-type boots that are black and of smooth-grained leather or similar synthetic
material having a likeness to leather may be worn by uniformed personnel.
3. The heels, measured from the top of the sole to the bottom of the heel, shall be a
maximum of 1 5/8 inches.
4. The toe style shall be either the round or medium round style and all stitching shall be
black.
5. Trouser cuffs must be worn outside the boot tops and there shall not be any ornamental
straps, stitching or buckles on the boot.
K. Helmets
2. Officers riding motorcycles off-duty while wearing the police uniform shall be required to
wear a white protective helmet similar to those issued by the Department.
L. Jackets
1. All personnel shall wear the L.R.P.D. shoulder patch on the left shoulder.
4. Field Training Officers (FTO) shall wear FTO insignia on each sleeve.
6. Lieutenants and above shall wear their rank insignia on each shoulder.
8. The Training Division will maintain the specifications for the optional nylon windbreaker.
Officers who purchase the optional jacket must ensure that it meets the Department’s
established specifications.
M. Rain Gear
1. Uniform personnel shall wear only the rain gear issued by the Department.
2. The cap cover and coat shall be worn at all times when conditions necessitate.
3. The cape and leggings are optional; each officer shall be responsible for all parts of the
rain gear issued to them.
4. Rain gear shall be stored and carried in the issued carrying bag. (Rain gear shall not be
stored until it has dried.)
N. Leather Goods - The following leather goods shall be worn and are the only items authorized to be
worn with the Police Uniform.
1. One Sam Browne style belt, finished in a basket weave pattern, and a rectangular metal
buckle or Velcro fastener.
2. The following holsters are approved for the Glock 22: Don Hume Tiger model H738,
Safariland model 295 and the Safariland model 070, basket weave design.
3. One or two open style handcuff cases or the closed cover case with snap or Velcro
closure, basket weave design. Officers may, at their own expense, carry a second set of
handcuffs and a second handcuff case, but both sets of handcuffs must be stored in a case.
Wearing handcuffs without a case will not be allowed.
5. One two (2) clip .40-caliber magazine carrier, basket weave design.
8. Key rings, knives, and similar items shall not be worn attached to the Sam Browne belt.
9. The Leatherman all-purpose tools may be worn on the duty belt in a basket weave case
purchased at the officer’s expense.
10. The wearing of leather gloves with the police uniform is acceptable during cold inclement
weather with the long sleeve uniform shirt only. Officers may wear departmentally
approved gloves for officer safety purposes with the short sleeve uniform shirt. These
options consist of the following and may be purchased at officer’s own expense:
a) Street Guard SGK 100: 9oz, 100% Kevlar interlock liner with a neoprene and
nylon spandex top, which provides cut resistance material, and limited liquid
protection.
a) Neoprene ear warmers may be worn with or without the uniform cap during
cold and inclement weather.
b) Uniform personnel shall wear only the neoprene ear warmer issued by the
Department.
c) A “midnight blue” knit cap with the “LRPD” logo embroidered on the front
will be issued and may be worn in cold or inclement weather. No other type of
hat, cap, or ear warmer shall be worn.
a) Personnel may purchase a tactical radio lapel microphone and ear piece to
wear with the Departmental issued radio.
1. The Training Division will issue two (2) reflective neon yellow LRPD wrist
bands to all officers in an effort to assist identification of a sworn law
enforcement officer(s) in plain clothes and to help prevent blue on blue
shootings involving plainclothes officers while on duty or off duty. The
departmentally issued wristbands can be used at the scene of an incident to
assist in the identification of plainclothes officers by other responding officers
or civilians. Plainclothes officers involved in a situation where officer
identification is likely to be difficult and where its use will not compromise a
covert operation can place the wristband on their dominant gun hand as soon as
possible after an incident. When responding to a crime scene or an incident in
which the possibility of danger exists, plainclothes officers, either on duty or off
duty, can affix their reflective LRPD wristband to their shooting wrist prior to
arrival if practical.
3. As an officer safety issue, officers will not wear the wristband in a visible
manner on their person unless they are responding or actually involved in an
event while in plainclothes. Officers in an on duty plainclothes assignment are
encouraged to have an ID band on their person or readily available. Officers
off duty shall ensure they make every effort to have access to the wristband
when they are armed in plain clothes. Officers are encouraged to carry one (1)
ID band on their person and one (1) in their private vehicle.
A. Non-Uniformed civilian employees of the City of Little Rock must present a professional
appearance to effectively relate to all segments of the populations they serve. The Chief of Police
will establish appearance regulations which shall apply to all personnel.
1. All male and female employees shall wear conservative, moderate, business-like
attire. The attire shall be clean and well-maintained. For females this includes
dresses, dress skirts, pant suits, or pants and a business top. Male employees shall
wear dress trousers, shirt and tie, except when directed otherwise.
2. In compliance with this directive, the following are examples of unacceptable attire:
torn, patched/faded clothing, halter tops, tube tops, tank tops, low-cut blouses, see
through or mesh clothing, muscle shirts, strapless sun dresses, shorts, jeans or denim
attire, skirts more than five (5) inches above the knee, shirts with slogans or large
letter advertising, shirts that allow midriff to show, sweat suits/warm-up suits, sweat
pants, and flip flops.
1. This Policy establishes the requirements for personal appearance of uniformed civilian
employees and the proper wearing of departmentally issued or approved uniforms and
accessories.
2. Employees will wear only those articles of uniform clothing and accessories as authorized
in this Order. All uniforms will be issued by the Department.
3. The personal appearance and grooming standards for uniformed civilian employees are
specified in this Order.
4. The Chief of Police will approve all changes in the civilian uniform.
6. Employees may only wear their uniforms while en route to, from or during any scheduled
on-duty assignment, subpoenaed court appearance in which an employee expects to testify
on behalf of the city or prosecution for criminal cases, or where such uniform is specially
authorized by the Office of the Chief of Police.
7. Males in Uniform
a) The hair must be combed in an orderly manner and maintained under all but
the most adverse conditions.
b) The hairstyle shall present a tapered appearance on the sides and back. No
style or texture of hair shall be permitted to extend outward in excess of one
(1) inch. The “Block Cut” is permitted as long as a tapered appearance is
maintained. The length and/or bulk of the hair shall not present a ragged,
unkept or extreme appearance.
c) When combed, the hair length shall not touch the top of the shirt collar, and
the length on the sides shall be no lower than the middle of the ear.
d) Wigs are acceptable, provided they meet the requirements set out above.
e) Sideburns shall be neatly trimmed, tapered and shall not extend below the
bottom of the earlobe. Sideburns shall not be flared or wider at the bottom
than their natural width at the top. Sideburns shall end in a clean, horizontal
line.
f) Mustaches must be trimmed and shall not be allowed to grow or hang below
the corner of the mouth nor shall they be twisted or curled at the ends. Beards
will not be permitted.
8. Females in Uniform
a) Females in uniform shall wear their hair in styles, which project a conservative
professional image.
b) The hair must be neat and shall not extend below the bottom of the shirt collar.
The grooming style must be maintained under all but the most adverse
conditions.
c) Hairstyles such as pigtails, ponytails, braids and large bouffants are not
acceptable.
d) Wigs are acceptable as long as they meet the prescribed requirements for
hairstyles.
b) Earrings, one in each earlobe, may be worn by females, providing the earrings
do not hang below the earlobe. Earrings must be identical. Personnel who are
assigned to special duties that require them to deviate from this policy must
have permission from their Division Commander. The Department will not
be liable for the loss or damage of earrings.
c) Items used by female employees to hold their hair in place shall be concealed
as much as possible and shall be of a color and style that blends with the hair.
Decorative items such as ribbons are prohibited.
10. Employees attending or instructing any Department training class shall not wear clothing
with written messages or symbols that convey any humorous, political, or social idea.
a) Class “A” Uniform will consist of the long sleeve uniform shirt and tie. This
will be the dress uniform and shall be worn for official ceremonies, funerals or
when directed by a Division Commander and/or the Office of the Chief of
Police.
b) A complete uniform shall be worn when required and no item of the uniform
shall be worn except as part of the complete uniform.
12. Accessories for supervisory personnel shall be gold in color all others shall be silver in
color.
13. All uniforms and equipment referenced in this Order are issued by the Department unless
otherwise specified.
14. Ties shall be worn as part of the Class “A” dress uniform.
15. A white or black T-shirt may be worn with the winter and summer duty uniform.
16. Shirts
a) All buttons on the uniform shirt shall be buttoned at all times except the shirt
collar button on the duty uniform.
b) Sleeves shall not be rolled up or turned under on the long sleeve uniform shirt.
17. Trousers
a) Trousers shall be no shorter than two (2) inches above the top of the sole of
the footwear at the heel and no longer than the top of the heel when standing
erect.
a) White socks may be worn for health reasons when supported by a physician’s
statement.
19. Shoes
a) Shoes worn with the uniform will be purchased by the employee, and must be
black smooth-grained leather or similar synthetic material having an
acceptable likeness to leather.
b) They may be low-cut, high-cut, or high-top and must have black stitching and
black leather or synthetic soles.
c) The heel, measured from the top of the sole to the bottom of the heel, shall not
exceed l 1/2 inches in height.
d) Shoes shall be plain-toed. (Loafers, wing tips, tennis shoes or shoes with
ornamental designs, buckles or straps are not acceptable.)
20. Jackets
a) All personnel shall wear the L.R.P.D. shoulder unit patch on the left shoulder.
c) The badge (where appropriate) shall be worn over the left breast.
21. The wearing of leather gloves with the civilian uniform is acceptable during cold
inclement weather with the long sleeve uniform shirt only. Employees may wear
departmentally approved gloves for safety purposes with the short sleeve uniform shirt.
These options consist of the following and may be purchased at officer’s own expense:
a) Street Guard SGK 100: 9oz, 100% Kevlar interlock liner with a neoprene and
nylon spandex top, which provides cut resistance material, and limited liquid
protection.
a) Neoprene ear warmers may be worn with or without the uniform cap during
cold and inclement weather.
b) Uniform personnel shall wear only the neoprene ear warmer issued by the
Department.
c) A “midnight blue” knit cap with the “LRPD” logo embroidered on the front
will be issued and may be worn in cold or inclement weather. No other type of
hat, cap, or ear warmer shall be worn.
(1) Collar brass shall consist of the letters L.R.P.D. and shall be worn on
each side of the collar on all shirts by all civilian employees.
b) The collar brass on winter duty, summer duty and Class “A” uniform shirts
shall be positioned one-inch back from the front edge of the collar, centered
and parallel with the top edge of the collar.
c) The Little Rock Police Department unit patch shall be worn below the seam of
the left shoulder of the work jacket and all shirts.
d) All patches proposed for use should be submitted through the Chain of
Command and approved by the Office of the Chief of Police prior to use.
e) A service star for each five years of service and/or a bar for each single year of
service may be worn on the lower left sleeve of the jackets and the long sleeve
uniform shirt.
(1) Nameplates shall be worn over the right pocket of all shirts.
(2) The reflective vest shall be worn at all times after dark, when
performing a traffic related task.
(1) All clothing will be clean prior to being returned to the Training
Division. No replacement will be made prior to the requested item
being returned as described.
(2) The Training Division Quartermaster will order the replacement item
and notify the employee when the item(s) are available for pick up. The
Quartermaster will stock a limited amount of clothing items to be issued
in emergencies on a case by case basis.
C. Civilian employees shall carry their identification card, identifying them as a members of the Little
Rock Police Department at all times while upon police premises, except when required to
surrender such by the Code of Conduct for Civilian Employees.
D. Improper or negligent handling of or negligent damage to city property is a violation of the Code
of Conduct for Civilian Employees.
E. Civilian employees who have lost, damaged, or destroyed any equipment issued to them by the
Department shall immediately report such to their immediate supervisor. The employee may be
required to make restitution if the loss or damage is the result of negligence on the part of the
employee.
F. Civilian employees shall promptly report the need for repairs of any city owned property issued,
used or possessed by them to their immediate supervisor.
G. Civilian employees shall not alter, repair, or in any way change, add to, or remove any parts or
accessories of any city owned property without permission from the Chief of Police.
A. Uniform accessories for personnel below the rank of Sergeant shall be silver in color and accessory
items for supervisory personnel shall be gold in color.
1. Badges
b) Department issued cloth badges will be worn on the nylon work jacket.
2. Rank Insignia
a) Sergeants shall wear the cloth chevrons on each sleeve of all shirts and jackets.
b) Lieutenants and above shall wear their rank insignia on the collar of all shirts.
3. Collar Brass
a) Collar brass shall consist of the letters L.R.P.D. and shall be worn on each side
of the collar on all shirts by patrol officers and sergeants.
b) The collar brass on winter duty, summer duty and Class “A” uniform shirts
shall be positioned one-inch back from the front edge of the collar, centered
and parallel with the top edge of the collar.
4. Sleeve Patches
a) The Little Rock Police Department patch shall be worn below the seam of the
left shoulder of the nylon work jacket and all shirts.
(2) All patches proposed for use should be submitted through the Chain of
Command and approved by the Office of the Chief of Police prior to
use.
b) A service star for each five years of service and/or a bar for each single year of
service may be worn on the lower left sleeve of the jackets and the long sleeve
uniform shirt.
5. Name Plates
b) Officers may purchase their own body armor, but it must meet or exceed the
Department issued vests.
c) The Training Division will maintain the approved specifications for body
armor.
d) All uniformed officers will be required to wear their soft body armor at all
times while assigned to field enforcement duties, except those officers
specifically excluded by the Office of the Chief of Police.
f) Officers are responsible for maintaining their body armor in good condition.
Damage, loss, or theft will be reported to a supervisor.
7. Reflective Vests
b) The reflective vest and whistle will be worn whenever an officer is assigned a
traffic control function or exposed to a traffic hazard (e.g., traffic accident
scene, low visibility situation, etc.).
c) The reflective vest shall be worn at all times after dark, when performing a
traffic related task on or off duty.
A. Items issued by the Department to officers in specialized police positions (e.g., Tactical Response
Unit, Canine Unit, Training, etc.) are designated as special-use items.
B. Specifications for these items shall be defined by the Division Commander with final approval
from the Office of the Chief of Police.
C. Nylon duty gear issued by the Department may be worn only by officers in specialized police
positions (S.W.A.T., S.I.D., Training, K-9, Bicycle and walk beat officers) and only while wearing
a specialized uniform, (B.D.U., camo clothing, etc.) authorized by the Office of the Chief of
Police.
D. Ultra Sensor facemasks may be worn only by bicycle officers during inclement weather, and only
while riding their bicycle with helmet.
E. Special use items are authorized during times of special circumstances only and are not to be worn
in lieu of the departmental uniform.
1. Training Division personnel may wear special use items on the firing range, driving range
and in field training situations.
2. In tactical or training situations authorized units may wear special use items. As soon as
practical at the conclusion of the tactical or training situation these officers will change to
their normal duty uniform, if returning to regular duty. The use of the tactical holsters
will be restricted to tactical and training situations only. At the conclusion of the tactical
or training situation, the tactical holster will be replaced with approved regular nylon duty
gear or leather gear.
3. When an officer receives a forthwith order from any court he will respond to the order in
the uniform which he is wearing.
A. Members of the Department who have been awarded the following commendation(s) are
authorized to wear the ribbon bar(s) on the uniform shirt only. The ribbon bar(s) shall be worn
centered on the right pocket, one-half (1/2) inch below the nameplate. The top of the ribbon bar(s)
shall be even with the top pocket seam.
1. Medal of Valor
2. Medal of Merit
4. Lifesaving Award
B. In the event that an employee should receive more than one award, he may wear all the ribbon bars
associated with the awards.
1. The ribbon bars shall be worn in a horizontal row positioned as described in subsection
IX.A. above, with the ribbon bar representing the highest level of award positioned to the
right.
2. No more than three ribbon bars shall be worn on each horizontal row and will be arranged
in the order of precedence listed above. Employees who have been awarded four or more
ribbon bars will fill the lower rows with the three lowest precedence awards progressing
up with awards of higher precedence.
C. Should an employee receive the same award more than once, only one ribbon bar for that level of
award will be worn. The ribbon bar issued for subsequent awards will denote the number of times
the employee has received the award.
D. Employees are permitted to wear the ribbon bar(s) from the date issued until the date of
termination of active police service.
A. Any officer in need of a uniform replacement item shall report to the Training Division Clothing
Officer and bring the item to be replaced.
B. All clothing will be clean prior to being returned to the Training Division. (No replacement will
be made prior to the requested item being returned as described.)
C. The Training Division Quartermaster will order the replacement item and notify the officer when
the item(s) are available for pick up. The Quartermaster will stock a limited amount of clothing
items to be issued in emergencies on a case-by-case basis.
A. Personal Vehicle: Assigned departmental equipment (gun, radio, laptop, badge, ID, etc.) shall not
be left in the passenger compartment of an officer’s personally owned vehicle at anytime when the
vehicle is unattended. Storage of police guns, radios, and badges in an officer’s personal vehicle
overnight or for any extended period of time is prohibited.
B. Unmarked Department Vehicle (Including SID Lease and Undercover Vehicles): Officers utilizing
or assigned an unmarked or undercover vehicle will not leave assigned departmental equipment in
the passenger compartment of the vehicle when the vehicle is unattended with the exception of
emergency circumstances. Even in the event of rapid exit from a vehicle under emergency
situations, the vehicle and contents shall be secured as soon as practical. Equipment may be
secured in the vehicle trunk if the remote trunk access in the passenger compartment is disabled.
Storage of police guns, radios, and badges in an unmarked department vehicle overnight or for any
extended period of time is prohibited.
C. Marked Department Vehicle: contain thousands of dollars of police equipment which is mounted
securely to the vehicle. Officers utilizing or assigned a marked department vehicle will not leave
assigned departmental equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle when the vehicle is
unattended with the exception of emergency circumstances unless the officer properly locks the
vehicle or can maintain an unobstructed view of the vehicle. Even in the event of rapid exit from a
vehicle under emergency situations, the vehicle and contents shall be secured as soon as practical.
For officers assigned a take-home marked vehicle equipment not permanently mounted in the
vehicle shall not be left in the passenger compartment, but may be secured in the vehicle trunk if
the remote trunk access in the passenger compartment is disabled. Storage of police guns, radios,
and badges in an unmarked department vehicle overnight or for any extended period of time is
prohibited.
D. Officers should employ common sense regarding the security and protection of their equipment.
Officers found negligent may be required to reimburse the Department for the cost of replacing the
equipment. The officer may also face appropriate disciplinary action.
I. Purpose
A. The purpose of this Order is to specify firearms and ammunition which are authorized by the
Little Rock Police Department.
B. This Order also governs the handling and training associated with the use of firearms.
A. The only authorized on-duty or off-duty firearms are those issued by the Department or those
authorized weapons inspected and approved by the Training Division, based on established
Departmental criteria approved by the Chief of Police.
B. A record of all weapons approved by the Department for official use will be maintained by a
Training Division Armorer. These records shall include:
2. Owner;
1. Officers shall carry a Department-issued .40 caliber semi-automatic pistol as the on-duty
service weapon.
2. Service weapons will be carried with a round in the chamber and the magazine fully
loaded.
4. Shotguns
D. All Department issued sidearms shall be carried in an approved holster (unless otherwise
designated in these orders) or shall be stored in a designated secure area while on duty or
working in approved off-duty employment.
E. Officers on duty in plain clothes shall wear their weapon in a holster and in a manner that will
not attract attention or be open to the view of the public outside Departmental offices. Non-
uniformed officers shall wear holsters approved by the Division Commander or issued by the
Training Division.
F. Undercover officers may wear their weapon concealed, without the use of a holster.
I. Handgun Mounted Tactical Flashlights – flashlights attached to the duty pistol will meet the
following requirements and restrictions. The decision to carry a handgun mounted flashlight is
strictly voluntary; officers wishing to attach a tactical flashlight to their duty weapon must
purchase the holster and flashlight at their own expense and attend a mandatory training class on
their own time.
1. Approved holsters are the Safariland 6360 (Basket weave-Duty), Safariland 6378
(Detective–Paddle), Safariland 6377 (Detective–Belt), Safariland (Nylon), Safariland
6305 (Tactical).
2. Approved weapon mounted flashlights are the Streamlight M3, Streamlight TLR-1,
Surefire X200, and the Surefire X300.
3. Officer will not attach a flashlight to their duty weapon for on duty or off duty use unless
they are wearing one of the approved holsters, and have completed the required training.
4. Officers must attend a mandatory training class presented by the Little Rock Police
Department Training Division prior to the use or installation of a handgun mounted
tactical flashlight. Officers attending this training must be off duty and will not receive
overtime or compensatory time for attending this training.
5. After each training class, the Training Division will send each Division Commander an
updated master list of personnel who are authorized to carry a handgun mounted tactical
flashlight. The Division Commander will make this list available to all supervisors under
their command.
a) Officers will not consider the flashlight mounted to their duty weapon as a
replacement for their handheld flashlight. Therefore, all typical illumination
needs should be accomplished with the handheld flashlight (examining VINs,
Driver’s license, individuals, etc.).
b) Officers must consider General Order 303 Use of Force with regards to the
drawing and display of their duty weapon. Officers must also be aware of
“lasering” or pointing their weapon at an unintentional person or object for the
purpose of illuminating the area.
c) Officers will unload their duty weapon prior to attaching and detaching the
flashlight to their duty weapon.
III. Ammunition
A. The Department will provide all ammunition for training and on-duty use for all departmentally
owned service weapons and only departmentally issued ammunition will be carried in these
weapons. Ammunition will not be modified.
f) Any ammunition that the Training Division Armorer deems to be unsuitable for
duty use.
B. All ammunition used in carbine rifles, secondary, and off-duty weapons must be approved by the
Training Division Armorer and conform to Departmental ammunition guidelines.
A. Officers may carry an approved weapon off duty, but will exercise discretion as to when and
where it is worn. All sworn personnel will qualify at least annually with their approved off-duty
weapon. All approvals shall be conditional upon annual re-qualification.
1. Any display or use of an off-duty weapon will be governed by the same regulations that
apply to on-duty officers.
3. Prior to carrying any non-issue weapon during off-duty hours, officers shall have such
weapons approved through the Chain of Command and the Office of the Chief of Police.
4. Officers are authorized to carry their on-duty weapon while off-duty, but as an alternative,
they may be authorized three other departmentally approved off-duty weapons, but may
carry only one at any time. An approved off-duty weapon may be carried as a secondary
weapon as long as it meets all other requirements for a secondary firearm. While on-duty,
the issued Glock .40 or 9mm will be carried as the primary weapon.
a) The Training Division shall maintain a current list of all weapons approved for
off-duty use.
b) The Training Division will maintain all other records pertaining to the selection
of, qualification with, and authorization to carry off-duty weapons.
5. Officers shall not make modifications to off-duty weapons after approval. Any repairs
will require that the weapon be re-submitted to the Training Division for inspection.
6. This Order should not be construed to restrict the legitimate possession and use of
sporting or recreational firearms.
A. Officers may carry one approved secondary firearm in conjunction with and as a back up to the
officer’s primary departmentally issued or approved firearm.
B. The secondary firearm is to be viewed only as a weapon of last resort and the use of a secondary
firearm will be limited to those instances where an officer’s use of deadly force is authorized
under this General Order and the officer’s primary firearm has been:
1. Lost, stolen, or rendered inoperable during the course of the specific incident authorizing
the use of deadly force;
2. Exhausted of ammunition under circumstances which clearly limit the officer’s ability to
immediately reload; or,
3. When an act of an assailant(s) prevents the officer from being able to employ his/her
primary weapon in a situation where deadly force is authorized in General Orders. (For
example, when an officer is being disarmed or is in the process of being disarmed by
assailant[s]).
C. Secondary firearms are not limited by system (i.e., revolver, semi-automatic, or derringer) and
may be of any standard caliber not to exceed .40 calibers for semi-automatics and .38 calibers
for all others. No magnum above .22 cal. will be authorized.
D. Ammunition for secondary firearms will conform to the same guidelines as departmentally
issued ammunition.
F. Officers electing to carry a secondary firearm shall comply with the following procedures prior
to actually bearing the firearm:
1. The secondary firearm and the ammunition for the firearm will be submitted to the
Training Division for inspection.
a) The Training Staff Armorer shall establish that the firearm is safe, functional and
in good repair, and that the firearm and ammunition is in compliance with this
Order.
b) The Training Staff Armorer will, upon approval of the firearm and ammunition,
complete a Secondary Weapon Authorization Card and will return the firearm,
remaining ammunition, and authorization card to the officer. The authorization
card shall record the firearm description, serial number, ammunition type and
confirmation that an N.C.I.C. check has been made on the firearm.
d) Each officer shall qualify with his/her secondary firearm on the range under the
supervision of a Training Division Firearms Instructor to ensure the weapon is
working properly and that the officer is familiar with how the weapon functions.
Officers are required to furnish their own ammunition. All approvals shall be
conditional upon annual re-qualification.
2. The officer will then submit the secondary firearm, ammunition, and authorization card to
his/her Section/Shift or Watch Commander (Lieutenant). The Section/Shift or Watch
Commander shall satisfy himself/herself that the officer fully understands the limitations
on the use of the secondary firearm, that the officer has prepared a suitable manner for
carrying the secondary firearm, and that the authorization card is in order. The
Section/Shift or Watch Commander will sign the authorization card and forward it to the
Training Division.
3. The Training Division shall maintain the Secondary Firearm Authorization Cards in a
secure file.
a) The Training Division shall maintain a current list of all weapons approved as
secondary weapons.
b) The Training Division will maintain all other records pertaining to the selection
of, qualification with, and authorization to carry secondary weapons.
4. Training Division Armorer and/or the Section/Shift or Watch Commander may disallow
any weapon or ammunition which they determine does not comply with this General
Order.
5. Only one secondary firearm will be authorized for an officer at any given time. In the
event that an officer who is authorized to carry a secondary firearm wishes to carry a
different secondary firearm, the new weapon will be submitted to the inspection process
described in this subsection and, upon approval, the previously authorized weapon will be
removed from service and such shall be noted on the authorization card. An officer will
carry only the one currently authorized secondary weapon.
G. Once an officer has been authorized to carry a particular secondary firearm, he shall carry that
secondary firearm only in the prescribed manner whenever he is on-duty. While secondary
firearms are optional, they will be subject to inspection at anytime by any police supervisor.
H. The authorized secondary firearm may be carried in the prescribed manner whenever the officer
is off-duty or working in an off-duty capacity and is armed with a departmentally approved or
issued firearm.
I. In the event that an officer discharges a secondary firearm, unintentionally or intentionally, all
investigative and reporting procedures established by these General Orders shall apply.
J. Officers who wish to carry a secondary firearm must provide the weapon, carrying mechanism,
and all required departmentally approved ammunition at their own expense.
A. Officers desiring to carry the carbine rifle must submit a request on an officer’s letter (5600-02)
through their chain of command to the Office of the Chief of Police for approval. Once
approved, an officer must complete the basic carbine rifle training course at the Training
Division prior to being permitted to carry the carbine rifle. Officers must have one year of
service with the Little Rock Police Department and the officer must have scored at least 80% on
their previous annual handgun 50 round qualification course.
1. Officers who wish to participate in the Carbine Rifle Program are required to purchase the
rifle, accessories, and all training and duty ammunition at their own expense.
2. Carbine Rifles must be AR-15 style weapons, .223 caliber or 5.56 NATO, 16 inch barrels,
and configured for semi-automatic use only. The rifle and all accessories must be black
in color.
3. Officers desiring to carry a rifle must purchase only departmentally approved weapons. A
list of approved weapons will be maintained by the Little Rock Police Department’s
Quartermaster.
4. Minimum trigger pull weight must be no less than 5.5 pounds. No set triggers or two
stage triggers will be allowed.
5. The maximum magazine capacity is 30 rounds for the carbine rifle. All carbine rifle
magazines will be loaded two rounds short of the maximum capacity of the magazine.
Spare magazines will be carried in a bag or belt when deployed. When the Officer
deploys the bag or belt, it must not cover the uniform or the identifying police apparel so
the Officer is readily identified as such.
6. All carbine rifles will be equipped with front and rear iron sights. A list of the electronic
sighting systems that have been approved will be maintained by the Little Rock Police
Department’s Quartermaster. The electronic sight must be mounted in such a manner that
it allows for a “co-witnessing” sight picture when viewed through the iron sights. The
sight picture shall be considered co-witnessing if the illuminated dot of the electronic
sight is visible and appears positioned on the tip of the front sight when the shooter
acquires a proper sight picture through the iron sight. This is required in case the
electronic sight fails. No sights with magnification will be allowed on the weapon.
a) On “safe”;
9. No loaded rifles will be allowed in any police facility. In order to enter a facility, the rifle
will be:
a) On “safe”;
10. Below is a list of the only accessories that are approved to mount on the Carbine Rifle (no
lasers will be allowed):
a) Flashlight system;
b) Forward grip;
c) Adjustable stock;
e) Sling (Required).
11. Officers will not modify their patrol rifle with any accessories not approved. These
include but are not limited to:
B. Duty Ammunition
1. Remington .223 Caliber, 62 grain HP Bonded are the only duty rounds permitted.
C. Training
1. In order for a sworn member of the Little Rock Police Department to carry a carbine rifle,
they must first attend the Basic Rifle Course conducted at the Training Division. Safety,
proper technique and accuracy are the goals of the firearms training. Courses include
both day and low-light shooting. This course will teach the following skills:
a) Safety;
b) Policy;
c) Nomenclature;
f) Proficiency in shooting.
2. The carbine rifle course of fire will have a specific time frame sufficient to simulate a
stress situation, which causes the officer to apply fundamental concepts of safety, proper
technique, and accuracy in firing and proficiency in reloading the firearm.
3. The course of fire and the passing score will be determined by the Training Division with
the approval of the Chief of Police. During any qualification, if anyone does not qualify,
they will have the option of individual instruction from a firearms instructor. If after this
instruction, they fail to qualify, they will be suspended from carrying a rifle and will be
required to attend the Basic Rifle Course again should the Officer desire to carry the
carbine rifle.
4. A firearms instructor can recommend to the Chief of Police that an officer not be
permitted to carry the carbine rifle because of lack of proficiency, even though the officer
has qualified with it.
5. All officers who carry the carbine rifle will be required to qualify two (2) times a year at
the Training Division’s Firing Range. The Training Division will set the qualification
dates. Anyone who misses the set qualifications will contact the Range Master and
coordinate a make-up qualification.
6. Practice days for the rifle range will be announced and conducted throughout the year. A
firearms instructor will be present during these practice sessions for instruction and safety.
7. Once an Officer attends the Carbine Rifle School and meets the requirements to carry the
rifle, the Training Division will send a memorandum to their Division Commander
authorizing that officer to carry the rifle. This memorandum will include the authorized
rifle that the officer is allowed to carry. If at anytime, an Officer fails to re-qualify or is
not able to carry the carbine rifle for any other reason, the Training Division will notify
the officer’s Division Commander of the status change.
8. After each Carbine Rifle Training School, the Training Division will send each Division
Commander an updated master list of personnel who are authorized to carry the carbine
rifle. This list will contain the authorized weapon for each officer. The Division
Commander will make this list available to all supervisors under their command.
1. All carbine rifles will be inspected semi-annually by a Training Staff armorer or his/her
designee.
3. Weapons determined unsafe may be re-inspected at a later date by the same armorer if
possible, and if found safe may be approved for use in the performance of duty.
A. Only certified police armorers authorized by the Training Division Commander will repair,
modify or otherwise work on departmentally owned weapons.
B. Officers will be responsible for maintaining issued and personally owned weapons in a clean and
serviceable condition.
C. All departmentally approved and issued firearms will be inspected annually by a Training staff
armorer.
1. Weapons determined unsafe by a departmental armorer will not be authorized for use in
the performance of duty.
2. Weapons determined unsafe may be re-inspected at a later date by the same armorer, if
possible, and if found safe may be approved for use in the performance of duty.
D. Officers may install, at their own expense, Hogue-Handall and Pachmayr type grips.
VIII. Training
A. Prior to being authorized to carry a weapon, each officer will be instructed by the Training
Division in:
1. Policies and procedures concerning the use of force necessary to effect a lawful arrest;
and,
B. All officers authorized to carry weapons will be issued a current copy of the Little Rock Police
Use of Force policy as contained in the Department General Orders. Issuance of the General
Orders will be the responsibility of the Accreditation Unit.
C. Annually, each sworn member of the Little Rock Police Department will be required to receive
in-service training on the Police Department’s use-of-force policy and demonstrate proficiency
with any approved weapon the sworn member is authorized to use.
D. Annually, each sworn member of the Little Rock Police Department will be required to
successfully complete a firearms qualification course that meets the Arkansas Law Enforcement
Standards & Training, Standard Qualification Course of Fire, with fifty (50) rounds for one
target, with a passing score of eighty percent (80%) [OLES Regulation 1026].
E. Officers shall receive annual in-service training regarding defensive tactics, control holds,
authorized neck restraints and other uses of physical force.
F. Only officers demonstrating proficiency with an approved weapon on an annual basis shall be
authorized to use such weapons.
H. The Training Division will document the officer’s training and proficiency record to reflect
his/her attendance of in-service training classes and document the officer’s proficiency in the use
of departmentally authorized weapons.
A. All firearms shall be carried in a safe and secure manner both on and off-duty.
B. Officers will not clean, repair or load firearms in police buildings, except at the range, unless
ordered to do so by a supervisor.
D. Handguns will not be cocked while pursuing, subduing, arresting or searching a suspect.
E. Shotguns will not be carried inside a police building with the breech closed.
F. Shotguns shall be carried in shotgun racks in patrol vehicles with the breech closed, chamber
empty, magazine full and the safety on.
G. Under no circumstances shall a shotgun be placed in the rack with a round in the chamber or
with the safety off.
H. Officers shall at all times adhere to standard firearms safety instructions provided by
Departmental training processes.
I. Firearms will at all times be maintained and used in a manner which precludes unintentional
discharges.
J. Officers shall secure weapon from unauthorized access both on and off-duty.
B. To effectively serve both management and the individual employee, the objectives of the
evaluation process shall be:
5. To provide a fair means for measuring and recognizing individual performances; and,
II. Definitions
A. Little Rock Police Department Employee Goals and Performance Evaluation - An evaluation
system used for sworn employees below the rank of Lieutenant.
B. Performance Feedback Process - An evaluation system used for civilian and sworn employees of
the rank of Lieutenant and above.
A. All sworn employees are assigned to a twenty-four month probationary period commencing at date
of hire. Non-sworn employees have a six-month probationary period. There shall be no
exceptions to the probationary period.
1. All probationary employees will be evaluated each month during the probationary period.
2. A written review shall be completed each month by the immediate supervisor outlining
the probationary employee’s progress and any deficiencies that may exist.
3. A final evaluation shall be completed no later than two (2) weeks prior to the end of the
employee’s probationary period and shall include a recommendation as to whether or not
the employee should be granted regular permanent status.
1. All evaluations shall be completed by the employee’s immediate supervisor and submitted
to the Office of the Chief of Police no later than the 10 th day of January, unless specified
otherwise.
a) If the employee did not work for the supervisor for the entire period under
review, the current supervisor may request additional written documentation
from any other supervisor for whom the employee worked.
2. Employees shall be evaluated on the appropriate form in compliance with guidelines and
procedures provided with the form. The evaluation period will be included on each
evaluation.
C. All first line supervisors shall be properly trained in the evaluation system. The evaluator’s
immediate supervisor will be responsible for ensuring that the evaluator performs the proper
techniques of evaluating performance, preparing the evaluation form, and conducting the
evaluation interview and career counseling.
D. All ratings will be based only on performance specific to the employee’s position during the rating
period. The employee’s immediate supervisor will be responsible for conducting the career
counseling interviews. Career Development forms shall be completed on all personnel and
forwarded to the Career Development Coordinator pursuant to the guidelines set forth by General
Order 201 during the performance evaluation process.
E. At the end of each rating period, the evaluator will counsel the employee in the following areas:
2. Level of performance expected, rating criteria or goals for the new evaluation period; and,
F. If an employee is not performing at an acceptable level, he/she shall be notified in writing. This
notification shall be made in a timely manner prior to the end of the evaluation period outlining the
deficiencies. If unsatisfactory performance continues, this information shall be included in the
employee’s performance evaluation.
G. Each employee shall be given the opportunity to make comments to supplement the completed
performance evaluation report. Each employee shall sign the completed evaluation indicating he
has read and understands the content. This signature does not indicate agreement or disagreement.
H. Should the employee refuse to sign a performance evaluation, the supervisor shall take note and
record the reasons, if given.
J. Raters will be evaluated by their immediate supervisor regarding the quality of rating given to
employees they are rating. As part of the rater evaluation, the rater’s supervisor will review and
sign employee evaluations completed by the rater. The reviewing supervisor’s signature will
signify the following:
4. The rater is able to carry out the role in the performance evaluation system.
A. Sworn personnel promoted to the next rank will be placed on probation for a period of 6 months.
1. Probationary Sergeants and Lieutenants during their first week of their new assignment
will be issued a Supervisor’s Reference Guide and will be assigned to a supervisor
designated by their new Division Commander.
a) The supervisor will review the reference guide with the probationary supervisor
and train/mentor them for a period of five (5) working days.
b) At the end of this period, the designated supervisor will complete the Field
Training Observation form, the LRPD Supervisory Training form, the LRPD
Significant Incident Report and a written review of the initial weeks training
detailing any deficiencies or exceptional situations.
(1) These forms will be forwarded through chain of command to the Office
of the Chief of Police for review.
(2) Once the review process is completed, the original forms will be
forwarded to the Training Division for placement in the individual’s
Training file.
c) During the remainder of their probationary period, the employee will be closely
observed, and their supervisory performance monitored by their immediate
supervisor.
(2) The evaluation shall be completed in writing and shall identify the new
supervisor’s strengths and weaknesses, giving the employee the
opportunity for improvement.
b) The evaluation shall be completed in writing and shall identify the new
Captain’s strengths and weaknesses, giving the employee the opportunity for
improvement.
4. The final evaluation shall be completed no later than two (2) weeks prior to the end of the
employee’s probationary period and shall include a recommendation concerning their
ability to continue their duties and responsibilities as a supervisor or being returned to
their previous rank.
B. All evaluations will be forwarded through the chain of command to the Office of the Chief of
Police for inclusion in each employee’s performance evaluation file.
A. Employees shall be evaluated on the L.R.P.D. “Employee Goals and Performance Evaluation
Form” by their immediate supervisor.
B. Prior to the evaluation period, the supervisor and employee shall select evaluation dimensions
and/or performance goals on which the employee agrees to be evaluated. The supervisor shall
discuss with the employee how to be successful in each area and what performance standards will
be used in evaluating the employee.
C. Dimensions and/or goals shall be weighted as to their importance in determining job success. The
weight total is 100% for dimensions and/or 100% total for goals. The final score will be an
average of the two figures.
2. Document important events and observations, both positive and negative; and,
3. Keep the lines of communications open by coaching the employee, helping to improve
employee performance, and providing continuous feedback on progress toward
accomplishment of performance objectives.
E. After observing the employee during the evaluation period and reviewing any documentation, the
supervisor shall rate the employee on each goal performance dimension agreed upon. The
supervisor shall score the evaluation according to the weight assigned to the chosen dimensions.
F. Supervisors shall review the evaluation with each employee discussing strengths and weaknesses.
Supervisors shall counsel each employee in their chosen career path.
G. The employee and supervisor shall agree on dimensions and/or goals for the next evaluation
period.
VI. Evaluation Procedures – Civilians and Sworn Employees of the Rank of Lieutenant and Above.
A. The Performance Feedback Process shall be used to evaluate all civilians and sworn employees of
the rank of Lieutenant and above.
1. Prior to January 10th of each year, the immediate supervisor will complete a Planning
Session Worksheet for each of his/her employees. The Planning Session Worksheet will
detail the performance factors and illustrate examples of performance expectations, goals
and priority work related to each performance factor specific to each employee.
2. The supervisor will review the Planning Session Worksheet with each employee to ensure
that a mutual understanding of the performance elements is achieved.
4. In preparation for the annual evaluation, supervisors shall collect and review notes on
critical incidents, positives and negatives concerning how well an employee is
performing. Input from other supervisors may also be collected.
5. Near the end of the evaluation period, the supervisor shall complete the Performance
Feedback Form utilizing the previously completed Planning Session Worksheet. The
supervisor and employee shall meet to review the evaluation and discuss career
development.
6. Explanatory comments are required for when the summary rating is fully (4) or seldom
(1).
7. Each employee shall be given the opportunity to make comments to supplement the
completed performance evaluation report. Each employee shall sign the completed
evaluation indicating he has read and understands it. This signature does not indicate
agreement or disagreement.
8. After the evaluator signs the form it shall be forwarded to their supervisor for review.
B. At the end of each rating period, the evaluator will counsel the employee in the following areas:
2. Level of performance expected, rating criteria or goals for the new evaluation period; and,
A. An employee may appeal an evaluation report when they believe it does not correctly reflect their
performance. Should an evaluation be contested, the appeal process shall be:
2. Discussion of the evaluation between the evaluator, the reviewer and the employee within
five working days of the request.
3. If an agreement is not reached, the Division Commander shall review the evaluation with
the employee, evaluator and reviewer.
4. If the contention is still not satisfied, the Division Commander shall forward the appeal
and all evaluation documentation to the Office of the Chief of Police. A decision shall be
made at this level and the employee advised of the decision in writing.
5. The appeal process for civilians is outlined in the Administrative Personnel Policy and
Procedure Manual for the City of Little Rock.
A. The purpose of this policy and procedure is to promulgate the City of Little Rock Civil Service
Commission promotion procedure and eligibility requirements for sworn police personnel.
B. It is the policy of the Little Rock Police Department to provide promotional opportunities
whenever possible to qualified employees. Employees are encouraged to take advantage of these
opportunities by qualifying themselves for advancement through further education and study, and
by a high level of job performance, service, and interest.
C. The Civil Service Commission Promotional Procedures Guidelines for Uniformed Personnel are
intended to establish an effective and fair testing and feedback system, provide continuity in the
promotional process and, most important, to determine the most qualified candidates. The City of
Little Rock Human Resources Department shall be responsible for ensuring the security of all
promotional materials.
D. The promotional process, for all positions, will comply with the criteria set forth by the Promotion
Procedure Guidelines of the City of Little Rock Civil Service Commission. This policy shall be
subordinate to the Civil Service Commission Promotion Procedure Guidelines where in conflict.
E. The Chief of Police and the City of Little Human Resources Department shall be responsible for
the administration of the promotional process pursuant to the Civil Service Commission Rules and
Regulations.
F. The Police Department shall provide “Subject Matter Experts” to assist the Human Resources
Department in the development of the written test content, exercise scenarios, rating criteria or
any other assessment instruments that require law enforcement knowledge. Subject Matter
Experts will be selected from L.R.P.D. officers the same or higher rank of the specified
promotional position. Questions may be taken from the Little Rock Police Department General
Orders and Rules and Regulations, Arkansas Criminal Code, Arkansas Rules of Criminal
Procedures or any other announced job related source. Any Subject Matter Expert who violates
the security agreements promulgated by the Human Resources Department will be subject to
disciplinary action up to and including termination.
G. Copies of the actual list will be maintained on file in the Office of the Chief of Police and City
Human Resources Department. Each candidate will be notified in writing of their final score and
ranking on the list.
I. Upon expiration of an eligibility list any future promotional opportunities will require
reapplication, retesting and re-evaluation.
A. A list of eligible candidates will be submitted in rank order to the Civil Service Commission for
certification.
B. The Human Resources Department will provide a copy of the certified list to the Chief of Police as
soon as reasonably possible following Civil Service Commission certification. The Police Chief is
then responsible for the distribution of the certified list to all work locations as soon as reasonably
possible.
C. Candidates may schedule a personal appointment with the Employment Services Manager, or
his/her designee, to review and discuss his/her Assessment Center results, scores, and
developmental needs. Appointments should be scheduled as soon as possible following the date of
certification of the list.
III. Selection
A. All candidates will be ranked according to their composite score as specified in the Civil Service
Commission Promotion Procedures Guidelines. Education and Seniority credits will be added to
the final composite score before a ranked list is created.
B. The Chief of Police, when filling a promotional position, is authorized to promote one of the top
three candidates until the list is exhausted.
C. Any employee who has received a disciplinary suspension within the previous three (3) years will
not be considered for a promotion during that time period. The three year period will begin from
the date of the incident.
I. Purpose
A. The purpose of this General Order is to familiarize all members of the Department with the Training,
the services available to them, and the rules and guidelines that apply when they are attending training
classes, ordering equipment, using the range, or conducting any Departmental function which involves
the Training Division.
B. The purpose of the Training Division is twofold. Training shall be provided to accommodate
Department needs and in the interest of self-improvement of employees. The Police Recruiting and
Background Investigation Unit will recruit the most qualified individuals possible for the position of
police officer.
II. Scheduling
A. Any officer who wants to reserve a range or classroom should contact a member of the training staff
(Lieutenant, Sergeant or Officers).
B. On Wednesdays, as needed, the range will be open for individual officers who wish to practice on their
own.
C. Advance notice of all personnel required to attend scheduled training programs shall be distributed to
all Division Commanders who shall see that this information is disseminated to affected personnel.
D. Personnel who are unable to attend a training class must be re-scheduled by their immediate supervisor.
The Training Division Commander or his designate may grant exceptions, for reasonable excuses of
conflicting nature (i.e., court appearances, illness, Departmental business of an emergency or serious
nature, personal emergencies). Excessive absences of required training shall be brought to the attention
of the Office of the Chief of Police by the Training Division Commander.
B. Personnel who attend training classes are expected to be on time. Personnel who are late may be
refused training for that day at the discretion of a Training Supervisor. The tardy officer’s Division
Commander will be notified.
D. Personnel who miss more than 10% of any training course shall not receive credit for the course.
Failure to complete required training courses will be documented as “incomplete” and no credit will be
given. Information concerning personnel receiving an “incomplete” for required training courses shall
be brought to the attention of the Office of the Chief of Police by the Training Division Commander.
E. It shall be the responsibility of the course coordinator to ensure that personnel required to attend a
designated class are present. The class coordinator shall document any absences.
F. The class coordinator is responsible for ensuring that a class roster is completed for all persons
attending. The roster shall include at least the names of those attending, rank, social security number
and employee number.
G. The course coordinator shall ensure that all documentation of personnel successfully completing a
training course is submitted to the Training Division Records Specialist for updating of individual
training files. The Training Division Records Specialist shall ensure that proper documentation is
forwarded to Arkansas Commission on Law Enforcement Standards and Training (CLEST).
H. Instructors may remove any disruptive or non participating student by notifying any Training Division
Supervisor. The supervisor will notify the Training Division Commander, or designee, who will make
a determination whether the student will be able to continue the training course. If the student is
dismissed from the training course, his/her Division Commander will be notified of the dismissal and
the actions of the student.
A. A current and approved lesson plan shall be required for all training classes provided by the Little Rock
Police Department. The purpose of the lesson plan is to ensure the topic of the presentation is
thoroughly and accurately presented. All lesson plans will be submitted in the following format:
1. Agency Title;
2. Course Title;
3. Objectives;
4. Time Length;
5. Training Aids;
6. Handouts or pamphlets;
7. References;
9. Date prepared.
1. Introduction;
3. Summary or conclusion.
1. Focusing on the elements of skills, knowledge, and ability for which formal training is needed;
1. Training content - The Training Division supervisor approving the lesson plan will ensure that
instruction is based on course objectives;
2. Instructor techniques that are appropriate and sufficient. The Training Division supervisor
approving the lesson plan will review and discuss appropriate instructional methods (these
include but are not limited to: use of videos; hands-on training; lecture; role-playing etc.);
and,
3. Test utilized–For the purpose of evaluating participants in a training program, a pre-test and/or
a post-test may be required. Instructors should use competency based testing which uses
performance objectives, and measures participant knowledge of related skills. Passing and
failing scores shall be established for all written examinations. A minimum passing
performance standard shall be established for all proficiency examinations.
E. The method of instruction shall be correlated to the subject matter being presented.
F. All lesson plans shall be submitted to the Training Division which shall ensure completeness and
consistency with Departmental policy. Lesson plans shall be submitted to a Training Division
Supervisor no later than seven days prior to scheduled training. A Training Division Supervisor shall
approve lesson plans.
H. Lesson plans shall not be removed from the Training complex. Departmental personnel may request a
copy of any lesson plan maintained by the Training Unit. Training Division personnel shall be
responsible for copying the requested lesson plan and ensuring the original is returned to its proper
storage.
V. Remedial Training
A. Remedial training is personalized training to correct a specific deficiency which is identified either by
testing, inspection, or other evaluations during training, or by a supervisor evaluating routine job
performance.
B. The purpose of remedial training is to ensure that Departmental personnel do not suffer deficiencies in
basic skills, knowledge, and abilities required to perform their assigned tasks or comply with standards
established by the Arkansas Commission on Law Enforcement Standards and Training (CLEST).
C. Remedial training will be provided for, but not limited to, firearms, driving, and impact weapons.
D. Remedial training shall be provided to personnel by members of the Training Unit, when requested or
deemed necessary by Training or supervisory personnel.
E. Whenever a supervisor has reason to believe that an employee under his/her supervision has
demonstrated a deficiency in basic skills required to perform assigned tasks, the supervisor may arrange
for remedial training through the Training Division.
F. Upon completion of a remedial training program, participants shall be evaluated by the Training staff to
determine whether or not existing deficiencies were alleviated. Results of the evaluation shall be
forwarded through the Training Division’s chain of command to the appropriate Division Commander
and/or the Office of the Chief of Police when deemed necessary.
G. Any employee assigned to remedial training that does not satisfactorily complete the course shall not be
released to active duty.
1. Departmental personnel who do not satisfactorily complete the first scheduled remedial
training session will be assigned to the Training Division for continued remedial training for a
maximum of four additional training days.
2. After five days, if Departmental personnel do not show a reasonable improvement in their
skills, documentation shall be forwarded through the chain of command to the Training
Division Commander detailing the deficiencies.
3. The Training Division Commander shall forward the file with a recommendation to the Office
of the Chief of Police for administrative review.
4. The Training Division Commander shall ensure a copy of the file is forwarded to the
appropriate Division Commander.
5. If a person scheduled for remedial training does not report as scheduled, the Training Division
Lieutenant shall be notified and he/she shall contact their immediate supervisor.
A. In-Service Training is provided to sworn members of the Little Rock Police Department to further the
education and training of current officers. This training is designed to enhance the knowledge and
skills already possessed by officers or to introduce new training that is required or needed.
B. The In-Service Sergeant and Officers are responsible for the development of In-Service Training. This
can be accomplished by utilizing the following guides: Training Committee recommendations;
directives from the Office of the Chief of Police; officer critique evaluations; or changes in Arkansas
State Law or policy.
C. In-service training is training in addition to recruit training which includes but is not limited to:
1. Annual qualification of all weapon systems utilized by the Department; (i.e., Firearms,
Defensive Tactics, Batons, Pepper Spray);
2. Specialized training;
4. Advanced training.
D. All officers are required to complete an annual retraining program which should include, but is not
limited to the following:
1. Departmental policy concerning the use of force, including the use of deadly force;
2. Reviews of statutory or case law affecting law enforcement or process operation with an
emphasis on changes;
E. When changes occur, all officers are required to receive training (roll-call training, etc.) which may
include, but is not limited to the following:
1. Review of Departmental General Orders, Divisional Operating Procedures, and Rules and
Regulations with emphasis on changes;
2. Reviews of statutory or case law affecting law enforcement or process operation with an emphasis
on changes;
5. Departmental policy concerning the use of force, including the use of deadly force;
10. Review of contingency plans including those relating to special operation and unusual
occurrences;
F. In-Service Critiques are completed by all those attending in-service at the conclusion of the training. The
In-Service Sergeant or designee will be responsible for collecting, compiling and evaluating those critiques.
A. Advanced training is training which is designed to impart higher levels of supervisory and management
skills to the participants.
1. Middle and upper management employees may receive advanced training when available to
supplement pre-promotional training or executive development training for higher-ranking
officers (i.e., F.B.I. National Academy, IPTM, etc.).
a) Management Theory;
b) Supervisory Techniques;
B. It shall be the responsibility of the Training Division Lieutenant to ensure that all supervisory personnel
of the rank of Sergeant or Lieutenant attend the University of Arkansas School of Law Enforcement
Management and Supervision or other equivalent course when openings become available.
A. Specialized training is specifically designed to enhance skills, knowledge, and abilities taught in either
recruit or in-service programs. Specialized training may address supervisory, management, and/or
executive development training, or may also include technical and job specific subjects. Specialized
training may include the following:
1. Development and/or enhancement of the skills, knowledge, and abilities particular to the
specializations;
3. Departmental General Orders, Divisional Operating Procedures and Rules and Regulations
which are specifically related to the function or component; and,
1. Intoxilizer Operator;
3. Radar Operator/Instructor;
4. SWAT Team;
5. Hostage Negotiator;
7. Canine Handler;
8. Detective;
9. Armorer;
18. Motorcycle;
19. Helicopter;
C. Supervisors will ensure that employees under their command receive Specialized Training and are re-
trained or re-certified as mandated. All certificates and proof of re-certification will be forwarded to
the Training Division for inclusion in the employee’s training file.
A. Employees who wish to attend seminars or training courses outside the department at the department’s
expense must submit a written request and a completed travel expense form through the chain of
command to the Office of the Chief of Police for approval and the Administrative Services Manager for
processing.
B. Employees may attend training courses at their own expense. The Department may authorize time off
depending upon manpower needs, type training or other pertinent factors.
C. When an employee is selected to attend an approved course, their immediate supervisor will notify
them. The department shall provide reimbursement for the following expenditures:
1. Tuition/Registration;
2. Transportation;
3. Lodging;
D. Upon completion of the approved course, employees shall forward to the Administrative Services
Manager receipts for any expenditure incurred by the city. (i.e., gasoline, lodging, airfare etc). With
the exception of those items not requiring receipts as identified by the Travel Expense Form (Finance
Form T-1).
E. Within five days after completion of their course of study, employees shall complete a school
attendance form and forward it and a copy of the course certificate, if applicable, to the Training
Division.
A. Employees who attend training seminars or courses conducted at locations other than Department
facilities may submit any manuals, handouts, or other literature obtained during their instruction to the
Training Division for copying and inclusion in the Department’s research library or Training Division
library subject to copyright restrictions.
B. All original material submitted in compliance with this Section shall be returned as quickly as possible.
A. Civilian employees performing duties associated with the Communication Center and the Crime Scene
Search Unit shall receive orientation and on-the-job training commensurate with their responsibilities.
B. All civilian employees shall receive in-service training as required. All training will be documented
and forwarded to the Training Division for filing.
C. Civilian employees will be provided with the following information through their immediate
supervisor:
A. Firearms and officer survival training are designed to impart skills, knowledge and abilities related to
the mechanical aspect of shooting as well as the situation and tactical use of police weapons.
B. All firearms instructors shall ensure that all officers are instructed in the proper use of firearms as well as
Departmental General Orders and procedures relating to the use thereof.
C. A safety officer will be identified during all Firearms Training. The safety officer’s primary
responsibility shall be to ensure that all safety procedures are followed at all times. The safety officer
shall not participate as a role player, student, or instructor in the training.
D. When on the firing range, all officers will adhere to the rules of basic firearms safety.
1. Horseplay, unnecessary talking, or wandering about the range will not be tolerated.
2. All commands given by the designated range master will be obeyed, immediately.
4. The muzzles of all shotguns, when not being used on the firing line, will be pointed down
range.
5. Body Armor, hearing and eye protection will be worn at all times.
6. When the range is in use, a red flag will be flown on the flagpole to indicate that the range is
“hot”. Anytime the firing range is in use, it shall be considered ‘hot’.
E. Type of Weapons, Ammunition, Targets, and Equipment Permitted for Use on the Range
1. Rifle Range:
b) Any specialized weapon that has been issued to personnel of this department
c) Any specialized weapon that has not been issued but has been approved by the Training
Division Lieutenant, SWAT Lieutenant, SRU Lieutenant or Training Division
Commander.
2. Pistol Range:
3. Types of Ammunition:
a) Any ammunition that will operate the above listed approved weapons will be allowed
on the ranges.
a) Rifle Range
(3) Only those metal targets owned by the Training Division will be used unless
approved by the Training Division Commander
(4) Any other objects on the range must be approved by the Training Division
Commander prior to use.
b) Pistol Range
(1) All paper targets or other targets approved by the Training Division
Commander.
1. Storage of ammunition in the Conex Storage containers next to each Firearms Range is
permissible.
2. Weapons of any kind will not be stored at either Firearms Range when Training personnel are
not present. Weapons will be stored inside the weapons vault inside the Training building
when not in use for a training class.
A. All sworn members of the department must meet minimum performance standards on the following
firearms courses.
1. Officers must annually demonstrate a minimum performance ability of 80% using the
Arkansas Law Enforcement Standards & Training, Standard Qualification Course of Fire, with
fifty (50) rounds for one target. [OLES Regulation 1026]
3. After three attempts, officers who fail to demonstrate minimum performance in either of the
above categories during annual qualification will be relieved of official police duties by a
Training Supervisor.
a) They will relinquish their service weapon to the Training Division Supervisor.
b) They will not carry any weapon under police authority while relieved.
c) The Training Division Supervisor shall immediately notify the relieved officers’
immediate supervisor and schedule the officer for remedial training.
d) The relieved officers’ supervisor shall notify his/her chain of command, in writing, of
the officers’ status. This memorandum shall be forwarded to the Office of the Chief
of Police.
e) The relieved officer shall be temporarily assigned to the Training Division. The
relieved officer will report to the in-service training supervisor for remedial firearms
training and shall not return to full police duties until he/she has successfully
qualified with their issued service weapon.
e) The T.I. Machine will be used to measure an officer’s judgment, survival skills, and
accuracy when faced with a decision in the use of deadly force.
f) No weapon will be allowed into the area where the T.I. Machine is being utilized.
A. The Training Unit will be responsible for developing, producing, and distributing at least one Roll Call
Training video and/or memorandum each month.
1. The In-Service Training Sergeant will develop and implement a schedule of topics for Roll
Call Training on an annual basis.
2. The Training Unit should encourage officers assigned to other divisions to submit suggestions
through their Division Commanders for topics or ideas for Roll Call Training.
3. The Training Unit will ensure that Roll Call Training videos/memorandums are distributed to
all divisions of this Department.
4. A variety of instructional techniques will be used in the development of roll call training
which include but are not limited to, written material; Departmentally produced videos, and
professional videos.
B. The Training Unit will maintain a record and a copy of all Roll Call Training materials on file in
accordance with lesson plan procedures.
C. The Training Officer Minimum Standards/Records Keeper will maintain a monthly file of the rosters of
each Division indicating the personnel who have received or reviewed the monthly Roll Call Training.
Appropriate Division Commanders will be notified of all required personnel who have not participated
in roll call training.
D. Officers will be allowed to evaluate the effectiveness of roll call training on forms provided by the
Training Division.
E. The In-Service Training Sergeant shall ensure that personnel who develop roll call training should be
familiar with the current issues and the topics addressed. This may include instructors from outside the
Department.
F. It is the responsibility of all Shift Commanders to ensure their subordinates have received the required
roll-call training and all required documentation is forwarded to the Training Division.
A. The field training program for recruits shall consist primarily of on-the-job training and shall extend for
a minimum period of twelve weeks after graduation from the Little Rock Training Academy. The
objective of the field training program is to provide a newly sworn officer with “on street” experience
and expertise guidance.
B. The Field Services Division Commander shall have command responsibility for the administration and
supervision of the Field Training Officer (FTO) program for his/her Division.
C. Candidates for F.T.O. will attend and successfully complete thirty-two hours of classroom instruction
conducted by the Training Unit, prior to becoming a certified Field Training Officer.
D. All Field Training Officers will be required to attend an annual eight-hour refresher course as
scheduled by the Training Unit.
E. The Training Unit will be responsible for keeping all records associated with the F.T.O. program to
include:
3. F.T.O. manuals.
F. The Training Division staff is available to all Probationary and Field Training Officers for consultation
during the 12-week field-training program. A Field Training Manual is updated on a weekly basis by
the Field Training Officer and forwarded to the Training Division for review upon program
completion. Periodically a program critique is completed by the probationary officer and forwarded to
the Training Division.
A. Official records of all Department training will be maintained by the Training Unit. Records will
include:
2. The types of training/subject matter, course content (lesson plan), number of hours and test
scores and/or certificate (if applicable); and,
3. Training records of individual Departmental personnel shall be updated by the training staff
within thirty days of participation in a training program, either within the agency or outside.
Departmental employees shall complete a School Attendance Record within five days of
completion of an approved class taken outside the Department and forward the School
Attendance Record to the Training Division.
B. Training records of Departmental personnel shall be released to outside entities only upon approval by
the Chief of Police, the individual or in response to a subpoena.
A. Training officers and agency instructors must meet all CLEST requirements for instructors. They shall
be responsible for developing, scheduling, and implementing job related training for all Departmental
members. Training officers will be assigned to the Training Unit at the discretion of the Chief of
Police. Instructors shall receive training in the following areas:
3. Instructional techniques;
4. Learning theory;
B. Instructors from outside the Department will be selected on the basis of expertise in a particular subject
area and should meet CLEST requirements for instructors or shall be approved by the Training
Sergeant. If outside instructors do not meet CLEST requirements, but have been approved by the
Training Sergeant, a certified instructor of the Little Rock Police Department will be present in the
classroom during instruction. Lesson plans will be submitted by all outside instructors and approved
by the Training Sergeant
C. Instructors are required to keep abreast of the latest developments in their area of expertise. The
instructor must update their training accordingly. Instructors must arrive a minimum of 15 minutes
prior to the beginning of class, to prepare and coordinate with the academy staff.
D. In an effort to provide training that is timely, diverse and providing different perspectives, the Training
Division will rotate instructors. The rotation will be based upon subject matter, expertise, instructor's
experience, and the instructor's effectiveness in teaching.
E. In all training conducted by Training Division Instructors or training attended by Training Students
(In-Service, Recruit, or Advanced), one instructor will be designated as safety officer in all training
classes that are hazardous in nature and documented on the Risk Assessment Form (LRPD Form 5200-
27). Those classes include but are not limited to: Canine and equine operations;
Chemical/ordinance/biological/radiological; Defensive tactics; Physical fitness; Firearms; Motor
vehicle operations; Motorcycle and bicycle operations; Tactical operations; and Practical and
Scenario Based Training.
1. The safety officer’s primary objective is to observe overall conditions of the training exercise to
watch for safety violations and dangerous behavior. The safety officer has the authority to
discontinue any training that he/she considers a danger to any personnel involved.
2. The safety officer’s policies and procedures will be annually reviewed and approved by the
Training Sergeant and/or the Inservice Sergeant.
A. The Quartermaster will be primarily responsible for the control and issuing of Departmental equipment,
which shall include clothing, firearms, ballistic vests, badges, etc. In the absence of the quartermaster,
any divisional supervisor or their designee may issue equipment.
B. Requests for new equipment may be made by utilizing the Collective Data Automated Ordering system.
The completed computerized request shall be forwarded to the quartermaster for filing until the next
order is placed with the appropriate contract vendor.
C. The quartermaster will notify officers by use of the automated notification feature within the Collective
Data System when equipment is received and ready to be picked up. Officers will have ten business
days to pick-up equipment. After ten business days it will be returned to stock.
D. Equipment items will be replaced when they are no longer serviceable. Non-serviceable equipment
items will be turned in for destruction according to department guidelines.
E. Any officer issuing clothing/equipment will ensure that a property receipt is properly completed by the
officer receiving the equipment and initialed by the issuing officer. Items possessing a serial number
will have the number recorded on the property receipt. When issuing O.C. Pepper spray the
expended/expired canister must be turned in for proper destruction by the quartermaster, before
receiving a new canister. The quartermaster will use the property receipt to make the computer entry
into the individual’s file.
F. When issuing clothing/equipment to an officer whose issued property has been lost or stolen, the officer
will present an Incident Report and an Officer’s Report Form detailing the circumstances involved.
The Officer’s Report Form shall include a recommendation by the officer’s supervisor to replace the
item at the Department’s expense or the officer’s expense.
A. The Departmental armorer (Quartermaster) shall issue all weapons. In the absence of the Departmental
armorer, the Training Sergeant, or his/her designee, shall be responsible for the issuing of weapons.
Only Training Unit personnel and their supervisors are allowed access to the firearms vault.
B. When issuing a firearm, the log will be completed by the issuing personnel and initialed by the
receiving officer. When firearms are returned to the vault, the log shall be completed reflecting the
same information.
C. All weapons will be inspected and test fired upon being issued to any officer. The issuing personnel
will ensure that the receiving officer has qualified with the new weapon prior to leaving the Training
Academy.
D. The Departmental armorer shall have a continuous weapons maintenance program for all in stock
weapons and shall maintain a weapons maintenance history of all weapons of the Little Rock Police
Department.
E. The Departmental armorer will maintain an inventory on all weapons, service pistols, shotguns, rifles,
and miscellaneous weapons owned by the Department. Weapons which are actually in the control of
the Quartermaster will be maintained in an alarmed, secured vault. A monthly inventory of these
weapons will be performed by the Departmental armorer. An up to date record of all Departmental
weapons issued to officers for on duty use will be maintained in the Quartermaster’s computer.
F. Individual units such as S.W.A.T., S.R.U., and S.I.D., who have actual control of specialized weapons,
will present to the Departmental armorer a monthly written account of all their assigned weapons.
1. Each officer is responsible for cleaning his/her weapon after it is fired before that officer
returns to duty.
2. Department armorers will inspect each weapon after cleaning during annual qualification.
3. Quarterly, each Division Commander shall ensure that supervisors inspect the weapons of
their officers for cleanliness and that all ammunition is Department issued. Documentation
shall be forwarded to the Training Division no later than the 10th of the month following the
end of the quarter.
A. The Little Rock Police Department promotes student interest in the law enforcement field by providing
interested college students with first hand experience in law enforcement.
B. Procedures
1. At the request of local colleges, the Department may sponsor an individual student intern
program.
a) Coordinating and selection of part time interns through the Co-operative Education
Program with the University of Arkansas at Little Rock;
(1) A criminal history check with the Little Rock Police Department.
c) If the student has a criminal record, the Training Division Commander will follow the
guidelines as set forth by the City of Little Rock’s Civil Service Commission
regarding the Police Officer Selection process and disqualification standards;
d) The investigation will be conducted by the Police Personnel Unit. The results of the
investigation will be maintained in the intern’s file located in the Police Personnel
Office;
e) Locating and placing students in job positions of their interest and assigning them to
a supervisor; and,
f) Serve as the liaison between the Department and the Co-operative Education
Program Director.
a) Acquaint the student with the Police Department and present the student to the staff
as a co-worker;
c) Coordinate and assist the intern with assigned project by identifying and defining the
specific duties to be performed by the student during the practicum. The duties
assigned should allow the student to secure valuable, firsthand knowledge of an
actual work situation, and contribute his/her abilities to the operation of the
Department;
d) Have conferences with the student to allow for mutual exchange of feedback on the
progress of the work experience;
e) Arrange for interviews with personnel in the Department or other agencies if deemed
necessary;
f) Student intern evaluation forms will be completed by their respective supervisor and
forwarded to the Co-operative Education Program Director, in a timely manner, to
ensure compliance of the student’s progress within their guidelines; and,
g) Consult with the student’s instructors regarding the student’s progress or any
particular concern, whenever necessary.
4. Students participating in the intern programs are responsible for presenting themselves in a
manner to ensure their professional demeanor and must abide by the Rules and Regulations
and other directives of the Department.
I. Scope
A. This General Order establishes the structural and operational guidelines of the Little Rock Police
Department Training Committee.
B. The Little Rock Police Department Training Committee serves to review the training practices of
the Little Rock Police Department and to make recommendations to the Chief of Police regarding
changes in curriculum, policy, and direction.
II. Procedures
A. The Assistant Chief of Police, in charge of the Training Division shall appoint members to the
Little Rock Police Department Training Committee on a biennial basis. The Committee shall be
comprised of the following:
B. Committee members shall serve for a period of two years. Should a member wish to be released
prior to the end of their term, they shall submit a letter through their chain of command to the
Assistant Chief of Police making such request.
C. Should any member miss two consecutive meetings the committee chairman may request his/her
removal and immediate appointment of a replacement.
D. The Committee shall meet annually and additional meetings may be scheduled at the direction of
the Committee Chairman, if deemed necessary.
1. Ensuring that the needs of the Department are addressed and that there is accountability
for all training provided.
2. Serving as a liaison between Department personnel and the Training Division to ensure
training courses are relevant, up to date and open to new ideas and methods.
3. Ensuring that all training conforms to the Commission on Accreditation for Law
Enforcement Agencies and the Arkansas Commission on Law Enforcement Standards and
Training.
4. Monitoring the following training programs with emphasis on the improvement of:
b) In-service training;
c) Roll-call training;
d) Remedial training;
f) Specialized training.
5. Ensuring critical topics are covered in training, which may include, but are not limited to:
k) Hazardous materials;
p) Report writing;
r) Victim/witness rights;
F. The committee will assist the Training Division Commander to ensure that all responsibilities, as
identified in the Training DOP, are fulfilled:
1. Mission;
3. Annual evaluation;
4. Utilization of resources;
5. Attendance requirements;
8. Types of training;
G. The Committee Chairman shall prepare a written report after each meeting that will be forwarded
to the Assistant Chief of Police, in charge of the Training Division and the Chief of Police.
H. Reporting
a) Curriculum;
b) Physical facilities;
d) Course/student scheduling.
2. Results of the assessment will be presented to the members of the Committee, the
Assistant Chief of Police, in charge of the Training Division and the Chief of Police.
I. Purpose
A. To establish a physical fitness program within the Department and familiarize Departmental
personnel with both short and long term benefits.
B. To assist sworn personnel in developing nutritional programs geared toward their lifestyles.
C. To maintain and support a physical training program, in which the principle elements will be
regular physical exercise, a healthy diet, and moderation in the use of alcohol, tobacco, and
caffeine.
II. Administration
A. The physical fitness program will be administered under the direction of the Commander of the
Training Division.
B. The program will be reviewed on a continual basis in relation to the organizational goals and
objectives of the department and revised as necessary.
A. The goal of the physical fitness program is to improve the physical fitness and overall health of all
sworn personnel in the department.
B. Objectives
A. The physical examination by a licensed physician is required for employment and is performed at
no cost to the prospective employee.
B. The Chief may, with cause, require an employee to take a physical examination to determine health
status. When a physician approved by the department performs this examination, there will be no
cost to the employee. If the employee elects to have the examination done by their personal
physician, the employee shall pay the fee and the results subject to confirmation by a department
selected physician.
C. The physical examination will be based on the employee’s ability to perform the essential
functions of the employee’s job, as shown on the official position description with or without
reasonable accommodation.
B. Although any exercise is beneficial, the following aerobic exercises are highly recommended:
1. Jogging;
2. Walking;
3. Swimming;
4. Treadmill;
6. Bicycle.
D. All police facilities are equipped with a variety of exercise equipment. Employees are encouraged
to use this equipment as part of their regular exercise program.
E. Officers interested in additional information or help in setting up a fitness program may request
assistance from the Training Division.
F. Officers may be required to attend additional training, as deemed appropriate by the Training
Division Commander or the Office of the Chief of Police (i.e. weight-loss, nutrition, and fitness).
A. The Training Division shall administer the Minimum Skills Assessment for pre-employment
purposes and training academy fitness test(s).
B. The Training Division and/or City of Little Rock physical fitness experts shall develop methods of
testing.
C. Personnel who are interested in additional physical fitness and nutrition information may consult
the Training staff for guidance, goal setting and evaluations. This program may include the
following;
A. This Order establishes the principles of supervision for police related off-duty and non-police
related employment of sworn and non-sworn personnel of this Department.
1. Police related off-duty consists of any employment outside the Department, which
may require the Officer to act in his/her official capacity as a member of the Little
Rock Police Department.
B. Citizens requesting information regarding police related off-duty employment for officers of
this Department during regular business hours shall be referred to the Headquarters Division
Commander. After receiving notice of a request for off-duty employment, the Headquarters
Division Commander or his/her designee shall:
1. Verify that the request is valid and that the job is potentially subject to approval and
within the guidelines of Departmental requirements.
2. Record the pertinent information regarding the job and forward it via email to all
Division Commanders who will then post the off-duty request in his/her Division in a
central location for equal access by officers.
4. Off-duty employment posted under these guidelines shall be filled on a first come
first serve basis.
5. An off-duty eligible officer receiving an initial request from a citizen for off-duty
employment may forego these guidelines if the receiving officer has a desire to accept
the job, as long as the request is submitted for approval and consistent with Section III
of this order.
6. Officers who fail to successfully pass the annual fitness assessment test or control
tactics training will be prohibited from working any departmentally approved, police
related, off-duty. Once an officer successfully passes the annual fitness assessment
and control tactics training, their departmentally approved off-duty employment will
be reinstated.
7. Employees who are not on full-duty status will not be approved for off-duty or extra-
duty employment.
a) C.O.A.T. officers are permitted to work police related off-duty after being
employed for six months following their graduation date from the Training
Academy.
D. Limitation of hours
1. Officers will be limited to a total of 80 work hours during a seven-day week with no
more than 60 work hours during the workweek.
b) The “workweek” begins at the start of shift of the officer’s first working day
following assigned days off and ends at the regular end of shift on the last
day of the officer’s workweek.
c) “Work day,” means the time an officer works for the City, including late
relief overtime, compensatory time, court and supplemental overtime.
2. Employees will work no more than 16 work hours in any 24-hour period. The 24-hour
period begins whenever an employee starts any form of on-duty, police related off-
duty, or non-police related extra-duty employment.
4. At no time will an employee be allowed to take leave from their regular work
assignment in order to work an overtime assignment in which the City of Little Rock
is the funding source or conduit for compensation.
6. Requests to work special events, which cover multiple days or require extraordinary
manpower allocation (State Fair, Riverfest, Greek Festival, etc.) and may cause an
officer to exceed 80 work hours, may be forwarded to the Bureau Chief, through the
chain of command, for approval or disapproval. A consideration for approval is
whether the officer will have a non-working day immediately following the event.
7. The officer’s supervisor is responsible for imposing other reasonable limitations upon
an officer’s off-duty employment to best meet the needs of the Department and the
officer.
8. Nothing in this Order shall prohibit the Department from requiring an officer to work
more than the aforementioned number of hours, if the needs of the Department or
required court appearances dictate.
9. The officer’s immediate supervisor shall ensure that the total number of hours worked
during the week does not exceed that mandated by this policy.
10. Any infractions of this policy shall be reported through the Chain of Command to the
appropriate Division Commander or Bureau Chief.
11. This Subsection applies to both police related off-duty and non-police related extra-
duty employment.
E. Non-supervisory members of the Department shall not commit, schedule, or coordinate the
activity of personnel, for off-duty employment. The supervisor responsible to perform these
functions will be identified by the employee on the L.R.P.D. Off-Duty Employment Form
5500-10.
F. Supervisors may perform scheduling and other management-related tasks for police related
off-duty employers only as a part of their own off-duty employment; however, supervisors
may not be paid solely for performing such services. Supervisors must regularly provide
police-related services to the off-duty employer in addition to management functions. (This
does not preclude the off-duty employer from paying the supervisor at a higher rate in
consideration for these additional services.)
G. Officers or supervisors will not profit by subcontracting police related off-duty work to other
officers at a lower rate of pay.
H. Employees shall not accept or disperse lump sum payment of funds for the off-duty
employment of other officers.
I. Police related off-duty employment requiring three or more officers of the Department
working simultaneously must be referred to the Division Commander who may require the
employer to add an off-duty supervisor as a condition of approval for such employment, if
he/she determines such supervision is in the best interest of the Department or the City.
A. Sworn members working police related off-duty where a uniform is required will wear their
Department issued “Standard Duty Uniform” or the blue BDU uniform that has the officer’s
last name and Department badge sewn on them. All uniforms will be worn in compliance with
General Order 203.
1. The supervisor of officers working off-duty at special events and/or during periods of
extreme heat, may request a modification to the uniform requirement for the event
(i.e. State Fair, Riverfest, Greek Festival, etc.). Any request will be in writing
through the chain of command and approved by the Chief of Police prior to the event.
2. Officers working police related off-duty where a uniform is required must carry their
issued intermediate weapons in addition to their departmentally issued weapon, while
working the off-duty assignment.
B. Sworn members working police related off-duty where the uniform is not required will wear
appropriate civilian attire. Officers working off-duty in plain clothes shall wear their weapon
in a holster and in a manner that will not attract attention or be open to the view of the public
outside Department offices.
1. The LRPD embroidered button down and polo shirts may be worn when working an
off-duty assignment that does not require a uniform. These shirts will not be
represented to any off-duty employer as a department uniform.
A. An employee, who desires to accept off-duty or extra-duty employment, shall submit an Off-
Duty Employment Form (5500-10) for all outside employment, whether police-related or not,
to his immediate supervisor prior to working the job. Employees shall not work an off-duty or
extra-duty job prior to the submission and approval of the Departmental Off-Duty Employment
Form. This will include the owning or managing of any business.
1. The immediate supervisor receiving the form is responsible for determining if the
employment complies with Departmental policies and that the form is completed
properly.
2. The form will be forwarded to the Shift or Section Commander. Final approval shall
be granted or refused by the Division Commander, based on this policy and the
recommendations of the employee’s Chain of Command.
3. In situations dealing with a one time event, where time does not permit the normal
forwarding/approval process prior to the anticipated initiation of the off-duty or extra-
duty employment, a Lieutenant or equivalent civilian supervisor may approve the
employment request. Nevertheless, all forms will be forwarded to the Division
Commander.
4. The appropriate Bureau Chief will be the approving authority for all requests
submitted by a Division Commander. The Chief of Police will be the approving
authority for all requests submitted by a Bureau Commander.
B. Employees will be required to complete an Off-Duty Employment form (5500-10) for regular
or permanent off-duty or extra duty employment per location, per calendar year.
1. Approval for any off-duty or extra duty employment will expire on the 31 st of
December each year.
2. Employment forms must be re-submitted and approved prior to that date for
continued employment.
D. A copy of all approved Off-duty Employment Forms shall be routed to the Professional
Standards Section for filing.
E. A Shift or Section Commander and/or Division Commander will disapprove off-duty or extra
duty employment if, in his/her judgment, the employment is not in the best interest of the
Department or the employment interferes with the employee’s on-duty performance. If the
Shift or Section Commander or Division Commander believes that the number of officer’s for
a particular job is not adequate, he/she shall require the employer to hire more officers prior to
approving the police related off-duty employment.
V. Employee’s Responsibility and Notification Procedures for Police Related Off-Duty or Extra-
Duty Employment
1. The information on the form will include the officer’s name, employee number, date
of off-duty employment, location of off-duty employment, hours of off-duty
employment, specific duties to be performed and the signature of the requesting
employee. The form will also indicate if a supervisor is required and the name of the
supervisor.
2. The approving supervisor will sign his/her name to the form, as evidence that the
employee has met requirements of this Order and is authorized to work in a police-
related off-duty capacity for that particular date and time. If the employee’s
immediate supervisor is not available to sign the form prior to his/her working off-
duty, another supervisor may approve and sign the form. The approving supervisor
shall scan and forward a copy of the approved form to the employee’s immediate
supervisor.
3. The officer’s supervisor will review all off-duty time forms. He shall see that the
forms are properly filed and maintained. Monthly totals of officer’s working hours
will be compiled on a monthly basis and forwarded to the Division Commander as
part of the unit’s monthly report.
4. When an employee’s work hours differ from the hours indicated on the time form, he
shall notify his supervisor of the changes, as soon as practical, so revisions can be
made to the form to accurately reflect the hours worked.
B. Officers will call the Communications Center and log into the CAD system, prior to working
any police related off-duty employment, and provide the Communications Center with the
location and scheduled working hours of the employment.
C. The Communications Center will log the officer into the CAD system. Officers without
permanently assigned radio call signs will be issued a “Frank” call sign (example “F92”) for
use while working the off-duty assignment. When issuing radio call signs, the
Communications Center operator will ensure that duplicate call signs are not issued. Officers
with permanently assigned radio call signs will use their assigned call sign.
A. Officers who apply for live-in, off-duty security at apartment complexes will fill out the Off-
Duty Employment Form (5500-10).
B. The Apartment Security Agreement Form will be explained to the apartment management
representative by the requesting officer’s immediate supervisor and shall be signed by the
apartment manager, the officer and the supervisor. The form will be attached to the Off-Duty
Employment Form and submitted for approval through the Chain of Command to the
appropriate Bureau Commander.
1. Approved apartment security forms will expire on the 31st of December each year.
2. Both forms must be re-submitted and approved prior to the expiration date for
continued employment.
C. Officers employed in off-duty apartment security positions shall immediately notify their off-
duty employer any time their ability to perform off-duty work is prohibited by Department
regulations, including use of sick leave and suspension from duty.
A. Personnel who are involved in off-duty and extra-duty employment shall keep proper records
and include all earnings in their tax returns.
A. Officers may volunteer for non-paid off-duty performance of police related duties.
B. Volunteer non-paid off-duty employment will be treated as regular off-duty employment and
governed by this Order.
C. Supervisory officers may notify subordinates of volunteer events, but officers will not be made
to feel coerced into volunteering for non-paid off-duty employment.
IX. Accountability
A. The Orders, Rules and Regulations, policies and procedures of the Little Rock Police
Department will govern officers working an off-duty job.
B. Officers will respond to all requests for assistance from citizens, and under no circumstances
shall the officer refuse a request due to being “off-duty”.
X. Equipment
A. Equipment and vehicles will be checked out for off-duty use only after receiving authorization
from the on duty Shift Commander.
B. Shift Commanders will only authorize the use of equipment from their respective divisions.
A. A Section or Division Commander may for just cause suspend an employee’s police-related
and non-police related employment.
I. Purpose
A. The Chief of Police is responsible for the proper handling of citizen complaints and misconduct
investigations for the Police Department.
B. To ensure the integrity of the Police Department, all alleged or suspected misconduct claims will
be thoroughly investigated in order to obtain the truth and identify any violation which may have
occurred.
II. Complaints
A. Citizen Complaints:
4. It shall be the responsibility of Division Commanders to ensure that all employees in their
respective divisions follow these guidelines.
B. All signed complaints taken by any supervisor will be forwarded to the Office of the Chief of
Police, along with a summary of the complaint, for investigation assignment. The Office of the
Chief of Police will determine whether the subsequent investigation will be conducted by Internal
Affairs, or by the employee’s Chain of Command, unless the complaint falls within the following
criteria:
1. The shift or section Lieutenant may manage a complaint investigation up to and including
recommending corrective or disciplinary measures if determined at the onset of the
complaint that the incident is within the criteria established in Little Rock Police
Department Rules and Regulations 1/2006.00, which states, “Minor violations which do
not involve gross misconduct and which will not reflect discredit upon the Department,
but which indicate a need for some form of discipline and/or training, may be handled by
the offender’s commander or supervisor.”
C. Anonymous Complaints: Complaints brought by citizens who do not wish to become involved to
the extent of signing a letter or sworn statement will be investigated in the same manner as any
other complaint. Formal investigations of an anonymous complaint are initiated only upon the
specific direction of the Chief of Police. The Department exercises caution associated with
investigations of this type to avoid unnecessary harassment of Departmental employees from
outside sources.
A. Supervisors will assume the duties and obligations of their rank to discover and investigate
employee inefficiency or misconduct at its earliest stages. Supervisors will not look to higher
authority to initiate investigations, when an employee is within the scope of their own authority
and responsibility.
1. If the problem involves another employee of equal or higher rank, a superior officer will
be called to investigate the incident.
2. The incident will be documented by the investigating supervisor, who will forward the
information, along with supporting documentation, through the Chain of Command to the
Office of the Chief of Police.
C. If the violation is of a serious nature, the investigating supervisor shall relieve the employee of
duty and take his/her credentials, issued weapon and badge. These items will be stored in the
Property and Evidence Room pending disposition. Any employee who is relieved of duty shall be
instructed to be immediately available to the Office of the Chief of Police and Internal Affairs and
will not perform any police duties while relieved of duty.
1. Anytime an employee of the Little Rock Police Department is relieved of duty, the
supervisor relieving the employee will, through the Chain of Command, notify their
Division Commander immediately. The supervisor will submit a detailed written report
describing the facts of the incident, the reason for the action and a recommendation
concerning the employee’s return to duty. The documentation shall be forwarded
through the Chain of Command for review and evaluation at each level. The Division
Commander will submit to the Office of the Chief of Police all written documentation
and recommendations no later than the next business day after the employee has been
relieved of duty. The Chief of Police, or his/her designee, will review the documentation
and make a decision concerning the employee’s impending return to duty. If the Chief of
Police, or his/her designee, does not authorize the continued relief of duty, the employee
will be notified by a member of their Chain of Command concerning his/her return to
duty.
D. Any complaint, allegation or investigation, involving any of the following circumstances, shall be
immediately, or as soon as practical, reported to the Chief of Police:
2. In custody deaths;
A. The Internal Affairs Unit is responsible for the following administrative investigations. They
include but are not limited to:
3. In-custody deaths;
7. Corruption, extortion or the violation of any criminal statute (criminal investigations will
be conducted by the appropriate Division if the alleged criminal act occurs in the
jurisdiction of the Little Rock Police Department);
B. Division Commanders are responsible for the investigation of complaints not enumerated above,
including, but not limited to:
2. Improper procedure;
3. Unprofessionalism;
4. Rudeness;
5. Discourtesy;
6. Insubordination; and,
C. The Chief of Police or the appropriate Bureau Chief will review all files and make a final
determination based on the recommended discipline and/or corrective action.
D. The investigative file shall be returned to the Internal Affairs Unit upon completion of the
supervisory review process, and the complaint will be classified as either:
3. Exonerated - the employee’s actions were within the scope of his authority, complied
with departmental guidelines and were lawful and proper;
4. Unfounded — the allegation was false or not factual or did not occur; or,
A. The Professional Standards Section Commander will report to the Assistant Chief of Police –
Executive Bureau.
1. Nothing in this Order will preclude the Professional Standards Section Commander or
his/her designee from directly notifying the Chief of Police when complaints or matters
of a sensitive nature are received that require immediate attention.
B. Investigations are conducted whenever a written citizen complaint form has been signed by the
complainant or the Chief of Police orders an investigation.
C. The Internal Affairs Unit shall be responsible for the completion of all internal investigations and
shall be required to provide an appropriate summary of the facts of each case.
1. Written reports and/or taped statements may be obtained from the employee(s) under
investigation, depending upon the complexity of the allegation.
2. The employee may have a sworn member of the Little Rock Police Department present
during the interview process or other official Internal Affairs business. In cases involving
multiple employees, each employee shall have a different sworn member present during
the interview or other official Internal Affairs business.
a) A Police Officer may select a sworn member of equal rank or one rank greater
(Sergeant).
c) The member selected will not be involved in the case under investigation either
as an accused, as a witness or as a member of the investigating unit.
d) The member selected will not be in the involved employee’s chain of command
or a member of the chain of command responsible for evaluating the employee.
e) Non-sworn employees may have either a sworn member of the rank of Police
Officer or Sergeant or a non-sworn member of first-line supervisory status of the
Little Rock Police Department present during the interview process.
f) The member selected will not interfere with the scheduled time of the interview.
g) The member is only an observer and will not participate in or interfere with the
interview process or other official Internal Affairs business, and will only be
allowed as support for the employee. The employee may confer with the
observer as needed, but all statements will be made by the employee being
interviewed. No supervisor will issue any instruction or order that contradicts
the orders of Internal Affairs personnel.
3. Before a taped interview is conducted, or a written report is made, the employee involved
will be advised of the complaint and allowed to read the complaint form, if it is available.
4. The name(s) of the officer(s) conducting the interview, and all others present, will be
stated at the beginning of the interview.
5. The employee is responsible for his/her statements and any statements of the observer
concerning the matter under investigation.
7. Cell phones are not allowed in the interview room while the interview is in progress.
9. The employee will be advised that the interview is part of an Internal Administrative
Investigation.
10. The employee will be advised of Garrity Warnings if the allegations are criminal in
nature.
11. The employee will obey all lawful orders and truthfully answer questions pertaining to all
Departmental investigations, as required by the Little Rock Police Department Rules and
Regulations.
a) Employees are required to be honest and truthful in all matters related to their
scope of employment and the operations of the Department. Untruthfulness is
defined as intentionally making a false, misleading, or untrue statement. This
requirement applies to all oral statements and written statements. Written
statements include, but are not limited to, reports of any type, and any form of
electronic communications.
12. The employee shall not be subjected to offensive language during the interview.
13. Interview sessions shall be for reasonable periods and timed to allow for personal
necessities and rest periods.
E. During an Internal Affairs’ investigation, the involved employee(s) may be required to provide
reasonable photographs (not degrading or compromising) of himself/herself. Such photographs
shall be relevant to the investigation and used for Administrative purposes only. These
photographs may be taken of, but are not necessarily limited to, the following:
F. At the discretion of the Chief of Police, in order to further aid the investigation (at the
Department’s expense), the employee may be ordered by the Internal Affairs investigator to:
1. Be photographed or fingerprinted;
3. Provide access to financial records including, but not limited to, bank and credit union
accounts as determined to be reasonably related to an investigation;
a) Such requests shall be documented and approved by the Chief of Police. The
requests will be narrowly limited, and reasonably related, to the scope of the
investigation and a concise explanation of the data requested shall be provided
to the employee.
a) Such requests shall be documented and approved by the Chief of Police. The
requests will be narrowly limited, and reasonably related, to the scope of the
investigation and a concise explanation of the data requested shall be provided
to the employee.
G. Upon completion, the assembled file along with all statements, records and evidence gathered
during the investigation will be forwarded to the involved employee’s Chain of Command for
review and evaluation.
1. The Chain of Command will review the investigative file and make recommendations
regarding the disposition of each allegation and list all applicable policy violations.
Policy violations will be cited by source and section numbers.
H. During the review process of the investigative file by the employee’s Chain of Command, the
Division Commander shall be responsible for ensuring that all investigative files are maintained in
a secure manner, with access limited to supervisory personnel.
2. When investigative files are not in use, they shall be securely stored.
I. The Internal Affairs Investigator shall be responsible for informing the complainant as to the
status of the Internal Affairs investigation on a periodic basis, at least every sixty days.
A. The following procedures will apply to all administrative investigations conducted at the
Divisional level.
1. If, in the opinion of the Division Commander, an Administrative Hearing is warranted for
any employee as the result of a Divisional level or other investigation, the Division
Commander will forward the investigative file to the appropriate Bureau Chief for initial
evaluation.
b) The Office of the Chief of Police will complete a Notice of Intent and once
signed, the original Divisional investigative file containing all appropriate
documents will be forwarded to the Internal Affairs Unit for assembly and
distribution consistent with existing internal administrative investigative
standards.
c) The Internal Affairs Unit will have a supervisor from the respective division
sign a receipt and pick up a copy of the Divisional investigative file.
2. All requests for copies of such Divisional files (as in preparation for an Administrative
Hearing) will be forwarded to the Internal Affairs Unit. The Internal Affairs Unit will
inventory and issue all such copies and will be responsible for the recovery of such files.
4. A Division Commander may request the assistance of the Internal Affairs Unit at any
time during the course of a Divisional investigation.
b) When investigative files are not in use, they shall be securely stored.
B. The Division Commander shall be responsible for informing the complainant as to the status of
Divisional investigations on a periodic basis, at least every forty-five days.
A. Any officer, who may be disciplined in the form of a suspension, demotion, or dismissal, is
entitled to a prompt administrative hearing by management unless the officer specifically waives
the hearing in writing. Any civilian employee who may be disciplined in the form of suspension
or demotion is entitled to a prompt administrative hearing by management unless the employee
specifically waives the hearing in writing. Administrative Hearing procedures for civilian
employees will be consistent in structure, function and administration to that of sworn employees.
The Office of the Chief of Police will complete all required Human Resources documents for
notice and service for civilian employees. If a civilian employee is subject to dismissal they are
entitled to a “pre-termination hearing” as outlined in the City Personnel Manual. The
Department’s Administrative Hearing will serve as the civilian “pre-termination hearing”. The
civilian employee may be placed on Administrative Leave until the date of the hearing.
2. The Office of the Chief of Police will draft a “Notice of Intent” and will promptly
forward it to the appropriate Division Commander for service as soon as practical. The
Notice of Intent will include a list of all charges and a brief explanation of the basis for
the charge(s).
3. Upon service of the Notice of Intent, the Division Commander or their designee will:
b) Direct the employee to either request or waive the hearing in writing by signing
the Notice of Intent accordingly;
(2) The employee will sign a receipt for the copy of the internal
investigative file, and the file will be returned to the Division
Commander or their designee at the conclusion of the hearing who will
return the file to the Internal Affairs Unit; and,
(3) The file copy will not be duplicated in any manner and will only be
given to the employee.
d) Schedule an Administrative Hearing for personnel within five (5) working days
and notify the employee of the date, time and location of the hearing. The
hearing shall be conducted within one week unless adequate documented
justification is provided.
4. The purpose of the hearing is to ensure that the employee’s side of the incident is fully
presented.
a) The employee shall be furnished a copy of the charges prior to the hearing;
1. Immediately following the hearing, the Division Commander or their designee will
ensure that the taped proceedings are transcribed and a copy placed in the file for review
by the affected employee’s chain of command.
2. A reasonable length of time will be allowed for the Chain of Command to complete a
thorough review and evaluation.
3. The Division Commander or their designee shall establish a deadline for the completion
of reviews, concurrently documenting and tracking its progress (this should not exceed
one (1) week).
4. In the event that the evaluation process exceeds one (1) week, the Division Commander
or their designee shall submit an explanation in memorandum form through his/her Chain
of Command to the Chief of Police.
2. The Division Commander, or their designee, shall ensure that the employee’s copy of the
file is returned to the Internal Affairs Unit.
3. The Division Commander or their designee will review and draft his/her
recommendations on the “Administrative Evaluation Form” (LRPD Form 5030-14).
4. The Division Commander’s or their designee’s copy of the file and recommendations will
be forwarded to the appropriate Bureau Chief.
5. The Bureau Chief will make a final determination on any corrective action or discipline
resulting in an oral or written reprimand.
6. The Chief of Police will make a final determination on any recommended discipline that
may result in a suspension, demotion or termination.
D. A record of disciplinary hearings will be maintained in the original investigative file. The final
action taken will be noted and the Human Resources Department will be notified by the Office of
the Chief of Police, when appropriate.
E. An appeal of a disciplinary decision (of three working days or greater) shall be heard before the
Civil Service Commission, providing the officer wishes to appeal.
B. Supervisors may use the following corrective actions as a precursor to disciplinary action.
b) Employee’s attitude towards the work place, supervisors and other employees;
and,
2. Training - A supervisor may use training as a corrective action in those areas involving
minor procedural violations in Department policy. Corrective training may include areas
involving radio procedure or report writing. Supervisors may conduct informal training
themselves or schedule the employee for formal documented training through the
Training Division.
A. Employees are subject to disciplinary action for the commission or omission of any act that is
prohibited or required.
B. Non-compliance with any Order, the Rules and Regulations, Departmental procedures, other
Departmental or City directives, Administrative Regulations, the City of Little Rock Personnel
Manual or the Civil Service Rules and Regulations may also result in disciplinary action.
C. It is the Department’s intent to administer discipline in a manner that is both consistent and fair to
the employee, the Department and the citizens we serve.
1. When determining the type of discipline necessary, it should be appropriate to the offense
and intended to correct the problem. Disciplinary actions may take one of the following
forms as outlined in the Civil Service Commission Rules and Regulations (CSCRR) and
the Administrative Personnel Policy and Procedure Manual:
(2) An employee who receives an oral reprimand has the right to have the
reprimand repeated in front of an employee of their choosing.
(2) In discipline cases, the Chain of Command shall not consider a written
reprimand given prior to a twelve consecutive month period free of any
disciplinary action.
c) Suspension - In the interest of good discipline, the Chief of Police may suspend
an employee without pay for any length of time up to thirty (30) calendar days.
An employee who is suspended shall be given written notice of the reasons for
the action and of his/her right to appeal this action if the suspension is for three
(3) working days or more.
e) Dismissal - The Chief of Police may dismiss an employee for just cause,
pursuant to Section 1 of Chapter 6 (CSCRR), provided any disciplinary action
taken by the Chief of Police, which is reviewable by the Commission, can be
supported by evidence strong enough to bear the burden of proof of just cause
for such disciplinary action. When an employee is dismissed, he will receive the
following:
D. All discipline related to citizen complaints will be reviewed and coordinated through the Chief of
Police or his/her designee.
2. The Chief of Police or his/her designee will make official notification on all employee
terminations.
A. Upon receipt of written notification from the Chief of Police, of a dismissal, demotion or
suspension for three (3) calendar days or more, the officer shall have the right to reply in writing
and request a hearing before the Civil Service Commission.
B. Any such written reply shall be a part of the record before the Commission in the event of an
appeal hearing.
C. A request for a hearing shall be directed to the Human Resources Director and must be received in
the Human Resources Department within ten (10) calendar days from the date of notice of the
disciplinary action. The right of appeal will be forfeited if the written appeal is not received by the
Human Resources Director within the ten (10) calendar day period for requesting a hearing.
D. In the event a request for hearing is made, the Commission shall, within fifteen (15) calendar days
of receipt of the request, schedule a date for the hearing. The hearing date will not be within this
fifteen (15) calendar day period.
E. When an officer files a written notice of appeal to the Civil Service Commission, the officer may
make a written request to the Professional Standards Section for a copy of the internal
investigative file.
1. The copy of the investigative file will be supplied in an electronic format when available.
2. The employee will sign a receipt for the file and will return the file to the Internal Affairs
Unit within forty-eight (48) hours after the ruling of the Civil Service Commission.
3. The file copy will not be duplicated in any manner and will not be disseminated to
anyone, except the employee or their attorney.
F. If the officer desires to appeal the Civil Service Commission’s ruling to Circuit Court, he/she may
make a second written request for the investigative file.
1. The copy of the investigative file will be supplied in an electronic format when available.
2. The employee will sign a receipt for the file and will return the file to the Internal Affairs
Unit within forty-eight (48) hours after the ruling of the Circuit Court.
3. The file copy will not be duplicated in any manner and will not be disseminated to
anyone, except the employee or their attorney.
A. An appeal of the disciplinary decision by the Chief of Police upon the non-sworn employee shall
be conducted in accordance with Section V. 4 (c) of the Administrative Personnel Policy and
Procedure Manual.
1. A non-sworn employee shall have ten (10) working days to exercise his/her right of
appeal to the Director of Human Resources.
A. The Professional Standards Section shall submit a monthly report to the Office of the Chief of
Police of the disposition of all Departmental investigations, excluding officer-involved accident
investigations. This report will contain the following categories:
1. Complaint number;
2. Date received;
4. Officer(s) involved;
6. Status of investigation;
B. The Professional Standards Section is responsible for compiling an annual statistical report, based
upon Internal Affairs records for the past year, for submission to the Office of the Chief of Police.
1. This report shall be disseminated to all Division Commanders and to the Public Affairs
Office.
2. Departmental employees and the public shall be provided this information, but only upon
request.
A. Records
1. The IA Pro System shall be utilized for the recording of a complaint and the action taken
on the complaint;
2. The original Citizen Complaint form will be placed in the investigative file, if applicable;
and,
3. The complainant will be provided with written verification that the complaint has been
received for processing. The complainant will receive a receipt of their complaint, which
will include an explanation of the investigative process and review.
B. Investigation Period
a) Any need to extend the investigation beyond the established time frame will be
documented and permitted only after approval by the Chief of Police.
b) Upon the determination that the complaint cannot be completed within the
established time frame, a written response shall be provided to the complainant
notifying them of the delay.
C. Response
1. When a final decision has been rendered and/or final action taken, the citizen and the
officer will be advised in writing of such decision or action, which will include the
following information:
d) That the complainant has the right to appeal the results of the investigation to the
Civil Service Commission pursuant to the guidelines outlined in the Civil
Service Commission Rules and Regulations.
2. The notification will be made by the Chief of Police, Professional Standards Section
and/or Division Commander, whichever may apply.
D. The confidentiality of all Internal Affairs records is vital, and proper security precautions should
be taken. Internal Affairs case files and records shall be maintained in a secured office or area
assigned solely to the Internal Affairs Unit. Access to this area shall be limited to the following
personnel:
E. The information contained in any internal investigative file shall not be used by anyone to the
detriment of any complaining citizen or witness. This shall not be construed as preventing the
Internal Affairs Unit from pursuing criminal charges based upon the information contained in the
file.
F. Employee personnel files shall be maintained securely in the Office of the Chief of Police. Access
shall be limited to the Office of the Chief of Police and administration supervisory personnel.
1. Personnel investigative files in the Internal Affairs Unit, including all reproduced copies,
shall be purged after fifty-four (54) months, unless ordered prior to the purge period by a
court of competent jurisdiction, to maintain particular file(s) longer.
A. In those instances where the initial investigation establishes that the criminal allegations are
unfounded, the facts will be evaluated by investigating personnel to determine whether sufficient
evidence exists or may be obtained to pursue prosecution of the complainant pursuant to A.C.A.
§5-54-122 (Filing False Report with Law Enforcement Agency), or other appropriate violations.
In the event that such a prosecution is viable, the Major Crimes Division will conduct the
necessary investigation and will be responsible for submitting the case file to the Prosecuting
Attorney for review and determination of charges in accordance with established procedures.
1. The above review will be strictly limited to those cases where an individual’s allegations
of criminal conduct by an employee of this Department have been disproved.
3. All investigations of this type will be reviewed by the Bureau Chief prior to submission
to the Prosecuting Attorney.
A. The purpose of the Early Intervention System is to provide the Department with a procedure that:
2. Provides for supervisory review at all levels in the Chain of Command; and,
B. The intent of the Early Intervention System is to ensure that the Little Rock Police Department is
not faced with a serious case of misconduct that reveals an escalating pattern of misconduct that
could have been abated through earlier intervention. No disciplinary action may be imposed as a
result of a review under the Early Intervention System criteria. Any disciplinary action should
have been previously imposed at the time of the original incident.
1. Utilization of the Early Intervention System does not alter the critical role of supervisors
in directly monitoring the performance and behavior of personnel under their command.
2. Supervisory and management personnel shall be familiar with alternatives and authorized
actions they may take in response to personnel exhibiting behavioral and/or performance-
based problems with or without information provided by the Early Intervention Program.
C. The Early Intervention System will apply to all employees of the Police Department.
1. An employee is the subject of two (2) or more sustained internal or four (4) or more
sustained divisional investigations or six (6) or more Departmental investigations
involving misconduct, or quality of service within any twelve (12) month period.
2. An employee is involved in four (4) or more police vehicle pursuits within any twelve
(12) month period, in which there are sustained violations.
3. An employee is involved in three (3) or more on-duty motor vehicle accidents during any
twelve (12) month period, where the employee's actions were determined to be a
contributing factor or the fault was undetermined.
4. An employee is involved in two (2) or more bias complaints within a six (6) month
period.
5. An employee is involved in five (5) or more use of force incidents in a six (6) month
period.
E. The Internal Affairs Unit will be responsible for maintaining and monitoring all data pertinent to
automatic activations of the Early Intervention System. Internal Affairs will ensure that automatic
activations are conducted in a timely manner and will monitor the process to ensure that all
provisions of this General Order are followed.
1. Supervisors of the Little Rock Police Department will continuously monitor the
performance and behavior of all personnel under their command. Supervisors have
available to them, as part of their Blue Team access, the Early Intervention Dashboard
that gives them an overview of the employee’s current status concerning the events that
activate an alert in the system.
F. First-line supervisors must be cognizant of potential problems that may impact an employee’s
daily work performance. The Early Intervention System may also be activated at the request of
any supervisor. This request will then be forwarded through the Chain of Command for the
approval of the Chief of Police, whenever any of the following behaviors, incidents or situations
can be documented:
5. The failure of previous attempts to correct substandard performance through the use of
performance review, training or discipline;
6. Any other sudden or unusual change in behavior, which, in the opinion of a supervisor,
adversely affects the employee’s performance or the performance of other members of
the Department; and/or,
7. Any employee who, upon periodic supervisory review of his/her sick leave usage,
exhibits a pattern of usage suggesting a definite and/or possible abuse of the Department's
sick leave policy.
G. Each first-line supervisor will maintain an Early Intervention System file on each employee
assigned to his/her command. This file will be the repository for documented incidents that meet
the criteria for Early Intervention System consideration. This will be the same file used for
employee performance evaluations and will be considered and treated as a confidential employee
record. In the event of an employee transfer, this file will be hand delivered to the Division
Commander in charge of the employee’s new area of assignment by the employee’s former
Division Commander. These files will include the following documentation concerning the
employee:
5. Referrals to EAP;
H. All supervisory requests for activation of the Early Intervention system will be forwarded from the
Chief of Police to the Internal Affairs Unit. The Internal Affairs Unit will ensure the timely
activation of the System and will monitor the process to ensure that all provisions of this General
Order are followed.
I. Upon activation of the Early Intervention System, an Internal Affairs Unit supervisor will review
the alert and determine if an Employee Analysis Report (LRPD Form 5030-21) for the affected
employee should be completed. The Internal Affairs supervisor should consider in his review the
employee’s actual involvement, whether or not discipline was administered and any other factors
that could cause public concern. The Internal Affairs supervisor will complete a memorandum
detailing his review of the alert and forward a copy to the Chief of Police. If it is determined that
an Employee Analysis Report should be compiled, the report will include a summary of, at a
minimum, the following information:
1. General employment history, including all assignments and transfers, leave use of all
types and leave available;
2. All citizen complaints and internal or divisional investigations involving the employee;
3. A synopsis of all use of force incidents involving the employee during the last six (6)
months;
J. The Internal Affairs Unit will compile the Employee Analysis Report and deliver a copy of the
report to the Chief of Police. Once reviewed by the Chief of Police or his designee, the report will
be forwarded to the employee’s Division Commander.
1. The Division Commander will ensure that each of the employee’s current supervisors
(first-line supervisor or sergeant upwards) reviews the Employee Analysis Report.
2. The employee’s immediate supervisor will prepare a written evaluation of the Employee
Analysis Report and recommendations for remedial action which may include the
following:
a) Conclusion that the employee’s actions does not warrant immediate need for
corrective action;
e) Reassignment or transfer.
3. Supervisors may obtain any additional information regarding the employee as may be
necessary to appropriately complete an evaluation.
4. Supervisors may consult with Internal Affairs Unit or Training Division personnel or any
other Departmental personnel as may be appropriate during this review.
5. Once an employee has been identified by the Early Intervention system and has been
notified by their supervisor, the employee will cooperate with the supervisor and/or
Internal Affairs personnel in identifying reasons for and resolutions to Departmental
concerns regarding the employee’s actions and follow the mandated plan of action to
completion.
6. This review and written evaluation will be completed and forwarded with notations by
each supervisor through the Chain of Command to the Chief of Police within fifteen (15)
business days of the initial receipt of the Employee Analysis Report.
7. The Chief of Police will review the evaluation and the Employee Analysis Report and
will make a final determination regarding any recommendations made by supervisors.
8. In the event the review of the Employee Analysis Report results in any employee action,
the employee’s immediate supervisor will ensure that the action is completed, will
monitor the employee’s continued performance, and will provide a monthly written
follow-up evaluation through the Chain of Command to the Chief of Police for a period
of six (6) months from the original date when the Early Intervention System was
activated. Evaluation periods may be extended at the recommendation of the employee’s
Division Commander and/or the Office of the Chief of Police.
10. If it is determined, after a review of the Employee Analysis Report and other relevant
information by the employee's Chain of Command, that intervention and/or corrective
action is not necessary, then a monthly written evaluation will not be required. The
employee's Division Commander will prepare a memorandum noting his/her final
recommendations, which will then be forwarded to the Chief of Police for final approval.
K. The Professional Standards Section Commander will prepare and deliver to the Chief of Police an
annual evaluation of the Personnel Early Intervention System no later than January 31 st of each
year. This annual evaluation will assess the system’s effectiveness and recommend any changes
that may be needed to improve the system.
L. The Professional Standards Section will maintain all original documentation pertaining to the
Personnel Early Intervention System and Employee Analysis Reports for a period of sixty (60)
months. Information regarding employees will be maintained in a confidential manner.
M. The Personnel Early Intervention system will not be used as a form of harassment or retaliation
against any employee and all employee actions taken as a result of the Early Intervention System
will conform with the Departmental General Orders, Rules and Regulations and with applicable
City of Little Rock policies.
N. Any exceptions to the evaluation timelines established in this General Order will require the prior
written approval of the Chief of Police.
I. Purpose
A. The purpose of this Policy is to provide a healthy work environment, which will provide all
employees the opportunity to perform their duties to their fullest potential, and to establish
procedures for the reporting, investigation and resolution of complaints of racial or sexual
harassment, as defined by this General Order.
B. It is the policy of the City of Little Rock that all employees shall have the right to work in an
environment free of all forms of harassment. The Department views racial and sexual harassment
as serious misconduct, which will not be tolerated. Therefore, the Department shall take the
necessary steps to prevent such behavior, and to remedy all reported instances of racial, sexual or
any other form of harassment.
A. No employee shall either explicitly or implicitly ridicule, mock, deride or belittle any person.
B. Employees shall not make offensive or derogatory comments based on race, color, creed, sex,
religion, national origin, age, disability, marital status, sexual orientation, gender identity, genetic
information, political opinions or affiliation, either directly or indirectly, to or about another
person. Such harassment is a prohibited form of discrimination, under state and federal
employment laws, and is also considered gross misconduct subject to disciplinary action by this
Department.
III. Definitions
A. General harassment is defined as any annoying, persistent act or action that singles out an
employee, to that employee’s objection or detriment, because of race, color, creed, sex, religion,
national origin, age, disability, marital status, sexual orientation, gender identity, genetic
information, political opinions or affiliation. Harassment may include, but is not limited to: verbal
abuse, ridicule, interference with an employee’s work, or the making of innuendoes.
B. Sexual harassment is defined as unwelcome and unsolicited sexual advances, requests for sexual
favors, and other verbal or physical conduct of a sexual nature when:
3. Such conduct has the purpose, or effect, of unreasonably interfering with an employee’s
work performance or creating an intimidating, hostile, or offensive working environment.
A. All employees are responsible for avoiding situations which involve actual or apparent racial or
sexual harassment, and shall assist in the prevention of harassment by:
3. Encouraging any employee, who confides that he is being harassed, to report these acts to
a supervisor.
B. Supervisory employees shall ensure that each work place has an atmosphere free from racial or
sexual harassment for all employees. Supervisors shall monitor the unit work environment and
shall stop any acts, whenever they observe or are made aware of any action,that may be considered
harassment by taking appropriate steps to intervene, whether or not the involved employees are
within his line of supervision.
C. Supervisors shall counsel all employees on the types of prohibited behavior and the Department’s
procedures for reporting and resolving complaints of harassment, and shall take immediate action
to limit the contact between two employees, where there has been a complaint of harassment,
pending the outcome of an investigation.
D. Every supervisor has the responsibility to assist any employee of this Department, who comes to
him with a complaint of harassment, in documenting and filing a complaint for investigation.
E. Failure on the part of any employee to take action to stop known harassment and/or to report such
to a supervisor shall be grounds for disciplinary action.
V. Complaint Procedures
A. Employees encountering any form of harassment, as defined by this Order, shall tell the person(s)
engaging in such conduct that their actions are unwelcome and offensive.
B. Any employee, who believes that he is being harassed, shall report the incident(s) without delay to
his supervisor, as soon as possible, so that steps may be taken to protect the employee from further
harassment and appropriate investigative measures can be initiated. Where this is not practical, the
employee may file a written complaint with any supervisor, or with the Office of the Chief of
Police. Should an employee feel that they can not file such a complaint with any departmental
supervisor or the Chief of Police, he/she may go directly to the City of Little Rock Human
Resources Department.
C. Any supervisor who has had a harassment complaint reported to them will document the
complaint and forward the record without recommendation to the Office of the Chief of Police.
1. The original complaint will then be forwarded to the Human Resources Department for
investigation.
2. A copy of the complaint will be forwarded to the Professional Standards Section for
tracking purposes only.
3. The Human Resources Department will be responsible for the investigation of the
complaint and will notify the office of the Chief of Police of its findings.
4. The Office of the Chief of Police will notify the Professional Standards Section as to the
disposition of the complaint and any disciplinary or corrective measure, which may result.
D. Retaliation against any employee, who has filed a harassment complaint, or those who assisted,
testified, or participated in the investigation of such, is prohibited.
E. This policy does not preclude any employee from filing a complaint or grievance through the City
of Little Rock Human Resources Department, the City Manager’s Office or with an appropriate
outside agency.
A. If after an investigation Human Resources or the Professional Standard Section determines that the
complainant is not factual, or that an employee has made false statements regarding the complaint,
disciplinary action may be taken against the individual who filed the complaint or the individual
who has given false information.
B. If Professional Standards determines that the complainant is not factual, or that an employee has
made false statements regarding the complaint, Professional Standards may recommend to the
Office of the Chief of Police that a criminal investigation be initiated against the individual who
filed the complaint or the individual who has given false information.
I. Purpose
A. This Order shall establish guidelines for a random drug and alcohol testing program for all sworn
and selected civilian members of the Little Rock Police Department.
B. This section of the Little Rock Police Department General Orders is also designed to establish
procedures for the proper handling of a positive test result, failure to report for testing, refusal to
submit to testing, tampering or adulterating a test sample, and subsequent disciplinary action.
A. The overall administration of the City of Little Rock’s drug and alcohol testing policy shall fall
under the direct authority of the Human Resources Department, who shall ensure adherence to the
City’s policy by the involved departments.
B. The primary responsibility of the Little Rock Police Department is public safety, to serve and
protect the community and to remain responsive to the needs of all citizens. This responsibility
empowers sworn members of the Department with both the authority to arrest and to use deadly
force.
C. Police agencies, such as the Little Rock Police Department, also hold a public trust to ensure that
individuals sworn to uphold the law must themselves obey those same laws. Employees of the
Little Rock Police Department hold a personal responsibility to perform at the highest levels of
which they are capable. These personal responsibilities are most critical when it becomes
necessary for a citizen or Department member to depend upon another member of the Little Rock
Police Department.
D. For these reasons, it is the policy of the Department that all sworn and selected civilian members
undergo random breath and urinalysis testing for illegal drug/controlled substance, anabolic
steroids and/or alcohol abuse. This testing is to ensure that all employees holding access to or
control over any item of evidence, contraband, currency, or having access to information
concerning ongoing criminal investigations and criminal cases are physically unimpaired, have
unimpaired judgment, and possess the integrity to fulfill their duties and responsibilities.
III. Definitions
A. Calendar Year - Each year beginning on January 1 and ending on December 31.
B. Sworn Member - Any officer, of any rank, who possesses the authority to bear arms and has arrest
powers.
C. Civilian Employee - A Police Department employee who is not a sworn officer and whose conduct
is governed by the provisions of the Code of Conduct for Civilian Employees, the Civil Service
Commission Rules and Regulations, the Ordinances of the City of Little Rock, and/or the laws of
the State of Arkansas, or the United States, and Departmental policies, procedures and directives,
and the Administrative Personnel Policy and Procedures, whichever shall apply.
D. Split Specimen - A collection method of maintaining two separate containers of urine from the
tested subject. This allows for retesting should the need arise.
F. Negative Test Result - Indicates there is no presence of illegal drugs or controlled substances
within the urine screen, or the amount present does not exceed set detection limits.
G. Positive Test Result - Result of an initial screening method, which detects the presence of an illegal
drug, controlled substance, or anabolic steroids in the urine screen.
H. Invalid/Cancelled Drug Test Result – The result of a drug test for a urine specimen that contains an
unidentified adulterant or an unidentified interfering substance, has abnormal physical
characteristics, or has an endogenous substance at an abnormal concentration that prevents the
laboratory from completing or obtaining a valid test result. It could also be the result of a broken
vial, or a loss of urine (spillage) at the laboratory.
I. Confirmed Positive Test Result - Result of a confirmation test, which detects the presence of an
illegal drug, controlled substance, or anabolic steroids in the urine screen that exceeds set
detection limits.
J. Verified, Confirmed Positive Test - A confirmed positive test which has been verified by a
Medical Review Officer.
K. Medical Review Officer (M.R.O.) - A licensed physician, employed by the laboratory, with
knowledge of substance abuse disorders and the appropriate medical training to interpret and
evaluate all confirmed positive test results.
M. Reasonable Suspicion - A suspicion, based on facts or circumstances, which gives rise to more
than a bare suspicion. Facts to consider while determining the reasonableness of this suspicion
include, but are not limited to, the following: absenteeism, abnormal erratic behavior, reliable
information from cooperating individuals, citizens complaints, accidents, physical symptoms, and
discovery of incriminating evidence.
N. Negligent Work Practices – Those acts or practices which constitute an apparent violation of
Department Rules and Regulations or General Orders.
O. Refusal to Submit to Testing – Failure to appear for any test after being directed, failure to provide
a urine or breath sample for any test required, refusing to provide a minimum of 40 ml of urine,
failure to take a second test when directed to do so, failure to remain at the testing site until the
testing process is complete, failure to cooperate with any part of the testing process.
A. Random Testing
1. Selected sworn and civilian employees will provide a breath sample, blood or urine
specimen which will be screened for illegal drugs and alcohol. These members may be
randomly tested monthly through a contract firm/laboratory. This random drug and
alcohol testing program in no way supersedes or eliminates any employee from being
subject to reasonable suspicion testing by a departmental supervisor.
2. On a yearly basis, approximately fifty five percent of all sworn personnel and fifty
percent of all civilian personnel will be selected to participate in the Random Drug and
Alcohol Testing.
1. The Chief of Police reserves the right to require a police officer or employee to undergo
drug and/or alcohol testing, if there is “reasonable suspicion” to believe that such
employee is under the influence of drugs or alcohol during work hours. The initial
determination of whether or not reasonable suspicion exists may be made by the Division
Commander or in his absence the highest-ranking supervisory officer on duty at the time.
3. The Chief of Police or his/her designee is the sole person to require a sworn officer or
civilian to undergo drug testing, if there is “reasonable suspicion” to believe that such
employee is under the influence of Anabolic Steroids.
4. Any supervisor who has reasonable cause to believe an employee may be under the
influence of Anabolic Steroids, will document all facts and circumstances, and forward
this information through the employee’s chain of command to the Chief of Police. The
employee will be immediately placed on Administrative Leave with pay pending a final
decision.
6. A supervisor shall accompany the employee to the approved collection site. The
employee will be placed on administrative leave with pay pending the test results.
Nothing in this General Order shall restrict a supervisor from ordering immediate drug
and/or alcohol testing when it is deemed reasonable.
1. Any employee of the Department who is involved in a work related incident, resulting in
physical injury to any person, through apparently negligent work practices, will be
automatically tested, as soon as practical, following the incident.
a) The On-Duty Shift Commander or, in his absence, the Acting Shift Commander
will be responsible for determining whether an incident meets the criteria for
post injury accident screening.
2. Any employee, who is involved in an on-duty or off-duty traffic accident, while operating
a city owned, rented, leased or seized vehicle, which results in physical injury to any
person or in serious damage to the vehicle and/or the vehicle being immobilized to the
point that it has to be towed from the scene, will be automatically tested, as soon as
practical, following the accident.
1. The Professional Standards representative will provide the “City of Little Rock Donor
Information For Collection Site” form, and the “Little Rock Police Department
Notification to Report for Random Drug and Alcohol Testing” form, to the appropriate
supervisor, when Departmental personnel are randomly selected for drug and alcohol
testing.
2. When employees are notified of a random drug and alcohol test, or are subject to a post-
accident or reasonable suspicion drug and alcohol test, or an anabolic steroids test, the
notifying supervisor will provide the employee with the “City of Little Rock Donor
Information For Collection Site” form.
3. It will be the responsibility of the involved supervisor to complete and provide the “City
of Little Rock Donor Information For Collection Site” form to the affected employee.
4. The “City of Little Rock Donor Information For Collection Site” form will be submitted
to the collection site by the employee.
V. Testing Notification
A. The contract firm will maintain and execute a random selection process from which employees will
be selected. The contract firm will maintain two separate lists of sworn personnel and civilian
personnel for random drug testing. The Department’s Professional Standard Section
representative will receive notification of personnel who have been randomly selected for testing.
Selected sworn and civilian members will be notified in person by a supervisor or Professional
Standards representative after supervisor notification. Selected employees will be tested during
their normally scheduled duty hours.
B. Notification to Report Form - This form will serve as notice to the employee that he has been
randomly selected to participate in the Random Drug and Alcohol Testing Program. A supervisor
or a Professional Standards representative will present the form to the employee. This notice serves
as a direct order, by authority of the Chief of Police, to provide a breath and urine sample at the
specified collection location. This notice further provides instructions for the employees to report
to the specified collection location within one hour.
1. Employees who are working an approved light duty TDY Departmental assignment
subsequent to their assignment to the Headquarters Division’s Extended Leave Unit are
subject to Random Drug Testing. These employees will be notified by the Headquarters
Division, Operations Support Lieutenant, his designee or a Professional Standards
representative.
C. Documented Absence Form - Any selected employee on extended pre-approved leave, (i.e. sick
leave, military leave, vacation leave) may be excused if the employee is not physically on duty and
available at work. Any other absence, such as subpoena for court appearance, may be excused with
approval of the Division Commander. A form filled out by the appropriate supervisor will
document the absence. This form will be sent through the chain of command for review by the
Professional Standards Section representative.
D. If a sworn member becomes involved in a police incident (traffic stop, waved down, etc.), while
traveling to the testing facility, the sworn member will immediately call for a unit and supervisor.
The sworn member will then relinquish the incident to the unit and continue to the collection
location. The supervisor will ensure that the sworn member is released from the scene with
instructions to continue to the collection location.
E. Failure to Report - Any selected employee who fails to report for drug and alcohol testing, in
accordance with this Order, will be subject to disciplinary action up to and including dismissal.
F. Refusal to Submit to Testing - Refusal by any selected employee to submit to drug and alcohol
testing, in accordance with this Order, will result in the employee being immediately placed on
administrative leave. The employee will be subject to disciplinary action up to and including
termination.
A. Procedures for providing random urine specimens must allow individual privacy, unless there is
reason to believe a particular employee may alter or substitute the specimen to be provided.
Precautions will be taken to ensure that a urine specimen has not been adulterated or diluted during
the collection procedure, and that all information on the urine bottle and in the logbook can be
identified as belonging to a given employee. To ensure that unadulterated specimens are obtained,
the following procedures outline the minimum precautions that shall be taken during the collection
of urine specimens:
1. At the collection site, toilet-bluing agents shall be placed in the toilet tanks, wherever
possible, so the reservoir of water in the toilet bowl always remains blue. There should
not be any other source of water (e.g. shower, sink, etc.) in the enclosure where urination
occurs.
2. When the employee arrives at the collection site, collection site personnel shall request
the employee to present some type of photo identification (employee photo identification
or driver’s license.) This shall be noted on the chain of custody form. If the employee fails
to appear within the required time period, collection site personnel shall contact the
appropriate authority to obtain guidance on action to be taken.
3. The collection site person shall ask the employee to remove garments (e.g., coat, jacket)
that might conceal items or substances that could be used to tamper with or adulterate his
urine specimen. Also, all personal belongings (e.g. purse, briefcase) must remain with the
garments. The collection site person shall note any unusual behavior or appearance.
4. The employee shall be instructed to wash and dry his hands prior to urination.
5. After washing hands, the employee shall remain in the presence of the collection site
person and not have access to water fountains, faucets, soap dispensers, cleaning agents,
chemical agents, or other sources of adulteration.
6. The employee may provide his specimen in the privacy of a stall, or otherwise partitioned
area, that allows for privacy.
7. Upon receiving the specimen from the employee, the collection site person will determine
that it contains at least 40 to 60 milliliters of urine. If there is not sufficient urine in the
container, additional urine should be collected. The employee may be given reasonable
amounts of liquid (e.g., a glass of water), and must remain in the testing area under the
supervision of the collection site personnel. If an employee fails, for any reason, to
provide the necessary specimen, collection site personnel shall contact the appropriate
authority to obtain guidance on action to be taken.
8. After the specimen has been provided and submitted to the collection site person, the
employee should be allowed to wash his hands.
9. Immediately after collection, collection site personnel shall measure the temperature of
the specimen, conduct an inspection to determine the specimen’s color, and inspect it for
signs of contaminants. Any unusual findings, resulting from the inspection, must be
included on the chain of custody form. The time from urination to delivery of the sample
for temperature measurements is critical and in no case should exceed four minutes. If the
temperature of the specimen is outside the range of 32.5 - 37.7 degrees C/ 90.5 - 99.8
degrees F, this gives rise to reasonable suspicion of adulteration/substitution, and another
specimen should be collected under direct observation, and both specimens forwarded to
the laboratory. Any specimen suspected to be adulterated should always be forwarded for
testing. When reasonable suspicion is established, the second specimen must be obtained
under direct observation.
10. Both the individual being tested and the collection site person should keep the specimen
in view at all times prior to it being sealed and labeled. If the specimen is transferred to a
second container, the collection site person shall request the employee to observe the
transfer of the specimen and placement of the tamper-proof seal over the bottle cap and
down the sides of the bottle. The collection site person will place the identification label
securely on the bottle.
11. The identification label should contain the date, employee’s specimen number, and any
other identifying information required. The employee shall initial the label on the
specimen bottle.
12. The collection site person will enter the identifying information in a ledger. Both the
collection site person and the employee shall sign the ledger next to the identifying
information.
13. The individual shall be asked to read and sign a certification statement regarding his urine
specimen.
14. The collection site person shall complete the appropriate chain of custody form.
15. The urine specimen and chain of custody form are now ready for shipment. If the
specimen is not immediately prepared for shipment, it will be appropriately secured
during temporary storage.
16. While performing any part of the chain of custody procedures, it is essential that the urine
specimen and custody documents be under the control of the involved collection site
person. If the involved collection site person must leave his workstation momentarily, the
specimen and custody form must remain with him or must be secured. After the collection
site personnel returns to the workstation, the custody process will continue. If the site
person is leaving for an extended period of time, he should package the specimen for
delivery prior to leaving.
B. Any employee who is unable to provide a urine specimen due to a medical condition, must
immediately upon diagnosis or upon being hired, if the condition is pre-existing, provide the
Professional Standards Section with documentation from his/her physician to keep on file. When
the employee is selected to participate in the Random Drug Testing, the Professional Standards
representative will contact the contract firm/laboratory to arrange for a blood test to be
performed. The employee must notify the Professional Standards representative as soon as
possible, regarding any changes in their medical condition that affects their participation in the
Random Drug Testing.
C. Collection Control - Collection site personnel shall always attempt to have the container or
specimen bottle within sight before and after the employee has urinated. The containers shall be
tightly capped, properly sealed, and labeled. A chain of custody form shall be utilized for
maintaining control and accountability from point of collection to final disposition of specimens.
With each transfer of possession, the chain of custody form shall be dated, signed by the person
releasing the specimen, signed by the individual accepting the specimen, and the purpose for
transferring possession noted. Every effort should be made to minimize the number of persons
handling specimens.
b) Confirmation step.
2. The urine sample is first tested using a screening procedure. A specimen testing positive
will undergo an additional confirmation test. An initial positive report should not be
considered positive; rather, it should be classified as “confirmation pending”.
3. The confirmation procedure should be technologically different from the initial screening
test. In those cases where the second test confirms the presence of a drug or drugs in the
sample, the sample will be retained for further testing in case of dispute.
5. The laboratory selected to conduct the analysis will be experienced and capable of quality
control, documentation, chain of custody, technical expertise, and demonstrated
proficiency in urinalysis testing.
a) The M.R.O. will examine alternate medical explanations for any confirmed
positive test result, or an invalid/cancelled test result.
(1) This action will include conducting a medical interview, a review of the
individual’s medical history (including a review of the individual’s
legally prescribed medication), and a review of any other relevant
biomedical factors.
(2) The M.R.O. will make the final decision whether to verify the test result
as confirmed positive.
(3) If the M.R.O confirms the test to be invalid, the employee is subject to
be tested again, as soon as possible, to determine whether the sample is
a confirmed positive or negative test result.
b) Verified, confirmed positive test results will be retained by the laboratory for a
time period of 5 years.
c) Verified, confirmed, positive test results are for administrative purposes only and
will not be used against the employee in any criminal proceedings.
8. An employee, whose test is verified as confirmed positive, may request that the split
specimen be tested by an alternate National Laboratory Certification Program (NLCP)
certified laboratory. In order to effect such a request for testing of the split specimen, the
employee must do the following:
a) Submit a written request to the Chief of Police within ten (10) working days of
notification of such result.
b) The written request must include the NLCP - certified laboratory that has been
chosen by the employee.
(1) The contract laboratory will transport the split specimen to the alternate
NLCP - certified laboratory chosen by the employee for testing.
(3) Retesting expenses of the split specimen will be paid for by the
Department unless the test shows to be positive. In the case of a
positive test, it will be the responsibility of the employee to incur the
cost of the test.
1. Where a positive report is received, urine specimens shall be maintained under secured
storage for a period of 42 months, or until ordered destroyed by the Office of the Chief of
Police.
2. Each step in the collecting and processing of the urine specimens shall be documented to
establish procedural integrity and the chain of evidence.
A. When the employee arrives at the collection site, collection site personnel shall request the
employee to present some type of photo identification (employee photo identification or driver’s
license.) This shall be noted on the chain of custody form. If the employee fails to appear within
the required time period, collection site personnel shall contact the appropriate authority to
obtain guidance on action to be taken.
B. Collection site personnel will only use non-alcohol swabs to prepare the injection site for
specimen collection.
C. Both the individual being tested and the collection site person should keep the specimen in view at
all times prior to it being sealed and labeled. If the specimen is transferred to a second container,
the collection site person shall request the employee to observe the transfer of the specimen and
placement of the tamper-proof seal over the bottle cap and down the sides of the bottle. The
collection site person will place the identification label securely on the bottle.
D. The identification label should contain the date, employee’s specimen number, and any other
identifying information required. The employee shall initial the label on the specimen bottle.
E. The collection site person will enter the identifying information in a ledger. Both the collection
site person and the employee shall sign the ledger next to the identifying information.
F. The individual shall be asked to read and sign a certification statement regarding his blood
specimen.
G. The collection site person shall complete the appropriate chain of custody form.
H. The blood specimen and chain of custody form are now ready for shipment. If the specimen is not
immediately prepared for shipment, it will be appropriately secured during temporary storage.
I. While performing any part of the chain of custody procedures, it is essential that the blood
specimen and custody documents be under the control of the involved collection site person. If the
involved collection site person must leave his workstation momentarily, the specimen and custody
form must remain with him or must be secured. After the collection site personnel returns to the
workstation, the custody process will continue. If the site person is leaving for an extended period
of time, he should package the specimen for delivery prior to leaving.
J. Collection Control - Collection site personnel shall always attempt to have the container or
specimen bottle within sight before and after blood has been drawn. The containers shall be
tightly capped, properly sealed, and labeled. A chain of custody form shall be utilized for
maintaining control and accountability from point of collection to final disposition of specimens.
With each transfer of possession, the chain of custody form shall be dated, signed by the person
releasing the specimen, signed by the individual accepting the specimen, and the purpose for
transferring possession noted. Every effort should be made to minimize the number of persons
handling specimens.
b) Confirmation step.
2. The blood sample is first tested using a screening procedure. A specimen testing positive
will undergo an additional confirmation test. An initial positive report should not be
considered positive; rather, it should be classified as “confirmation pending”.
3. The confirmation procedure should be technologically different from the initial screening
test. In those cases where the second test confirms the presence of a drug or drugs in the
sample, the sample will be retained for further testing in case of dispute.
5. The laboratory selected to conduct the test will be experienced and capable of quality
control, documentation, chain of custody, technical expertise, and demonstrated
proficiency in blood testing.
a) The M.R.O. will examine alternate medical explanations for any confirmed
positive test result, or an invalid/cancelled test result.
(1) This action will include conducting a medical interview, a review of the
individual’s medical history (including a review of the individual’s
legally prescribed medication), and a review of any other relevant
biomedical factors.
(2) The M.R.O. will make the final decision whether to verify the test result
as confirmed positive.
(3) If the M.R.O confirms the test to be invalid, the employee is subject to
be tested again, as soon as possible, to determine whether the sample is
a confirmed positive or negative test result.
b) Verified, confirmed positive test results will be retained by the laboratory for a
time period of 5 years.
c) Verified, confirmed, positive test results are for administrative purposes only
and will not be used against the employee in any criminal proceedings.
8. An employee, whose test is verified as confirmed positive, may request that the split
specimen be tested by an alternate National Laboratory Certification Program (NLCP)
certified laboratory. In order to effect such a request for testing of the split specimen, the
employee must do the following:
a) Submit a written request to the Chief of Police within ten (10) working days of
notification of such result.
b) The written request must include the NLCP - certified laboratory that has been
chosen by the employee.
(1) The contract laboratory will transport the split specimen to the
alternate NLCP - certified laboratory chosen by the employee for
testing.
(3) Retesting expenses of the split specimen will be paid for by the
Department unless the test shows to be positive. In the case of a
positive test, it will be the responsibility of the employee to incur the
cost of the test.
1. Where a positive report is received, urine or blood specimens shall be maintained under
secured storage for a period of 42 months, or until ordered destroyed by the Office of the
Chief of Police.
2. Each step in the collecting and processing of the urine or blood specimens shall be
documented to establish procedural integrity and the chain of evidence.
A. Employees are not allowed to report for duty with the presence of alcohol in their system.
c) Never in uniform.
2. Employees returning to work, as a result of a call-out from a period of off-duty time, will
not be subject to the provisions of this portion of the Order.
B. Certified instruments and operators are in place to allow alcohol screening by breath sample to be
conducted at the same collection site where urine screening and blood testing is conducted.
1. When an employee reports for drug and alcohol screening for any of the reasons specified
in this Order, he will be required to give a breath sample in addition to the urine or blood
sample required.
2. Upon completion of the breath sample, the employee will be told whether his test was
negative or positive for the presence of alcohol.
3. If the test for alcohol is negative, the employee will return to his regularly assigned duties.
C. If the test is positive (above .02 blood alcohol content), the employee will be required to remain at
the collection site for a period of fifteen minutes, at which time a second test will be administered.
1. If the results of the second test do not confirm the first (a BAC of .02 or below), the test
process, as a whole, will be deemed negative and the employee will return to his regularly
assigned duties.
2. If the results of the second test are also above .02 BAC, then the test process, as a whole,
will be deemed to reflect a positive indication that the employee has alcohol in his system,
in violation of Departmental standards, and a supervisor will be notified immediately.
IX. Confidentiality and Maintenance of Records of Drug and Alcohol Screening Results
A. All drug screen and breath alcohol test results will be confidential, subject to prevailing law and
necessary departmental use. Drug and alcohol test results will be made available only to those
personnel assigned to inform the employee of the test results or those personnel involved in the
disciplinary process arising from such results.
B. Drug screen and breath alcohol test results shall be admissible in all disciplinary proceedings
arising from a positive drug and/or alcohol test result. Upon completion of the test, officers will
return all forms to Professional Standards through their supervisor.
C. Drug and alcohol test results shall be available to the affected employee, or the employee’s
representative, upon the presentation of properly executed release forms.
D. Drug and alcohol test results may be provided to subsequent and potential employers providing a
waiver signed by the employee is submitted, authorizing the release of these results.
E. Drug and alcohol test results shall not be utilized to support any criminal prosecution.
F. Statistical analysis of the drug and alcohol testing program results shall be available to
Departmental personnel assigned to conduct such analysis.
X. Administration of Program
A. The Department’s Professional Standards Section representative will act as a liaison between the
Police Department and the drug screening contract firm/laboratory, and will be responsible for the
following:
1. Providing a departmental roster of all sworn and selected civilian members. The roster
will identify the sworn members by a number only and will include current assignment,
watch, and days off;
3. Receiving and reviewing Notification to Report forms to ensure policy guidelines were
followed;
6. Receiving the verified and confirmed positive reports from the contract firm/laboratory
(the Office of the Chief of Police will make notification of positive test results to the
officer);
7. Scheduling consultations between the employee and the M.R.O if necessary; and,
B. The Professional Standards Section will coordinate the employee’s request for the testing of the
split specimen by a NLCP - certified laboratory.
1. Failure to Report - Any sworn member, or civilian employee, who fails to report for drug
and alcohol testing, in accordance with this order, will be subject to disciplinary action up
to and including termination.
2. Refusal to Submit to Testing - Any sworn member, or civilian employee, who refuses to
submit to drug and alcohol testing, in accordance with this order, will be subject to
disciplinary action up to and including termination.
3. Tampering, or attempted tampering, with any urine sample will result in disciplinary
action up to and including termination.
4. A verified, confirmed positive test result which indicates illegal drug use will result in
disciplinary action up to and including termination.
5. A verified, confirmed positive test result which indicates controlled substances abuse will
result in disciplinary action up to and including termination of the employee.
6. A verified, confirmed positive test result which indicates Anabolic Steroid use will result
in disciplinary action up to and including termination.
7. The confirmed presence of alcohol after random, post accident or reasonable suspicion
testing will be subject to disciplinary action up to and including termination.
8. Disciplinary action, arising as a result of this order, may be appealed by the employee
under Civil Service in accordance with the City of Little Rock Civil Service Commission
Rules and Regulations, and the employee not under Civil Service with City of Little Rock
Personnel Policy and Procedure guidelines. Verified, confirmed positive test results are
for administrative purposes only and will not be used against the employee in any
criminal proceedings.
A. The Little Rock Police Department and the City of Little Rock encourages any employee who has
a drug or alcohol problem to obtain assistance. Any employee who has not been required to
submit to a drug or alcohol test or who has tested negative but, in good faith, requests assistance
for his problem, shall be referred immediately to the Employee Assistance Program. This
voluntary admission shall not be used against the employee for disciplinary purposes (see
Employee Assistance Program Guidelines in Little Rock Police Department General Orders).
B. Any employee of this Department, who requests and receives treatment by the Employee
Assistance Program’s recommended physician, must adhere to the following guidelines prior to
returning to full time duty status:
1. The employee must complete a doctor supervised rehabilitation program, and receive a
written release detailing his completion of rehabilitation and his/her ability to return to
work.
2. After completing the rehabilitation program, and receiving the written release from the
rehabilitation program’s physician, the employee must meet with the city psychologist and
receive a written recommendation to be allowed to return to full time duty status.
C. Any employee of this Department, who requests treatment through this Section of the Little Rock
Police Department General Orders, must use accrued sick leave during his participation in a
rehabilitation program.
1. If the employee exhausts his available sick leave, and has not completed the rehabilitation
program, he may use accrued vacation/personal leave or may be granted authorized leave
without pay at the discretion of the Chief of Police.
2. Any employee of this Department, who seeks and receives treatment through this Order,
will be granted a one-time exclusion from disciplinary action. Any subsequent admission,
positive test, or other violation of this Order will result in immediate disciplinary action
up to and including termination of employment with the Little Rock Police Department.
I. Grievance Procedures
A. The following Grievance Procedures for all classes of employees shall be followed:
C. All grievances filed shall be submitted on a City of Little Rock Grievance Form and shall include:
1. A written statement of the grievance and the facts upon which it is based.
1. Acknowledging receipt of the grievance by noting the date and person receiving the
grievance.
E. The Chief of Police shall maintain a separate and secure file for all employee grievances. The
Assistant Chief of Police – Executive Bureau will, on an annual basis, formally review and
analyze all grievances, supporting policies and reporting practices, to identify specific problem
areas or patterns.
A. The purpose of this General Order is to provide the maximum psychological and physical care for
all sworn employees during and after a critical incident. The Little Rock Police Department
recognizes the high amount of stress evolving from law enforcement duties related to the
fulfillment of the Department’s mission. As a result, the following policies and procedures
regarding the response and psychological support to personnel involved in traumatic events are set
forth in this General Order.
B. This Order governs all personnel who are acting, or who may reasonably be expected to act, in the
capacity of a Peer Support Member during or after a critical incident.
C. Definitions
1. “Critical Incident,” as used in this Policy, is defined as any event that has a stressful
impact sufficient enough to overwhelm the usually effective copings skills of emergency
responders. Critical incidents are abrupt, powerful events that fall outside the range of
ordinary human experiences. These incidents create unusually strong emotional reactions
or distress, which have the potential to interfere with the ability to function during or after
the incident
2. “Critical Incident Stress,” as used in this Policy, is defined as the severe or accumulative
psychological stress or trauma an employee may experience in providing emergency
service in response to the critical incident, including crisis, disaster, or emergency. The
stress or trauma is an abnormally strong emotional, cognitive, or physical reaction that has
the potential to interfere with normal function(s) to include:
3. “Defusing,” as used in this Policy, is defined as a semi structured group discussion used
for information exchange and cathartic ventilation.
5. “Peer Support Member,” as used in this Policy, is defined as any employee who has
received training in critical incident stress management by the Arkansas Crisis Response
Team to provide emotional or moral support to a responder who needs emotional or moral
support as a result of job-related stress or an incident in which the responder was involved
while acting in his or her official capacity (A.C.A. § 16-40-106).
6. “Responder,” as used in this Policy, is defined as any employee involved in the response
to a critical incident or traumatic event (i.e. Police Officer, Dispatcher, Call Taker, Crime
Scene Technician, etc.)
A. The Peer Support Supervisor shall be responsible for providing Communications with a CISM
callout roster to facilitate the deployment of the CISM team.
B. Supervisors will request the deployment of the CISM team to the following incidents:
3. Officer Suicide.
C. Supervisors may request the deployment of the CISM team to the following incidents:
A. Statement of Philosophy
B. Purpose
1. If the officer involved is not injured, he should retire some distance from the scene to
await the arrival of the officer-in-charge of the investigation. This should be done in the
company of a companion officer chosen by the involved officer, such as a supervisor that
is not in the involved officer’s chain of command or an officer of equal rank who was not
a witness to or involved in the incident. It will be the responsibility of the field supervisor
to ensure a companion officer is made available. The purpose of a companion officer is to
serve the involved officer in a supportive role.
2. When the Major Crimes Division supervisor arrives at the scene, he will be briefed by the
field supervisor and, if he deems necessary, the involved officer will report back to the
scene and respond to the needs of the investigation. When the Major Crimes Division
supervisor determines that the involved officer is no longer needed at the scene, the
companion officer will transport him/her to the Major Crimes Division.
a) Accompany the involved officer to the Major Crimes Division offices after
release from the scene. The companion officer shall remain with the involved
officer unless the officer desires to be left alone.
b) Be responsible for acting as a calming influence and monitor the involved officer
for signs of critical incident stress or trauma. If signs of trauma or shock are
evident, appropriate medical assistance shall be summoned to the scene and the
on-scene supervisor shall be notified immediately.
4. The companion officer shall take all measures to ensure they do not:
b) Discuss the facts or specifics of the incident with the involved officer or
jeopardize the criminal investigation.
c) Make any statements that infringe on the privacy of the involved officer.
5. The involved officer will refrain from discussing the details of the incident with anyone
except Departmental personnel assigned to the investigation, the Prosecuting Attorney’s
Office, Departmentally-provided and/or personal Psychologist or counselor, the officer’s
private attorney, the officer’s chosen clergy, and the officer’s immediate family.
6. A designated representative with the F.O.P. may have contact with the involved officer
for the purpose of arranging an attorney retained by them or for assisting the companion
officer with notification and transportation of family members, if necessary.
A. This Section establishes a Peer Support Group (PSG), which will coordinate the training, response,
and available resources for all personnel.
B. Training
1. The Little Rock Police Department will provide all members of the PSG with training in
Critical Incident Stress Management and Critical Incident Debriefings.
2. The PSG will also meet semi-annually to assess the program and address any changes or
deficiencies in the program.
C. Response
1. In the event of a PSG response, the Peer Support supervisor will be notified.
2. The Peer Support Supervisor will determine the appropriate number of PSG members
and make contact with those members.
a) The Peer Support Supervisor will attempt to utilize PSG members that are on
duty at the time of the incident.
3. The level of response will be determined by the responding PSG members. Examples of
response types will include:
a) Demobilization
b) Defusing
g) Follow-up or Referral
4. The PSG member shall not be compelled to disclose any communication made to the
member by the responder while engaged in a peer support event. However an immediate
supervisor will be notified if: (A.C.A. 16-40-106)
a) The PSG member was an initial responder, witness, or involved in the critical
incident that prompted the PSG activation; or
b) A crime has been committed and the crime is divulged to the certified PSG
member; or
5. At the conclusion of any PSG response, the responding members will notify the Peer
Support Supervisor.
V. Employee Resources
A. All personnel shall be provided with the resources necessary to obtain assistance in dealing with
the effects of traumatic events. These resources include, but are not limited to, the following:
VI. Training
A. The Training Division will ensure all responders receive training in Critical Incident Stress:
I. Purpose
A. To maintain a working relationship and delineate responsibility between the Little Rock Police
Department Communications Center and the Police Department.
B. To establish procedures for radio communications between field personnel and the
Communications Center, and to identify situations requiring radio contact.
II. Policy
A. The Little Rock Police Department through the Communications Center will provide to the
citizens of Little Rock timely and efficient response to all calls for service, and provide for the
safety of all field personnel.
B. The Communications Center will be manned and operated on a twenty-four hour basis to provide
continuous radio communications and support services to all personnel.
C. A twenty-four hour toll free telephone service to the Communications Center is provided to the
public. The Communications Center is a member of the enhanced 9-1-1 Emergency System.
D. Radio communication is the primary means used by the Communications Center to relay
information to Patrol units, other designated police personnel, fire, State and Federal Emergency
Agencies. Police and Communications Center personnel shall operate City of Little Rock
communications equipment in accordance with procedures and regulations established by the
Federal Communications Commission (FCC).
A. The basic function of the Communications Center is to receive, screen and prioritize calls for
service and, subsequently, dispatch the appropriate response in an efficient and coordinated
manner.
B. When receiving information, the Communications Center uses a computer entry process to record
the following minimum information:
1. An incident number;
7. Time of dispatch;
8. Time of arrival;
C. All calls for service received by the Communications Center will be assigned a unique, individual
incident number. These numbers will be consecutive and will begin with the first two
numbers denoting the year and the remaining numbers denoting sequential calls for service.
D. Communications Center personnel shall obtain as much information as possible, on each call for
service. The amount of information necessary will depend on the nature of the call and the status
of the reporting/requesting party, with the purpose of maximizing the responding personnel’s
safety by allowing him/her to anticipate conditions to be encountered at the scene.
E. It is the policy of the Little Rock Police Department that when any call is dispatched to a police
officer, it is intended for the officer to go to the address of the call and talk to the complainant. If
the calling party does not wish to be contacted, the officer assigned the call will be notified of that
fact when dispatched, and will check the area or address for the reported problem.
F. The following types of calls for service require a two-man response (one two-officer unit or two
one-officer units):
1. All felony crimes involving violence against a person or crimes against property which
are in progress;
8. Prowler calls.
G. A single unit will ordinarily be dispatched to the following calls, unless additional information is
received indicating two officers should be dispatched:
2. Shoplifter in custody;
5. Suicides;
6. Missing children;
9. Loud music;
3. Found property;
5. Reports at hospitals;
6. Transporting prisoners;
7. Report of an overdose;
I. The primary assigned officer may cancel the back-up response, should they determine, after
careful appraisal of the situation, that additional assistance is not required.
J. When back-up is requested or required, the officer closest to the location of the call, and able to
respond, shall acknowledge and respond. Another officer may acknowledge a closer location, at
which time the first back-up unit may be canceled by Communications. Any additional units
dispatched on a call are expected to clear the scene as soon as it has been determined that their
presence is no longer needed to deal with the situation.
K. Patrol supervisors may alter these guidelines, as situations dictate, for the safety of the officers.
A. In order to assume command, a field supervisor will be notified and will respond to the scene of
any of the following incidents:
1. Bomb threat;
7. Chemical spills;
9. Tactical situations;
11. Missing children, under the age of twelve, or adults of any age, if the adult is mentally
ill or mentally incompetent and severe weather conditions or other life threatening
circumstances exist, requiring immediate search procedures.
V. Radio Transmissions
A. At least one primary dispatch channel will be responsible for dispatching all calls 24 hours, 7 days
a week. Field personnel will be responsible for monitoring this channel at all times.
B. One secondary channel will be available for transmitting additional information to personnel 24
hours, 7 days a week. Another secondary channel is ordinarily available six days a week from
0630-0200.
1. During “pro-net” incidents, or in cases where the main channel is restricted for
emergency traffic (10-33) or has been restricted by a field supervisor, the secondary
channel will be responsible for dispatching calls. All service requests will be kept to a
minimum.
2. There are three dedicated police dispatch consoles. Any requests to monitor other
channels on special events will require that one of the three consoles be shut down and
used for the additional request.
C. Mobile Data Computers (MDC), when available, should be used for requesting additional
information from ACIC/NCIC, rather than requesting this information from a secondary channel.
D. Members of this department shall utilize the radio system/mobile data computer (MDC) only for
the transmission of police related messages, and will strive to keep all messages as professional,
concise, and complete as possible. At no time will members of the department misuse or disrupt
the radio system by transmitting unauthorized or personal messages.
E. The radio codes that should be utilized by members of the department, when transmitting over the
radio system, are found at the end of this Order.
A. Operations are more efficient and personnel safety is enhanced when the Communications Center,
supervisors, and other personnel know the status of units, their location, the nature of incident, and
developments in their investigation.
B. Prior to going on-shift, all field personnel shall enter their name, employee number, portable radio
identifier number, district or call sign information and vehicle information, if appropriate, into the
Computer Aided Dispatch System. This may be accomplished by using the Mobile Data
Computer or the desktop Computer Aided Dispatch terminal. There are desktop terminals located
in all field operations areas. Instruction sheets for entering unit and equipment information are
located near the terminal.
1. There are special units who remain in the Computer Aided Dispatch system at all times.
These units need only advise their availability for assignment or that they have been
given a special assignment and are not available for assignment.
2. Field personnel shall not contact the Communications Center, either by telephone or a
secondary channel, to have a dispatcher enter their required information. The only time
Communications Center personnel shall be allowed to receive unit information is when
the Mobile Data Computer or the desktop Computer Aided Dispatch terminal is not
functioning.
4. The above information shall also be communicated to the Technology Support Section
the next business day to ensure resolution.
C. When the unit information has been entered, field personnel shall be available for assignment,
unless they advise the Communications Center that they have been given an assignment or they
are out-of-service for a specific reason.
D. Personnel assigned to field operations shall maintain contact with the Communications Center at
all times during their tour of duty, and are required to carry a portable radio with them at all times,
while away from their vehicle, unless unusual circumstances exist or with approval of a
supervisor.
f) When engaged in any activity affecting availability to handle calls for service;
2. Personnel will use status buttons, mobile data computer codes, or voice communications
to advise the communications center of the above statuses.
3. Personnel shall reply promptly with their call sign and location when called via radio by
the Communications Center or field supervisors.
4. When stopping vehicles, officers shall provide Communications with the following
information:
a) Location;
E. An alert tone is given by the Communications Center, prior to a Code 10-33/10-63 call, to warn all
personnel that an emergency situation is about to be broadcasted. Field personnel will not
broadcast any further radio transmissions (except for other emergency traffic) until the emergency
situation has subsided.
2. Personnel not involved in the emergency situation shall switch to a secondary channel
designated by Communications for dispatch purposes.
A. All portable hand held radios and all vehicle mounted mobile radios are equipped with an
emergency status button. The purposeful activation of an emergency status button signifies that an
emergency situation requiring immediate response exists.
1. The radio operator receiving the emergency status button activation will:
a) Advise all units on that channel of the activation and broadcast the call sign or
radio ID of the unit with the activation, and the location the unit is checked out
at. The channel will be restricted for the emergency activation and response;
b) Attempt to call the unit and ascertain the nature of the emergency or additional
information, and;
c) The remaining active police dispatch and or secondary channel(s) will also
broadcast the emergency status activation and broadcast the call sign or radio
ID of the unit with the activation, and the location the unit is checked out at.
2. A police supervisor will acknowledge the emergency status activation and monitor the
police response.
a) If the unit activating the emergency response was not checked out at a known
location and does not respond to verbal requests for their location, the police
supervisor will be responsible for directing the efforts to identify and locate the
unit with the emergency activation.
A. Radio identification call numbers shall be made from a combination of designators described
below:
1. Field Services Division - Units shall be identified by shift (1, 2, and 3), and district
assigned. (Example: 2X43 designates the second shift, district 43 unit; 2Y43 designates
second shift, secondary unit assigned to district 43.)
2. Major Crimes Division - Units shall be identified as “David” units, with a numerical
identifier assigned to each person. (Example D900.)
4. Administration
5. Headquarters Division
b) Desk Officers, Crime Scene Search Personnel, and Vehicle Control Personnel
shall all be identified as “Robert” units, with numerical identifier assigned each
person. (Example R30.)
7. Patrol supervisors - All patrol supervisors shall be identified as “Lincoln” units, with a
numerical identifier assigned to each supervisor. (Example L35.)
B. All Divisions shall ensure that the Communication Center is supplied with a duty roster of all field
personnel, at the beginning of their tour of duty. This will include a designation of the officer in
charge.
C. The Professional Standards Section will be responsible for the updating and revisions of the
master list of all assigned radio identification call numbers.
A. The capability to maintain communications in all emergency situations dictates that security
measures be implemented to protect communications personnel, facilities, and equipment.
D. Persons who have entered the Communications Center, shall leave promptly upon completion of
their business. Personnel shall not be permitted access to the Communications Center for anything
other than business.
E. In the event that the Communications Center building is threatened, either through man-made or
natural disasters, the on-duty downtown shift supervisor shall assign personnel, as necessary, to
provide security to the Center.
A. All incoming telephone lines and radio transmissions to the Communications Center shall be
recorded and have the capability for immediate playback. All original tapes shall be retained
securely by the Communications Center.
B. These recordings shall be maintained for a period of not less than thirty (30) days from the date of
the recording.
2. Upon approval, the request shall be forwarded to the Communication Center Supervisor;
4. Anytime a tape is taken from storage for review or copying it shall be logged in and out,
with the time in/out, reason, and employee responsible for the tape, and;
5. Should copies of a tape be required, they shall be recorded on a cassette from the
original.
D. If an original tape is required for criminal prosecution, the tape will be logged out to the employee
by the Communications Center Supervisor and stored in accordance with General Orders.
I. Purpose
A. The purpose of this General Order is to establish a procedure governing the manner in which this
Department responds to requests for service, which are outside the conventional realm of police
incidents; to reduce the number of Incident Reports which must be processed and entered into the
Records Information Management System; and to reduce the amount of time field units must
commit to the service of non-police type incidents.
B. The Records Section Supervisor will ensure that all incident numbers assigned by Departmental
computer systems have a report in the Records Management System, as authorized by this Order,
within ten days of the number having been generated.
A. Incident Report - The initial report used to officially record a police incident. (Refers only to the
report form itself, not to the classification of incident type).
B. Abbreviated Incident Report – A report used to record all coded calls. This is a standard incident
report form with only the incident number, unit assigned, call date, call time, type of call, date of
incident, time of incident, location of incident, district, incident/offense type, and narrative
completed.
C. Supplement Report - The report used to provide additional information concerning any police
incident wherein an Incident Report was previously filed. Supplement Forms (Forms A and B)
may also be used to add additional suspects, victims, person reporting, etc., to the original report
when necessary. Supplement reports never receive a new incident number, but always utilize the
incident number from the original Incident Report.
D. Police Incidents - Incidents wherein there is the allegation of or evidence suggesting, the
commission or attempted commission of a criminal offense by any party, whether the remedy is
further police investigation or civilian warrant action. Police incidents include, but are not limited
to:
1. Violations or attempted violations of the laws of the State of Arkansas, United States, or
ordinances of the City of Little Rock;
3. Incidents in which an officer takes a person into limited or temporary custody, or detains
a person for informational or investigative purposes, either upon observation or as a result
of a citizen’s call for service;
5. Incidents alleging criminal offenses, domestic violence or disturbances, even when the
victim indicates no desire to prosecute; and,
6. Investigation of motor vehicle traffic accidents pursuant to state statutes and City
ordinances.
E. Non-Police Incidents - Incidents which do not pertain to a distinct criminal offense, or attempt,
and which do not require further police action or follow-up; or incidents which do not lend
themselves to criminal prosecutions or property seizures. Such incidents include, but are not
limited to:
2. Parking or traffic violations, blocked alleys and drives, and stalled autos (where no
vehicular impound is likely);
5. Messages;
F. Code Calls - Dispatched assignments or incidents discovered in the field will require the
completion of an Abbreviated Incident Report.
III. Procedure
A. General Provisions
1. Officers will respond to all dispatched or otherwise encountered requests for service. All
requests for service will be properly investigated to determine whether the request
constitutes a police incident (Incident Report required) or a code call (Abbreviated
Incident Report required). In cases where there is any doubt as to whether a situation is to
be classified as a police incident or a non-police incident, an Incident Report shall be
written.
2. All requests for police service and employee initiated activity will be documented by the
Communications Center in the CAD system and by the assigned employee in the form of
an Incident Report or Abbreviated Incident Report. Incidents to be documented will
include:
b) Citizen complaints;
B. Police Incidents
2. The specific criminal offense(s) addressed by the report shall be placed in the
“Incident/Offense Type” space on the Incident Report.
3. Incidents meeting the following listed criteria shall have the appropriate category
indicated by checking the corresponding section on the Incident Report.
a) “Car Jacking” shall be indicated when an incident involves the threat or use of
force against an occupant of a motor vehicle for the purpose of facilitating the
motor vehicle theft.
(2) The gang name shall be noted in the narrative of the report when an
incident involves a criminal street gang identified by an officer, victim
or witness.
(2) Even if the offender was mistaken in his/her perception that the victim
was a member of the group he or she was acting against, the offense is
still a hate crime because the offender was motivated by bias against
the group.
4. All persons, evidence and/or property involved will be identified on the Incident Report
in the appropriate spaces. The “Details of Information” shall include all statements and/or
a narrative description of the incident.
b) Officers will place the Incident Report number in the designated space on each
page of the Incident Report.
6. Upon conclusion of a police incident, officers shall return to service in the standard
manner.
8. Field Interview Cards will not be used in lieu of Incident Reports in police incidents, such
as suspicious persons’ calls and prowlers.
j) Any other numbers or information that can be used to access a person’s financial
resources.
1. Reports of identity theft can be taken by a patrol officer or by the telephone reporting
unit, depending on the circumstances surrounding the report.
2. Identity theft reports that do not occur within the jurisdictional boundaries of the City of
Little Rock will be taken. These reports will be titled, “Outside Identity Theft”.
3. Identity theft reports will be documented utilizing the agency standardized incident
report.
4. Victims will be encouraged to complete an Identification (ID) Theft Affidavit which can
be located on the Arkansas Attorney General’s website and the Federal Trade
Commission (FTC) website.
5. The employee taking the report will be responsible for providing the website address to
the Federal Trade Commission, which is: www.ftc.gov. The Federal Trade Commission
provides the most comprehensive information for victims regarding identity theft. The
website refers victims of this crime to the appropriate resources(s), to include:
6. The employee taking the report will inform the victim on how to obtain a copy of the
report.
c) Ensure that identity theft resources from the Federal Trade Commission are
available in the lobby of the Financial Crimes Unit.
E. Code Calls
g) Code Z - False alarms only (this shall include all false alarms, residential or
business, fire, burglary, robbery or other, whether the cause is accidental,
weather-related, unknown, or the result of a malfunction).
F. Incident Reports
1. Generally, criminal offenses involve only one victim (a person or a business). However,
when a continuing incident involving multiple offenses and victims occur, these incidents
will be documented on one Incident Report. Employees should be aware that the concept
of time and place is based on the premise that if one or more crimes was committed by
the same person or group of persons and the time and space intervals separating them
were insignificant, all of the involved crimes shall be considered a single incident. In
these cases, all offenses, victims, and suspects shall be included on a single Incident
Report.
a) Examples of incidents where there may be multiple victims include, but are not
limited to, hotel or motel break ins where several rooms were entered, mini
storage units where numerous units were entered, or vehicle breaking and
entering where several vehicles have been broken into during a continuing
incident.
b) The only exception to this rule is burglary. All burglaries will be on separate
Incident Reports.
2. When an officer responds to any incident during which a vehicle was also stolen, the
officer shall prepare only one report and shall list the vehicle as stolen on this report. A
complete description of the vehicle shall be included in the Incident Report. All Incident
Reports detailing the theft of a motor vehicle shall immediately, upon completion, be
reviewed for approval by a supervisor, taken to Communications for data entry, and
forwarded to the Auto Theft Unit.
3. Employees shall submit all Incident Reports to supervisory personnel at or before the end
of their tour of duty, during which the information contained in the report was received.
4. No employee shall be dismissed from his duty assignment until all reports they have
prepared have been accepted and approved by a supervisor.
5. Supervisors shall indicate their approval of Incident Reports by signing the report in the
appropriate space.
6. Supervisors shall ensure that all Incident Reports, along with a LRPD Report Submission
Form, are forwarded to the Desk Officer within three (3) hours after each shift change.
7. Records Division data entry clerks shall monitor all reports, and those containing errors
or omissions shall be forwarded to the Records Section Supervisor, who shall ensure that
the report is corrected in a timely manner and returned for data entry.
b) If the employee is not available due to vacation, military leave, or other type of
leave, the supervisor will notify the Warrant Sergeant via email of the
circumstance and their expected date of return. If more than one (1) day has
lapsed prior to the employee being notified, the employee shall be directed to
immediately respond to the Records Section to rectify the report.
c) In the event that the Department’s email is not operational, the Warrant Sergeant
will contact the officer’s chain-of-command via telephone and will fax a copy of
the report to the contacted supervisor. Notifications shall be made by telephone
if the email server is down for an extended period of time.
1. The Little Rock Police Department will utilize TraCS Software for the reporting of all
accidents investigated by members of the Police Department. The employee responsible
for investigating and processing the motor vehicle accident will be responsible for
completing the appropriate report. TraCS Software includes the following forms that
will be utilized for reporting accidents investigated by LRPD:
a) Motor Vehicle Crash Report Form (MVCR). This form will be utilized to report
all accidents involving an injury to any person, DWI, city vehicles, damages
greater than $1000.00, and anytime a citizen requests.
b) TraCS Incident Report Form (IRF). This form will be utilized to report minor
accidents not involving injury or damages greater than $1000.00. This report
may also be used at the direction of a shift commander for reporting weather
related accidents during inclement weather.
d) In the event an officer is unsure of which form to use, he will contact an on duty
supervisor.
2. When utilizing TraCS Software, officers will transmit reports for review as soon as the
report is completed. Officers will not hold reports until the end of their shift.
3. Patrol supervisors will check for completed accident reports at least twice during their
shift in order to ensure reports are processed in a timely fashion. Reports will be
reviewed and either “accepted” or “rejected”. Supervisors will notify officers of any
rejected reports.
4. Officers not assigned to patrol who complete an accident report will immediately notify
an on duty supervisor in their division in order to have the report approved. If there is not
an on-duty supervisor in their division, they will notify the nearest on duty patrol
supervisor in order to have the report reviewed.
5. In the event of a significant system failure, an on duty shift commander may authorize the
use of paper reports for the reporting of accidents. This should only be done in exigent
circumstances and only for a limited time period. Failure of a single computer will not be
cause for use of paper reports.
6. Officers will utilize TraCS Software in accordance with Department training and will not
attempt to manipulate the software/hardware in any other manner.
7. Shift Commanders will review the TraCS Database daily to ensure reports are being
reviewed and placed in an “Accepted” status in a timely fashion. As a general rule,
reports should be in an “Accepted” status no later than four hours after the time of the
accident.
1. Field Interview Cards are designed to provide documentation regarding the activity,
appearance and bearing, or specific location of persons or vehicles, under circumstances
which do not constitute a Police Incident requiring an Incident Report, but which, in an
officer’s professional judgment, are noteworthy. Incident numbers must be obtained for
Field Interview Cards with all persons and information related to a single event included
under an individual incident number.
2. Completed Field Interview Cards shall be reviewed by supervisors in the same manner as
Incident Reports, and shall be forwarded directly to the Crime Analyst assigned to the
appropriate Field Services Division.
3. The Crime Analysis Unit will be responsible for Field Interview data entry into the
Records Information Management System. After entry into the system, Field Interview
Cards will be disposed of in a secure manner.
4. The Crime Analysis Unit shall be responsible for the analysis of Field Interview Card
data, and will provide follow-up information and reports to operational units, as
requested.
1. The Violent Gang and Terrorist Organization File (VGTOF) has been designed to
provide identifying information concerning violent gangs, members of these gangs,
terrorist organizations, and members of these organizations to law enforcement
personnel. This is a national database, which is maintained by the Federal Bureau of
Investigations and is accessible by local law enforcement personnel.
2. Entry into the VGTOF system does not in and of itself prove gang membership, but it
does serve to alert the officer to a potential source of problems, and should be used in
concert with other information to justify appropriate courses of action.
3. In order for a person to be entered into the N.C.I.C. VGTOF system, that person must
meet the established criteria for gang membership. A gang must:
b) The group must have a common interest and/or activity characterized by the
commission of or involvement in a pattern of criminal or delinquent conduct.
Criminal or delinquent conduct includes narcotics distribution, firearms or
explosives violations, murder, extortion, obstruction of justice and any violent
offense or conduct of a juvenile, which would be a crime if committed by an
adult.
4. Listed below are the N.C.I.C. criteria for entry into the VGTOF system. Of the below
listed criteria, only category “A” will stand alone and allow for entry into the VGTOF
system. For the remaining categories, two and only two categories must be satisfied.
Officers should detail, in the narrative section, what criteria the person meets in order for
that person to be entered as a gang member. For example, if category “B” is used,
identify, as accurately as possible, the informant. For area, (category “D”), be as specific
as to the area or house location, if appropriate. If accompanied by a known gang member,
identify that member. If self admitted gang membership, what admissions were made?
For category “A”, include the A.D.R. number on the front of the entry card and the
charges in the narrative.
e) Has been arrested with known gang members for offenses consistent with gang
activity.
f) Self admitted gang membership at any time other than arrest or incarceration.
6. The procedures for entering a person into the VGTOF database are as follows:
a) A 4x6 LRPD VGTOF Entry Card is available to all divisions. As officers come
into contact with persons who fit the N.C.I.C. entry criteria, the officer will fill
out the VGTOF Entry Card and forward it to the Special Investigations Division
(SID).
c) Once the entry is made, the assigned NIC number shall be recorded on the card
and the original card shall be returned to the Special Investigations Division for
secure storage.
d) The Information Systems Coordinator shall retain a copy of each card for annual
N.C.I.C. audit purposes. These copies shall be maintained securely with limited
access.
7. Officers who have a Mobile Data Computer (MDC) will be able to query the VGTOF file
through the Query Warrant (QW) and Query Vehicle (QV) transactions. VGTOF
information is cross referenced to these files through N.C.I.C. transactions. The gang
membership information will be paged, after any warrant information, missing juvenile
and general operator information, as a message from N.C.I.C. Officers are cautioned to
thoroughly read the information received, in order to avoid confusion as to the content of
the response, as the entry is not based on certifiable identification information
(fingerprints). Officers should utilize the data as information only. [CALEA 41.3.7]
8. Officers who do not have a Mobile Data Computer can contact the secondary channel
operator and request a warrant or vehicle check. The VGTOF system includes an
automated cross search function. When a radio operator receives an acknowledgment
from N.C.I.C. that the person in question may have been entered as a gang member, the
radio operator shall advise the officer of “10-35” (Confidential) traffic. The officer
requesting the information should step away from any civilians and then notify
Communications that he is ready to copy “10-35” traffic. The officer will be advised of
all pertinent information concerning the response. Other officers, who may also be on the
secondary channel where the operator has advised that “10-35” traffic is to follow, should
take steps to ensure that the information will not be heard by non-law enforcement
personnel. Officers who come into contact with persons already in the VGTOF system
should fill out another VGTOF Entry Card and list in the narrative that the subject is
already entered into the VGTOF system. This additional card will be submitted as
supplemental information to the original entry. After an officer has completed the
VGTOF card, this report shall be submitted in the same manner as other reports. The
supervisor, receiving the VGTOF card, should ensure the information is as complete as
possible and forward the VGTOF card to the Special Investigations Division, via the SID
mail slot. The Intelligence Sergeant will ensure that these cards are retrieved on a daily
basis.
10. Officers receiving a positive response from the VGTOF system should keep in mind that
information contained in the system does not furnish grounds for the search or seizure of
any individual, vehicle, or dwelling. The following warning appears at the beginning of
each response: “Standing alone, NCIC Violent Gang and Terrorist Organization File
information does not furnish grounds for the search or seizure of any individual, vehicle
or dwelling. The information contained in the file is for information and officer safety. At
no time should any officer take any law enforcement action based solely on a positive
response from the VGTOF system.”
11. Officers should include as much identifying information as possible about the person,
especially drivers license numbers, social security numbers, complete name, to include
middle name, scars, marks or tattoos and their description. If a Police Incident or arrest is
part of the contact, enter the Incident or ADR number for additional confirmation of
identity. Officers should include in the narrative of the VGTOF card as much detail as
possible to assist the Intelligence Detectives in positively identifying the gang affiliation
and the reason the individual should be included in the VGTOF system.
1. The Incident Report Direct Entry (IRDE) System is the preferred method of completing
all incident reports and abbreviated incident reports. The IRDE System is a web based
computer application that gives officers the ability to complete their report and
supervisors the ability to approve reports from any secure intranet connection.
2. The IRDE System utilizes information from the Computer Aided Dispatch System to
auto populate basic information in the reports. Reports are available to be completed by
all officers assigned to the incident through the CAD System. Once the officer assigned
to complete the report initiates the entry, the report is removed from the other assigned
officer’s availability list.
3. Once a report has been completed, the officer writing the report will place the report in
“Complete” status, and electronically sign the report.
4. Supervisors will review all reports in “Complete” status at least twice per shift, and
immediately prior to the end of the officer’s tour of duty. Supervisors will either
“Reject” or “Approve” all completed reports. Reports that are approved will be
electronically signed and transferred to the mainframe system within two minutes of
approval. Reports that are “Rejected” will remain in the IRDE System until corrections
are made by the officer assigned to complete the report.
b) Supervisors will notify an officer that a report has been “Rejected” after the
supervisor determines the need to reject the report.
A. The Police Department’s primary concern in emergency driving situations is the protection of the
lives and safety of all citizens and officers. During emergency driving situations, officers will
operate their vehicles with extreme caution and in compliance with A.C.A. § 27-51-204, which
requires that the emergency light bar and siren be activated on authorized emergency vehicles.
Driving under emergency conditions does not relieve the officer from the duty to drive with due
regard for the safety of all persons, nor will these provisions protect the driver from the
consequences of his disregard for the safety of others.
B. The decision to drive under emergency conditions will be discretionary with each individual
officer, based on the following considerations:
1. When deciding to initiate or continue driving under emergency conditions, officers will
consider such factors as traffic volume, time of day, potential hazard, and safety to
themselves and the public.
2. Emergency responses shall be made only when the call involves a life threatening
situation or a violent crime in progress.
3. Officers will have sufficient information to justify the decision to drive under emergency
conditions.
4. Officers, responding to an “officer needs assistance” type call, must bear in mind that
even though a rapid response is important, they must arrive at the scene safely in order to
be of assistance. (Officers who are operating in emergency status should not operate the
emergency flashers, as operation of emergency flashers will make the turn signals
inoperative.)
C. Officers, upon deciding to make an emergency response to any situation, will immediately notify
Communications of their decision.
1. All officers, when making an emergency response, will notify Communications of such by
using the term “Code Three”. This will indicate that the officer will be employing
emergency equipment (emergency blue lights and siren).
2. All Officers, upon indicating a “Code Three” response, shall immediately provide
communications with sufficient information regarding their need for an emergency
response, thereby allowing the appropriate patrol supervisor to further evaluate the
necessity and safety of such an action.
3. A Supervisor will override the officer’s decision to make an emergency (Code Three)
response if, in their judgment, it is not warranted or cannot be done safely. The Sergeant
of the officer making an emergency response will normally be responsible for making this
determination.
D. No officer will operate a police vehicle in emergency (Code Three) status if it is occupied by any
passengers, other than another police officer or a person who has signed a release or waiver of
liability.
E. Police vehicles without emergency lights and sirens will not make emergency (Code Three)
responses or participate in pursuits.
F. Special purpose vehicles, excluding motorcycles and canine vehicles shall not be used in pursuits
or emergency (Code Three) responses. Motorcycles will follow the guidelines set forth in Section
II of this General Order, canine vehicles may engage as all other marked units do in pursuit
situations.
G. Motorcycles may conduct emergency (Code Three) responses, but are prohibited from becoming
involved in an active pursuit. If a motorcycle initiates a pursuit, it will yield to other authorized
Departmental vehicles as soon as practical. They will serve as a support unit and provide
assistance to the pursuing units if needed, once the pursuit is concluded.
H. Escorts
a) Upon notification to Communications, if the escort does not leave the officer's
assigned area of responsibility; or,
b) Upon approval from a supervisor, if the escort leaves the officer's assigned area
of responsibility.
a) Dignitaries;
b) Public Officials;
c) Funerals; and,
d) Emergency vehicles.
4. Emergency escorts of over-size loads, hazardous cargo, parades and other such
circumstances shall only be performed with the prior authorization of the City of Little
Rock Traffic Engineer and Department Traffic Services Commander.
5. When any escort is performed, the safety of all persons involved shall be of utmost
importance. Department procedures guiding emergency driving shall be adhered to.
J. While responding to incidents involving a medical emergency, officers may respond in emergency
status if it is known that the emergency medical services are holding short of the scene until police
arrive. In these instances, responding officers will advise a supervisor that they are responding in
emergency status by announcing “Code 3 for Medical” on the radio. Only officers assigned to the
incident may respond in emergency status.
A. The Police Department’s primary concern in pursuit situations is the protection of the lives and
safety of all citizens and officers. The operation of emergency vehicles is governed by A.C.A. §
27-51-204, which authorizes emergency vehicles (activated blue lights and siren) to exceed the
posted speed limit, but does not relieve the driver of an authorized emergency vehicle from the
duty to drive with due regard for the safety of all persons. It also does not relieve the driver of any
emergency vehicle from the consequence of a reckless disregard for the safety of others.
B. Definition of pursuit driving – A motor vehicle pursuit is an active attempt by a law enforcement
officer, operating an emergency vehicle and utilizing simultaneously all emergency equipment
(blue lights and siren), to apprehend one or more occupants of another moving vehicle, when the
driver of a fleeing vehicle is aware of that attempt and is resisting apprehension by maintaining or
increasing his speed, disobeying traffic laws, ignoring or attempting to elude the officer.
C. An officer may be authorized to engage in a motor vehicle pursuit if the officer reasonably believes
that the suspect has committed or is about to commit a felony or if the actions of the suspect
intentionally puts the public at risk.
1. The act of evading or fleeing in a motor vehicle shall not, standing alone, be deemed to be
a violent act, crime or felony within the meaning of this written directive.
2. Information developed or discovered after the pursuit cannot be used to justify the pursuit
itself.
3. Officers who have attempted a traffic stop on a suspected D.W.I. driver who refuses to
stop, but does not recklessly flee, may continue to follow the suspected D.W.I. driver in a
Code 3 status until the suspect stops or such time that they begin to actively flee at which
time the situation will be revaluated in accordance with this order.
D. An officer engaged in a motor vehicle pursuit should constantly re-evaluate his/her surroundings,
speed, foot and vehicle traffic, suspect driving ability and weather conditions. Any time the officer
finds that any of these parameters has exceeded an acceptable limit, it shall be the responsibility
of the pursuing officer to terminate the vehicle pursuit for the safety of both departmental
personnel and citizens.
E. A supervisor is ultimately responsible for any vehicle pursuit that is initiated by officers under his
command. Supervisors should also evaluate the same parameters as the pursuing officer(s), in
addition to their knowledge of the driving skills, decision making ability, and emotional bearing of
the pursuing officer(s) when determining to terminate the action or allow a vehicle pursuit to
continue.
1. Unmarked police vehicles may participate in any vehicular pursuit under the following
conditions:
a) Unmarked police vehicles (equipped with lights and siren) may become involved
in a pursuit as a primary vehicle only if a marked vehicle is not available. The
unmarked vehicle will become secondary once a marked unit becomes primary.
2. No more than two emergency vehicles will be involved in the immediate pursuit. Other
police vehicles will be support units, and will not become actively involved in the pursuit
or operate in an emergency mode.
a) During pursuit’s involving persons who have been involved in violent felonies, a
supervisor may authorize additional units to respond to the area in a Code 3
status. The purpose of this response should be to cover escape routes, increase
the chance of capture, and aid primary vehicles with traffic. This does not
negate that no more than two units can be in actual pursuit of a suspect at any
given time.
3. The first unit to become involved in a vehicular pursuit will be designated the primary
vehicle and will have the following responsibilities:
a) The officer will activate the police vehicle’s emergency lights and siren and
notify Communications of the following information:
(5) The license number, vehicle description and number of occupants; and,
4. In a pursuit, the second police unit will become the backup. Upon joining the pursuit, the
backup officer will activate the vehicle’s emergency lights and siren and advise
Communications. The secondary unit will advise Communications of their unit identifier
and if they are operating an unmarked vehicle.
a) Only one backup unit is to be used, unless authorization for additional backup
units is obtained from a police supervisor.
b) The backup vehicle will follow the primary vehicle at a safe distance.
c) Additional police units will not assume emergency status and follow the primary
and backup units, unless a supervisor deems it necessary.
5. Additional units will be support vehicles and will not become actively involved in the
pursuit, violate traffic laws, or operate in emergency status, unless the fleeing suspect has
been involved in a violent felony and a supervisor has approved the action.
b) Support units will be available to assume a backup or primary role, should one of
those units be unable to continue the pursuit.
6. Officers will not operate their vehicles as primary or secondary units when their vehicles
are occupied by any passengers, other than another police officer or a person who has
signed a release or waiver of liability.
8. Police personnel will not engage in, nor will police vehicles be used, for the following
purposes:
c) Overtaking, driving next to, or forcing suspect vehicles off the roadway; or
b) The distance between the officer and suspect is such that, in order to continue the
pursuit, it would place the officer or the public in unreasonable danger.
c) The primary officer loses visual contact with the suspect for an extended period
of time (approximately 15-20 seconds). This is not to imply that the officers
must cease looking for the suspect, but they must slow the pursuit after loss of
contact.
d) When there is a clear and unreasonable danger to the officer, fleeing suspect
and/or any other persons. This may be due to excessive speed, reckless driving
techniques, or the erratic driving by the suspect, which exceeds the performance
capabilities of the vehicle or the driver.
e) When the danger, created by the pursuit, outweighs the necessity for immediate
apprehension.
10. The following factors shall be considered by officers and supervisors in making the
decision to continue or terminate a police pursuit:
a) Environmental factors, such as rain, fog, ice, snow or darkness that would
substantially increase the danger of the pursuit.
b) The officer’s familiarity with the area and his ability to accurately notify
Communications of his location and the direction in which the pursuit is
proceeding.
d) The pursued vehicle proceeds the wrong way on any freeway, divided highway,
or one-way street. At no time will officers pursue violators the wrong way on a
freeway.
e) The pursuing officer knows, or has reason to believe, that the fleeing vehicle is
being operated by a juvenile who is driving in such an unsafe manner that it is
obvious he/she does not have the maturity to deal with the danger involved.
a) When other agencies pursue vehicles into the city limits, the following shall
govern Little Rock Police Department involvement:
(1) Little Rock Police Department officers will not assist in active pursuit,
unless requested by the pursuing agency and such assistance is
approved by a L.R.P.D. police supervisor;
(3) If the pursuing agency is joined by L.R.P.D. units, and the agency’s
backup unit arrives to assist, L.R.P.D. units will terminate active pursuit
and cease emergency operations.
b) When L.R.P.D. pursuits leave the city limits and enter other jurisdictions, the
following will apply:
(1) The primary officer will advise Communications that the pursuit is
leaving the city;
(2) The supervisor handling the pursuit will evaluate the entire incident and
make the decision to let the pursuit continue or terminate; and,
(3) If the agency with jurisdictional authority joins in active pursuit, the
L.R.P.D. backup unit will discontinue pursuit and cease emergency
operations. If two units from the other agency join the pursuit, all
L.R.P.D. units will safely terminate their pursuit and discontinue
emergency operations. (At no time will L.R.P.D. units be involved in
pursuits when two police units from another agency are already
involved.)
c) When other agencies become involved in L.R.P.D. pursuits, within the city limits
of Little Rock, the following shall apply:
(3) Due to limited radio communications with other agencies, the assigned
supervisor shall re-evaluate the pursuit and terminate, if necessary; and,
a) Ensure that a supervisor is aware of the pursuit and the nature of the pursuit.
c) During the pursuit, communications personnel will use any available information
to further develop and ascertain the possible identity of the fleeing driver and/or
occupants, plus attempt to discover other possible reasons for which the
individual(s) might be fleeing.
d) Notify outside agencies if the pursuit might involve their jurisdiction, and
whether the call is a request for assistance or merely a courtesy notification with
no participation requested.
b) The supervisor of the officer, who initiates the pursuit, should normally be the
supervisor assuming command. In the event that the officer’s supervisor is not
available, or does not assume command, the Field Services Sergeant, in the
Division in which the pursuit originates, will take command of the situation, and
will be accountable for compliance with this directive, until the pursuit is
terminated. If a Sergeant does not take command immediately, the Shift
Lieutenant, in the Division in which the pursuit originates, will take command
and/or assign a Sergeant. If this does not occur, any Field Services Shift
Lieutenant on duty will assume command and/or assign a Sergeant.
c) Any police supervisor may order a pursuit terminated if, in their best judgment,
the necessity of apprehension is outweighed by the level of danger.
15. Reports
a) A supervisor will ensure an Information Report and a Blue Team Pursuit Report
is generated and that each officer involved in the pursuit completes an Officer’s
Report Form, detailing the facts of the pursuit. The supervisor shall complete an
initial entry into the Blue Team program prior to the end of their shift.
b) A supervisor will ensure that copies of the MVR video, of all units actively
involved, are contained in the file.
c) Supervisors will obtain a copy of the Communications tape of all radio traffic
pertaining to the pursuit for inclusion in the file.
d) The reports will be reviewed by the officer’s supervisor, who will make a written
evaluation and forward the reports, through the Chain of Command. The reports
will be reviewed at each level and submitted to the Office of the Chief of Police.
e) If necessary, after review by the appropriate Assistant Chief, the Pursuit file will
be forwarded to the Chief of Police for his/her findings and disposition.
f) The following pursuit files will be forwarded to the Office of the Chief of Police
for findings and disposition:
(1) Any file wherein a potential violation of Departmental policy has been
identified,
(2) Any file where counseling or other disciplinary action has been
recommended,
(3) Any file where there is some element of disagreement in the Chain of
Command evaluations,
(5) Any file where there is an indication of a safety or policy issue which
should be addressed.
g) After final review, the pursuit file will be forwarded to Internal Affairs for
computer data entry. The Internal Affairs Division will retain files where any
type of disciplinary action was taken. All other files will be routed to the
appropriate Division Commander for retention.
a) All documentation will be placed in a file folder and secured at the top with an
ACCO two-hole fastener.
c) The initial evaluating supervisor shall be responsible for ensuring that all
necessary documentation is obtained and properly placed in the file, before
routing it through the Chain of Command. The initial evaluating supervisor is
also responsible for producing a copy of the completed file and forwarding the
copy to the Defensive Driving Coordinator.
G. The Training Division Commander will be responsible for the completion of an annual analysis of
all police pursuits. The analysis will include statistical data and a summary recommending any
training needs or policy modifications, based on trends or patterns revealed in the report. This
analysis should be completed and forwarded to the Office of the Chief of Police no later than
February 15th of each year.
H. The Training Division Commander will be responsible for the completion of an annual review of
pursuit policies and reporting procedures.
I. The Training Division Commander will be responsible for the completion of a quarterly statistical
report of all police pursuits. The report should be completed and forwarded to the Office of the
Chief of Police no later than the 10th of each quarter (January, April, July, October).
J. Tire Deflation Devices – The purpose of the deployment of the tire deflation device is primarily to
safely end vehicle pursuits, while placing paramount importance on the safety of the officers, the
public and the suspects. When any vehicle crosses a deployed tire deflation device, hollow spikes
are embedded into the tires to deflate the tire at a controlled rate. While the driver may continue to
drive, the ability to operate the vehicle at high speeds is greatly reduced, if not eliminated.
b) Only personnel who have completed an authorized training course for the
deployment of tire deflation devices are permitted to deploy the devices.
c) The tire deflation device location should provide deploying personnel with good
visibility of the approaching pursuit and other traffic in the area. The location
should provide as long of a visual path as possible. Deploying personnel should
seek protective cover that provides good visibility of the surrounding area and
the approach of the suspect vehicle. Using any vehicle as cover is discouraged.
d) The deploying unit shall not overtake a fleeing vehicle in an attempt to place a
tire deflation device in the roadway. The deploying unit may use emergency
equipment and “run code” in order to get into position to deploy the tire
deflation device. Only one unit may “run code” in order to establish position for
deployment, unless additional units are authorized by a supervisor.
e) The deploying unit shall advise the pursuing unit(s) and Communications of the
location of the deployment. Communications shall rebroadcast the location of
the deployment to the unit(s) involved in the pursuit.
f) Upon notification that tire deflation devices are being deployed in front of the
fleeing vehicle, pursuing vehicles should increase the gap between them and the
fleeing vehicle to avoid striking the tire deflation device (approximately 3 to 5
seconds).
g) Tire deflation devices shall not be used to stop the following vehicles:
h) The use of a tire deflation device to stop a vehicle being pursued by an outside
agency will be allowed under the following conditions:
(2) The use of the device would fall within the guidelines of a pursuit
initiated by the Little Rock Police Department; and,
(3) The pursuing agency has requested and been made aware of the
deployment to prevent damage to their vehicles.
i) Anytime a tire deflation device has been compromised (ran over or damaged by
any means), the entire device will be turned into the division’s vehicle/equipment
coordinator for replacement. A copy of the completed Pursuit Review Report
indicating the unit number the device was taken from will be attached to the
device. In the absence of the Pursuit Review Report, an Officer’s Report
detailing how the device was damaged and authorizing its replacement by a
Division Commander will be attached. The vehicle/equipment coordinator will
be responsible for completing the warranty replacement report or requisitioning
a new device, and the shipping and receiving of the damaged and replacement
device.
j) The use of a tire deflation device shall be indicated on the Pursuit Review Report
(Form 5500-28). The officer(s) deploying a tire deflation device will document
the deployment on an Officer’s Report (Form 5600-2) to be included in the
pursuit file.
A. Police employees will comply with all City Ordinances and State Laws when operating vehicles
owned, rented, leased or seized by the City.
B. Employees will use seat belts at all times when operating any city vehicle.
C. Employees will ensure that their assigned vehicles have sufficient gas and oil for their assigned
shift, and that tires are properly inflated.
E. All employees will inspect their assigned vehicles, prior to their shift, for damage or missing
equipment, and will inspect the rear seat area for contraband or evidence. (Officers shall inspect
the rear seat area after transporting every prisoner.)
F. All vehicle damage or missing equipment will be reported to a supervisor, prior to the vehicle
being placed in service. The supervisor will initiate an investigation to determine the cause and
document his/her findings. The reports will be forwarded through the Chain of Command to the
Division Commander for resolution.
G. Employees will ensure that their Department vehicle is kept clean and free of trash.
H. Employees will, at all times, ensure that the spare tire is in its proper location and secured to avoid
damage to radio equipment. When a Department vehicle has a flat tire, at any time, the assigned
employee will complete a work order and forward it to the Automotive/Equipment Coordinator to
initiate repairs.
I. Careless, abusive, negligent or reckless handling of any vehicle will result in disciplinary action.
A. Non-uniformed officers operating unmarked vehicles may conduct traffic stops of motorists if the
situation dictates that waiting on a marked vehicle would not be prudent. The non-uniformed
officer will conduct the traffic stop in accordance with policy regarding safety and identification.
Non-uniformed officers are to be cognizant of the public’s reaction to police impersonators.
B. Non-uniformed officers operating vehicles not equipped with emergency lights or siren shall not
make motor vehicle stops unless there is imminent danger of loss of life should they fail to act. In
other less urgent cases that demand attention, officers shall contact the Communications Center,
request that a marked patrol vehicle perform the stop, and assist in directing the marked unit to the
subject vehicle's location.
A. Certain Department personnel in specialized assignments which by the nature of the assignment
mandate their return to duty during off-duty hours for investigation or other critical police
responses may be assigned a take-home Department vehicle. The Chief of Police will designate all
take-home vehicle assignments in writing as needed.
a) For travel to and from the employee’s duty assignment and during the
employee’s tour of duty;
b) For transportation to and from any court appearance as long as it is job related;
c) For travel to and from approved off-duty employment with prior approval from
an appropriate supervisory authority; and,
C. Responsibilities
1. Employees assigned a take-home vehicle are required to keep the vehicle clean inside and
out and shall ensure that all maintenance and repair is completed on schedule.
2. Supervisors will be responsible for assuring that employees under their command are
maintaining their assigned vehicles pursuant to Departmental guidelines and will conduct
monthly inspections to assure adherence.
3. Officers assigned a take-home vehicle shall render police aid and services as necessary
regardless of duty status. This includes assisting stalled motorists, standing by at accident
scenes until the arrival of the assigned officer, giving directions or responding to nearby
emergencies. Off-duty officers will not ignore these responsibilities.
4. The assigned driver of a take home vehicle will park the vehicle at their respective place
of duty when they are off duty for a period of more than ten consecutive working days.
The period of time off will include sick leave, vacation, personal discretionary days,
military leave, death in family, administrative leave, and in conjunction with their regular
days off. The assigned employee will notify their immediate supervisor as to the delivery
of the vehicle and leave them the keys, to include the fuel tab key, where it may be
available for utilization during their time off.
D. Eligibility
2. The Chief of Police may at any time modify this Order for the budgetary or operational
needs of the Department. Nothing in this Order should be construed as conferring the
assignment of a take home vehicle as a right or condition of any Departmental position.
A. Any employee, who damages a city vehicle or becomes involved in a motor vehicle accident with a
city owned, rented, leased or seized vehicle, in the city limits will immediately notify an on-duty
patrol supervisor who will ensure that the appropriate Division Commander is notified.
B. Any employee, who damages or becomes involved in a motor vehicle accident with a city owned,
rented, leased or seized vehicle, outside the city limits will notify their immediate supervisor or
their superior immediately. When practical, the supervisor will respond to the accident scene to
begin the Departmental investigation.
C. When a member of the Command Staff is involved in a motor vehicle accident with a city owned,
rented, leased or seized vehicle inside or outside the city limits, their immediate supervisor will be
notified as soon as possible.
D. A police supervisor will respond to the scene and personally complete an Arkansas Motor Vehicle
Traffic Accident Report for accidents involving a city owned, rented, leased or seized vehicle
inside the city limits. In instances involving a pursuit situation, or where a fatality, serious injury or
extensive property damage occurs, the supervisor will request the assistance of a supervisor, or
officer trained in accident reconstruction, to assist in the investigation.
1. The investigating supervisor is responsible for ensuring that the State SR-1 form is
completed (if damage is believed to be $1000.00 or more), the City’s Supervisors
Investigation Report-Motor Vehicle Accident form, and logging the damage with
Communications.
2. The investigating supervisor is responsible for completing an Accident Report in the Blue
Team electronic file system, with the initial entry being made prior to the end of their
shift.
3. A repair order will be made, detailing the damage, and a copy of the accident report
attached for submission to Fleet Services.
4. The investigating supervisor will immediately forward a copy of the Accident Report,
Repair Order and Supervisor’s Investigation Report to the Department Vehicle
Coordinator. The Vehicle Coordinator will contact Fleet Services to determine the
disposition of the damaged vehicle.
5. The investigating supervisor will complete and fax (918-4229) the following forms to the
Fleet Services Department within three working days of the incident. A notation shall be
written on the inside front cover of the file indicating that the below listed forms have
been faxed and the date which they were faxed to Fleet Services.
d) City of Little Rock – Vehicle Incident Report Form and/or Arkansas Motor
Vehicle Accident Report Form.
E. The file, containing all forms and a written evaluation from each supervisor in the Chain of
Command, will be submitted to the Division Commander.
1. All documentation will be placed in a file folder and secured at the top with an ACCO
two-hole fastener.
2. Any photographs or audio/video tapes will be placed in a manila envelope, attached to the
inside front cover of the file.
3. The evaluating supervisor shall be responsible for ensuring that all necessary
documentation has been properly placed in the file, before routing it through the Chain of
Command.
a) Lieutenant’s evaluation;
b) Sergeant’s evaluation;
n) Copy of the alcohol and drug screen documentation, Custody and Control Form.
5. The original SR-1 Form, Supervisor’s Investigation Report-Motor Vehicle Accident form,
Municipal Vehicle Program – Vehicle Accident Report form, City of Little Rock –
Vehicle Incident Report Form, original blue copy of the Custody and Control Form, and a
copy of the Accident Report shall be attached by paper clip to the inside front cover of the
file.
A. The Training Division Lieutenant will serve as the Defensive Driving Coordinator. It will be the
responsibility of the Defensive Driving Coordinator to:
2. Provide record keeping for all current LRPD driving instructors that are certified;
B. The Recruit Training Sergeant will serve as the Assistant Defensive Driving Coordinator. It will be
the responsibility of the Assistant Defensive Driving Coordinator to:
1. Chair the Accident Review Committee in the absence of the Defensive Driving
Coordinator;
C. The Defensive Driving Coordinator and the Assistant Defensive Driving Coordinator shall be
required to have certification as a Defensive Driving Instructor in order to serve on the Accident
Review Committee. If either supervisor does not meet the criteria to serve as a Coordinator, then
they will assume an advisory role until certification can be obtained. The Assistant Chief of Police
over the Training Division will temporarily appoint a Defensive Driving Instructor of supervisory
rank to the position of Coordinator or Assistant Coordinator until the criteria established in this
Order are fulfilled.
A. When an employee is involved in a motor vehicle accident, the employee’s supervisor will
evaluate the file, but will not make a final recommendation until the file has been reviewed by the
Accident Review Committee.
B. Upon completion of the accident file, less the recommendation of the involved employee’s
supervisors, the original will be forwarded, through the chain of command, to the Office of the
Chief of Police for disposition of SR-1, the original blue copy of the Custody and Control Form,
and Workmen’s Compensation Forms.
C. The Office of the Chief of Police will forward the original accident file to the Professional
Standards Section for processing. The original accident file will be forwarded to the Defensive
Driving Coordinator for review.
D. The Defensive Driving Coordinator will maintain a log of accident files received, including date of
receipt and date to be reviewed by the Accident Review Committee.
E. The Accident Review Committee will evaluate all accidents based on:
2. Adequacy of training;
3. Adherence to training;
3. Three Defensive Driving Instructors who do not work with the involved officer; and,
G. After conducting the review, the Accident Review Committee will develop their findings and
recommendations. The Defensive Driving Coordinator will then compile a written report, which
will become part of the accident investigation.
1. The file will be returned to the involved employee’s Division Commander, within ten
days of receipt of the file.
2. The completed file will be reviewed and evaluated by the involved employee’s immediate
supervisors and forwarded, through the chain of command, to the Office of the Chief of
Police with their recommendations.
H. All investigations, committee reviews and chain of command reviews of police involved traffic
accidents shall be completed within 30 days from the date of the accident, unless investigatory
considerations warrant delay and the Office of the Chief of Police approves.
A. Division Commanders shall be responsible for ensuring that all vehicles, assigned to their
respective Divisions, are inspected monthly, with all documentation completed by the 1st of the
month.
B. Division Commanders shall review and maintain monthly vehicle inspection forms.
A. When a sworn police officer is involved in a motor vehicle accident, in a private vehicle within the
City of Little Rock, a police supervisor will be responsible for investigating the accident and
completing an accident report.
B. When a civilian employee is involved in a motor vehicle accident, in a private vehicle within the
City of Little Rock, a police officer will be responsible for investigating the accident and
completing an accident report.
A. Under certain circumstances, the blocking of a road by using patrol units may be necessary. Only
marked police vehicles, equipped with emergency equipment, and manned by uniformed
personnel, will be utilized to establish and maintain temporary traffic control. The temporary
traffic control must be clearly visible and provide adequate warning to allow vehicles to come to a
safe stop. Blue lights will be activated any time a police unit is utilized in temporary traffic
control. Only fixed temporary traffic control will be employed by personnel of this Department.
1. Where the flow of traffic needs to be temporarily controlled into or around an area for
investigative purposes; to allow for the removal of potential hazards (accident scenes,
structure or vehicle fires, chemical spills, crime scenes, etc.); or at the scene of natural or
manmade disasters. Field supervisors will be responsible for monitoring the need for and
duration of such temporary traffic control.
2. During special events, such as Razorback football games, Riverfest and Pops on the
River. Where possible, temporary traffic control at such events should be planned in
advance and approved by the supervisor in command of the event.
A. The policies of the Little Rock Police Department regarding the use of physical force, non-lethal
weapons, deadly force and the discharging of weapons, are set forth in this General Order.
B. This Order governs all personnel who are acting or who may reasonably be expected to act in the
capacity of a law enforcement officer, on or off duty. This Order should not be construed as to
supersede an employee’s legal personal prerogatives, when acting as a private citizen, pursuant to
A.C.A. § 5-2-606 “Use of Physical Force in Defense of a Person,” § 5-2-607 “Use of Deadly
Physical Force in Defense of a Person,” § 5-2-608 “Use of Physical Force in Defense of Premises”
and/or § 5-2-609 “Use of Physical Force in Defense of Property.” However, employees must
recognize that actions taken under statutory authority granted private citizens, will be investigated
and evaluated as such.
C. Definitions
1. “Deadly Force,” as used in this Policy, is defined as that force which creates some specified
degree of risk that a reasonable and prudent person would consider likely to cause death or
serious physical injury.
2. “Serious Physical Injury,” as used in this Policy, is defined as physical injury that creates a
substantial risk of death or that causes protracted disfigurement, protracted impairment of
health, or loss or protracted impairment of the function of any bodily member or organ
(A.C.A. § 5-1-102.(19)).
3. “Physical Force,” as used in this Policy, is defined as any bodily impact, restraint, or
confinement, or the threat thereof (A.C.A. § 5-2-601.(3)).
4. “Reasonably believe” or “reasonable belief,” as used in this Policy, is defined as belief that
an ordinary, prudent person would form, under the circumstances in question, and one not
recklessly or negligently formed (A.C.A. § 5-1-102 (18)).
6. Exigent circumstances, as used in this Policy, is defined as those circumstances that would
cause a reasonable person to believe that a particular action is necessary to prevent
physical harm to an individual, the destruction of relevant evidence, the escape of a suspect,
or some other consequence improperly frustrating legitimate law enforcement efforts.
A. Statement of Philosophy
1. The Little Rock Police Department in establishing a philosophy for the use of Deadly Force
places the ultimate value on human life, while considering the legal, moral and ethical
implications of its application.
2. The citizens of Little Rock have vested their police officers with the
responsibility to protect life and property, and to apprehend criminal
offenders. The apprehension of criminal offenders and protection of
property must, at all times, be secondary to the protection of life.
Therefore, the use of Deadly Force is not allowed to protect property
interests.
3. Police Officers are confronted daily with situations where control must be
exercised to effect arrests and to protect the public safety. The officers may
achieve control of situations by the use of verbal warnings or the use of
reasonable physical force. The use of any reasonable physical force must
be based on reasonable alternatives that have been considered and would
be ineffective. The use of Deadly Force shall be the last alternative, and the
officer's responsibility to protect human life must include his own.
B. Purpose
1. This Order states the Department’s policy regarding a police officer’s use
of Deadly Force; and,
2. Establishes policies under which the use of Deadly Force by police officers
is permissible.
2. Officers will plan ahead and consider alternatives which will reduce the
possibility of needing to use Deadly Force.
D. The Authorization To Use Deadly Force - Officers may only use Deadly Force to
protect themselves or others from what they reasonably believe to be an immediate
threat of death or serious physical injury.
3. Officers will not fire into a building or through doors, unless the officer or
someone else is drawing fire and the suspect can be identified and is
clearly visible.
2. Officers may draw or display firearms when there is a threat or reasonable belief that there is
a threat to life, or when they have a reasonable fear for their own safety and/or the safety of
others.
3. The carbine rifle is authorized as an additional force option for officers when faced with
incidents posing a higher degree of danger where a long-range weapon or tactical weapon to
meet comparable resistance is needed. The carbine rifle is available as a supplement to the
officer’s primary weapon.
a) Officers shall only deploy the carbine rifle in the following circumstances:
(2) When officers can clearly articulate the need for deploying the rifle.
Examples of such situations may be but are not limited to:
(d) An armed barricaded suspect. (Once SWAT has arrived and the
officer is relieved on the inner perimeter, the rifle will be
secured).
b) Use or display of the rifle for routine building searches, routine traffic stops or
during any other routine police action is strictly prohibited. Violation of these
guidelines may result in disciplinary action and prohibition from carrying the
carbine rifle.
c) When an officer deploys a carbine rifle, they will make a radio broadcast on the
primary radio channel for that incident to notify responding officers and supervisors
that a carbine rifle has been deployed. Supervisors will monitor the deployment of
the carbine rifle and will take appropriate actions where needed.
d) Non-uniformed officers may deploy the carbine rifle only when they have donned
apparel which causes them to be readily identified as a police officer from the front
and rear.
A. This Section establishes the type and degree of force which may be used to overcome a level of
resistance, to control persons who are in custody and/or to prevent escape. Officers will only use the
type and degree of force which is reasonable and necessary based on the circumstances.
B. Levels of Resistance
3. Passive Resistance: Any type of resistance where the subject does not attempt to defeat the
officer(s) attempt to touch or control him/her, but refuses to actively comply with the
officer(s). (e.g., dead weight, does not react to verbal commands, etc.)
4. Defensive Resistance: Any action that attempts to prevent an officer from gaining control of
the subject (e.g., pulling/pushing away to defeat the escort position). It is not an attack on the
officer, but a physical act designed to prevent the officer from gaining control.
5. Active Aggression: Includes physical actions/assaults against the officer or another person
with less than deadly force (e.g., advancing, challenging, punching, kicking, grabbing,
wrestling, etc.)
6. Deadly Force Assault: Any force used against an officer and/or another person that may
result in great bodily harm or the loss of human life. It is important to note that a subject’s
use of deadly force does not require the use of a weapon against the officer. Deadly force is
any force that the officer reasonably believes could result in serious injury or death.
C. The type and degree of levels of control that may be used to overcome resistance, to control persons
who are in custody, and to prevent escape, are:
1. Level 1 - Officer Presence - The identification of police officer’s authority, either by the
uniformed police or the verbal indication of being a police officer.
a) Soft Empty Hand Control - Techniques that are designed to control Passive or
Defensive Resistance, used when verbal direction/commands are not effective and
there is non-compliance with lawful orders. They include strength techniques, joint
locks, pressure points, or a Knee-Strike/Distraction Technique to the subject’s thigh
(to prevent resistance from the escort position). These techniques have little or no
potential for injury.
b) Hard Empty Hand Control - Techniques that are designed to control Active
Aggression, but can be used to control Defensive Resistance when lower forms of
control have failed or when the officer believes lower forms of control will fail.
These techniques include Defensive Counterstrikes and the Shoulder Pin Restraint.
These techniques have a probability of injury in the form of bruises, contusions, or
lacerations.
5. Level 5 - Deadly Force – Any force used by an officer that may result in great bodily harm or
the loss of human life. Officers may only use Deadly Force to protect themselves or others
from what they reasonably believe to be an immediate threat of death or serious physical
injury.
D. There are so many variables pertaining to using force that it is difficult to establish “absolutes,”
especially in the case of non-lethal force. For example: the type of crime committed or attempted;
relative size/stature of the officer and the subject; exigent circumstances; number of officers; number
of subjects involved; availability of backup; reaction time; relative strength; subjects’ access to
weapons; subjects under the influence of alcohol or drugs; exhaustion of the officer; weather or
terrain condition; immediacy of danger; distance from the subject; and special knowledge (e.g.
subjects’ prior history of violence, etc.) are just a few of the variables that will impact an officer’s
selection of a specific force response. Officers should use defensive tactics for which Departmental
training has been given to control or arrest uncooperative suspects. Officers shall use de-escalation
techniques consistent with his/her training whenever possible and appropriate before resorting to
force and to reduce the need for force.
1. When an officer witnesses a suspect conceal evidence in his mouth, the officer will not use
force to remove the evidence.
2. The officer will order the suspect to remove the evidence from his mouth so the officer can
take possession of the evidence.
3. If the suspect fails to comply with the officer, the suspect will be taken into custody for
Tampering with Physical Evidence.
a) If the evidence is believed to be an illegal drug, the officer shall transport the
suspect to the University of Arkansas Medical Center for treatment. Any visible
residue on the suspect’s lips which the officer believes to be an illegal drug/narcotic,
may be swabbed by the officer to be forwarded to the State Crime Laboratory. A
Narcotics Detective will be notified to process and charge the subject on the felony
charge.
F. Authorized Weapons
1. Oleoresin Capsicum (O.C.) - O.C., a chemical deterrent, may be used in defense against
combative, resisting, and/or otherwise violent individuals. O.C. is not necessarily a
replacement or substitute for otherwise less-than-lethal devices or tactics and, therefore,
should only be used when it is determined to be the best available enforcement tool or tactic
under the given circumstances. Similarly, O.C. is not intended to be an alternative to the use
of Deadly Force, when such is clearly authorized and is necessary, as described in this
General Order.
a) O.C. may be used when an officer must use physical force, and verbal direction is
ineffective or inappropriate, and where passive restraint techniques have failed, and
an officer must use physical force; or when an officer perceives any reasonable
actions that threaten the officer’s safety.
b) O.C. may also be used to effect the removal of a person from an automobile or from
an enclosed area, when it becomes apparent that physical force will be necessary to
otherwise accomplish this.
c) O.C. will only be used as a control and compliance measure against violent and/or
resisting individuals, and will never be used for retaliation or for any illicit or
unlawful purposes.
d) Officers will use only the amount of O.C. reasonably needed to achieve the desired
enforcement results. Officers will discontinue the use of O.C. when it becomes
apparent that a suspect may otherwise be taken into custody, or whenever the O.C.
appears to disable the suspect.
e) After control has been established and/or resistance has ceased, officers will make
reasonable efforts to allow the O.C. affected individual relief from the discomfort
associated with the application of O.C. Water and sufficient ventilation will reduce
the effects of the O.C.
f) Authorized officers will at all times conform to training provided by the Department
in the use of O.C., and will carry and use only the authorized O.C. issued by the
Department.
g) The use of O.C. against any person will be considered a use of physical force and
each incident will be documented as detailed in this General Order. Following the
use of O.C. spray upon any person, a Use of Force report will be completed in the
Blue Team program.
h) O.C. spray canisters will not be defaced or altered in any way other than by normal
use. Expended canisters of O.C. will be replaced by the Training Division
Quartermaster; the expended canister must be turned in prior to receiving a new
canister.
2. Police Batons - A police baton may be used when considerable force is necessary. The baton
permits an officer to defend himself/herself or others, in situations where the use of firearms
may not be necessary or justified.
a) When the use of the baton is warranted, officers will attempt to strike the suspects’
arms or legs. Officers should not attempt to strike suspects on the head, neck,
sternum, spine, groin or kidneys unless Deadly Force is authorized.
b) Jabs to the body with the baton should be used under circumstances that inhibit the
officer’s ability to strike the suspect in the arms or legs (e.g. crowded areas, other
officers in the area, etc.).
c) Straight Baton - Officers may carry straight batons, at their discretion, after
receiving departmental training. When carried, the only authorized baton will be the
Departmentally-issued straight baton.
d) Expandable Straight Baton – The expandable straight baton is issued to recruits and
officers who have received training in its use. When carried, the only authorized
expandable baton will be the Departmentally-issued ASP or Monadnock expandable
baton.
e) Side Handle Baton - Officers may carry the side handle baton, either collapsible or
non-collapsible, at their discretion, after receiving current departmental training and
certification in its use. When carried, the only authorized side handle baton will be
the Departmentally-issued side handle baton. Officers who have not completed the
training are not authorized to carry a side handle baton.
3. Conducted Electrical Weapons (i.e. Taser) – Conducted Electrical Weapons (CEW) shall be
used as a resource to facilitate the safe arrest of combative, combative resisting, or violent
individuals. The CEW is not a replacement or substitute for other less lethal devices or
tactics and should only be used when it is determined to be the most reasonable tool or tactic
under the given circumstances, in accordance with the law and departmental policy. The
CEW is not intended to be an alternative to the use of deadly force when such is clearly
authorized and necessary, as described in this General Order.
a) Only officers trained and certified by a qualified instructor in the use of a CEW may
carry or use a CEW.
c) All Field Service Division uniformed officers certified to carry and issued a CEW
will ensure that they carry the CEW on their person anytime they are on duty or off
duty in departmentally authorized employment.
(1) The use of verbal direction will not be a prerequisite to the use of a CEW if
a subject is demonstrating an assaultive, combative, or threatening
behavior.
f) The CEW may also be used when it becomes necessary to immobilize an individual
who may be a threat to themselves, or others, the use of other methods is not
practical, and deadly force would be inappropriate.
g) The CEW will only be used as a control and compliance measure against a violent
individual or an individual threatening violence, and shall never be used for
retaliation or for any illicit or unlawful purpose.
h) Officers will use only the amount of control reasonably needed to effectively control
the situation. Once control is obtained, the use of a CEW will be discontinued
immediately.
i) Officers shall not deploy the CEW against individuals that are demonstrating
passive resistance. This is a device which is primarily used to defend one’s self, a
third party, or to gain control of a combative, violent or combative resistant
individual.
j) Except in a confrontation where deadly force would be justified, the officer shall not
intentionally fire the CEW at sensitive areas, or the chest area, nor shall he/she
direct the laser into the eyes of anyone.
(1) Warn the suspect that he/she will be “Tased” if they do not cooperate,
(3) Loudly announce that the CEW is being deployed to avoid confusion by
assisting officers.
l) Center mass of the subject’s back is the primary aiming point, and lower center
mass or legs are the secondary targets.
m) The CEW may be used during exigent circumstances in a drive stun mode if:
(1) Upon deployment, the probes do not strike the intended target, or
n) While in drive stun mode, target areas should be the abdominal region, hips, thigh,
and the brachial plexus origin on the side of the neck or the pelvic girdle.
o) Multiple applications of the CEW using the drive stun method are discouraged
unless doing so is deemed reasonable and can be articulated.
(1) The officer recognizes the threat of sparks discharged by the CEW could
come into contact with flammable liquids or substances: (i.e. meth labs,
gasoline, or any similar accelerants. Officers should use discretion in the
use of a CEW when assisting/dealing with persons who have been sprayed
with a OC spray containing an unknown propellant by law enforcement
personnel from another agency/jurisdiction).
(2) The subject could suffer a fall from a significant height or onto objects
likely to cause serious injury.
(4) The effect of the CEW would present an increased risk of serious injury
due to the age or physical disability of an individual.
(6) The subject flees from officers, unless the officer reasonably believes the
subject has committed a violent offense or will likely commit a violent
offense if not apprehended in a timely manner.
q) Once deployed, the CEW should be allowed to cycle for a period not to exceed five
(5) seconds. The CEW will not be applied additional times unless doing so is
reasonably necessary to gain control of the subject.
r) After the CEW has been deployed and the desired results have been achieved, the
officer must take measures to secure the individual in restraints as quickly as
possible in order to minimize the need for additional cycles of the CEW.
s) After control has been established, the deploying officer will contact an on duty
supervisor who will immediately respond to the scene.
(1) MEMS shall be requested at the scene in order to provide medical aid to
anyone injured in the incident. MEMS personnel are allowed to remove the
CEW probes, in accordance with MEMS protocol.
(2) Officers may remove CEW probes that are embedded in clothing.
u) Officers will indicate in the Incident Report, Arrest Disposition Report (ADR), and
the Use of Force Report that a CEW was used. If the subject is arrested, make note
of the time the CEW was used and notify the detention employees of the time, so
they will know to observe the subject and contact the appropriate medical personnel
if the subject should require those services.
v) Officers will carry the CEW and cartridges in the issued case or holster.
(1) The CEW will be worn on the duty belt in a manner which enables the
officer to draw the weapon using a cross draw, strong hand technique.
(2) Officers are to ensure they maintain possession of their assigned cartridges.
Officers will not share cartridges unless exigent circumstances exist and
can be articulated.
w) Officers will conduct a spark test at the beginning of each shift or assignment to
ensure the device is functioning properly.
(1) A spark test for the X26 is conducted by first ensuring the CEW is not
loaded with a live cartridge and, then putting the safety switch in the Up
(ARMED) position and test firing the device to observe an electrical
discharge.
(2) A spark test for the X2 can be done without unloading the X2. The test is
conducted by putting the safety switch in the Up (ARMED) position and,
then depressing the ARC switch to both watch and hear both bays arcing
from arm’s length.
(1) When loading the X26 TASER cartridges into the CEW, carefully hold the
TASER cartridge on both sides of the cartridge while keeping your fingers
and all parts of your body away from the front of the TASER cartridge at
all times. Ensure the safety switch is in the Down (SAFE) position and
point the CEW in a safe direction. Carefully insert the TASER cartridge
into the deployment bay of the X26 CEW until it is seated. You may hear
an audible click when this occurs. Gently tug the cartridge to ensure it’s
seated.
(2) When loading the X2, hold the Smart cartridge at both ends of the blast
doors while keeping fingers and all body parts away from the front of the
Smart cartridge at all times. Ensure the safety switch is in the Down
(SAFE) position and point the CEW in a safe direction. Always keep your
finger off the trigger while loading or unloading a CEW. Smart cartridges
are not reversible. The protruding circuit board must be inserted first so
that the circuit board is in the bottom of the cartridge bay. Insert the
protruding end into the deployment bay of the X2 until it is seated. You
may hear an audible click when this occurs. If loading with your left hand,
load from right to left to avoid placing your hands in front of a loaded
cartridge. Do the opposite when unloading or if loading with your right
hand. Do not push the Smart cartridge into the CEW by pushing the center
of the cartridge between the blast doors. This method can result in the
cartridge to malfunction.
y) When an officer is off-duty and not working in an enforcement capacity, the CEW
will be stored in a secure, climate controlled environment.
z) Officers will conform to training provided by the Department in the use of the
CEW.
aa) The use of the CEW against any person will be considered a use of force and each
incident will be documented, as detailed in subsection IV.A. of this General Order.
4. Less Lethal Launchers (i.e. Less Lethal Shotguns) - These weapons are an option in dealing
with situations where an individual may be intent on harming themselves or others.
a) These situations must require that the suspect be incapacitated and taken into
custody under circumstances that would:
b) The use of the less lethal launcher is a decision that must be made by the individual
officer considering the specific tactics and resources immediately available to
him/her. Under no circumstances should an officer attempt to use less lethal
weapons on a suspect who is capable of using deadly force on the officer or another
person unless supported by officers armed with deadly force.
c) Only officers that have been trained in the use of less lethal launchers shall check
out a less lethal weapon at the start of their shift. These weapons are maintained by
each of the Field Services Divisions for issue to trained personnel. The procedure
for maintaining these weapons shall be as follows:
(1) Less lethal launchers shall be carried unloaded in the patrol vehicle trunk,
and in the provided carrying case at all times when not in use;
(2) While outside, prior to securing the weapon in the trunk, the issued officer
shall be responsible for inspecting the weapon. Special attention should be
made to assure that the breech and barrel are clear and that the weapon is
unloaded;
(3) The issued officer shall assure that serviceable less lethal ammunition is in
the case and that no other ammunition is carried with this weapon;
(4) If the weapon is deployed during the course of an officer’s shift, he/she is
responsible for assuring that it is unloaded and secured in the case prior to
leaving the scene. If the weapon has been fired during the course of an
officer’s shift, it should be returned to the Training Division with a copy of
the Use of Force Report so that the weapon can be cleaned and ammunition
replenished;
(5) Each issued officer shall be responsible for assuring that the less lethal
launcher is returned at the end of his/her shift in the above-described
condition. Any defects in the weapon or ammunition should be
documented and directed to the Training Division. Any defective weapon
or ammunition should immediately be taken out of service;
(6) All officers trained in the use of less lethal launchers will qualify annually
with such weapons, which will be documented and instructed by the
Training Division.
d) The use of the Less Lethal Launchers against any person will be considered a use of
force and each incident will be documented, as detailed in subsection IV.A. of this
General Order.
5. Canines - The use of a police canine to search for or apprehend suspects will be considered a
use of force under this Order, when the canine inflicts injury to any person.
G. Flashlights - In the event it becomes necessary to use a flashlight as a defensive weapon, officers will
use it in the same manner as the baton.
a) Only departmental issued flashlights or those meeting the below specifications will
be carried by employees.
b) Officers may purchase and use, at their own expense, a flashlight which meets the
following requirements:
H. Firearms - Striking a person with any firearm is prohibited, unless the firearm has already been drawn
or displayed in accordance with this Order, and the immediate use of physical force is necessary for
the defense of an officer or another person, under circumstances where the use of Deadly Force is not
justified and the opportunity to secure the firearm is not present.
I. Only employees demonstrating proficiency in the use of department authorized weapons will be
approved to carry such weapons.
J. Police Vehicles - Officers will not attempt to deliberately collide with other vehicles or to use police
vehicles to force any vehicle off the roadway.
1. When any force is used, the officer shall attempt to determine if any injuries have occurred as
soon as practical.
2. If a suspect is obviously injured, alleges injury or requests medical assistance when an officer
has used lethal or less-than-lethal force, the officer will immediately notify a supervisor.
3. In these instances, officers will provide medical treatment for the offender by:
A. Officers employing force to control, arrest or prevent the escape of any person, will, prior to the end
of the officer’s tour of duty, submit a detailed report outlining the circumstances and exact type and
amount of force used in the following instances:
1. Whenever the use of force results in, may reasonably result in, or is alleged to have resulted
in a physical injury to the person. Such force includes, but is not limited to, those instances
when:
b) An officer strikes, or attempts to strike, another person with his hands, feet, baton,
or other instrumentality, device, or method of force, whether or not injury results to
the person; or
3. Whenever a person complains of incurring a physical injury, as the result of physical force
employed by an officer of this Department;
5. Prior to the end of the supervisor’s tour of duty, they will enter the basic components of the
use of force into the Blue Team program, which will include the involved officer(s), involved
citizen(s), location of the incident, and the incident number.
B. The following procedures will be followed for review and documentation of an officer’s use of force,
as outlined in this Order:
1. As soon as the suspect is restrained and the scene is stabilized, the involved officer will
immediately contact a supervisor.
2. The supervisor will immediately evaluate the circumstances, amount and necessity of the
force used.
4. An Officer’s Report (Form 5600-02) will be made with a complete and detailed account of
the exact force used.
5. A Use of Force Report will be entered into the Blue Team program.
6. The reports will be reviewed by the officer’s supervisor, who will make a written evaluation
and forward the reports through the Chain of Command to be reviewed at each level and
submitted to the Office of the Chief of Police.
7. If necessary, after review by the appropriate Bureau Commander, the Use of Force file will
be forwarded to the Chief of Police for his findings and disposition.
8. The following Use of Force files will be forwarded to the Chief of Police for his findings and
disposition:
a) Any file wherein a potential violation of Departmental policy has been identified;
b) Any file where counseling or other disciplinary action has been recommended;
c) Any file where there is some element of disagreement in the Chain of Command
evaluations;
e) Any file where there is an indication of a safety or policy issue which should be
addressed.
9. After final review, the Use of Force file will be forwarded to Professional Standards for
computer data entry. The Professional Standards Section will retain files where any type of
disciplinary action was taken. All other files will be routed to the appropriate Division
Commander for retention.
10. The Division Commander will ensure that all provisions of this Order are observed, reports
are submitted in a timely basis, and each Use of Force file is maintained in his Division.
C. Files regarding the use of force, including resisting arrest, battery on officers and canine bites, will be
prepared as follows:
1. All documentation shall be placed in a file folder and secured at the top with an ACCO two
hole fastener.
2. Any photographs or audio/video recordings will be placed in a manila envelope and attached
to the inside front file cover.
3. The initial evaluating supervisor shall be responsible for ensuring that necessary
documentation is obtained and properly placed in the file, before routing it through the Chain
of Command.
a) Lieutenant’s evaluation;
b) Sergeant’s evaluation;
e) Printed copy of the Use of Force Report from the Blue Team program;
D. A copy of all Use of Force files involving canines will be forwarded to the Headquarters Division
Commander after the file has been reviewed and evaluated.
E. When an officer employs the use of O.C. spray, or uses physical force to restrain, move and/or place
a suspect in a vehicle, where no blows are exchanged by either the officer(s) or the suspect, the
following procedures will be followed:
b) Specify the exact amount of force employed and list the involvement of any other
officer(s) in his original Incident Report concerning the incident; and,
c) When completing the Incident Report in the IRDE System, select “Use of Force” as
an incident type.
b) Sign the original report, as indication of his approval of the officer’s actions;
c) Ensure that a Blue Team program Use of Force Report is completed and a printed
copy of the Use of Force Report is forwarded along with a copy of the Incident
Report through the Chain of Command to the office of the Chief of Police, where it
will be signed at each level.
3. If the supervisor does not approve of the officer’s actions, following his evaluation, he will
follow the guidelines set forth in Section IV. C of this Order.
4. Each division will be responsible for maintaining documentation on each Use of Force
incident.
F. The use of force report will be utilized by the Chain of Command to evaluate the actions of all
officers involved, in order to determine if the policies and procedures of the Department were
adhered to.
G. Annual analysis
2. The Training Division Commander will be responsible for compilation of an annual analysis
of all Use of Force incidents, policies, and reporting procedures. This analysis will review
patterns or trends that may indicate training needs, equipment upgrades, and/or policy
modification. The annual analysis shall be forwarded to the Office of the Chief of Police no
later than February 15th of each year.
A. Investigation Requirements
1. Whenever a Little Rock Police Officer becomes involved in an incident in which either the
officer or another person is injured or killed as a result of police action and/or the use of
Deadly Force, or whenever an officer intentionally employs Deadly Force, but no injury or
death results, two separate investigations shall be initiated - a criminal investigation and an
administrative investigation. (This shall not be applicable to those instances where the death
or injury is the result of a motor vehicle accident.)
a) When the use of deadly force by an officer results in someone being injured or
killed, or in other high profile cases (at the discretion of the Chief) a briefing may be
held the following day in the Chief’s conference room. The meeting will be for the
purpose of developing a Press release and statement to the Department. Any
confidential information or facts will remain confidential. The meeting will consist
of:
2. The Major Crimes Division will conduct the criminal investigation to facilitate successful
prosecution, if deemed appropriate, by the Prosecuting Attorney’s Office.
3. The Crime Scene Search Unit will be summoned to the scene of all officer-involved
shootings, and will process the scene for evidence in compliance with standard investigative
procedures.
5. Unintentional weapons’ discharges not resulting in physical injury will be investigated by the
involved officer’s Chain of Command.
a) The field supervisor in charge at the scene will be responsible for the integrity of the
crime scene until it is released to the Major Crimes Division supervisor.
b) The ranking supervisor from the Major Crimes Division will be in command of the
overall initial investigation, and will notify the Pulaski County Prosecuting
Attorney’s Office and the City Attorney’s Office.
2. Once the situation has been stabilized, the officer involved will relate a brief account of the
incident to the field supervisor prior to the arrival of Detective personnel, so the supervisor
may brief ranking officers requiring administrative information.
3. When the scene is stabilized, the field supervisor in charge shall take possession of all
weapon(s) in possession of the officer(s) at the time of the incident (including back-up
weapons). The supervisor shall render the weapon(s) safe in the presence of the Crime Scene
Technician prior to relinquishing the weapon(s) for processing. Both the supervisor and the
Crime Scene Technician shall document the transfer of the weapon(s) on the Evidence
Transmittal Form LRPD 5480-11 identifying the weapon, location, date, time and persons
involved. Crime Scene shall then maintain custody of the weapon for purposes of storage and
testing. Weapon(s) seized from the involved officer(s), determined by the Major Crimes
Division investigators not to have been used in the incident, shall be returned to the officer(s)
upon the issuing of a replacement weapon.
4. The Shift or Section Commander and/or Division Commander may relate basic facts to the
news media, or have the Public Affairs Officer make the initial release.
5. If the officer involved is not injured, he should retire some distance from the scene to await
the arrival of the officer-in-charge of the investigation. This should be done in the company
of a companion officer chosen by the involved officer, such as another supervisor or an
officer of equal rank who was not a witness to or involved in the incident. It will be the
responsibility of the field supervisor to ensure a companion officer is made available. The
purpose of a companion officer is to serve the involved officer in a supportive role.
6. The first supervisor on the scene shall assess the involved officer(s) for physical injury. If
physical injury is noted, medical personnel shall be summoned immediately. Should the
injury be suspected of having been caused by a gunshot, the injured officer shall be
immediately transported to a medical facility for examination and treatment by a licensed
physician.
7. When the Major Crimes Division supervisor arrives at the scene, he will be briefed by the
field supervisor and, if he deems necessary, the involved officer will report back to the scene
and respond to the needs of the investigation. When the Major Crimes Division supervisor
determines that the involved officer is no longer needed at the scene, the companion officer
will transport him/her to the Major Crimes Division.
a) Accompany the involved officer to the Major Crimes Division offices after release
from the scene. The companion officer shall remain with the involved officer unless
the officer desires to be left alone.
b) Be responsible for acting as a calming influence and monitor the involved officer
for signs of critical incident stress or trauma. If signs of trauma or shock are
evident, appropriate medical assistance shall be summoned to the scene and the on-
scene supervisor shall be notified immediately.
9. The companion officer shall take all measures to ensure they do not:
b) Discuss the facts or specifics of the incident with the involved officer or jeopardize
the criminal investigation.
c) Make any statements that infringe on the privacy of the involved officer.
10. The involved officer will refrain from discussing the details of the incident with anyone
except Departmental personnel assigned to the investigation, the Prosecuting Attorney’s
Office, Departmentally-provided and/or personal Psychologist or counselor, the officer’s
private attorney, the officer’s chosen clergy, and the officer’s immediate family.
11. A designated representative with the F.O.P. may have contact with the involved officer for
the purpose of arranging an attorney retained by them or for assisting the companion officer
with notification and transportation of family members.
12. Any employee not directly involved in the investigation shall refrain from lingering in or near
the crime scene or investigative offices of the Department.
13. Any employee not participating in the authorized Departmental investigation who has contact
with the involved officer(s) before conclusion of the initial investigation shall document that
contact in writing for inclusion in the investigative files.
14. The field supervisor at the scene shall have someone not involved in the incident prepare the
initial Incident Report and other necessary reports and have copies delivered to the Major
Crimes Division after supervisory review.
15. Prior to the end of the field supervisor’s tour of duty, they will enter the basic components of
the use of force into the Blue Team program, which will include the involved officer(s),
involved citizen(s), location of the incident, and the incident number.
16. The involved officer shall be afforded an early opportunity to communicate with family
members. The person designated as a companion may assist in making this notification. The
Major Crimes Division supervisor shall ensure that this is accomplished.
17. In order to ensure the integrity of an investigation and protect the best interest of the involved
officer(s), the Training Division will ensure that all personnel receive adequate instruction
detailing the responsibilities of a companion officer.
1. Officers who actually employ Deadly Force shall be requested to make a written and/or oral
statement.
2. Statements from officers involved in the incident shall be taken by Major Crimes Division
supervisors.
3. The Major Crimes Division will prepare a briefing sheet for Shift and Section Commanders,
who will brief their personnel as soon as practical.
4. Upon completion of the Major Crimes Division’s investigation, a copy of the investigative
file will be forwarded to the Office of the Chief of Police for review before forwarding to the
Prosecuting Attorney’s Office.
5. Upon conclusion of the investigation by the Prosecuting Attorney, the Major Crimes Division
Commander will notify the officer(s) in writing of their findings.
6. It shall be the responsibility of the Major Crimes Division supervisor to update the officer,
his supervisors, the Office of the Chief of Police, and the Pulaski County Prosecuting
Attorney’s Office, as to the status of the investigation.
1. The field supervisor in charge of the scene will notify the officer(s) involved Division
Commander and advise him/her that a replacement weapon is needed for an officer involved
in a shooting if he feels it necessary to replace the weapon immediately.
2. The Departmental Armorer shall issue the replacement weapon(s) during regular business
hours. In the absence of the Departmental Armorer, the Training Sergeant or his designate
shall be responsible for the issuing of weapons.
3. After business hours, the Division Commander shall advise a Major Crimes Division
Supervisor to remove a replacement weapon from the Major Crimes Division’s safe for the
officer(s) involved in the shooting.
a) When issuing a firearm, the log will be completed by the issuing personnel and
initialed by the receiving officer on a LRPD Quartermaster Issue/Return Inventory
Tracking Log 5210-02 and forwarded to the Training Division Commander.
4. If more replacement weapon(s) are needed, then the supervisor will advise Communications
of the location where the weapon needs to be brought in order for it to be issued to the
involved police officer. The In-Service Training Sergeant shall contact the Training Division
Armorer or respond himself/herself and issue the weapon. It shall be the responsibility of the
In-Service Training Sergeant to notify Communications of an alternate call-out person
whenever he is unavailable.
a) Prior to returning to full duty, the officer involved will need to respond to the
Training Division and qualify with a passing score using the newly issued weapon.
5. The Departmental Armorer shall inspect those weapons kept in the Major Crimes Division
semi-annually.
1. Officers who have employed Deadly Force which has resulted in injury or death to any
person, will be referred to the Employee Assistance Program as soon as practical after the
incident.
a) Officers will attend the confidential counseling session, which will be provided by
the Employee Assistance Program.
b) The involved officer’s Division Commander will be responsible for ensuring that
such counseling is scheduled and completed, and that appropriate supporting
documentation is forwarded to the Professional Standards Section.
2. Officers who have employed Deadly Force, which has resulted in injury or death to any
person, will be placed on Administrative Leave until after the officer(s) has attended
mandatory EAP sessions, a thorough administrative review has been completed or a decision
by the Chief of Police or his designee has been made to return to work. During this time the
officer(s) will make themself available to assist with the Professional Standards investigation.
a) Officers who have been placed on such leave will not engage in off-duty
employment during this time, nor are they expected to perform police-related
functions, except under extreme circumstances. Officers on Administrative Leave
will be available at the direction of the Professional Standards Section to assist in
the investigation of the Deadly Force incident.
b) Officers who have been placed on such leave will not be returned to normal duties
until completion of E.A.P. counseling.
d) The involved officer’s Division Commander will authorize his return to normal
duties.
1. The Professional Standards investigation will be conducted in conjunction with but separate
from the Major Crimes Division’s investigation.
2. The Professional Standards Investigator shall advise the involved officer(s) of his rights, as
to the administrative investigation process. Those rights are:
c) The right to refuse to answer any questions, but such refusal shall be grounds for
disciplinary action, including dismissal;
d) That the results of the Professional Standards investigative interview will not be
used against the officer(s) in any subsequent criminal proceeding (Garrity v. New
Jersey, 385 U.S. 493 (1967)); and,
e) The interviewed officer will be provided a copy of the statements he made during
the course of the administrative investigation, upon his request.
3. The Professional Standards investigator shall prepare a report on adherence to policy, and
submit the Professional Standards file to the involved officer’s Chain of Command for
review and recommendations to be forwarded to the Chief of Police.
1. The Deadly Force Review Board is established for the purpose of reviewing and evaluating
incidents of firearms discharge, both intentional and unintentional, resulting in injury or
death by sworn members while in the performance of their duties as police officers, and those
incidents where an officer or another person is killed by any other means, except motor
vehicle accidents.
2. All incidents, as noted above, will be reviewed within ten (10) days after the Professional
Standards Section has completed its investigation.
3. The Chief of Police, at his discretion, may have the Deadly Force Review Board review any
other firearms discharge or intentional use of Deadly Force not resulting in injury or death.
4. The objective of the Deadly Force Review Board is to make recommendations to the Chief of
Police concerning firearms discharges and other incidents described herein, based on:
b) Adequacy of training;
c) Adherence to training;
e) Adequacy of investigation.
5. The Assistant Chief of Police - Field Services Bureau shall appoint the Deadly Force Review
Board for each incident, comprised of the following:
6. The Chairman will convene the Deadly Force Review Board for the purpose of reviewing the
Major Crimes Division investigation and the Professional Standards investigation of each
incident.
7. The Chairman of the Deadly Force Review Board is authorized to discuss/clarify any matters the
board identifies/requests pertaining to the incident with appropriate Major Crimes, Professional
Standards or other divisional personnel prior to the conclusion of the board and submission of the
final report.
8. After conducting the review, the Review Board shall develop its findings and
recommendations. The Chairman will submit a written report specifically covering the issues
identified in subsection G.4.a. through e. and any recommendations to the Office of the Chief
of Police within five days.
H. All investigations shall be completed within ninety days from the date of the incident, unless
evidentiary or investigatory considerations warrant delay and the Chief of Police approves.
I. The Chain of Command review and evaluation should not exceed the deadline established by
Professional Standards Section upon submission.
J. The Shooting Review Board shall complete its review as prescribed by Subsection G of this Order.
VI. Other and Accidental Discharges of Firearms (may not constitute the use of force)
1. This procedure will be followed any time a member of the Department, on duty or off duty,
accidentally discharges a firearm and no injury or death occurs.
2. Procedure
a) Any employee who accidentally discharges a firearm will contact an on-duty police
supervisor who will initiate an investigation.
b) The supervisor will complete an Incident Report and ensure that the employee(s)
involved submit a detailed Officer’s Report on the incident.
c) The supervisor will complete a Divisional Investigation report in the Blue Team
program, and will include a printed copy of this report in the file.
d) The supervisor will evaluate the employee’s performance and submit his findings, in
writing, to be reviewed at each level in the Chain of Command.
e) The involved employee’s Division Commander will review and maintain the files on
all accidental weapons discharges.
1. This procedure will be followed any time a member of the Department, on duty or off duty,
accidentally discharges a firearm resulting in injury or death.
2. Investigation requirements
c) Any employee who accidentally discharges a firearm resulting in injury where there
is no threat of death or permanent disability will immediately contact an on-duty
police supervisor, who will respond to the scene and initiate an investigation.
d) The supervisor will complete an Incident Report and ensure that the involved
employee(s) submit a detailed Officer’s Report, as soon as practical after the
incident. The supervisor in charge may also request assistance from the Major
Crimes Division, as needed, toward the successful completion of the investigation
and for any appropriate criminal investigation necessary.
e) CSSU will be summoned to the scene and will photograph and process the scene as
needed.
f) The Professional Standards Section will be notified and briefed as to the specific
circumstances of the incident.
1. This procedure will be followed any time a member of the Department discharges a weapon
at an animal while in an on-duty capacity.
2. Any officer who discharges a firearm upon an animal will contact an on-duty police
supervisor who will initiate an investigation.
3. The supervisor will complete an Incident Report and a Use of Deadly Force Report, and will
ensure that the involved officer(s) submit a detailed Officer’s Report of the incident.
4. The supervisor will complete a Divisional Investigation report in the Blue Team program,
and will include a printed copy of this report in the file.
5. The supervisor will evaluate the officer’s performance and submit his findings, in writing, to
be reviewed at each level in the chain of command.
6. The involved officer’s Division Commander will review and maintain the files on all
weapons discharges upon animals.
D. Investigative review
1. The supervisor will evaluate the officer’s performance and submit his findings, in writing, to
be reviewed at each level in the chain of command to the office of the Chief of Police.
2. The completed investigative file will be forwarded to the Professional Standards Office, who
will record the file according to Professional Standards procedures.
E. Professional Standards shall maintain the files on all accidental weapons discharges with injury.
A. The purpose of this Order is to establish procedures and guidelines to provide for the security and
control of seized, recovered, and evidentiary property, as well as abandoned, lost, or found
property, in the custody of the Department.
B. Any property, brought into department control by employees must be logged into department
records and secured in the provided storage areas, as soon as possible, before the employee’s shift
ends.
C. Before any property is stored, the employee, who obtained the property, must make an effort to
identify and notify the owner or custodian of the property, and document such actions in his
report.
A. Items stored in the Property Room will be classified utilizing the following three categories:
1. Evidence;
2. Stored; and/or,
3. Found.
B. All property submitted for storage, shall have an Incident Report written and an incident number
identified on the property tag and in the computer records. Detectives assigned to the Special
Investigations Division, will follow procedures outlined in their Divisional Operating Procedures.
C. Evidence
1. All items stored under this classification must be linked directly to an identifiable crime
and have a direct bearing upon the prosecution of the offense.
2. All items stored as “Evidence” requires written authority from the officer, case
detective, Prosecuting Attorney, or Judge (Court Order) before a final disposition can be
made.
D. Stored Property
1. All items stored with this classification may be released or disposed of, at any time, by
property personnel, without prior notice to the recovering officer and/or case detective.
2. If the owner of the property is known, it shall be the responsibility of the employee
storing the property, to notify the owner and explain procedures for claiming the
property. Any notification must be documented in the Accident Report, Incident
Report, or Supplemental Report; whichever is appropriate.
4. The recovering employee will be responsible for notifying the owner and Property
personnel when such information is obtained at a later date.
E. Found Property
1. This classification shall be used on all property where the owner is not known or cannot
be identified (no identification or serial number, bicycles, lawnmowers, hand tools, etc.).
2. All items stored with this classification may be released or disposed of by property
personnel, without prior notice to the officer and/or case detective.
A. No personnel will accept for storage any item which is being stored with the intent to punish or
inconvenience any individual, or when the storage of such item is clearly unnecessary.
B. All items presented for storage must be properly packaged and sealed with officer’s initials and
date inscribed across the package and tape, whenever possible. Multiple items stored under one
(1) Tag Number shall be secured together to prevent separation in transport.
C. All items must have a computer entry and a bar code label affixed, prior to being stored.
Instructions for computer entry are available at each terminal where property may be stored. If the
computer is down for any reason, an appropriate red or blue property tag will be completed and
attached to the property.
D. Any property stored during periods when the Property Room is closed must be secured in the
provided lockers. The computer entry record must reflect which locker contains the property.
E. Any item that has an identification or serial number will be stored separately from other pieces of
property. The recovering employee will run an NCIC/ACIC check on the property to determine if
the item is stolen or wanted. Should the NCIC/ACIC computer system be down, the inability to
check the item shall be noted in the Officer’s Incident Report. A copy of the Incident Report
should be attached to the property.
1. Perishable food;
2. Explosives;
3. Detonators;
4. Fireworks;
5. Corrosives;
6. Bottled gases;
8. Any material or substance which poses a health risk to personnel storing or handling
such items. (Should the question of health risk arise, the Administration Division
Commander or his designee will be contacted to make the determination).
G. The dangerous items listed above will be stored at the Central Fire Station or by another agency,
which is responsible for handling such items. The employee should request a receipt to maintain
the chain of custody on items that are evidence. This receipt should be included in the case file.
H. Stored vehicles will not be entered into the property inventory computer system, except as
authorized by the Headquarters Division Commander or his designee.
I. A computer entry, or a bar code label, will not be made for any item not in custody of the
Department.
J. Any item presented for storage in the property room, should be packaged using the guidelines
listed below. Employees should use the smallest package possible to help utilize space in the
property room.
2. Other items can be placed in various sized paper bags or cardboard boxes, when
possible.
3. Any items that cannot be secured together must have separate computer entries and
property labels.
4. Any item soiled with blood or other body fluids will be dried in Crime Scene lockers
before being sealed in paper or cardboard and marked “CAUTION BIOHAZARD”.
K. If special conditions exist, concerning the stored item (such as, “To be printed”, “Caution” -
“Sharp Edges”, etc.), the officer shall ensure the packages are labeled appropriately. If necessary,
an Officer’s Report will be attached to the item stored.
L. Containers filled with non-flammable liquids shall be properly sealed or the container emptied
before storage.
M. Power equipment containing gasoline will not be accepted for storage within the Property Room
until the gasoline is removed.
N. Hypodermic syringes, knives, or any other sharp objects must be made safe before storage. The
State Crime Lab has requested that all syringes be packaged in puncture proof containers and
labeled “CAUTION BIOHAZARD”, prior to requesting analysis.
O. All blood and urine shall be stored in the refrigerator in a package to prevent leakage. An
Arkansas State Crime Laboratory submission form shall be completed by the storing employee.
The sample will be submitted by Property Room personnel.
P. Items, such as old or damaged televisions, refrigerators, bicycle frames, old automobile parts,
tires, etc., that have obviously been abandoned and are not of an evidentiary nature, will not be
stored in the Property Room. The sanitation department or other city agency will be notified to
pick up these items.
R. Large items or large quantities of property that will not fit in the provided lockers, will be securely
stored in cages located within the foyer of the main Property Room, 600 West Markham. The
keys to the overhead door, the outside double doors, and the security code may be obtained from
the Desk Officer. The Desk Officer will complete a log indicating the time in/out and the
employee requiring access.
1. The storing officer will transport or make arrangements to transport large items, such as
bicycles to the main Property Room. Those items will be secured by chain and lock
within the foyer of the Main Property Room.
2. No items will be left unsecured at anytime in any property facility. If property cannot
be secured, Communications will be notified to contact the on-call property personnel
for assistance.
S. Evidence received from the State Crime Lab shall be stored by Property Room personnel, so they
may account for all items.
T. Items presented by other agencies for storage will not be accepted by this Department, except
those items which are part of a Departmental investigation.
U. Property personnel shall ensure that procedures and packaging guidelines are followed. If
packaging or procedures have not been followed, the Property Supervisor will contact the
Officer’s Supervisor and have the Officer report to the Property Room no later than close of the
next business day.
A. All money and jewelry must be counted and itemized by two (2) people prior to storage.
1. Two (2) officers will conduct a count of the currency and separate by denomination.
Each officer will conduct an independent count and sign the “Little Rock Police
Currency Recording Form” (5600-92) verifying the total amount stored.
2. All currency will be recorded on LRPD Form 5600-92 which will then be attached to
the outside of the envelope prior to storage.
B. All money or jewelry must be sealed with scotch or evidence tape, with the employee’s signature
across the seal. Money and jewelry may also be heat sealed, with the storing employee’s signature
across the seal. The employee witnessing the counting and itemizing of money or jewelry, should
also sign across the seal.
C. All money or jewelry shall be stored separately from other items of property.
D. Property personnel will ensure that procedures are followed, before accepting the property for
storage.
E. Amounts over $5,000.00 shall be stored with a Property Supervisor at the main Property Room
during normal office hours. Amounts over $5000.00 that are stored after hours, requires the call-
out of a Property supervisor to secure the money or valuables in the safe. Amounts over
$5,000.00 will not be secured in the lockers provided for storage of property after hours.
F. If any member of the police department, sworn or civilian, during the course of his/her duties,
comes in contact with U.S. Currency in the amount of $2,000.00 or more that must be stored for
any reason, he/she will immediately notify his/her immediate supervisor. The notified supervisor
shall:
1. The supervisor shall be involved in the separation of the currency by denominations and
will ensure that, once separated; each member of the counting team counts and verifies
the total amount of money in each denomination. Should the individual totals be
different, a recount will be conducted to correct any discrepancies.
2. The supervisor shall ensure the amounts of each denomination and the total is correctly
recorded on a “Little Rock Police Currency Recording Form” (5600-92).
3. The supervisor and the two (2) employees used to assist in counting the currency will
sign the “Little Rock Police Currency Recording Form” (5600-92) verifying the total
amount stored.
V. Storage of Weapons
B. The employee recovering a firearm, shall run an NCIC/ACIC check on the firearm, before it is
stored. If stolen or wanted, a copy of this computer printout shall be attached to the property prior
to storage.
1. If the computer systems are down and the employee is unable to run a check on the
weapon, this shall be noted in the employee’s report. A copy of this report should be
attached to the property, prior to storage.
2. The recovering employee shall be responsible for notifying the appropriate Detective
Unit.
3. The officer or the case detective shall be responsible for notifying the owner of the
firearm and documenting such notification.
C. Weapons which fall into the classification as Unusual/Exotic, must be made safe by a department
armor, prior to storing. In accordance with Training Division call out procedures, the department
armor will inspect and ensure that the weapon is unloaded and safe. The armor will document that
the weapon is safe for storage and attach this documentation to the weapon or package so it can be
inspected.
D. Only one firearm will be stored under a single property tag number.
E. Other weapons, such as knives, razors, ice picks, etc., which do not have an identifying number,
may be stored under a single tag number. However, these items must be covered and made safe,
prior to storage.
A. Narcotics evidence will be heat-sealed in plastic bags, with the employee’s signature across the
seal. Narcotic evidence such as plant material that is considered green or may contain moisture or
have the potential to become toxic, shall be packaged in paper products.
B. The material will be clearly identified and no other property may be stored with narcotics.
D. All narcotics will have a quantity or a weight identified both in the computer record and on the bar
code label, prior to being stored. Narcotics will be weighed with scales, provided at each storage
facility, after heat-sealing in plastic.
E. A standard State Crime Lab submission sheet shall be completed by the Officer/Detective on all
evidence to be sent to the lab for analysis.
A. Officers, who receive notification of a rape incident and confirm a rape report is to be written, will
accompany the victim to the appropriate medical facility.
B. Officers will remain at the medical facility until completion of the victim's rape examination.
C. Officers will take charge of clothing, rape kit, or any other evidence related to the incident. The
clothing and rape kit will be stored separately under individual barcode numbers; however, all
items may be placed into the same locker. Rape kits shall not be refrigerated.
D. The storage information will be made part of the Offense Report, and a copy of the report will be
forwarded to the Detective Division.
A. These guidelines apply only to property of an arrested person which must be stored for safe
keeping when the person is incarcerated by a Little Rock Police Officer. Any evidence or
contraband seized from or as a result of the arrest must be processed in compliance with other
sections of this Order. Property stored in accordance with this section is intended to be released
back to the owner as soon as they are released from custody and must meet the classification
requirements of “stored property”.
B. The following procedures and guidelines will be followed when storing property under this
provision:
1. All property taken from a person arrested and stored for safekeeping will be recorded on
a “Little Rock Police Department Stored Property Receipt” Form 5500-95 and on the
associated incident report.
2. The incident report will indicate that a Little Rock Police Department Stored Property
Receipt form was completed and a copy was given to the arrestee or placed with his
immediate possessions.
3. The Little Rock Police Department Stored Property Receipt Form (5500-95) is for use
only when storing a person’s property that has been incarcerated under provision of this
section. The form is printed with two copies: the White copy to be sent to the Property
Room and the Yellow copy for the person whose property was stored. This form is not
interchangeable with and does not replace any other form used to store property under
other conditions.
4. The owner of the stored property will be required to sign the receipt acknowledging the
accuracy of the items listed on the receipt if they are able. If the owner refuses to sign
the receipt or is unable to, the officer will indicate this by writing “Refused” or
“Unable” in the space provided for the owner’s signature.
5. The completed Little Rock Police Department Stored Property Receipt Form will be
attached to the property tag on the outside of the item. In the case of multiple items
being stored from the same person, it only needs to be attached to one of the items.
6. When storing currency under this section, officers will not use the Little Rock Police
Currency Recording Form 5600-92, but are required to list the currency on the Little
Rock Police Department Stored Property Receipt Form 5500-95 and abide by all
requirements for the counting, verification, and storage of currency as defined in Section
IV of this Order.
7. Currency, jewelry, and general property must be stored under separate property tag
numbers even though only one Little Rock Police Department Stored Property Receipt
Form 5500-95 is required.
8. The property tag number(s) of each item will be recorded on the Little Rock Police
Department Stored Property Receipt Form in the space provided when the items are
entered into the system. It is not necessary for these numbers to be recorded on the Pink
copy of the form.
A. All Police Department employees shall follow the below guidelines when checking property out of
the Property Room. Any employee, requesting several items, should notify Property Room
employees’ one day in advance, so they may be pulled and ready in time.
1. After the item requested is presented by property personnel, the employee will verify all
information and sign the computer printout indicating that he took custody of the
property.
2. The property technician, who issues the item(s), will sign the same printout. Property
Room personnel will retain the receipts and place them in their permanent file.
B. All Police Department employees shall follow the below guidelines, when returning property to
the Property Room.
1. During normal working hours, the employee returning the property to the Property
Room will verify all information and sign the computer printout indicating the property
was returned.
2. The property technician receiving the item(s), will sign the same printout indicating that
he took custody of the property. In addition, all narcotics will be weighed and this
weight documented.
C. Property returned after the Property Room has closed will be secured in the lockers provided for
storage after hours. The employee returning the property, shall make note of the date and time the
item was returned and attach this to the property. Property Room personnel will attach this sheet
to the original checkout sheet and place them in their permanent file.
D. Should property be retained by a court, the employee, who checked out the property, must obtain a
court order or receipt detailing the item(s) being retained by the court for “Evidence”. The
employee, who checked out the property, will return this court order or receipt to Property Room
personnel, who will make the proper notations in the computer system and file the court’s
documentation.
E. Any item checked out from the Property Room and not returned by the employee, will cause a
notice to be sent to the employee’s Division Commander. Employees signing out property are
responsible for ensuring the proper receipts are provided to Property Room personnel. Property
computer records will be checked monthly to ensure that all items were returned, according to
policy.
F. Property Room employees cannot pick-up property from temporary storage areas without the
presence of another employee. Each division is responsible for ensuring an employee is available
each day to witness the property being secured for transport. When necessary, an officer will
escort Property Room employees to ensure needed security.
G. All items submitted to the Arkansas State Crime Laboratory will be transported to the Arkansas
State Crime Laboratory by Property Room personnel upon receiving the submission request from
the investigator assigned to the case. The requesting investigator is responsible for the proper
completion of all necessary Arkansas Crime Laboratory submission forms. The Property Room
will maintain documentation for all property checked out, and checked in from the Arkansas State
Crime Laboratory.
H. In extenuating circumstances when an investigator transports items directly to the Arkansas State
Crime Laboratory or picks items up from the Arkansas State Crime Laboratory, they will notify
the Property Room personnel prior to submission or retrieval and provide all documentation
pertaining to the items(s) submitted or retrieved on the same date.
I. Copies of the Arkansas State Crime Laboratory submission reports will be forwarded through
inter-office mail to the requesting investigator once the date and time are stamped by the Arkansas
State Crime Lab on items submitted by Major Crimes Division detectives, Special Investigations
Division detectives, and DWI/DUI investigators. All other personnel requiring a date and time
stamped submission report can obtain a copy upon request from the Property Room personnel.
X. Disposition of Property
A. It shall be the responsibility of the recovering officer and/or the case detective to notify owners to
pick up their property.
1. The officer notifying the owner of items marked as “Evidence” will be required to notify
property personnel in writing that the item is cleared for release, prior to notifying the
owner.
2. If the owner of property is determined at a later time, the officer shall make the
notification and inform the Property Section in writing. Property Room personnel will
assist the case detective and/or recovering officer in returning the property to its rightful
owner.
B. Officers, who receive notifications advising that they have stored property as “Evidence”, shall
return the notification to the property section with the disposition of the item. If the officer has not
returned the notice within fifteen working days, the notice will be sent to the officer’s immediate
supervisor for resolution.
1. If the property is no longer required as evidence, the officer will notify the owner to
retrieve the property within ten working days.
2. If the property is still required as evidence, the officer and/or case detective must return
the notice with approval from a supervisor.
C. Release of Property
1. Property stored as “Evidence” may be released on the written authorization of the Chief
of Police, any sworn supervisor, the case detective assigned, the Prosecuting Attorney of
the Sixth Judicial District, or a Judge, who has jurisdiction over the property.
2. A patrol officer may release evidence, as long as it is documented and there is not a
detective assigned to the case.
3. Evidence in a case that has a detective assigned, cannot be released by a patrol officer,
without written approval from the detective.
4. Every effort will be made to notify the owners of all “Stored” and “Found” property.
5. Property of any classification will only be released to individuals who can produce some
form of government-issued photo identification. Individuals unable to produce the
specified identification shall be referred to the Administration Division Commander or
his designee.
6. Prior to any serial numbered item being released, Property Room personnel will ensure
the item is run through NCIC/ACIC. If any items being released receives a “Hit”
through NCIC/ACIC, the Detective Division shall be notified prior to the release of the
item.
Additions and revisions are italicized and underlined.
A. General
1. This Order establishes procedures for the impounding and storing of vehicles, which are
encountered by the Department and for the custodial care of such vehicles.
2. All vehicles, towed by members of this Department, other than at the request of the owner
or other responsible party, are deemed impounded, unless stated otherwise in this Order.
a) These vehicles will be taken to the Fleet Vehicle Storage Facility or the Vehicle
Processing Facility only.
d) All officers will ensure that an attempt is made to contact the registered owner of
all impounded and stored vehicles. This attempt will be documented in the
narrative of the Incident Report, supplement to an existing Incident Report, or
Accident Report and should include the name, phone number and time of contact
or attempt to contact was made.
e) All officers will document the location of the impounded or stored vehicle’s keys
in the narrative of the appropriate report.
B. Impound Authority
1. Arkansas State Law (A.C.A. § 27-50-1201 and following), and Little Rock City
Ordinance 32-43, authorize the removal and/or impound of vehicles under the following
circumstances:
a) When any vehicle is left unattended upon any bridge, viaduct, or where such
vehicle constitutes an obstruction or hazard to traffic;
d) When a vehicle is left unattended upon a city street continuously for more than
48 hours and the owner cannot be located and is presumed to be abandoned; or
which vehicle is located at a distance of three or more feet of the traveled surface
of the public way for a period of 72 hours or more (Note: vehicles removed
under this subsection must be properly marked.);
e) When the driver of such vehicle is taken into police custody and is unable to
make a legitimate disposition of the vehicle (e.g., D.W.I., disturbed person,
minor, etc.); or,
f) Arkansas driver’s license or privileges suspended for any purpose (A.C.A. § 27-
16-303);
(1) The officer issues a citation for a state traffic violation that is classified
as an offense under (A.C.A. § 27-50-302) as listed below:
(g) Speeding in excess of fifteen miles per hour over the posted
speed limit;
(2) The driver is operating the motor vehicle without a driver’s license; or
3. The following discretionary exceptions are specifically recognized and in these limited
circumstances, an officer's discretion shall determine whether or not impoundment occurs:
a) In the event that registration, or license tag of the vehicle has been expired for
less than sixty days, or the driver has a driver’s license that is expired and has
been expired less than 60 days, the officer may in the sound exercise of his
discretion, from the circumstances stated by the violator concerning the
expiration, other factors relevant to the situation at hand, and the officer's
knowledge of the history of the defendant's violation record, if any, forego the
impoundment of the vehicle in connection with the issuance of a citation to the
violator.
4. Officer's duties when impounding pursuant to the City of Little Rock impoundment
policy:
a) Issue a citation to the operator of the vehicle for the traffic offense resulting in
the impoundment of the vehicle, except in cases where a warrant will be
obtained after further investigation (D.W.I. with serious injury to suspect, fatality
accident, etc.).
b) Give the address and phone number of the Fleet Vehicle Storage Facility to the
operator and/or to the owner (7801 Jamison Rd, L.R., AR 72209 / 918-4260).
c) Inform the operator or owner of the impounded vehicle that they may gain
immediate release of the vehicle by displaying current registration, current proof
of insurance, and a valid driver’s license to the appropriate personnel at the Fleet
Vehicle Storage Facility. A person other than the registered owner, if the owner
isn’t present, must also provide notarized written permission from the owner to
retrieve the vehicle. No vehicle will be released to any person that has a
suspended driver’s license unless the vehicle is towed from the impound facility
or driven by a person with a valid driver’s license. A police supervisor, the rank
of Lieutenant or higher, may authorize the release of a vehicle impounded
pursuant to this Order if extenuating circumstances exist and after reasonable
attempts to resolve the issue have been exhausted.
d) Inform the operator or owner of the conditions of return of the vehicle to either
the registered owner or a third party, non-owner, as provided in this policy
1. Any time an officer impounds a vehicle as a result of a traffic citation, he/she shall inform
the driver or owner of the following.
b) Any person seeking a hearing who has failed to request such hearing within the
time specified may, in writing, petition the Little Rock Police Department for an
extension to file the request. Such extension shall only be granted upon the
demonstration of good cause as to the reason(s) the request for hearing was not
timely filed. For the purposes of this section, "good cause" shall be defined as
circumstances beyond the control of the person seeking the hearing that
prevented such person from filing a timely request for hearing. The Little Rock
Police Department will send written notification to the petitioner within five (5)
working days. Notification will include whether or not the petition has been
granted. In the event such extension is granted, the person receiving such
extension shall be granted a hearing in accordance with this General Order.
c) Upon the filing of a petition, the owner or lienholder may have the impounded
vehicle and its contents released by posting with the City Treasury Management
Division, a cash or surety bond equal to the amount of the charges for the towing
and storage. Upon posting of the required bond, the Little Rock Police
Department will issue an order notifying the impound facility that the vehicle
and its contents are to be released to the petitioner.
d) If a person fails to file a timely request for hearing and an extension has not been
granted, the right to a hearing is waived, the impoundment and the associated
costs of impoundment and administrative fees are deemed to be proper, and the
City shall not be liable for removal, towing, and storage charges arising from the
impoundment.
e) A decision made by the Little Rock Police Department may be appealed to the
City Manager or his designee for final judgment. Any person appealing such a
decision must file a written request for an appeal with the City Manager’s Office
within two (2) business days after the decision of the Police Department. The
City Manager’s Office will be responsible for notifying the petitioner in writing,
of their decision, within five (5) working days. If a person fails to file a request
for an appeal within the time specified by this section, the right to an appeal is
waived and the Police Department’s decision is final.
f) Upon determining the respective rights of the parties, the administrative decision
maker shall provide for payment of towing and storage fees. If the owner or
lienholder has posted a cash or surety bond to obtain immediate release of the
vehicle and the owner or lienholder is found to be responsible for the towing and
storage fees, the administrative decision maker shall declare the bond to be
forfeited, with the amount paid to the impound facility to cover the towing and
storage fees.
2. The City of Little Rock impoundment policy will be reviewed annually for legal and
operational concerns.
E. Impound Guidelines
1. It is the policy of this Department, unless mandated by Arkansas state law, Little Rock
city ordinance or City of Little Rock Impound Policy, that a vehicle shall be impounded or
stored only as a last resort. Vehicles shall not be impounded if:
a) The owner or driver can make a legitimate decision regarding the disposition of
the vehicle;
b) The owner or driver, although arrested, can make a legitimate disposition of the
vehicle in a reasonable length of time;
c) The vehicle is not wanted as evidence and/or has not been used in the
commission of a crime;
2. When a vehicle is towed, pursuant to this Order, officers shall advise the person
responsible for the vehicle of “owner preference”, as defined in A.C.A. § 27-50-1202.
(“Owner Preference” means the right of the owner or person of any disabled or
inoperative vehicle to request some reasonable person, gratuitous bailee or bailee for hire,
of his or her choosing, to take charge of the vehicle).
3. When a vehicle is towed, pursuant to this Order, officers shall not suggest or recommend
any particular towing/storage firm to the owner or person in charge of any disabled or
inoperative vehicle, except when advising of the towing firm having a contract with the
City of Little Rock.
a) The officer or unit for whom the vehicle has been impounded and the reason for
storing will be listed in the “Reason for Storing” space on the report.
b) The officer responsible for towing the vehicle shall ensure that the Storage
Report contains documentation concerning the notification or attempted
notification of the registered owner.
c) The hard copy of the Storage Report will be given to the wrecker driver and the
white copy will be forwarded to the officer or unit ordering the hold.
(1) The officer storing the vehicle may call the storage report information
in the Desk Officer, or may fax the Storage Report to the Records
Division at 371-4708.
(2) The Storage Report will be filed by either manner no later than the end
of the storing officer’s shift.
(3) The Desk Officer will forward a copy of all Storage Reports to the
appropriate officer or unit and retain the original.
2. The basic storage information, the vehicle description, and the name of the officer, or
unit, authorizing the impound will be recorded on an original Offense Report, a
Supplement Report to the original Offense Report, or an Accident Report, whichever is
appropriate to the circumstances surrounding the impound.
3. When a vehicle is to be released from an investigative hold, the officer authorizing the
release will sign the bottom of the Storage Report, note the date and time of the release on
the Report, and give the Storage Report to the vehicle owner. The signed Storage Report
will serve as the owner’s release to be presented to the wrecker company.
2. Whenever a vehicle is towed at the direction of an officer for any reason other than those
authorizing an investigative hold, the following will apply:
c) The officer directing that the vehicle be towed will write the VIN, license
number, vehicle description, owner’s name(s), owner’s address, and all lien-
holders, and their addresses, on the L.R.P.D. Storage Report.
d) Any remarks concerning property stored separately from the vehicle (at the
Department) or special equipment will be noted on the Offense Report, a
supplement to an existing Offense Report, or an Accident Report, whichever is
appropriate.
H. Abandoned Vehicles
1. Vehicles parked unattended upon a city street for more than 48 hours, and which are
presumed to be abandoned, will be marked by affixing an orange warning tag to the front
windshield.
2. Officers shall attempt to contact the owner and have him/her remove the vehicle.
3. The officer marking the vehicle will complete an Offense Report describing the condition
of the vehicle and documenting his efforts to contact the owner.
4. Abandoned vehicles will be removed only with a prior report on file and no contact with
the registered owner.
1. Inventory searches are conducted in order to locate and identify items in a vehicle. The
search is completed in order to:
b) Protect the police officer, the department, and the wrecker service from
subsequent claims of loss or of stolen property;
2. All vehicles impounded will have their contents inventoried. Inventories will also be
completed on vehicles involved in accidents where the driver or person responsible for
the vehicle is incapacitated and the vehicle is towed at the officer’s request.
d) Locked vehicle trunks, locked dash or console boxes, and locked containers will
not be opened by force except in exigent or emergency circumstances, or with a
warrant. The existence of a locked container that is not inventoried will be noted
on the report.
e) Unlocked but closed containers will be opened and their contents inventoried if
the officer cannot see the contents without opening the container and:
a) Articles of value, such as gems, jewels, large sums of money, etc. discovered
during the inventory of an impounded vehicle should be removed from that
vehicle and placed in the department’s Property Room.
c) When items are removed from a vehicle during an inventory search, the officer
conducting the inventory will list all items removed on the report.
3. Vehicles impounded for evidence and towed to the Crime Scene Processing Facility will
be inventoried by the Crime Scene Specialist in accordance with these guidelines when
the vehicle is processed.
1. A Little Rock Police Department Storage Report will be completed on all vehicles as
directed in this Order.
3. The investigating officer will notify the Desk Officer of the information on the Storage
Report for entry into the computer system as soon as possible. The Storage Report may be
faxed or hand delivered to the proper unit for data entry, but if it is faxed, it is the
investigating officer’s responsibility to ensure the fax was received. In any event, the
original Storage Report will be forwarded to the Desk Officer no later than the end of the
investigating officer’s shift.
4. The Vehicle Storage Report is a three-part form. The original (white copy) of the Vehicle
Storage Report shall be retained by the investigating officer until submitted to the Desk
Officer for data entry purposes and departmental record keeping. The hard copy (yellow
copy) of the Storage Report shall be given to the wrecker operator for their company
records. The pink copy of the report shall be retained by the owner of the vehicle.
1. Only the Little Rock Police Department can authorize the release of a vehicle impounded
pursuant to this Order. Authorized personnel (the Desk Officer or his designate) shall
release the vehicle only after proper documentation is presented, including:
A. General
1. This Order establishes procedures for the impounding and storing of vehicles for the
purpose of examination or processing for evidence.
2. Vehicles to be processed will be towed to the Crime Scene Processing Facility at 3313
J.E.Davis Dr. by the contract wrecker service.
B. Impound authority
1. Vehicles will be impounded only under guidelines set out by the U.S. Constitution, Laws
of the State of Arkansas, General Orders of the Little Rock Police Department and
Divisional Operating Procedures of the same.
2. Any vehicle impounded must be with authority of a Little Rock Police Department
supervisor or case officer of a criminal investigation.
C. It will be the responsibility of the officer/detective having the vehicle impounded, to:
1. Ensure that all necessary paperwork is complete and forwarded to the Crime Scene
Search Unit as soon as possible; and,
2. Follow vehicle to the Crime Scene Processing Facility and ensure that the vehicle is
secure in one of the holding bays.
a) In the event that the holding bays are full, the officer will contact
Communications. The officer/detective will stay with the vehicle until other
instructions are given.
b) Communications will contact the Crime Scene Supervisor and arrangements will
be made to clear space for another vehicle.
D. The following procedures will be followed at the Crime Scene Processing Facility:
(1) If red Sonitrol Reader light is on, this indicates the bay is empty. If
light is off this means the bay door is disabled, indicating there is
already a vehicle in that bay.
(3) Run Sonitrol card through reader and door will open.
(5) As officer leaves the bay, press the "close" button. (Button is on right
side of door [facing from outside], just inside door.) This button will
close and disable this door securing vehicle inside.
(6) Crime Scene Search Unit personnel will process, remove and reset bay
doors as vehicles are processed and removed.
E. The Crime Scene Specialist will conduct an inventory search of all vehicles processed in
accordance with the guidelines in section I. I. of this Order; the inventory will be documented on a
Crime Scene Specialist Report. Any items of evidence seized from the vehicles will be
documented on the Crime Scene Report.
F. Crime Scene Specialists should be readily available during the 0700-1500 shift and 1500-2300
shift; the 2300-0700 shift will require a supervisor to contact Communications to implement the
call-out procedure.
G. Vehicle Release
1. Authority for the release of any vehicle being held for CSSU will come from a Little Rock
Police Department supervisor or the case officer.
2. CSSU personnel will notify the Contract Wrecker Service, Desk Officer, and case officer
once the processing is complete.
I. Handling of Prisoners
A. General
1. Officers taking any person into police custody will use only the amount of force
reasonably necessary to affect custody and protect themselves or others.
2. The officer assumes primary responsibility for the health, safety and welfare of any
person in his custody.
3. The officer assumes primary responsibility for properly handling a prisoner’s property.
a) Felons;
b) Belligerent or combative;
2. Persons shall remain handcuffed from the time of custody until they are processed at a
Detention Facility, or released to the custody of another officer (i.e., Detectives, other
agency, etc.).
4. Handcuffs will be used only for restraint and not for punishment or retaliation.
5. Two or more prisoners will not be handcuffed together with one handcuff, except in
extreme circumstances.
C. Handcuffing Procedures
a) Whenever possible, the handcuffs will be applied just above the hand, adjusted
tightly enough to avoid slipping or cutting into the wrist and double locked.
Handcuffs shall be applied with the prisoner’s hands behind his/her back.
b) Leg restraints should be applied with the same degree of care as handcuffs, and
used when transporting a prisoner who is a potential escape risk. With the use of
all forms of restraint, officers must remain aware that Positional Asphyxia can
occur if a person is restrained in such a position, as to constrain breathing. The
practice of “hog tying” a person is specifically prohibited. Officers will
constantly monitor the physical condition of any restrained person and will
render aid, as appropriate.
2. Officers shall use approved handcuffs for restraining persons and may use disposable
handcuffs, if circumstances dictate, with the approval of a supervisor.
2. When removing a person held in police custody from a police unit, officers shall search
under the rear seat and surrounding area.
3. Whenever a person, held in police custody is moved from one room of any police facility
to another (i.e., from an interview room to a restroom), the suspect and the vacated room
will be searched.
1. Once a suspect is in custody, for safety considerations and in an effort to reduce the
possibility of escape, a prisoner will not be allowed to communicate with anyone, except
a police officer, and then only with the consent of the arresting officer or the officer in
charge of an investigation.
2. In incidents involving more than one suspect, officers shall transport suspects in separate
vehicles in order to restrict their conversation.
3. Attorneys, friends, family members or others shall not be allowed to communicate with
the prisoner, until after he/she has been transported to the Major Crimes Division or
Detective Unit and/or the arrest procedures are completed.
F. Fingerprint Criteria
1. All prisoners charged with a felony or class A misdemeanor (except misdemeanor traffic
offenses) will be fingerprinted before release.
2. All such persons charged on citations will be transported to the Pulaski County Regional
Jail, where they will be presented, along with the completed citation form, to jail
personnel. The prisoner will be processed, as soon as possible, by personnel and released.
G. When issuing a Criminal Citation, officers will obtain a thumbprint from the person cited as a
means of identifying that person for court purposes. Thumbprints will be placed on Traffic
Citations only when the person being cited lacks valid photographic identification. The cited
person's thumbprint will be printed on the citation in an appropriate place. Refusal to submit a
thumbprint in and of itself will not be grounds for the incarceration of a violator. Refusal will be
noted on the citation and the violator will be processed in the manner appropriate to the charges.
A. Vehicle Inspection
1. At the beginning and end of each tour of duty, all vehicles regularly used for prisoner
transport, shall be inspected for readiness as follows:
b) All windows shall be intact and outer door latches in proper working order;
c) Rear seat door handles and window controls should be deactivated; and,
2. Prior to placing a prisoner in the vehicle for transport, the transporting officer shall again
inspect the interior for weapons or contraband. The vehicle shall be searched again after
the prisoner has been delivered to a detention facility or other destination.
B. Transport
1. Prior to transport, all prisoners shall be thoroughly searched for any weapons or tools of
escape.
b) The transporting officer shall search the prisoner, unless a search was conducted
in his presence.
2. The officer should use care when assisting a prisoner into the vehicle for transport.
3. When transporting prisoners, the officer shall provide the Communications Center with
the following information:
a) A description (including, but not limited to, the race and sex) of the prisoner;
4. Upon proper notification from the transporting officer, the Communications Center will
document the time of departure and arrival.
(1) A vehicle not equipped with a security screen and having only one
transporting officer, will not be used.
c) Leg restraints shall be used when an officer believes the prisoner has a potential
for violent behavior.
d) All prisoners shall be secured in the vehicle by proper use of a safety belt.
6. Any purses, bags, luggage or other personal property, including wheelchairs, crutches,
prosthetic devices, and medication should be transported with, but not in the possession
of the prisoner.
7. Prisoners shall not be left unattended during transport. Should a transporting officer come
upon a situation requiring police assistance, he/she shall notify Communications of the
situation, giving the location and nature of the incident. The transporting officer will not
stop during transport, unless the incident poses eminent danger of grave injury or death to
another, and the possibility of injury to, or escape of, the prisoner is minimal.
9. Before taking prisoners into a secured area of the Pulaski County Regional Jail, the Major
Crimes Division or the Detective Unit, officers shall store their firearms in a secure area
for safekeeping.
10. Officers shall release to the jail personnel, the prisoner, all pertinent documentation and
the prisoner’s property. Officers shall ensure that all necessary forms and prisoner
property receipts are properly signed, prior to leaving the facility.
1. On all ADR’s and/or Citations to Appear you must indicate whether the offense is a
Felony or Misdemeanor on each charge.
2. In the facts of arrest block, officers must include the following (if applicable):
d) what type of property was involved, the amount of damage, and the owner of the
involved property.
3. In cases that are Domestic or Violating a Protection Order, note the name, date of birth,
address, and phone number of the victims in the Complainants and Witnesses block, so a
no-contact order can be issued if requested.
a) On all charges of Violating a Protection Order, the officer should put the
Protection Order number on the ADR.
4. When serving a warrant, list the warrant number and the details of arrest. If the warrant is
a Failure to Appear or a Contempt of Court, reference the case number on the ADR or
Citation.
5. In the arresting officers block of the ADR, list all officers involved and the correct
employee numbers.
6. When an officer receives information concerning the prisoner’s potential for suicide or
escape, other personal traits or infectious diseases, he/she shall note this information on
the ADR.
D. If you have relinquished your prisoner to the Pulaski County Regional Jail, do not issue a Citation
to Appear. Pulaski County Regional Jail personnel are responsible for the citation.
A. Interview rooms in the Major Crimes Division and in the Field Services Division’s Detective Units
are provided for use when the need arises to question a subject. The Major Crimes Division and
the Detective Unit is responsible for authorizing and overseeing the use of interview rooms
whenever Detectives are on duty. During non-duty hours, the on duty supervisor of the arresting
officer(s) is responsible for authorizing and overseeing the use of the interview rooms.
1. Any time a detainee is to be placed in these rooms, an on duty Detective supervisor shall
be notified. If the individual is to be interviewed by someone other than a Detective, a
supervisor from the interviewer’s division will respond to the interviewing area. The
supervisor will ensure compliance with these procedures.
2. Access to the interview room area is limited to officers, detectives, supervisors, attorneys,
and personnel of the Crime Scene Search Unit and persons authorized by a supervisor.
3. No more than two departmental personnel will be allowed in an interview room unless
authorized by a Division Commander.
4. Officers shall be held accountable for the supervision of detainees brought in for
questioning until a detective or another officer takes responsibility for them.
a) Detainees brought into the Major Crimes Division or a Field Services Division
Detective Unit for questioning shall be searched, prior to being placed in an
interview room. Detainees shall be searched and their personal property
removed including shoes with any type of laces, keys, belts, and any other items
with which they could injure themselves. Detainees shall place their personal
property into a large envelope and the envelope will be sealed. The property
envelope shall then be placed into the designated interview room property
storage unit. If the detainee is taken to the Pulaski County Regional Jail, the
transporting officer shall transport the sealed property envelope with the
detainee. If the detainee is released from the Major Crimes Division or
Detective Unit, their property shall be returned to them in the sealed property
envelope.
c) The detainee shall be searched again prior to transport to the regional detention
facility.
5. Once a detective or other officer takes responsibility for a detainee, he/she shall be held
accountable for the supervision of that detainee.
7. Anyone placing a detainee in an interview room shall record certain information on the
interview room status board. This board shall be for recording a detainee’s name, the time
he/she was placed in an interview room, the name of the officer/detective who placed
him/her in the room, and whether the detainee is an adult or a juvenile. This information
should be erased within twenty-four (24) hours of the detainee departing from the
interview room. This procedure is intended as an effective and economical way to assist
supervisors in monitoring those persons taken into custody.
8. Anyone responsible for detainees shall ensure quick access to a restroom and the privacy
necessary for that function. Detainees will be provided with access to water, medical
needs, and other immediate needs in a timely manner. A Witness/Suspect Information
sheet (Form 5400-39) will be used to record the access to these functions. The original
completed Witness/Suspect information sheet will be retained in the case file.
9. Individuals who are requested to appear at the Major Crimes Division or Field Services
Division Detective Unit for an interview and are not subject to arrest at the time of the
interview, may be placed in the interview rooms. Persons in interview status will not be
secured to any fixed object while they are in the interview rooms.
a) Officer shall consider such factors, but not limited to, the suspect's level of
combativeness, seriousness of the offense, the possibility of an escape attempt or
likelihood of injury to the detainee or others when placing a detainee in the
interview room. If the factors support the need, arrestees may be secured at the
investigating officer’s discretion utilizing the handcuffs installed in the interview
room.
c) Restraints will not be used at any time for the purposes of punishing or harassing
the individual.
a) Female detainees will be separated from male detainees by sight and sound
regardless of the age of the detainee. A juvenile detainee will not be placed
within sight or sound of adult prisoners. Juveniles may be placed in the
interview rooms when no adult prisoners are present. Juveniles must be moved
from the interview rooms to designated areas prior to the arrival of adult
prisoners. An Officer/Detective will be assigned to physically remain with the
juvenile until processing is complete and the juvenile departs. In those instances
where there are more juvenile prisoners than adults, the adult may be held in
designated areas and will be attended by an Officer/Detective until the juveniles
depart and an interview room becomes available or until the adult departs.
(1) The Major Crimes Division - Has designated the detective east wing,
west wing and annex interview rooms to separate male, female, and
juvenile detainees.
(2) The Northwest Division - Has designated the Detective Office waiting
room for use to separate male, female, and juvenile detainees.
(3) The Southwest Division – Has designated the precinct line-up room for
use to separate male, female, and juvenile detainees.
(4) The processing of juvenile offenders may take place in any interview
room, the Major Crimes Division Duty Room, or Northwest/Southwest
Detective Unit Office areas.
12. Sworn police personnel shall be present at all times in the interview room area when a
detainee is in the interview room area or in an interview room. Officers/Detectives
interviewing detainees will wear the panic alarms provided for each interview room.
Officers/Detectives monitoring the interview rooms will remain in the immediate area in
order to respond rapidly to an alarm.
13. All interview rooms shall be kept empty. Personnel conducting interviews shall be
responsible for all necessary equipment and materials needed for that interview. At no
time will any equipment or material be left in the interview room.
14. The detainee shall be searched again prior to transport to the Pulaski County Regional
Jail.
15. Interview rooms shall be inspected for contraband prior to use by a detainee and
immediately after removing a detainee. These inspections will be documented on Form
5400-39.
IV. Felony Arrest After Normal Major Crimes Division Duty Hours
A. Supervisors will continue to notify on-call Detectives from the Homicide, Juvenile, Robbery, and
Violent Crimes Unit as necessary, after the normal duty hours of the Major Crimes Division.
B. Any other felony arrest to be investigated by a Detective of the Major Crimes Division or arrests of
subjects on warrants issued by a Detective of the Major Crimes Division, made after the normal
duty hours of the Major Crimes Division will be handled in the following manner:
1. All documentation pertaining to the arrest, including a copy of the Officer’s Letter, Arrest
Report, Incident Report, Warrant (if applicable), and any other documents deemed
necessary, will be fastened in a file folder using a two hole fastener and presented to the
officer’s supervisor for approval.
2. The arresting officer’s supervisor will be responsible for ensuring that all documentation
related to the arrest are included in the folder. They will review the contents of the file
then sign and date the inside cover of the file.
3. The completed file will be delivered to the Desk Officer prior to the arresting officer’s
end of shift, the Desk Officer will place the file folder in the Major Crimes Division’s
mail box.
C. It shall be the responsibility of the Major Crimes Division supervisors working the following 0700
hours to 1500 hours shift, to check the mailbox and distribute all files to the appropriate
investigative unit at the beginning of their work day.
A. Any person in police custody, who has a minor injury (e.g., a scratch, cut, abrasion, minor swelling
or a sprain) which can be controlled with normal first aid procedures, will not require treatment at
a public hospital, prior to incarceration. Those persons arrested, whose injuries cannot be
controlled with normal first aid procedures, shall be taken to the nearest participating hospital for
treatment, prior to being transported to a Detention Facility.
B. When a prisoner is transported to a medical facility for treatment, the officer will:
1. Use discretion when deciding to take off handcuffs or leg restraints. Charges, demeanor,
mental capacity and verbal communication by the prisoner may be used, but are not
limited to an officer’s decision to remove restraints;
2. Stay in the treatment room with the prisoner. If directed to remove the restraints by the
attending physician, officers may use discretion as described in III B. 1. above;
3. If requested to remain outside the treatment room, station themselves outside the room
and allow access to authorized medical personnel. The ability to restrain the prisoner
should be considered;
4. Remain alert for escape attempts by the prisoner, or others acting in collusion with
him/her;
5. Upon release, search and if circumstances meet the criteria set forth in this General Order,
restrain the prisoner;
6. Upon release, record the prisoner’s condition and obtain, in writing, from medical
hospital personnel all information, relative to medical instructions, future treatment and
medications; and,
7. Upon arrival at a detention facility, ensure that the intake officer is aware that the prisoner
has received medical care and forward any documentation relative to medical instructions,
future treatment and medications, to the intake officer.
D. Should the prisoner be admitted to the hospital, the officer will notify his immediate supervisor,
who will arrange for relief at the end of his shift. The prisoner will remain in the custody of Little
Rock Police Department personnel, until the charges are certified to circuit court, or other
circumstances exist that would allow release from custody (i.e., release to the custody of Pulaski
County, bond, recognized by the court, etc.). All paper work shall be completed and delivered to
the Pulaski County Regional Detention Facility for processing. A notation shall be made on the
ADR concerning the location of the hospital.
1 While in the hospital, the prisoner will be prohibited from having visitors. This will
include telephone contacts.
a) Charges;
d) Isolation.
e) Officers, assigned to guard a prisoner, will not become lax while performing
their duty.
h) The officer, guarding a prisoner, will be rotated each shift and closely supervised
by the officer’s immediate supervisor.
A. Pulaski County Sheriff’s Office is primarily responsible for the transportation of all prisoners from
the Pulaski County Regional Detention Facility. If a Little Rock police officer is called upon to
transport a prisoner(s) from another detention facility or police agency, the following guidelines
will be adhered to:
c. Photograph I.D;
f. Any other means, which will assure the officer of the prisoner’s correct identity.
2. Documentation that should accompany the prisoner may include a copy of the warrant,
prisoner’s property, medical records or any other pertinent documents.
3. When an officer receives information concerning the prisoner’s potential for suicide or
escape, other personal traits or infectious diseases, he/she shall note this information on
the ADR.
4. There will always be two officers assigned to transport prisoners outside of Pulaski
County.
5. The transporting officers should inquire of, and be alert to, any medical, mental or
security risks the prisoner may present during transport.
B. During transport for long distances, requiring stopping for meals or the use of restroom facilities,
officers shall select locations randomly and at no time allow the prisoner out of direct sight.
C. Prisoners, who are transported from agencies outside Pulaski County, will be:
2. Restrained with leg restraints (waist belt and leg restraints will be maintained by the Desk
Officer); and,
D. The Pulaski County Sheriff’s Office is responsible for the incarceration of Little Rock Police
Department prisoners. When special circumstances arise (i.e., attending funerals, visiting hospitals
of critically ill relatives, etc.), the transportation of prisoners will be the responsibility of the
Pulaski County Sheriff’s Office.
A. Officer’s responsibility
2. In the event of a prisoner escape during transport, the transporting officer shall:
d) Generate an “Escape from Custody” Offense Report and any necessary Officer
Reports.
e) Notify the appropriate law enforcement agency, in which the escape took place,
if transporting a prisoner outside Little Rock, and assist the apprehension under
their direction.
B. If the prisoner is apprehended soon after his escape, the transporting officer will transport the
suspect to the appropriate location for follow-up, completion of pertinent documents and the filing
of any additional charges. Should the prisoner not be apprehended, the transporting officer will
contact the Prosecuting Attorney’s office, within 48 hours, to obtain a warrant.
A. In some instances, officers may encounter a circumstance where probable cause develops to arrest
an individual for an offense only to discover, shortly thereafter, that the person arrested did not
commit a crime, or that the event did not constitute a crime. When such an arrest occurs, officers
must terminate custody to prevent violation of the citizen’s Constitutional rights.
B. Procedure
1. Officers needing to terminate custody of any citizen placed under arrest in the field shall:
a) Immediately advise a field supervisor of the need for release of the citizen;
b) Inform the citizen of the reasons for the release and the original arrest, if such
facts have not been explained;
c) Release the citizen in a safe location (officers may return the person to the
original contact point or another safe and reasonable destination, if requested);
and,
2. Officers needing to terminate custody of any citizen placed under arrest and taken to a
Detective Office for investigation shall:
a) Inform the citizen of the reasons for the release and the original arrest, if such
facts have not been explained;
A. Arkansas law grants police officers the authority to make arrests, within their jurisdiction, for
violations of law wherever and whenever the need for police intervention occurs, both on and off-
duty. While off-duty law enforcement is required under certain circumstances, officers who
perform such duties, without the ability to quickly summon assistance or access the numerous
tactical advantages available to on-duty personnel, create an increased opportunity for injury to
officers attempting the off-duty apprehension of offenders. To minimize this potential for injury,
the following policy shall be adhered to by all personnel.
B. For purposes of this Section, officers are considered to be off-duty when not working in
furtherance of Departmental objectives during their regularly scheduled hours or other hours, as
required by a police supervisor or court order.
C. Procedure
1. Off-duty officers, who have knowledge of or observe any incident that does not require
immediate police intervention to prevent bodily injury or property loss/damage, shall
summon on-duty police personnel and await their arrival, if circumstances permit.
2. Off-duty officers shall not enforce traffic offenses or utilize personal vehicles to pursue or
to attempt the apprehension of persons. Off-duty officers may cautiously follow suspects
to obtain vehicle and suspect descriptions or destination, but officers must realize there is
no authorization, under state law or Department policy, to violate traffic law while
operating a private vehicle.
3. Off-duty officers, who make an arrest, shall notify an on-duty police supervisor of the
circumstances of the arrest and complete any documentation of the incident and arrest,
required by the supervisor or Departmental Orders and procedures.
A. The process of fingerprinting and photographing of detainees shall be performed in the following
locations:
2. Major Crimes Division annex in the common area outside the interview rooms.
4. Major Crimes Division processing room of the Crime Scene Search Unit.
B. The following security measures shall be taken when a detainee is being processed in one of these
areas:
1. The detainee will be under the constant supervision of the investigator until he/she is
formally transferred to another officer for transport or released from custody.
2. Personnel responsible for the processing of the detainee shall ensure that their weapon is
secured in the weapons locker while the detainee is present in the processing area.
3. Personnel responsible for the processing of the detainee shall be equipped with a panic
alarm or a portable radio should an emergency occur in which additional assistance is
needed.
4. Personnel will be cognizant at all times of the potential for escape. While the area in
which detainees are processed is inside a secure area, personnel should always consider
such factors as the level of combativeness, seriousness of the offense and the possibility
of attempted escape.
C. All breathalyzer testing of detainees will be conducted at the Pulaski County Detention Facility.
All blood or urine testing of detainees will be conducted at a medical facility by medical personnel
determined at the time of arrest.
I. General
A. The purpose of this Order is to establish the procedures by which members of this Department
process complaints and/or arrests, involving youthful offenders, and to establish youth services
within the Department.
B. The Department is committed to developing and implementing programs which are concerned with
the control and prevention of juvenile delinquency. An effective plan to address juvenile
delinquency enhances the Department and its public image. The Department is committed to
ensuring the fair and equitable treatment of youthful offenders.
C. All members of the Department are committed to participation and support of the juvenile
operations of the Department.
1. The Juvenile Crimes Unit is responsible for the investigation of offenses committed
against juveniles (including felony family offenses), offenses committed in public schools
or child care facilities, in which a juvenile is a suspect or a victim, juvenile runaways,
missing persons and all status offenses. The Juvenile Crimes Unit is also responsible for
the Department’s sex offender notification program.
D. The Juvenile Crimes Unit Sergeant will be responsible for soliciting comments from other
elements, in the juvenile justice system, regarding development and implementation of new
programs, or policy and procedures.
E. An annual evaluation will be completed for the Juvenile Crimes Unit and all juvenile programs for
the purpose of evaluating progress towards meeting their goals and objectives for the year, and to
determine each program’s effectiveness, efficiency, and retention advantages.
2. Annual evaluations shall be completed in December of each year and forwarded through
the chain of command to the Office of the Chief of Police by January 10th of each year.
3. Division Commanders shall be responsible for ensuring compliance with this order.
II. Definitions
A. Abandonment - (A.C.A. § 9-27-303[2]) The failure of the parent to provide reasonable support and
to maintain regular contact with the juvenile, through statement or contact, when the failure is
accompanied by an intention on the part of the parent to permit the condition to continue for an
indefinite period in the future, and failure to support or maintain regular contact with the juvenile,
without just cause or an articulated intent to forego parental responsibility.
B. Abuse - (A.C.A. § 9-27-303[3A]) Any of the following acts or omissions by a parent, guardian,
custodian, foster parent, person eighteen (18) years of age or older living in the home with a child
whether related or unrelated to the child, or any person who is entrusted with the juvenile’s care by
a parent, guardian, custodian, or foster parent, including but not limited to, an agent or employee
of a public or private residential home, child care facility, public or private school, or any person
legally responsible for the juvenile’s welfare, shall be considered abuse.
c) Shaking a child; or
7. Any of the following intentional or knowing acts, with or without physical injury:
b) When a child suffers transient pain or minor temporary marks as the result of a
reasonable restraint if:
(3) No other alternative exists to control the child except for a restraint;
(5) The person exercising the restraint has been trained in properly
restraining children, de-escalation and conflict resolution techniques;
and,
9. Reasonable and moderate physical discipline inflicted by a parent or guardian shall not
include any act that is likely to cause and which does cause injury more serious than
transient pain or minor temporary marks.
10. The age, size, and condition of the child and the location of the injury and the frequency
or recurrence of injuries shall be considered when determining whether the physical
discipline is reasonable or moderate.
C. Centers For Youth and Families - An emergency shelter, designed and authorized for the
temporary care of juveniles (ages six through seventeen only) who are runaways, the victims of
physical or sexual abuse, drug and/or alcohol abusers (where no withdrawal reaction may
reasonably be anticipated), or are abandoned. The Centers For Youth and Families will not accept
violent, aggressive, or suicidal persons, nor persons who are visibly intoxicated. The Centers for
Youth and Families will accept juveniles who have criminal charges pending, provided those
charges are non-violent in nature. The Centers For Youth and Families is not, however, a secure
facility, and should not be viewed as a point of incarceration. The Centers for Youth and Families
is an alternative residence for those juveniles who cannot or should not in an officer’s opinion, be
immediately released to the custody of a parent or guardian or otherwise returned to the home. The
twenty-four hour telephone number for The Center For Youth and Families is 666-8686 or
1-888-868-0023.
F. Custodian- A person, other than a parent or legal guardian who stands in loco parentis to the
juvenile or a person, agency, or institution to whom a court of competent jurisdiction has given
custody of a juvenile by court order.
G. Department of Human Services (DHS) – State of Arkansas agency responsible for the protection of
individuals.
H. Division of Children and Family Services (DCFS) – A division of DHS responsible for assessing
child maltreatment cases.
I. Family in Need of Services (F.I.N.S.) – Any family whose juvenile evidences behavior which
includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Being habitually and without justification absent from school while subject to compulsory
school attendance;
2. Being habitually disobedient to the reasonable and lawful commands of his or her parent,
guardian or custodian; or,
3. Having absented himself or herself from the home without sufficient cause, permission, or
justification.
4. F.I.N.S. may be obtained by parent or guardian at the Juvenile Justice Center at 340-6700.
K. Delinquent Juvenile - Means any juvenile that is ten (10) years old or older who has committed
an act other than a traffic offense or game and fish violation which, if the act had been
committed by an adult, would subject the adult to prosecution for a felony or misdemeanor.
This includes the violation of furnishing a deadly weapon to a minor (5-73-119) and any juvenile
charged with capital murder (5-10-101) or murder in the first degree (5-10-102) in juvenile
court.
L. Dependent-Neglected Juvenile - Means any juvenile who is at substantial risk of serious harm as
a result of:
1. Abandonment,
2. Abuse,
3. Sexual abuse,
4. Sexual exploitation,
5. Neglect,
7. A Dependent Juvenile.
M. Dependent Juvenile - Means a child of a parent who is under the age of eighteen years and is in
the custody of the Department of Human Services (DHS); a child whose parents or guardian has
no appropriate relative or friend willing or able to provide care for the child; a child whose
parents or guardian is incapacitated, whether temporarily or permanently, so that the parent or
guardian cannot provide care for the juvenile and the parent or guardian has no appropriate
relative or friend willing or able to provide care for the child; a child whose custodial parent dies
and no stand-by guardian exists; a child who is an infant relinquished to the custody of DHS for
the sole purpose of adoption; or a safe-haven baby.
N. Guardian - A parent, stepparent, legal guardian, legal custodian, foster parent, or anyone who, by
virtue of a living arrangement, is placed in an apparent position of power or authority over a
minor.
O. Juvenile - Any individual who is under the age of eighteen, whether married or single (A.C.A. §
9-27-303(32)).
P. Juvenile Charged as an Adult - Any criminal offense, as defined by Arkansas State Statute, City
of Little Rock Ordinance, Federal law, or any other accepted and enforced code, where the
offender may be subjected to incarceration and/or fined as an adult.
Q. Juvenile Charged as a Juvenile - Any criminal offense, as defined by Arkansas State Statute, City
of Little Rock Ordinance, Federal law, or any other accepted and enforced code, but where the
offender is charged through the Juvenile Court system, and is subject only to the provisions
therein. This is also referred to as delinquency or a delinquent act (A.C.A. § 9-27-303[15]).
R. Juvenile Justice Center - Located at 3201 W. Roosevelt, this facility is where all Pulaski County
juvenile cases are processed and tried. A detention facility located at the center is used to house
juvenile offenders, who are charged on the juvenile docket.
1. Failure/refusal to prevent the abuse of the juvenile, when such person knows, or has
reasonable cause to know, the juvenile is or has been abused;
2. Failure or refusal to provide the necessary food, clothing, shelter, and education, required
by law, or medical treatment necessary for the juveniles well-being, except when the
failure or refusal is caused primarily by the financial inability of the person, legally
responsible, and no services for relief have been offered or rejected, or when the juvenile
is being furnished with treatment by spiritual means alone, through prayer, in accordance
with the tenets and practices of a recognized religious denomination by a duly accredited
practitioner thereof in lieu of medical treatment;
3. Failure to take reasonable action to protect the juvenile from abandonment, abuse, sexual
abuse, sexual exploitation, neglect, or parental unfitness, where existence of such
condition was known or should have been known;
4. Failure or irremediably inability to provide for the essential and necessary physical,
mental, or emotional needs of the juvenile;
5. Failure to provide for the juvenile’s care and maintenance, proper or necessary support, or
medical, surgical, or other necessary care;
6. Failure, although able, to assume responsibility for the care and custody of the juvenile, or
participate in a plan to assume such responsibility; or
7. Failure to appropriately supervise the juvenile, which results in the juvenile being left
alone at an inappropriate age or under inappropriate circumstances placing the juvenile in
danger.
T. Parent - Means a biological mother, an adoptive parent, or a man to whom the biological mother
was married at the time of conception or birth or who has been found by a court of competent
jurisdiction to be the biological father of the juvenile.
U. Pornography
1. Obscene or licentious material including pictures, movies and videos lacking serious
literary, artistic, political or scientific value, which when taken as a whole and applying
contemporary community standards would appear to the average person to appeal to the
prurient interest; or,
2. Material that depicts sexual conduct in a patently offensive manner lacking serious
literary, artistic, political or scientific value.
V. Serious Bodily Injury – Bodily injury that involves substantial risk of death, extreme physical
pain, protracted and obvious disfigurement or protracted loss or impairment of the function of a
bodily member, organ or mental faculty.
W. Severe Maltreatment – Sexual abuse, sexual exploitation, acts or omissions which may or do
result in death, abuse involving the use of deadly weapon as defined by the Arkansas Criminal
Code § 5-1-102(4), bone fracture, internal injuries, burns, immersions, suffocation,
abandonment, medical diagnosis of failure to thrive, or causing a substantial and observable
change in the behavior or demeanor of the child.
X. Sexual Contact – Any act of sexual gratification involving the touching, directly or through
clothing, of the sex organs, buttocks or anus of a person or the breast of a female.
1. Rape;
7. Incest; or,
1. Engaging children in sexually explicit conduct for use in visual or print medium;
BB. Status Offense - Acts which are offenses only because of the age of victim (sexual offenses,
sexual performances, computer crimes against minors, exposing children to chemical substance
or methamphetamine, or endangering the welfare of a minor 1 st).
CC. Traffic Offense - Any act which is considered an offense resulting from the operation of a motor
vehicle. These offenses may include moving, parking and license violations, as well as D.W.I.
offenses.
DD. Victim’s Assistance Unit - A unit of the Prosecuting Attorney’s Office, which assists police
agencies and prosecutors in interviewing victims and witnesses, and in preparing child
abuse/neglect and sexual offense cases for trial.
EE. Victim Services Program – trained, civilian employees of the Little Rock Police Department,
who provide valuable information such as counseling and therapy referrals and assistance in
obtaining Orders of Protection. In addition, upon request, Victim Services personnel are
available to assist officers in the furtherance of their investigation. Victim Services personnel
are on-call 24 hours a day and may be contacted at 690-7474 or through the Communications
Section.
III. Procedures
3. Reasonable grounds to believe that the youth has been abandoned, abused or neglected;
B. When a juvenile is taken into custody, the laws of arrest, which apply to adults, are applicable.
Constitutional rights shall be protected for all subjects taken into custody. The juvenile shall be
transported to the appropriate facility, without delay (unless the juvenile is in need of emergency
medical treatment), and processed in a timely manner. Parents or guardians of juveniles shall be
notified as soon as practicable.
1. Law Enforcement Officers who take juveniles into custody for a delinquent or criminal
offense will inform the juvenile of their rights under A.C.A. §9-27-317 before
questioning. Officers who take a juvenile into custody for a delinquent or criminal offense
shall clearly advise the juvenile of his or her Miranda Rights in the juvenile’s own
language.
2. Officers shall immediately make every effort possible to notify parents or guardian of the
juvenile’s location after the juvenile is taken into custody.
3. No law enforcement officer shall question a juvenile, who has been taken into custody for
a delinquent act or criminal offense if the juvenile’s parents, guardian or counsel is not
present and has not given written consent or permission.
4. When a parent or guardian cannot be located or refuses to go where the juvenile is held,
counsel shall be appointed for the juvenile. Procedures are then the same as if the
juvenile had invoked counsel.
5. No waiver of the right to counsel shall be accepted in any case in which the parent,
guardian, or custodian has filed a petition against the juvenile, initiated the filing of a
petition against the juvenile, or requested the removal of the juvenile from the home.
6. No waiver of the right to counsel can be accepted when a juvenile is in the custody of the
Department of Human Services, including the Division of Youth Services.
D. Whenever possible, the arresting officer/detective shall take the least severe action, which is
consistent with the nature of the offense.
b) Officers may obtain information from the Social Services Referral Guide
through their supervisor or the Communications Center.
c) Unless detained by the Pulaski County Juvenile Justice Center, all juveniles
arrested shall be issued a Juvenile Citation to Appear. Only the intake officer
can make the decision to detain a juvenile, and only the intake officer can give a
court date, if the juvenile is given a Citation to Appear. Juvenile Intake Officers
are on-call 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. They may be reached by calling 1-
501-940-9701. The Citation to Appear will be executed by the investigating
officer. Prior to release, both the parent and juvenile shall be required to sign
the Juvenile Citation, and a copy given to the parent.
2. For violations of a serious nature, juveniles with prior offenses, as mandated by the
Pulaski County Juvenile Justice Center, shall be transported to the Juvenile Justice
Detention Center.
E. Any officer who arrests a juvenile under the following conditions shall complete LRPD Form
5400-72 and forward the form and a copy of the incident report to the Juvenile Squad.
F. As soon as practical, the Juvenile Unit will send written notification of the arrest to the school
superintendent of the school in which the juvenile is currently enrolled. A.C.A. §9-27-309(2).
A. The Pulaski County Juvenile Justice Center will have exclusive original jurisdiction of
proceedings in which a juvenile is alleged to have committed a delinquent act or violation of
law.
B. Juveniles, who commit serious acts of delinquency, will be referred to the Pulaski County
Juvenile Justice Center. These acts include:
A. Juveniles charged with criminal offenses shall be afforded all rights and guarantees prescribed
by law.
1. Juveniles, 14 or 15 years of age, may be charged as adults for the following offenses only
(A.C.A. § 9-27-318[b]):
a) Capital Murder;
d) Rape;
e) Kidnapping;
f) Aggravated Robbery;
i) Aggravated Assault;
j) Terroristic Act;
(4) Kidnapping;
(6) Rape;
2. Juveniles, 16 and 17 years of age, may be charged as an adult for any felony offense
(A.C.A. § 9-27-318[c]).
A. Juveniles who are arrested for any offenses that if committed by an adult would constitute a
felony or a Class A misdemeanor in which violence or the use of a weapon was involved shall be
fingerprinted and photographed by the arresting officer.
1. The arresting officer will send the original fingerprint card and photograph to the Juvenile
Sergeant.
2. Copies of a juvenile’s fingerprints and photographs shall be made available only to other
law enforcement agencies, the Arkansas Crime Information Center, Prosecuting
Attorney’s and the Juvenile Division of Circuit Court.
3. Photographs and fingerprints of juveniles adjudicated delinquent for offenses for which
they could have been tried as adults shall be made available to Prosecuting Attorney’s and
Circuit Courts for use at sentencing in subsequent adult criminal proceedings against
those same individuals.
4. Juvenile photographs and fingerprints shall be securely filed in the Juvenile Crimes
Sergeant’s office.
A. Whenever a juvenile is arrested for the commission of an offense for which he/she may be
charged as an adult, the investigation will be conducted and the prisoner will be processed just
as if the offender were an adult.
1. The authority to charge a juvenile as an adult rests with the Prosecuting Attorney’s Office
(A.C.A. § 9-27-318[c]).
a) The arresting officer, or the detective processing the juvenile, will contact the
Prosecuting Attorney’s Office (a Deputy Prosecuting Attorney or higher) for a
determination, as to whether the juvenile will be charged through Little Rock
Municipal Court (as an adult) or through Juvenile Court (as a juvenile).
b) The name of the prosecutor, his/her decision, as to which court will be utilized,
and the date and time the prosecutor rendered his/her decision shall be noted on
the Arrest/Disposition Report and in the Major Crimes Division’s case file.
2. If the juvenile is to be charged as an adult in Municipal Court, the arresting officer, or the
detective processing the juvenile, shall contact the Pulaski County Juvenile Court and
notify an Intake Officer and shall provide such information, as may be directed by
Juvenile Court authorities. The juvenile may then be placed in a Detention Facility.
A. Whenever a juvenile has been arrested for any offense for which he/she is to be charged through
the Juvenile Court, the arresting officer, or the detective processing the juvenile, shall contact
the Juvenile Court and notify an Intake Officer of the arrest. The officer shall provide such
information, as may be requested.
a) In the event the Intake Officer determines that detention in a juvenile facility is
inappropriate, the juvenile shall be released to a parent or guardian, as
prescribed by law.
2. A copy of the Offense Report, notarized copy of the Juvenile Affidavit and the Juvenile
Citation will be forwarded through the Desk Officer to Juvenile Court, such forms being
completed and submitted to the Desk Officer, prior to the end of the arresting officer’s
shift. All documentation will be complete, including a physical description of the juvenile.
B. Juvenile in Possession of a Weapon – Officers, who determine a person under eighteen years of
age is in possession of any weapon, shall disarm the juvenile and seize the weapon, under the
authority conferred by A.C.A. § 5-73-110.
1. Weapons seized from juveniles may be returned to the parent or guardian of the juvenile
or be stored in the usual manner for delivery to the court having jurisdiction to try
criminal offenses, if an offense involving the weapon has occurred.
2. Juveniles found in possession of a handgun shall be charged with such violation under the
authority of A.C.A. § 5-73-119, and the handgun stored as evidence.
A. Traffic Offenses - When a member of this Department charges a person, who is under the age of
eighteen with a traffic offense, he/she shall comply with the following procedure:
2. The court date indicated on the citation shall be for a Wednesday at 1600 hours, and shall
be at least 30 days from the date of issue.
3. Before allowing the juvenile to sign the citation, it should be explained to him/her that the
court appearance is mandatory and that he/she must be accompanied to court by a parent
or guardian.
B. D.W.I. Offenses - When a member of this Department charges a person, who is under the age of
eighteen with the offense of D.W.I., he/she shall comply with the following procedure:
2. The court date indicated on the citation shall be for a Tuesday at 0800 hours, and shall be
at least a week from the date of issue.
3. Before allowing the juvenile to sign the citation, it should be explained to him/her that the
court appearance is mandatory and that he/she must be accompanied to court by a parent
or guardian.
4. The investigation and processing of juvenile D.W.I. suspects shall follow the same
procedures as any other D.W.I. case. Juvenile arrest procedures, as outlined in this Order,
shall be followed. A parent or guardian must be notified and the juvenile released to
them.
C. Alcohol Possession - Arkansas law prohibits the purchase or possession of intoxicating liquor,
wine or beer by any person under the age of twenty-one (21) (A.C.A. § 3-3-203). When a
member of this Department observes an individual in violation of this statute, he/she shall
comply with the following procedure:
1. Persons in violation, who are age eighteen through twenty, shall be charged with the
aforementioned statute in Little Rock Municipal Court. The officer may place this charge
on a citation to appear, if the circumstances indicate that this would be appropriate.
2. Persons in violation, who are under the age of eighteen, shall be charged with the
aforementioned statute in Pulaski County Juvenile Court. The officer shall follow
established procedure set out for charging a juvenile in a misdemeanor arrest. The
juvenile will then be released to his/her parent, guardian, or other appropriate person.
3. Any intoxicating liquor, wine or beer, which is found in the possession of a juvenile, shall
be stored as evidence in the Property Section of the Police Department. Sealed containers
or containers that can be closed with a cap may be stored with the contents. Those
containers, which are open and cannot be closed, shall have the contents disposed of prior
to storage.
A. A law enforcement officer may take a juvenile into protective custody, without the consent of the
parent or guardian, whether or not medical treatment is required, if the circumstances or
conditions of the juvenile are such, that continuing in his/her place of residence or in the care
and custody of the parent, guardian, custodian, or other person, responsible for the juvenile’s
care, presents an imminent and severe danger to that juveniles life, health, or welfare (A.C.A. §
12-12-1001.
1. A juvenile may be taken into custody without a warrant by a law enforcement officer
before service upon him/her of a petition, notice of hearing or order to appear is set if the
following apply: (A.C.A. § 9-27-313)
b) if parents, guardians or others with authority to act are unavailable or have not
taken action necessary to protect the juvenile from the dangers; and,
c) there is not time to petition for or obtain an order from the court before taking
the juvenile into custody.
B. If an officer encounters a juvenile, who appears to meet the criteria for Emergency Protective
Custody, and no other means exist for the protection of the juvenile, he/she shall:
1. Contact a Field Services Division supervisor for authorization to place the juvenile in
emergency protective custody.
2. Immediately notify the D.C.F.S. of said custody and the circumstances and conditions
which required it. The twenty-four hour emergency telephone number for the D.C.F.S. is
1-501-837-8069.
3. Provide the D.C.F.S. investigator with any information required and appear at the probate
court hearing, if requested by the investigator.
5. Make every effort to notify the custodial parent, guardian or custodian of the juvenile’s
location. (The D.C.F.S. Investigator may make this notification; however, the officer
shall check with the D.C.F.S. to make certain notification was made.)
6. Generate a detailed Offense Report, containing all facts and circumstances surrounding
the Emergency Custody of the juvenile.
C. During an investigation involving disputed custody of a juvenile, where neither of the parties
involved are the biological mother (A.C.A. § 9-27-342[a]), and it can not be readily established
who has legal custody between the involved parties, the investigating officer shall contact a
Supervisor for authorization to place the juvenile in emergency protective custody and contact
D.C.F.S. for guidance.
D. An individual taking a juvenile into protective custody may give effective consent for medical,
dental, health, and hospital services during protective custody (A.C.A. § 12-12-516[c]).
E. Emergency protective custody shall only be invoked as a method of last resort; however, officers
should not hesitate to use such custody, if necessary, for the protection of a juvenile.
c) If it is necessary to the proper investigation of the case, the officer may interview
the victim of sexual or physical abuse at the hospital; however, in most incidents
of juvenile sexual abuse, it will not be appropriate for the officer to interview the
victim. Factors such as the victim’s age and emotional condition should be taken
into account, before such an interview takes place.
d) When any officer has reasonable cause to believe that any juvenile has been
subjected to maltreatment or has died as a result of child maltreatment or
observes a child being subject to conditions or circumstances that would
reasonably result in child maltreatment he/she shall immediately notify the
Child Abuse Hotline at 1-844-SAVE-A-CHILD. Officers can also make this
notification by faxing the incident report detailing the circumstances to 501-618-
8952. When using this option, the officer must include a telephone number
where he/she can be contacted.
2. View and document injuries and determine the victim’s need for medical attention.
5. Assess the juvenile’s condition to determine a need for Emergency Protective Custody, as
outlined in this Order.
B. Generate a detailed Offense Report containing all pertinent information and fax a copy of the
report to the Juvenile Unit (918-3580).
A. Any time an officer takes a report of an incident, involving criminal activity or a disturbance on
any school property, school bus or school bus stop, he/she will:
2. Immediately provide a copy of the completed Offense Report to the Office of the Public
Information Officer; and,
B. Whenever a member of this Department removes a juvenile student from the grounds of a
school, he/she will:
1. Contact the school principal or any member of the school administration, and advise them
that the student is being removed from the school;
2. Advise the principal or administrator of the general reason for the juvenile custody; and,
3. Sign any forms or release, which may be required for the removal of the student from the
school grounds.
A. Officers, either through personal observation or responding to a citizen’s call, shall determine if
the youth fits the below-listed criteria:
2. Enrolled or eligible for enrollment in the Little Rock School District (students enrolled in
private schools are not covered by this program).
3. The student must not be violent, intoxicated or have criminal charges pending (these
situations will be handled per existing policy).
4. Runaway or homeless youth will be taken to the Stepping Stone Shelter for assistance.
5. Students who are expelled or suspended will be provided written documentation by the
Little Rock School District.
6. Students, who are with their parents, or who have parental or school authorization to be
away from school, will not meet the criteria (i.e. doctor’s appointment, work permits,
etc.).
B. Officers will transport truants to the nearest secondary school or the student’s school, whichever is
closest.
C. The school district will provide Truancy Reports, which have been printed in triplicate. The
officer will transport the student to the principal’s office of the respective school, complete the
form, and leave two copies with school personnel. Officers will complete a Truancy Contact Form
in place of a police Offense report, and will insert the incident number in the top left corner. The
form will be sent to the Records Division for processing.
D. The school district will accept responsibility for returning the student to his/her school, if
necessary, and for providing follow-up between the school administration and parents.
E. If the student is not eligible to return to school, (i.e. currently expelled), then he/she may be
charged with violation of the daytime curfew ordinance, if applicable.
A. Pursuant to Little Rock City Ordinance 16,564, Section (17.5-24.), it shall be unlawful for any
minor to be upon the streets, sidewalks, parks, playgrounds, public places and vacant lots, or to
ride in or upon, drive or otherwise operate or be a passenger of any automobile, bicycle, or other
vehicle in, upon, or over or through the streets, or other public places between the hours of 10:00
p.m. and 5:00 a.m., Sunday through Thursday, or 12:00 midnight and 5:00 a.m., Friday and
Saturday. An amendment to this ordinance also provides for a daytime curfew to apply to these
same circumstances, during the hours of 9:00 a.m. and 3:45 p.m. Monday through Friday.
Additionally, it shall be unlawful for any parent to permit a minor to be in those places during the
specified hours. (The daytime curfew only applies when school is in session.)
c) If the minor is employed, for the period of time 45 minutes after work, provided
that circumstances suggest the minor is returning from work to a place of
residence.
d) When the minor is returning home, from an activity that is supervised by adults
or sponsored by the City of Little Rock, a civic organization, a public or private
school, or any entity that takes responsibility for the minor, provided that the
activity has not concluded for more than 45 minutes.
h) At any time the minor is engaged in an activity that is protected by the First
Amendment to the United States Constitution, or the freedom of speech, religion
or expression provisions in Article II of the Arkansas Constitution.
2. If the juvenile falls within any classification, as listed in subsection 1 above, and the
officer has no other charges to consider against the juvenile, the juvenile shall be released
and no further action shall be taken.
B. Procedures
1. The Field Services Divisions shall be responsible for enforcing the curfew, during the
designated times. Officers coming into contact with a juvenile 17 years of age or younger,
shall (within the bounds of good judgment and common sense) detain that juvenile and
follow the listed procedures. Officers are cautioned to use judicious discretion in their
actions.
2. The following general procedures shall apply to all citations issued to juveniles, who are
determined to be in violation of the curfew Ordinance.
b) The words, “date and time released” or “date and time notified,” and appropriate
information must appear above the box titled “WARNING”. The signature of
the parent, if obtained, must appear at the bottom of the citation and the court
appearance date and time information must be left blank. Court appearance date
and time will only appear on those citations issued, as a result of a warrant
obtained for the parent.
3. The following shall apply to juveniles determined only to be in violation of the curfew
Ordinance (no additional charges):
a) If the juvenile has been properly identified, lives within the City of Little Rock
and a parent has been notified, the officer shall:
(1) Issue the juvenile a criminal citation for 3rd Division District Court;
(3) Obtain all information on the parent to include full name, home address
(if different from the juvenile), date of birth, driver’s license or social
security number, place and phone number of employment;
(6) Release the juvenile to the parent or return the juvenile to his/her
school; and,
(7) Turn in copies of the citation (except the blue [Officer’s] copy), per
departmental procedures.
b) If the juvenile has been properly identified, lives within the City of Little Rock,
but no parental notification can be made, the officer shall:
(3) Release the juvenile or if citation is for a daytime curfew, return the
juvenile to his/her school and,
(4) Turn in all copies of the citation (except the blue [Officer’s] copy),
including the green copy.
(1) Transport the juvenile to the officer’s assigned Field Services Division,
or the Major Crimes Division, for further investigation;
d) If the juvenile has been properly identified, lives outside the City of Little Rock
and the parent has been notified, the officer shall:
(2) Obtain all information on the parent, to include full name, home address
(if different from the juvenile), date of birth, driver’s license or social
security number, place and phone number of employment;
(3) Require the juvenile to sign the citation and note on the citation that
parental notification has been made;
(5) Turn in all copies of the citation (except the blue [Officer’s] copy),
including the green copy.
e) If a juvenile has no identification, lives outside the City of Little Rock, but
parental notification can be made, the officer shall:
(2) Obtain all information on the parent, to include full name, home address
(if different from the juvenile), date of birth, driver’s license or social
security number, place and phone number of employment;
(3) Require the juvenile to sign the citation and note on the citation that
parental notification has been made;
(4) Release the juvenile or if the citation is for a daytime curfew, return the
juvenile to his/her school; and,
(5) Turn in all copies of the citation (except the blue [Officer’s] copy),
including the green copy.
f) If the juvenile has no identification, lives outside the City of Little Rock and
parental notification cannot be made, the officer shall contact his/her supervisor,
who will determine what further actions will be taken.
4. If a juvenile is arrested for any other charge during the curfew hours, he will be charged
with the curfew violation on one citation and any additional charge(s) shall be placed on a
separate citation. The citation numbers shall be referenced in the Offense Report and on
each citation, (i.e. also citation # XXXXXX).
5. It will be the responsibility of the on-duty Shift Commander to ensure that the above
procedures are properly implemented, ensuring that good judgment and common sense
are being used regarding juveniles.
XV. Compliance
A. All officers are responsible for the proper processing of incidents involving juveniles.
B. Supervisors will monitor all incidents involving juveniles, and will ensure compliance with this
Order.
C. The Financial Services Manager shall maintain juvenile service billing records and make such
payments to independent organizations, as may be required by City of Little Rock Ordinance
and/or Departmental operating procedures.
I. Purpose
A. The purpose of this General Order is to establish guidelines by which the Little Rock Police
Department shall respond to hostage situations, incidents involving barricaded persons, or other
high-risk situations, that pose imminent danger to human life.
B. The primary concern of responding units, in any high-risk situation, is the protection of life. The
preservation of the life of innocent persons, and self-preservation shall be foremost in the mind of
every officer.
C. The primary responsibility of any officer, responding to a high-risk situation, is to identify the
situation and participants, secure the incident scene, notify and deploy necessary support
personnel, and initiate efforts to resolve or defuse the situation. Personnel involved also have the
responsibility of maintaining accurate records throughout the incident.
II. Discussion
A. High-risk situations require well-disciplined, specially trained, and properly equipped personnel,
functioning as a team, to resolve a situation safely and effectively.
1. When situations occur, which warrant special tactical procedures for successful
resolution, personnel trained and equipped for such are necessary; the Special Weapons
and Tactics (SWAT) Unit is responsible for this mission.
2. When negotiations are desired to defuse a situation, personnel trained and equipped for
such are necessary; the Crisis Negotiations Team (CNT) is responsible for this mission.
3. In many instances, both the SWAT Unit and the CNT are necessary for the resolution of
an incident.
B. The use of deadly force, in a high-risk situation, will be governed by applicable laws and
Departmental General Orders and directives. Although deadly force is authorized by law and
Policy, under certain conditions, it shall be used only as a last resort.
C. No order, or set of orders, can be written to cover all possible situations. High-risk situations
involve high levels of stress. Common sense and calm, life protecting police procedures must
prevail. SWAT Unit members are specially trained and equipped for this mission. They, like all
officers, are permitted to use deadly force, as authorized in these General Orders.
III. Definitions
1. Hostage Situation - One or more persons being held against their will, with the actual or
implied use of force. This could be the result of a crime, domestic problem, or other
incident.
3. Other - Any situation (such as the serving of a search or arrest warrant, under hazardous
circumstances; information or evidence there will be armed resistance; etc.), not
described above, that an officer determines falls within the definition of a high-risk
situation, and that a response by the SWAT Unit is warranted.
B. Operational Definitions
2. Special Weapons and Tactics (SWAT) Unit - A unit comprised of specially trained and
equipped officers who respond to high-risk situations.
4. SWAT Unit Team Leader – Sergeant, who supervises the operations of a specific SWAT
team and reports to the SWAT Unit Commander.
5. Assistant Team Leader - Sworn member of the SWAT Unit, who assists the Team Leader
in the supervision of a specific SWAT team and reports directly to the SWAT Team
Leader.
6. SWAT Unit Call Out - Members of the unit advised to meet in a designated location,
with all necessary supplies and equipment.
7. Command Post (CP) - Field headquarters located in a safe and secure area, not subject to
gunfire from the scene, from which the Incident Commander will control the operation.
The CP shall be comprised of the Tactical Operations Center (TOC) and the Crisis
Negotiators Operations Center (CNOC).
8. Tactical Operations Center (TOC) - The SWAT Van or other designated vehicle or area,
where all tactically significant information to support the SWAT mission is gathered for
use by the SWAT Unit Commander.
10. Immediate Action / Deliberate Action Team - An element of the SWAT Unit charged with
providing cover and control of the inner perimeter and conducting entry operations.
11. Inner Perimeter - The immediate area of containment. This area is initially manned by
patrol personnel, until relieved by members of the SWAT Unit.
12. Outer Perimeter - Controlled area, manned by patrol officers, which is set up outside the
inner perimeter to keep vehicular and pedestrian traffic out of the incident area.
13. Operation Order - Overall plan, prepared by the Incident Commander, which outlines the
course of action which will be utilized to resolve the situation. The SWAT Unit
Commander will prepare the Operation Order for routine Warrant Service.
14. Tactical Assault - A maneuver by an element of the SWAT Unit to resolve a situation.
15. After Action Memorandum - A memorandum, outlining comments and actions taken
regarding the conduct of the operation, with regard to issues relating to training,
operational and administrative procedures, and equipment needs.
16. Crisis Negotiations Team (CNT) - A unit comprised of personnel specially trained and
equipped for negotiations.
17. CNT Commander - A Lieutenant responsible for the training, operational use, and
administrative affairs of the Unit. The CNT Commander reports directly to the Incident
Commander.
18. CNT Supervisor – A Sergeant responsible for overseeing different functions within the
CNT (Negotiations, Operations, and Logistics/Support).
19. Negotiator - A law enforcement officer or civilian member who is specially trained to
perform negotiation functions. Negotiators report directly to the CNT Commander.
20. Crisis Negotiations Operations Center (CNOC) - The City of Little Rock Emergency
Command Vehicle or other designated vehicle or area, where all significant information
and intelligence are gathered and the Crisis Negotiations Unit conducts negotiations.
21. Logistical Commander – A Lieutenant who will direct the activity of all mission essential
functions that fall outside of the scope of the SWAT Unit Commander and the CNT
Commanders.
22. Logistics Support - Law enforcement, fire department, ambulance company, and
governmental and private industry components, with resources that may provide support
in high-risk situations.
23. Tactical Emergency Medical Support (TEMS) - Physicians and emergency medical
technicians specially trained and equipped to provide medical support in high-risk
situations.
IV. Procedures
A. General Instructions
1. Any officer shall have the authority to call up the SWAT Unit, within the confines of this
General Order. If the officer is unsure whether the situation falls within the definition of
“high risk”, the SWAT Unit will be called for the safety of the citizens and officers
involved.
2. Assigned units will maintain radio discipline and refrain from radio transmission, except
when absolutely necessary. Unassigned units shall remain clear of the high-risk situation
area and shall not enter the area, unless directed.
3. Assigned personnel shall change radio frequency to the designated operational channel,
when directed to do so by Communications.
4. SWAT Unit personnel will use a frequency, other than that designated for operational use
by Communications. The SWAT Unit Commander will monitor the designated
operational frequency. Non-SWAT personnel will make no transmissions on the
designated SWAT frequency, and will communicate with the SWAT Unit Commander
on the designated operational frequency.
6. Units directed to the high-risk situation shall report to the Command Post/Assembly Area
for specific assignment.
1. Move to a position that affords cover and concealment, and avoid a confrontation with
the suspect(s).
2. Advise the Communications Section to restrict a channel for the use of involved units.
3. Direct arriving units to form an inner perimeter, thereby confining the suspect(s) to the
immediate area.
5. Call out the SWAT Unit and CNT, and contact a Field Supervisor.
7. Notify the Communications Section by the safest means available of the following:
d) The location to which additional units should respond, as well as any areas or
streets which may be unsafe for responding units to enter.
8. Detain and separate all witnesses to the incident for later debriefing.
9. Brief the first-arriving supervisor of the situation and location of all officers at the scene,
and stand by for debriefing by SWAT and CNT members.
10. At the conclusion of the high-risk incident, submit a detailed Offense Report, outlining
the circumstances of the incident.
2. Confirm and completely secure an inner perimeter around the high-risk location to
control access in and out of the location.
3. Evaluate the necessity and desirability of evacuating civilians and/or injured persons
from danger areas at this time. If safe, assign patrol personnel to effect their removal to a
location outside the outer perimeter. Debrief those evacuated for information about the
incident and/or suspect(s).
4. Establish an outer perimeter, beyond the view of the high-risk location, block off all
vehicular entrances, and restrict citizens and unauthorized vehicles from entering the
danger area.
5. Establish a Command Post at a safe location, beyond the view of the high-risk location,
to which responding personnel can report. Ensure the Communications Section is made
aware of this location.
7. Continually update the Communications Section of any new information, and secure any
witnesses at a safe location near the Command Post for debriefing by SWAT officers and
negotiators.
8. As time permits, collect the following information for the SWAT Section Commander:
a) Situation Report - The who, what, when, where, why, and how of the incident.
9. Coordinate the relief of inner perimeter officers with the SWAT Unit Commander who,
upon his arrival, will then assume command of the scene.
10. Debrief and reassign inner perimeter officers, as they are relieved by SWAT Unit
members.
11. At the conclusion of the incident, assign a patrol unit to transport the suspect(s).
D. The Shift Commander, at the Scene, shall establish liaison with the first supervisor on the scene
and confirm or establish:
1. Inner and outer perimeters, and evacuate any civilians and/or injured, that can be safely
moved.
3. Establish a news media information area and assign an officer to serve as a media liaison,
until the arrival of the Public Affairs Officer.
4. Control the location of witnesses, coordinate requests for specialized equipment and
vehicles (i.e., rescue, ambulance, fire, etc.), and coordinate any logistical support with
other law enforcement, governmental, and private organizations.
5. Coordinate patrol operations with the on-duty Shift Commander of the unaffected Field
Services Divisions.
7. At the conclusion of the high-risk situation, conduct a critique session, with involved
patrol personnel, at the Police Administrative Building or appropriate substation.
1. Formulate an Operational Plan for resolving the high-risk situation by correlating the
situational reports and the recommendations from the SWAT Unit Commander with those
from the CNT Commander.
2. Coordinate with the Major Crimes Division supervisor for the procurement of such
search/arrest warrants, as may be appropriate. Except under emergency conditions, in
which the lives of civilians/hostages and/or law enforcement officers are in immediate
danger, warrants will be obtained, prior to a tactical assault.
3. Authorize the use of chemical agents when appropriate. Unless otherwise restricted by
the SWAT Unit Commander, SWAT personnel engaged in a tactical assault may use
distraction devices at their discretion, when tactical advantage may be gained by its use.
4. Provide situational and status reports to the Assistant Chief of Police – Investigative
Bureau and/or the Chief of Police. The Incident Commander will appoint another
Captain to assume his responsibilities in his absence in accordance with policy
1. Formulate an Operational Plan for the tactical resolution of the high-risk situation and
the service of search and arrest warrants.
2. Brief arriving SWAT personnel, and direct the Immediate Action Team in the relief of
patrol personnel on the Inner Perimeter.
3. Designate a radio channel, which will be used only by SWAT personnel. All other
communications will occur on the channel restricted by the Communications Section, at
the onset of the incident, or on such channel, as may be designated for such use by
supervisory personnel in command at the scene.
4. Direct the Immediate Action Team to prepare for an emergency tactical assault and to
begin planning for a deliberate tactical assault. Tactical assault is used as a last resort,
only when all reasonable options have been exhausted, or are no longer practical, and at
the direction of the Incident Commander.
5. Request the presence, if not already summoned, of Tactical Emergency Medical Support
(TEMS) personnel, and direct their activities at the scene.
6. Request the call out of a Canine Team, and direct its placement, so as to prevent the
escape of the suspect from the Inner Perimeter.
7. Request the presence of the Fire Department Bomb Disposal Squad, when explosives are
found or are believed to be present.
13. Submit an after action memorandum to the, Incident Commander at the earliest
opportunity, after the high-risk situation is completed.
G. The SWAT Unit Team Leader shall perform the SWAT Unit Commander’s duties, in his absence;
perform any other duties, as specified by the SWAT Unit Commander; and direct all tactical
operations involving the team he is assigned to command.
H. The SWAT Unit Assistant Team Leader shall assist the SWAT Unit Team Leader in directing his
team during tactical operations, and perform other duties as directed by the SWAT Unit
Commander or Team Leader.
I. SWAT Unit Members shall follow all orders issued by SWAT supervisors, keep the Team Leader
advised of all information that may affect the operation, and arrive at the assembly area in SWAT
uniform, with all assigned equipment.
2. Serve as the direct link to the Incident Commander and the Tactical Unit Commander on
overall negotiation progress.
3. Assign the Primary, Secondary and Coach Negotiators to particular duties after
consulting with the CNT Unit Commander,
4. Assure proper flow of information from Negotiations to and from Sergeant (Operations),
SWAT Liaison, and Command level Officers, and
5. Actively monitor the negotiation process and advises personnel on tactics and updated
information as the event continues.
4. Assure needed equipment and supplies are readily available for deployment in support
of the operation. (I.e. Throw Phone, food, water, bull horn…etc…)
5. Ensures the immediate and proper flow of all information at all times.
2. Communicate directly with the suspect. Attempts to gain the suspect(s)’ trust, gathers
intelligence, and ultimately assists the suspect with surrender.
3. Develops verbal tactics, monitors and assesses the subject’s level of emotional arousal,
strives to “slow everything down” and defuse the situation.
3. Monitor the conversation between primary negotiator and suspect. He/She helps with the
conversation (ideas, strategy).
4. Make sure that all information flows from intelligence sources to negotiator.
3. Monitor the conversation between primary negotiator and suspect. He/She helps with the
conversation (ideas, strategy), and
4. Regulate and provide information to the primary and secondary negotiator acts as an
information bridge, keeps negotiations on a predetermined path.
2. Maintain written documentation of all communication and actions taken during the
incident.
3. Be responsible for forwarding a report of all information, time lines, and any audio or
video recordings to the CNT Negotiations Supervisor at the conclusion of the incident.
2. Ensure needed equipment and supplies are readily available and on hand for the
operation (i.e. throw phone, cameras, computers, food, water, bull horn, etc…)
1. Report directly to the Incident Commander. Upon arrival at the scene shall assume
command for all street closures, location of the Command Post and the media staging
area.
2. Direct the evacuation of injured persons or civilians from the area within the Outer
Perimeter, if such evacuation has not been completed upon arrival. Shall be responsible
for securing locations and transportation for the temporary displacement of civilians.
3. Request the response of the LRPD Aviation Unit and/or the Arkansas State Police
Aviation Unit when needed, notify them of the situation, and determine response time.
Shall also be responsible for locating an adequate landing zone.
4. Request the presence of the Fire Department Bomb Disposal Squad, when explosives are
found or are believed to be present.
5. Ensure that MEMS is notified and has a route cleared for immediate ingress and egress
from the area. Also designate an area for landing MED Flight, if needed to respond to
the scene.
2. Interview witnesses;
X. The Crime Scene Search Unit will provide for the processing of the incident scene, as directed by
the Incident Commander and Major Crimes Division personnel.
2. Monitor the operation and inform the media of the status of the incident.
V. Mobilization of Special Threat Situations - It is the policy of the Little Rock Police Department to not
allow a hostage taker to leave the scene of an incident with the hostage. In the event a suspect escapes with
a hostage, or where allowing the suspect and hostage to change locations is believed to be a tactical
advantage, the SWAT Unit Commander will:
A. Notify Communications Section, by secure means, that the situation is going mobile and the
proposed route and destination, if known.
B. Maintain operational coordination, until the incident shifts to another jurisdiction or until relieved
by superior authority, and brief the commander of the new jurisdiction and offer assistance, as
necessary.
C. Coordinate the composition of the hostage/suspect convoy. Consideration should be given to the
number of suspects, their armament, emotional/mental temperament, number of hostages and the
destination. In addition, ensure that:
(2) Negotiators are included in, and are an integral part of, the convoy.
(6) SWAT personnel are pre-positioned, at the new location, to contain the
suspect and hostage.
d) If the new location is outside the city, the SWAT Section Commander will brief
the senior officers, of the agency with jurisdiction, with all pertinent information
and stand by with them to provide such assistance, as may be requested.
A. Airport incidents will be governed by the Airport Emergency Plan and this General Order.
VII. Conclusion
A. All personnel, involved in any type of high-risk situation, must remember that there are two
objectives in all high-risk situations.
1. The primary objective is to preserve the life of hostages, citizens, law enforcement
personnel and suspect(s).
B. A team effort, geared toward these objectives, will enable a peaceful resolution to be achieved.
I. Purpose
A. The purpose of this General Order is to provide officers with the resources necessary to
effectively assist persons who appear to need some type of mental health service. This
Order provides officers information on legal and procedural requirements, as well as
information on community resources, which may assist them in providing a higher degree
of service to our citizens.
B. This Order does not prevent or inhibit the placing of criminal charges against any person,
due to mental illness. The determination of mental capacity, in regard to criminal
proceedings, is a matter for consideration by a criminal court, and is not relevant to the
civil commitment provisions contained in this Order.
II. Procedures
2. The In-Service Training Sergeant will assess ongoing needs for training,
equipment, and policy regarding the understanding of mental illness and
working with those subjects that have a mental illness.
B. In all cases involving the mentally ill, the primary obligation of the responding Officer is
the safety of the public. This General Order should not be construed to restrict officers
from making legal arrests of persons who are believed to suffer from mental illness when
such arrests are advisable. However, if such arrest is not warranted, it is the function of
the officer to conduct a brief assessment of the mental health needs of the person in
question and exercise one of the following options:
3. If such behavior is apparent to the Officer, however the subject does not present
it during an evaluation, it will be necessary for the officer to seek a commitment
petition. State Mental Health personnel shall assist Officers in obtaining the
petition.
5. Method of Transport – In order to provide for the safety of both officers and
citizens, officers will utilize patrol units equipped with safety screens to
transport persons to an Emergency Room. Those persons, who cannot be
transported in a police vehicle, due to physical limitations, may be transported
by ambulance.
6. Juveniles – When attempting to locate mental health services for persons under
the age of eighteen officers should attempt to contact the juvenile’s parent or
guardian.
III. General
A. At no time should this General Order be construed as limiting the authority, or relieving
the responsibility, of all officers to provide necessary police services to all persons
without regard to mental illness. With the prevalence of mental illness in society officers
must be prepared to deal with persons suffering from these conditions on a frequent basis
during the course of their duties. Officers should remember that the majority of persons
in need of mental health care represent no danger to others; however, there are exceptions
that can become extremely violent and combative with little or no apparent warning. For
this reason, officers should exercise extreme caution in their approach to such
individuals.
2. Do not abuse, belittle, or threaten the person. Such actions may cause the
person to become alarmed and distrustful.
3. Do not deceive the person. This may limit chances for successful treatment and
make future management of the person by other officers more difficult.
4. Do not take the person’s anger personally. Ignore any attacks on your character,
physical appearance or profession, and encourage ventilation to safely release
the frustration.
5. Remain professional in your contacts with the person. With an image of quiet
self-assurance and an insistence on your orders being followed, gently indicate
that your only intention is to help the person.
A. Act 861 of 1989 (A.C.A. § 20-47-201 et seq.) sets forth the requirements and
responsibilities for the care, custody and treatment of persons, believed to be in need of
mental health services, due to mental illness.
C. Voluntary Admission (A.C.A. § 20-47-204) - Any person, who believes himself to have a
mental disease or disorder, may apply to a mental health receiving facility for admission.
If the screener at a receiving facility shall be satisfied, after examination of the applicant,
that he is in need of mental health treatment and will be benefited thereby, he may
receive and care for the person in the receiving facility, for such time as he shall deem
necessary for the recovery and improvement of said person, provided that said person
agrees at all times to remain in the facility.
a) The person has inflicted serious bodily injury on himself, or has attempted
suicide or serious self-injury, and there is a reasonable probability that such
conduct will be repeated, if admission is not ordered; or,
b) The person has threatened to inflict serious bodily injury on himself and
there is a reasonable probability that such conduct will occur, if admission
is not ordered; or,
c) The person’s behavior demonstrates that he so lacks the capacity to care for
his own welfare, that there is a reasonable probability of death, serious
bodily injury, or serious physical or mental debilitation, if admission is not
ordered.
A. The Warrants Unit Sergeant shall receive any Mental Health Probate Court Order, during
normal working hours. If the Warrants Unit Sergeant is not working, the Desk Officer
shall receive the order. Upon receipt the Order shall be forwarded to the appropriate
Field Services Shift Commander for service.
1. When a Probate Court Order is received by the Warrants Unit Sergeant, or the
Desk Officer, for the transport of a person “For Immediate Detention”, at least
four copies of the Order shall be made.
b) Each copy shall also contain the person’s Commitment Rights Form and
any other papers attached by the Probate Court.
2. When the person named in the Order is located, taken into custody, and is being
transported to the facility, designated in the order, the facility shall be contacted
and advised that the officers are en route with a person “For Immediate
Detention”.
3. After arriving at the facility, the facility’s security staff shall accept control of
the person. There is no statute requiring officers to provide security, when a
probate court has ordered detention.
a) Should the facility fail to notify their security staff, officers shall advise
them the Order only requires an Officer to deliver the person named.
b) Officers should document all cases where they were required by Hospital
staff to remain over twenty minutes with a person, who is delivered under
an Immediate Detention Order.
4. When the Order is served, or service was attempted but not successful, the Court
Copy shall be returned to the Warrants Unit Sergeant’s Office, with notation that
the Order was, served or service was attempted, the date and time served or
attempted, and the officer’s name(s) and employee number(s). [CALEA
74.1.2.a, b]
5. After the Order is served, Warrants Unit personnel shall stamp the “Court
Copy” with the service stamp provided for this purpose and return the Order to
the issuing court, within five working days.
6. The Probate Court is located on Unit 4 (upper level) of the Arkansas State
Hospital and the phone number for the Prosecutor Coordinator, assigned to the
Court, is 686-9193.
2. The prosecutor coordinator, or the ASH Admissions Office, will verify the
current status of the Commitment Order and provide the case number, date of
Commitment Order, a copy of the Respondent’s Rights Form, and specific
admission procedures for the person to the Warrants Unit Sergeant, or Field
Services Shift Commander, by hand or facsimile (FAX) transmission to the
Records Division.
4. After the prosecutor coordinator has supplied the required information, officers
shall:
a) Obtain the documents from the Desk Officer or the ASH Admissions
Office;
c) Transport the person to the designated mental health facility, if the person
can be located; and
d) Return the Order to the Desk Officer, with notation of the date and time of
service or attempted service, and the name and employee number of the
officer(s) serving or attempting service of the Order.
D. Use of Force - Officers may use reasonable and appropriate physical force, necessary to
control and transport persons, for the purpose of involuntary admission or for the
enforcement of a probate court order, in compliance with Arkansas law (A.C.A. § 5-2-
605) and Departmental policies.
A. The nature and seriousness of crimes committed between family or household members are not
mitigated because of the relationships or living arrangements of those involved. It is the intent of this
policy to prescribe courses of action, which police officers should take in response to domestic
violence that will enforce the law, while also serving to intervene and prevent future incidents of
violence.
2. Protect victims of domestic abuse and provide them with support through a combination of
law enforcement and community services;
3. Promote officer safety by ensuring that officers are fully prepared to respond to and
effectively deal with domestic abuse calls; and,
C. The Little Rock Police Department recognizes that domestic violence may be preventable. By
thoroughly investigating incidents of domestic violence and appropriately enforcing applicable laws,
short and long term positive effects are realized.
D. In both arrest and non-arrest situations, officers of this Department will take all reasonable measures
necessary to assist and/or assure the immediate safety of the victim(s), the children, the offender, or any
other person who may be affected; and to determine what action will be most effective in preventing
future domestic violence. The Legislature has adopted a preferred action standard indicating that when
evidence of domestic abuse exists, an arrest within twelve (12) hours of the occurrence is the preferred
action by law enforcement.
II. Definitions
1. Physical harm, bodily injury, assault, or the infliction of fear of imminent physical harm,
bodily injury or assault, between family or household members, or,
2. Any sexual conduct between family or household members whether minors or adults, which
constitutes a crime under the laws of this state (A.C.A. § 16-81-113(b)(1)).
B. “Family or household member” means spouses, former spouses, parents and children, persons related
by blood, within the fourth degree of consanguinity, persons related by marriage within the second
degree of consanguinity, any child residing in the household, persons who presently or in the past have
resided or cohabitated together, persons who have or have had a child in common and persons who are
presently or in the past have been in a dating relationship together. (A.C.A. § 16-81-113(b)(2)).
C. “Dating relationship” means a romantic or intimate social relationship between two (2) individuals
which shall be determined by examining the following factors;
3. The frequency of interaction between the two (2) individuals involved in the relationship.
“Dating relationship” shall not include a casual relationship or ordinary fraternization between two (2)
individuals in a business or social context.
D. “Consanguinity” means lineage or origin by blood relationship. This relationship in domestic abuse
violations extends to the fourth degree and includes Great, Great Grandparents and children, Great-
Grand Uncles and Aunts, and Great-Grand Nephews and Nieces. (See Chart at end of this Order).
E. “Order of Protection” means an order, issued by a Circuit Court, which prohibits a person from
engaging in certain conduct or contact with another person.
F. “No Contact Order” means an order issued to a person arrested for a domestic abuse violation, upon
their first appearance in District Court. This order limits or prohibits contact with the victim, by the
suspect, until the case is disposed of.
G. “Probable Cause” means the combination of facts which gives the officer reasonable grounds to believe
that a crime has been committed, and that the person to be arrested committed the crime.
H. “Ex-Parte Orders” means temporary orders issued by a Circuit Court, which prohibit a person from
engaging in certain conduct or contact with another person.
I. “Petitioner” means the person alleging abuse in a petition for an Order of Protection.
J. “Respondent” means the person alleged to have abused another in a petition or Order of Protection.
K. “Predominant Aggressor” means the person involved in a domestic abuse incident who, when all
pertinent factors are considered, is determined to be the party perpetrating the preponderance of the
aggression.
L. “Preferred Response,” means law enforcement officers shall arrest a person committing domestic abuse
unless there is a clear and compelling reason not to arrest.
M. “Weapon” means any firearm, explosive, metal knuckles, knife, or other device employed as an
instrument of crime subjecting another to physical harm or fear of physical harm.
A. Communication Center personnel who receives a domestic abuse call can provide the responding
officers with vital information that could save the victim’s and the officer’s life. Communications
Center personnel will give a domestic abuse call the same priority as any other life-threatening call and
will, whenever possible, dispatch at least two (2) officers to every incident; including those that involve
or appear to involve a police officer of any department.
B. In addition to information normally gathered, an effort should be made to determine and relay the
following to responding officers:
1. Whether the suspect is present and, if not, the suspect’s description and possible whereabouts;
2. Whether weapons are involved and whether the offender is under the influence of drugs or
alcohol;
3. Whether there are children present and whether the victim has a current protective or
restraining order; and,
C. No Communications Center employee, in speaking with a victim of domestic violence, will discuss, or
make any comments concerning the victim’s desire to “press charges,” “drop charges,” or “prosecute.”
D. Communications Center personnel shall not cancel the police response to a domestic abuse complaint
based solely on a follow-up call from the residence requesting such cancellation. However,
Communications Center personnel shall advise responding officers of the complainant’s request.
E. Communications Center personnel shall maintain a current list and contact information of all local
domestic violence victim advocacy organizations for on-scene officers and supervisors to provide to
victims.
1. Restore order by gaining control of the situation and taking possession of all weapons used or
threatened to be used in the crime;
2. Assess the need for medical attention and call for medical assistance, if requested;
a) The Crime Scene Search Unit (CSSU) may also be requested for photographs or
other crime scene processing services.
5. After each party has been interviewed, responding officers shall determine if an arrest should
be made or whether other actions should be taken. Where physical evidence exists that
domestic abuse has occurred within the last twelve (12) hours, the officer will arrest the
suspect.
6. Per state law, the first officer who interviews the victim of domestic violence shall assess the
potential for danger by asking a series of questions provided on the LRPD Domestic Violence
Lethality Assessment Form. Officers will use this form when investigating any case of domestic
violence. The completed LRPD Domestic Violence Lethality Assessment Form shall be submitted
with the report. A copy of this form will be attached to the ADR and provided to the Pulaski
County Regional Detention Facility. This copy does not need a supervisor’s signature however
the original will need to be signed prior to attaching it in the RMS system and forwarding to
Victim Services.
7. Per state law, provide the victim, and if applicable, the victim’s family, a Domestic Abuse
Victim’s Rights card (Laura’s Card) and be sure they understand their rights.
8. If the offender has left the scene and a crime has been committed, the officer(s) will:
a) Conduct a search of the immediate area, obtain information from victims and
witnesses as to where the offender might be, and make a reasonable effort to
apprehend the offender.
b) Refer the victim immediately to the Major Crimes Division for assistance in
obtaining a warrant, in those instances where such is appropriate.
B. When responding to a domestic violence call, officers may enter a premises or vehicle without consent
or warrant, when there is probable cause to believe that individuals therein are in imminent danger of
death or serious bodily harm (ARCrP 14.3 (a)).
V. Arrest Authority
A. In addition to other arrest authority, officers are authorized to make a warrantless, probable cause arrest
of a person for a misdemeanor offense, even if the act occurred outside the officer’s presence when:
2. The person has committed the offense of battery upon another person; and,
b) The officer reasonably believes there is danger of continued violence, unless the
person is arrested without delay (A.C.A. § 16-81-106). (This authority is not limited
to domestic abuse situations and has no time limitation.)
3. The person:
3. The evidence and information indicate a particular party was capable of, and had the
opportunity to commit the offense.
C. Primary Aggressor
1. To determine the primary aggressor in domestic abuse related incidents, or when an officer
has probable cause to believe that two (2) or more persons committed a domestic related
offense, or where there are allegations that each party assaulted the other, officers shall
consider the following:
2 The Little Rock Police Department discourages dual arrests; however, if sufficient evidence
exists justifying a dual arrest, and the officer determines that this course of action would be the
most appropriate under the given circumstances, a dual arrest is authorized.
b) Ownership, tenancy rights of either party, or the fact the incident occurred in a private
place;
c) Belief that the victim will not cooperate with criminal prosecution or that the arrest may
not lead to a conviction;
e) Denial by either party that the abuse occurred when there is evidence of domestic abuse;
h) Adverse financial consequences that might result from the arrest; or,
1. Make any statements which would discourage a victim from reporting an act of domestic
violence; or,
2. Threaten, suggest, or otherwise indicate the possible arrest of all parties to discourage future
requests for intervention by law enforcement personnel.
3. Release or issue a citation to any person arrested for a domestic abuse related offense (Per
District Court order: Persons charged with any degree of domestic battery shall be detained
without bond privileges).
E. Field supervisory personnel will monitor any domestic violence incident dispatched to any officer
under their chain of command or within their area of responsibility.
F. Requests for Violent Crimes Unit personnel to respond to the scene of a domestic related incident
should generally be limited to the following incidents:
3. Spousal rapes;
4. Domestic related aggravated assaults where weapons are used and suspect is not in custody;
8. Juvenile sex crimes involving domestic abuse (joint investigations with the Juvenile Unit).
2. Victims (walk-ins) come directly to the Violent Crimes Unit office for assistance;
A. A Little Rock Police Department “Information Report” (Form 5500-01) will be completed whenever an
officer investigates an allegation that domestic abuse has occurred or has responded to a domestic
related disturbance.
B. A Little Rock Police Department Domestic Lethality Assessment Form will be completed whenever an
officer responds to a report of domestic violence or investigates an allegation that domestic abuse has
occurred.
C. Officers investigating domestic related incidents shall give the victim and, if applicable, the victim’s family,
a preprinted document to be known as “Laura’s Card”, LRPD Form No.5410-03.
D. Officers investigating domestic related incidents shall be cognizant of the applicable “enhancement” laws
associated with the charging of persons with a domestic abuse related offense.
1. A domestic offense may be enhanced if the suspect has a conviction for a similar offense,
which occurred within the five (5) years preceding the commission of the current offense.
2. A domestic offense may be enhanced if the suspect has convictions for two similar offenses,
which occurred within the ten (10) years preceding the commission of the current offense.
3. A domestic offense may be enhanced if the suspect knew or should have known the woman
abused was pregnant.
E. Investigating officers, upon deciding to make an arrest or determining that a dual arrest would be
appropriate under the circumstances, must be able to articulate their reasoning and justification for
taking such action and include this information in their report.
F. All domestic violence incidents resulting in probable cause arrests will require a Field Services supervisor
to create two (2) copies of any MVR video files from any MVR equipped vehicles involved in the incident.
One copy of any MVR video files will be included in the case file and the other copy will be stored as
evidence.
G. In all felony domestic abuse cases, or misdemeanor cases as described in Section V.F & V.G of this
order, the assigned detective shall prepare the investigative file (burgundy folder) and ensure that the
following documentation is included:
1. Information report(s);
4. Affidavit(s) of Arrest;
12. All Digital photographs taken. (Copies of the photographs and the compact disc shall be
placed in the original case file.); and,
H. In all misdemeanor domestic abuse cases, resulting in arrest, the arresting officer shall prepare a field
investigation file. The following documentation should be secured in a lavender file folder and
forwarded to the Major Crimes Division:
4. Affidavit(s) of Arrest
12. All Digital photographs taken. (Copies of the photographs and the compact disc shall be
placed in the original case file.); and,
I. Prior to the end of the officer’s shift the domestic file will be completed and forwarded to a Patrol
Supervisor for approval. The Patrol Supervisor will sign the inside front cover of the file to indicate
that the file is complete and in compliance with this policy. This file will be forwarded to the Violent
Crimes Unit Supervisor to determine if follow-up investigation is necessary and for statistical
accountability.
J. If the domestic violence allegation does not result in an arrest and a domestic file is not generated, the
officer shall scan the Domestic Violence Lethality Assessment form into the Report Management System
(RMS), attach it to the Incident Report and forward the original Domestic Violence Lethality Assessment
form to the Victim Services Unit for storage.
A. Officers who have taken into custody persons arrested for any felony domestic abuse related offense
shall transport that person to the Major Crimes Division for processing of the prisoner.
B. Officers who have taken into custody persons arrested for any misdemeanor domestic abuse related
offense will be responsible for conducting an investigation.
C. Officers may conduct these investigations in the field, or transport persons arrested for misdemeanor
domestic abuse charges to the Major Crimes Division, or any other Police facility (except Special
Operations) in order to assure an environment conducive to their investigation.
1. Officers may request witnesses, victims, or other persons needed for the investigation to meet
them at the Police facility to obtain statement, photograph injuries, or any other actions
necessary for the completion of the investigation.
2. Patrol Supervisors should have access to digital camera equipment for use in the investigation
when such equipment in the Detective Offices is not accessible.
3. Officers should include a criminal history printout of the suspect(s) to verify the possible
enhancement of the charge to felony level has been checked. If any doubt exists as to the
felony or misdemeanor status of a case a Patrol Supervisor or a Major Crimes Division
Supervisor should be consulted.
4. In order to investigate misdemeanor domestic abuse cases in the field, patrol officers should
assure they report for duty with an adequate supply of :
A. Federal Law
1. Title 18 USC, 922 (g) bans individuals convicted on most criminal acts involving domestic
violence, including child abuse, from owning, shipping, receiving, transporting or possessing a
firearm or ammunition. Law enforcement officers are not exempt. The prohibition includes
any offense that is:
b) Has, as an element of the offense, the use or attempted use of physical force, or the
threatened use of deadly force; and
2. This includes assault or battery even when the state statute or ordinance does not specifically
define the offense as a domestic violence offense.
B. The Little Rock Police Department recognizes that domestic abuse is a crime and that some police
officers commit domestic violence against their intimate partners, family members, and household
members. This policy is written to insure that the victims are protected and that Department procedures
are followed in accordance with state and federal law.
C. This policy also provides guidance for investigating incidents of domestic violence where one or more
of the involved parties are sworn members of the Little Rock Police Department; or, if one or more of
the involved parties are sworn members of another agency and the incident occurred within the
jurisdiction of the City of Little Rock.
2. The Communications Center supervisor will then immediately contact the Shift Commander
responsible for the Division from which the call originated as well as a Major Crimes Division
supervisor.
3. Communications Center personnel will dispatch at least two (2) officers to all officer involved
domestic violence related incidents.
1. Any officer arriving at the scene of a domestic violence incident involving a police officer
shall immediately contact his/her immediate supervisor, regardless of the involved officer(s)
jurisdiction.
b) Take control of all weapons used or threatened to be used in the incident; and,
c) Assess the need for medical attention and call for medical attention if required or
requested.
1. A supervisor will respond to all officer involved domestic related incidents and, upon his/her
arrival, assume all on-scene decision making.
2. If the supervisor has probable cause to believe that there is evidence of physical abuse and that
the abuser is a sworn member of this Department, the supervisor will arrest the offender and
will seize and take into custody all Department issued firearms in possession of the sworn
officer. In addition, the supervisor will request that the sworn member surrender all
personally owned firearms.
3. If the incident involves a sworn member of another agency, the supervisor will arrest the
offender and will seize and take into custody any and all firearms in possession of the person
at the time of arrest. Also, the supervisor will notify, as soon as possible, an on-duty
commander from the accused officer’s department and forward all pertinent information for
that person’s review and possible instructions in reference to the accused officer. This
notification shall be made within twenty-four (24) hours of the incident and shall be
documented in the supervisor’s letter.
4. If, after a thorough investigation, the supervisor determines that an arrest is not the appropriate
action at the time, or that a domestic abuse offense did not occur, the supervisor shall submit a
detailed report articulating his/her reasoning for arriving at that conclusion and forward this
documentation through his/her chain of command for review.
5. If the offending officer is of a higher rank than the responding supervisory officer, the
supervisor shall contact his/her Shift Commander who will then respond to the scene and will
also notify his/her Division Commander. The Division Commander will be briefed on the
incident and will provide direction as needed.
6. If a sworn member of this Department does not have their Department issued firearm on their
person or under their control at the time of the incident, the supervisor shall accompany the
sworn member to the location of the firearm and take custody of the firearm.
7. If the offender has left the scene and a crime of domestic abuse has been committed, the
supervisor will conduct a search of the immediate area and obtain information from the victim
and/or witness as to where the offender might be. If unable to locate the offender, the
supervisor will forward all information to the Major Crimes Division supervisor for
appropriate action.
8. The supervisor shall be responsible for notifying the Division Commander within the involved
officer’s chain of command, the Major Crimes Division supervisor, and the Professional
Standards Section.
9. The supervisor will ensure that the victim receives written documentation providing
information on available community resources and local domestic violence organizations.
The victim will also be made aware of applicable laws as well as department protocols and
policies as they relate to domestic violence incidents. Every effort shall be made to ensure
that the victim takes advantage of all opportunities for safety and successful prosecution.
10. The Violent Crimes Unit supervisor shall serve as the victim’s principal contact agent
throughout the duration of the investigation and shall make themselves available for any
assistance needed or requested by the victim.
a) The Violent Crimes Unit Supervisor will be notified if an officer is charged with a
domestic related incident.
2. Ensure that a supervisor has responded to the scene and, under the direction of that supervisor
shall:
a) Search the crime scene and ensure that all crime scene evidence is preserved,
marked, collected and turned into the LRPD property room;
b) Attempt to obtain consent from the parties involved to search the incident scene for
the purpose of seizing and taking into temporary custody all privately owned firearms
present;
c) Locate and interview all suspects, victims and witnesses to the incident;
d) Forward a copy of all reports to the Violent Crimes Unit as well as to the
Professional Standards Section; and,
e) Determine if an order of protection, restraining order, or any other court order has
been issued or is currently in effect against the offender.
3. The Violent Crimes Unit, under the supervision of the Violent Crimes Unit supervisor, shall
be responsible for preparing the case file for criminal prosecution.
1. The Professional Standards Section shall conduct an internal investigation upon receipt of
information that a sworn member of this Department has been involved in a domestic related
incident.
2. In cases where an arrest was not made, but sufficient concern exists, the Department may
conduct an independent administrative investigation. Administrative actions should be made
in a timely manner and should not be contingent on the anticipated outcome of the criminal
proceeding.
3. In cases where the sworn member is the victim, the Professional Standards Section is not
required to conduct an investigation unless ordered to do so by the Office of the Chief of
Police.
4. In instances where a sworn officer of the Little Rock Police Department is involved in a
domestic related incident in another jurisdiction, it shall be the responsibility of the
Professional Standards Section to contact the involved agency and report their findings to the
Office of the Chief of Police for determination of administrative action.
1. Any sworn member of this Department who has been served with any restraining order, no
contact order or order of protection (including a temporary order) or any order from a District,
Circuit, or Juvenile court, or any other court or learns that they are a defendant named in any
such order will immediately notify their supervisor.
2. Any sworn member who receives notice of any changes in status of any existing restraining
order or order of protection, including, but not limited to the modification or addition of
restrictions or an extension of the expiration date, will notify their immediate supervisor and
the Professional Standards Section, in writing, prior to their first scheduled tour of duty after
the incident.
3. Any sworn member of this Department who is involved in a domestic abuse related incident
which occurs inside or outside the jurisdiction of the Little Rock Police Department will
immediately report the incident to an on-duty supervisor. The supervisor will be responsible
for notifying the sworn member’s Division Commander and the Professional Standards
Section.
1. Any sworn member of this Department who witnesses or has firsthand knowledge of a
domestic violence related incident involving a sworn member of this Department as the
alleged suspect and who fails to officially report this information, will be subject to
disciplinary action up to and including termination.
2. Officers of this Department will be investigated and charged criminally if they engage in
activities such as stalking, surveillance, intimidation, or harassment of the victims or witnesses
in an attempt to interfere with investigations of other officers accused of domestic violence.
A. Many victims of domestic abuse feel trapped in violent relationships because they are unaware of the
resources available to help them or that domestic abuse is a crime. Also, the offenders may have
threatened further violence if the victim attempts to leave or seek assistance. Therefore, officers shall
provide the following assistance to victims, batterers, and, where appropriate, their children:
1. Explain options available to the victim including the prosecution process, ex-parte order of
protection, and in case of arrest, the follow-up procedures and ensuing criminal proceedings;
3. Inform all parties involved that the State will be pursuing charges and not the victim;
4. Secure medical treatment for victims, as needed, and insure the safety of any children;
a) Officers of this Department shall place a high priority on the appropriate placement
and overall safety of children involved in domestic related incidents.
5. Advise victims of the criminal nature of domestic violence, it’s potential for escalation, and
that help is available. Suggest what to do if the suspect or others threatens or otherwise
intimidates the victim.
6. Remain on the scene to preserve the peace as one person removes personal property as may be
necessary for departure only.
7. Provide the victim(s) with a Laura’s Card (LRPD Form #5410-03) which shall include the
following information;
c) Women and Children First (501-376-3219) for shelter, support, and consultation.
f) Contact information for other community and state programs for crime victims and
their families.
A. General.
1. Orders of protection are issued by the Circuit Court. Temporary orders may provide relief for
up to thirty days, and final orders may provide relief for a period ranging from ninety days up
to ten (10) years. In order to get a final (sometimes called “permanent”) order of protection, a
petition must be completed and an ex-parte hearing first held to determine if there is good
cause to issue a temporary order of protection prior to the hearing date (which must be
scheduled within 30 days). Once a temporary order is granted, a copy of the temporary order
must be personally serviced on the respondent advising of the hearing date for the final order
of protection.
2. An order of protection can restrain the abuser from contacting and harassing the victim in
person, by telephone, or even indirectly through someone else. It can order the respondent to
keep away from the victim’s resident, workplace and children’s school, and restrict him/her
from possessing firearms for the duration of the order. Child custody and support issues may
be addressed in orders of protection if the parties have children together. Orders of Protection
issued in any county in Arkansas are enforceable in every county of the state.
3. In addition to protective orders issued in Arkansas, protective orders issued out-of-state will
be enforced in Arkansas, provided the form of the order meets the “full faith and credit
requirements” (valid jurisdiction, reasonable notice and opportunity for a hearing on the face
of the order). Any protective order that meets these requirements is to be enforced as if it had
been issued in this state.
4. Act 995 of 1995, codified in Ark. Code. Ann. 12-12-215, requires the Arkansas Crime
Information Center (ACIC) to maintain a registry of all orders of protection and temporary
orders of protection issued by a state court or registered in the state. The court clerk provides
a copy of the orders to the sheriff or other law enforcement agency for immediate entry into
ACIC.
5. Restraining Orders: Orders issued by the Circuit Court, but only in the context of a divorce
proceeding. It is common for a restraining order to prohibit the parties from harassing each
other and also require both parties to protect the marital property interests during the time
preceding divorce.
a) Have the Communications Center employee contact the Sheriff’s office and confirm
that the court’s order has been properly served, is on file, and the conduct or contact
is prohibited;
8. Any officer receiving information that an order of protection has been issued, and that the
respondent may be in violation, will make an appropriate investigation and take such action as
may be necessary in its enforcement.
a) Upon notice that an order of protection is in effect, the officer will verify its existence
by contacting the Communications Center.
b) In the case of an ex-parte order of protection the officer will ensure that it has been
“served” on the respondent or that the respondent has otherwise acquired actual
knowledge of its existence before taking further action (i.e., notified by officers on a
prior occasion);
c) If the respondent does not have actual knowledge of the ex-parte order of protection
the officer will inform him/her of its existence, the substance of its contents, and the
consequences of violating the ex-parte order;
e) If there is probable cause to believe that the respondent has violated the terms of the
order, the officer will arrest the respondent and file an Incident Report;
f) Full Faith & Credit considerations will be extended to all orders issued outside the
jurisdiction of Pulaski County courts
XI. Training
A. The Major Crimes Division Commander shall be responsible for implementing a comprehensive
training program for employees of the Department on domestic violence. New officers must complete
twenty (20) hours of training in handling domestic violence and child abuse cases. In addition, training
will be made available to satisfy requests from the community. This shall include other law
enforcement agencies, schools, hospitals, courts, prosecutors, etc.
18. Federal stalking, domestic violence, immigration and gun control laws.
C. Additional Administrative Command/Supervisor training related to domestic violence will address the
following:
D. Employees will receive training on the topic of domestic violence on at least an annual basis. This
training may be scheduled during the employee’s forty (40) hour in-service training.
E. Departmental personnel may receive additional instruction on domestic abuse and stalking during roll
call training.
F. The Violent Crimes Unit shall collaborate with local domestic violence victim advocacy organizations,
coordinating councils, and state domestic violence coalitions in the development of domestic violence
training curriculum and may use local advocates in the training of officers.
G. This policy does not preclude the Violent Crimes Unit from providing additional training upon request
or when additional training would be in the best interest of the Department and its employees.
A. The purpose of this Order is to establish guidelines for community relations activities, assigned to
the Crime Prevention Unit and Community Oriented Police Unit.
B. This Department is committed to establishing close ties with and responding to the needs of the
community. The responsibility for achieving the Department's community relation’s objectives
shall be shared by all Department personnel. [CALEA 45.2.1b]
A. Formal community relations activities are hereby established, under the direction of the Crime
Prevention and the Community Oriented Police Units. Informal activities in community relations
shall be executed by all officers of the Department. [CALEA 45.2.1b]
B. The Crime Prevention Unit and COPP Unit shall be primarily responsible for executing functions
associated with establishing liaison with community organizations, schools, neighborhood groups,
communities and associations, including implementation of the School Resource Officer Program.
However, all units within the Department shall bear responsibility for achieving close ties and
community relations with these groups, as well. [CALEA 45.2.1a]
A. All police officers and members shall adhere to the intent of this Order and the Department's
commitment in maintaining and improving its police-community relations, through the use of:
1. Community relations;
2. Crime prevention;
8. Serving as liaison between the Police Department and community groups, neighborhoods
and schools, etc.; and [CALEA 45.2.1b]
9. All officers of this Department will engage in any activity that will enhance the
Department’s goal of employing the Community Oriented Policing Philosophy
throughout all Units/Divisions of the Department.
10. Any member of this Department receiving information from a citizen relevant to the use,
content, or need for crime prevention information will forward this information to the
Crime Prevention or COPP Units as appropriate. [CALEA 45.2.3]
C. All community relations programs and activities, conducted by the Crime Prevention and COPP
Units, will be documented and a report provided to the Chief of Police. Evaluating these programs
and activities will allow for monitoring of community-related needs, concerns or problems, to
ensure that this unit is effectively meeting Department and community concerns.
D. A quarterly report shall be prepared and submitted by the Crime Prevention and COPP Units, to
the Chief of Police. It will include, at a minimum, the following: [CALEA 45.2.2a-d]
3. A statement of recommended actions that address the identified concerns and problems.
E. The intent and commitment of this Department, through the activities of all members and
employees, will be that of corrective actions, and practices, to include change, in attitudes, which
may contribute towards reduction in community tensions and complaints.
A. Officers, assigned to perform community relations activities, shall serve as the liaison between the
Police Department and community organizations, groups and citizens. [CALEA 45.2.1a]
B. The establishment of community groups, where such groups do not exist, will be coordinated by
the Crime Prevention Unit or the Office of the Chief of Police. [CALEA 45.2.1h]
A. In order for the Little Rock Police Department to more effectively carry out its responsibilities to
the community, foster a closer working relationship with the citizens of Little Rock, and improve
agency practices, bearing on police-community relations, a comprehensive community relations
program/plan is established. This program shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. The School Resource Officer Program was implemented to assist the Little Rock School
District in providing a safe learning environment and to improve relationships between
law enforcement officers and today’s youth. The program also attempts to promote a
better understanding of the law enforcement officer’s role in society, while educating
students, parents, and school personnel, which will build a better community, while also
providing a role model in the educational system. All of these objectives should also help
lower the crime rate in the future. [CALEA 44.2.4a-d, 45.2.1a]
7. Provide feedback and identify training needs through input from citizens, from
consultations with those personnel, involved in internal investigations, as well as
conferences with supervisors. [CALEA 45.2.1g]
8. Identify potential problem locations, situations or individuals, within the scope of youth
activities, and recommend police patrol strategies.
10. Assist in publicizing the Department’s objectives, problems, and successes. [CALEA
45.2.1d]
11. Establish community crime prevention groups where needed. [CALEA 45.2.1h]
13. Convey information, transmitted from citizen groups, to the Department. [CALEA
45.2.1e, 45.2.3]
A. Community relations functions, performed by members of this Department, the Crime Prevention,
and COPP Units will include, but not be limited to:
1. Establishing liaison with formal community organizations and other community groups;
[CALEA 45.2.1a]
2. Informing all personnel that they are responsible for achieving the Department’s
community relations objectives; [CALEA 45.2.1b]
I. Purpose
A. The purpose of this General Order is to establish guidelines for the Little Rock Police Department, while
responding to major emergencies, disasters, large preplanned events or spontaneous lawful
protests/demonstrations. The Little Rock Police Department’s organizational philosophy is based on
effective coordination and containment, transparent and timely communication, and if required, the
appropriate levels of control being utilized. The Little Rock Police Department Emergency Operations Plan
will focus on three (3) distinct facets of approach/operation required during any response: Genesis and
initial response, an investigation of the event, and responding to calls for service and investigations within
the entire city.
B. This General Order is designed to establish procedures for the handling of unusually serious incidents,
which will require multiple police unit responses and/or coordination of responses with other city
departments, cities, state, or federal units or agencies. It is intended to facilitate the accomplishment of the
mission assigned to the Department by the City of Little Rock Emergency Operations Plan.
C. The General Order will establish guidelines for the implementation and utilization of the Incident Command
System (ICS) in response to large-scale unusual occurrences. The Incident Command System will aid in the
coordination of other agencies in response to an actual incident and is modeled in accordance with the
FEMA incident management approach.
II. Responsibilities
A. All members of the Little Rock Police Department will respond to incidents in a manner consistent with the
guidelines of this General Order. All members should be aware that inaction may result in an escalation of
the incident.
B. The City of Little Rock Emergency Operations Plan will be distributed to all sworn personnel with the rank
of Captain and above. These personnel will familiarize themselves with the plan and have it available for
reference in the event of a major emergency.
D. The Chief of Police will designate a Homeland Security Advisor who will serve as the Department’s
Emergency Operations Planning Officer. He will be responsible for coordinating the planning function for
response to critical incidents and unusual occurrences. He will report to the Chief of Police or his/her
designee.
E. The Homeland Security Advisor will coordinate an annual rehearsal of the Department’s mobilization
procedure.
A. The following guidelines will be utilized in determining the degree of Department mobilization required to
handle an emergency situation.
1. Stage I Alert: - An unusual incident which could be controlled by on-duty Field Services Division
personnel and leave sufficient manpower to provide police services.
2. Stage II Alert: - An incident of such proportion that all available on-duty personnel not required to
provide other emergency services will be mobilized to establish immediate control of a situation,
and which may require temporary modification of the Department’s organizational structure.
3. Stage III Alert: - An incident which threatens the safety of the City to such an extent that, in the
opinion of the Chief of Police or his/her representative, it is necessary to mobilize the resources of
the Department and/or request the assistance of other city departments and/or outside agencies (i.e.
other law enforcement agencies, National Guard, etc.). Requests for the Arkansas National Guard
and the Arkansas State Police should be made through the City Emergency Operations Center to
the appropriate state agency. In any incident approaching such magnitude that the need for
extensive police response is obvious (i.e. riots, major disasters, etc.) and telephone contact is not
possible, it shall be the duty of all officers, including off-duty, to report, without notification, to
his/her Division of assignment.
A. The Department may have three separate Command Centers in operation during an alert. The Emergency
Operations Center and the Department Command Center may be activated for a Stage II or III alert, or at
the direction of the Chief of Police:
1. The Incident Command Post, staffed by the Assistant Chief of Police – Field Services Bureau, the
affected Field Services Division Commander, the Special Operations Division Commander,
Headquarters Division designee, and support personnel, normally located at or very near the
actual incident;
2. The City Emergency Operations Center (EOC), staffed by the Chief of Police, the Assistant Chief
of Police – Executive Bureau, the Homeland Security Advisor and support personnel, normally
located in the Emergency Operations Center, 7000 Murray Street, Little Rock, Arkansas. In an
effort to ensure the effectiveness and increase the synergy necessary to monitor, direct resources
and handle the event, it is recommended that the Mayor, City Manager, Fire Chief (or designee),
MEMS Director, Director of Housing and Neighborhood Programs, Neighborhood Programs,
Director of Public Works and Fleet Service Manager, and ADEM and National Guard Command
personnel (if applicable) also report to the City EOC;
3. The Department Command Center, staffed by the, Assistant Chief of Police, Investigative Bureau,
Major Crimes Division Commander, Special Investigations Division Commander, Records and
Support Division Commander and other additional support personnel normally located at 700 W.
Markham, Little Rock, Arkansas.
V. Implementation
A. This Incident Command System and/or Emergency Operation Plan may be implemented during the
following types of civil disturbances or disasters:
1. Riots;
3. Strikes;
5. Any other type of civil disorder or disaster that threatens human life or property.
A. Divisional Rosters
1. Each Division will prepare and maintain an up-to-date Special Call-Out Procedure - Emergency
(S.C.O.P.E.) Plan, which lists the name, address, and telephone numbers of each of its members.
All supervisory personnel shall retain a copy of their Division’s S.C.O.P.E. Plan at their homes and
offices for ready use.
2. Division S.C.O.P.E. Plans shall be updated and a copy forwarded to the Homeland Security
Advisor and the Communications Center by the 10th of each month. A copy of these updates shall
be maintained with the Desk Officer.
3. Each Field Services Division shall assign at least two (2) officers as drivers for the Mobile
Command Vehicle. These officers will be trained by the Little Rock Police Department Training
Division on proper driving and setup procedures of the Mobile Command Vehicle. A list of all
drivers and their contact numbers will be forwarded to the Homeland Security Advisor on a
quarterly basis. The Homeland Security Advisor will maintain an up to date Mobile Command
Vehicle Call-Out List, which will be provided to the Communications Section on a quarterly basis.
B. When an incident necessitating a Stage I Alert occurs, the affected on-duty Shift Commander will assume
command and evaluate the incident to determine if ICS is needed to initiate the level of mobilization
necessary to control the incident. The Shift Commander will be responsible for making staff notifications at
his/her discretion.
C. Whenever an incident appears to necessitate a Stage II or III Alert, the on-duty Shift Commander shall
immediately notify the Chief of Police, the Assistant Chief of Police – Investigative Bureau, Homeland
Security Advisor, Assistant Chief of Police - Field Services Bureau, Assistant Chief of Police - Executive
Bureau and the appropriate Field Services Division Commander and advise them of the situation. The
ranking commander available shall determine what level of mobilization may be appropriate and direct that
the mobilization procedure be implemented.
2. Division Commanders will ensure that all the necessary personnel under their command are
alerted, and will direct them to report for duty to a specified location.
3. In the event of a Stage II or III alert, the on-duty Shift Commander shall contact the Communications
Section and have the Mobile Command Vehicle mobilized. The Communications Section shall utilize the
Mobile Command Vehicle Call-Out List to dispatch a qualified vehicle operator, the Information
Technology Lieutenant and the On-Call Information Technology Technician. The Operator will retrieve the
Mobile Command Vehicle and transport it to the location designated by the Incident Commander.
4. Each member notified shall immediately report to the designated location, properly equipped and prepared
to perform police duties.
5. Members unable to respond to the designated location due to road or bridge damage or other obstruction,
shall respond to the nearest available Field Services Division and perform such duties, as assigned by the
on-scene commander. When this occurs, the member shall contact the supervisor who requested his/her
mobilization, and shall advise him/her of the alternative action.
6. Supervisors shall maintain a record of members contacted with mobilization instructions. A copy of this
record will be forwarded to their Division Commander.
7. Supervisors shall maintain a roster of all officers who report to them for assignment in order to coordinate
personnel deployment and to subsequently account for the manpower utilized. A copy of this roster will be
forwarded to their Division Commander.
1. In any incident approaching such magnitude that the need for extensive police response is obvious (i.e.
riots, major disasters, etc.) and telephone contact is not possible, it shall be the duty of each officer to
report, without notification, to his/her Division of assignment.
2. If any member, reporting for duty without notification, cannot reach the Division of his/her assignment,
he/she shall respond to the nearest available Field Services Division and perform such duties as may be
assigned by the on-scene commander.
E. Demobilization - At the completion of any incident requiring mobilization, the Chief of Police or his/her designee
will determine the manpower requirements for post-incident duty and direct that surplus personnel be released.
1. Officers released from duty shall complete any required reports and check out with their incident supervisor
before going off-duty.
2. Officers who remain on extended duty shall be released by their incident supervisors at the completion of
their assignments.
3. Division Commanders shall submit a record, using National Incident Management System (NIMS) Incident
Command System (ICS) forms, of the names of officers assigned to them during the incident, including the
times they reported to and were released from duty. These records shall be delivered to the Incident
Commander after the incident is ended. The Financial Services Manager will adequately assess the
manpower expenditure.
A. Incident Command should be established whenever an incident requires the response of multiple police units to a
Stage I, II, or III Alert. Incident Command will be established in accordance with the Department’s chain-of-
command structure.
B. Command Structure
1. The operational structure of the Police Department may be modified during Emergency Operations.
Whenever a police incident requires the establishment of Incident Command, the Departmental order of
succession for line control of the incident will be as follows:
a) Chief of Police;
b) Assistant Chief of Police – Executive Bureau and the Homeland Security Advisor;
C. Assuming Command
1. In the initial stages of an emergency incident investigation, the first officer on the scene (senior officer if
more than one officer arrives simultaneously) shall assume and retain Incident Command, until relieved by
a supervisor (Sergeant) or command-level officer (Lieutenant or above).
2. The modification of the Department’s organizational structure for line control during an emergency
situation does not negate the Department’s established chain-of-command. This means that any command
level officer in the Department’s normal chain-of-command may assume command and responsibility for
police response at any time during the police emergency.
3. The appearance or mere presence of a command-level officer at the scene of a police incident shall not
indicate his/her assumption of command. However, should this command-level officer issue orders or direct
the activities of personnel, he/she has indicated the assumption of Incident Command and must follow the
procedures outlined in this General Order.
a) If this command-level officer wishes to remain at the scene in an advisory capacity to the Incident
Commander, he/she must not issue orders or direct the activities of police personnel.
b) If the Incident Commander is unsure of the status of a command-level officer on the scene, he/she
should ask the command-level officer directly if he/she has assumed command, so that no
confusion exists.
1. When a member of the Command Staff personally appoints an Incident Commander, this officer will
normally be relieved of command by the Chief of Police or the Command Staff member who appointed the
Incident Commander.
2. The Incident Commander, regardless of rank, shall have complete authority and responsibility for
conducting the field operations of the Police Department for the duration of the emergency, until properly
relieved.
3. All personnel assisting in or assigned to the involved area shall be subjected to the direct command and
supervision of the Incident Commander.
1. After an emergency operation involving a major crime scene has been resolved and the Incident
Commander decides that the emergency has passed, the on-scene command of the incident may be passed to
the Major Crimes Division for further investigation, if necessary.
2. A supervisory officer of the Major Crimes Division shall then assume Incident Command and direct the
follow-up investigation.
3. All personnel from other Divisions will continue to assist as needed, obeying orders and directives given by
the Major Crimes Division supervisor (Incident Commander), and will remain on their assignments until
properly relieved by that Incident Commander.
A. When a Stage I Alert has been declared, officers shall assume the following basic responsibilities:
1. First Officer at the Scene - The first officer at the scene of a major incident that requires a large and rapid
response of police units shall:
a) Assume and retain Incident Command until properly relieved by a superior officer;
c) Request a supervisor and any other assistance he deems necessary (i.e. additional units, fire
department personnel, medical personnel, tow truck).
2. First Supervisor at the Scene - The first supervisor at the scene of a major incident that requires a large and
rapid response, shall:
d) Request the necessary resources to carry out his/her plan of action (i.e. additional manpower,
special equipment).
3. The Shift Commander at the scene of the incident shall assess the incident to determine if it is of a
magnitude that warrants escalation to a Stage II or III Alert.
a) If a Stage I Alert, he/she will assume Incident Command and ensure the Departmental manpower
and resources necessary to control the situation have been requested. At the conclusion of the
incident, he/she will submit a detailed After Action Report through the chain of command to the
Chief of Police and forward a copy to the Homeland Security Advisor.
A. Whenever the decision is made to move from a Stage I to a Stage II Alert, the Incident Commander shall:
1. Ensure that the Chief of Police, Assistant Chief of Police – Investigative Bureau, Assistant Chief of
Police - Field Services Bureau, Assistant Chief of Police - Executive Bureau and the Homeland
Security Advisor are notified;
2. Direct all field units in the involved area to switch to a common frequency. (This frequency will
usually be designated by the highest ranking supervisor in Communications;
3. Direct the Communications Center telephone clerks to screen all calls so that units are only
dispatched to emergency incidents;
4. If not on the scene, ensure that a Field Services Division Commander, preferably from the Division
of occurrence, responds to the scene; and,
5. Coordinate the mobilization of all on-duty personnel by notifying the Homeland Security Advisor
or his/her designee.
B. On-duty, non-uniformed members shall report in person to their supervisors. These supervisory officers
shall prepare a roster of available personnel. A copy of this record will be forwarded to their Division
Commander and the Homeland Security Advisor.
A. Whenever the Chief of Police or his/her representative declares a Stage III Alert:
1. The Homeland Security Advisor shall notify the Assistant Chief of Police – Investigative Bureau,
Assistant Chief of Police - Field Services Bureau, Assistant Chief of Police - Executive Bureau and
all Division Commanders, or their designees, to activate their S.C.O.P.E. Plans.
2. The Public Affairs Office will be utilized to ensure radio and television stations are requested to
periodically broadcast that off-duty officers are to report for assignment and that calls for service
will be prioritized and that response times may be affected.
a) The Public Affairs Lieutenant will respond to the City Emergency Operations Center
(EOC) and develop specific times for the media to be briefed.
b) The Crime Stopper Officer will respond to the Incident Command Post and develop
specific times for the media to brief.
c) The Crime Prevention Coordinator will respond to the Department Command Center and
develop specific times for the media brief. F.O.I. Sergeants will also respond to the
Department Command Center and support the Assistant Chief of Police Investigative
Bureau and the Major Crimes Division Commander.
3. All off-duty members who have not been contacted through the S.C.O.P.E. Plan have the
responsibility to report, without notification, when they become aware of such an emergency
situation.
4. Officers on an approved extended leave have the responsibility to contact the Department as soon as
possible. Officers on Extended Leave and working in a restricted duty assignment will be assigned to the
Communications Center for the duration of the event.
A. In a law enforcement event, the Chief of Police or his/her representative shall serve as the Law Enforcement
Coordinator and will be responsible for:
1. The issuance of appropriate instructions for the purpose of ensuring coordinated, effective deployment of
personnel and equipment for control of the incident, and for providing effective police services to the
remainder of the City;
2. The monitoring of police activities, as well as the coordination of the entire organization with outside
agencies;
3. Informing other authorities (i.e. City Emergency Control Group, other agency heads, etc.) of police
activities upon request or when appropriate;
4. The constant evaluation of incoming information in order to keep apprised of the scope and direction of the
incident;
5. Requesting any necessary assistance from City Departments, other police agencies, and State and/or Federal
Agencies;
7. Maintain ongoing media relations, through the Public Affairs Office; and,
B. Assistant Chief of Police – Executive Bureau and the Homeland Security Advisor shall be responsible to:
1. Respond to the City Emergency Operations Center, and assist in coordinating the analysis of incoming
intelligence;
2. Keep a current account of personnel assigned to the incident area and assist the Department Command
Center in planning for and meeting the personnel and logistical needs of the Incident Commander;
3. Serve as the Incident Recorder, and be responsible for compiling an overall chronological history of the
incident, in writing, by monitoring all related telephone and police radio communications;
5. Provide auxiliary services, personnel, equipment, and supplies, as required to support field operations; and,
6. Act as liaisons for outside agencies, including courts and the Prosecuting Attorney’s Office.
C. Assistant Chief of Police – Field Services Bureau, affected Field Services Division Commander, Special Operations
Division Commander and Headquarters Division designee shall be responsible to:
2. Order the use of special equipment (if time does not permit authorization through the Chief of Police);
3. Estimate the immediate and future equipment and manpower needs, so that off-duty personnel and other
agencies can be mobilized, if necessary (personnel assigned to the Headquarters Division shall be utilized to
work from the Command Post and may be supplemented from any other division, with approval from the
Chief of Police or his/her designee, except those personnel assigned to the Department Emergency
Operations Center);
4. Maintain situation maps and activity logs encompassing the emergency area, and prepare oral and/or written
status reports for the Chief of Police or his/her representative;
5. Establish a Department Staging Area to coordinate personnel and equipment for effective control of the
incident;
6. Establish a traffic control plan, to include detour routes, removal of vehicles, ingress and egress routes,
emergency vehicle routes, etc.; Establish crowd control and area isolation, if necessary;
8. Establish interior patrol to provide general law enforcement and the prevention of looting;
9. Collect and disseminate information regarding dangerous and/or damaged areas and the traffic capabilities
of the streets;
11. Establish a first-aid station for police and support personnel; and,
D. Assistant Chief of Police – Investigative Bureau, Major Crimes Division Commander, Special Investigations
Division Commander, and Records and Support Division Commander shall be responsible to:
1. Respond to the Department Command Center, and assist in coordinating the analysis of incoming
intelligence;
4 Maintain constant communications with the Field Command Post and the City Emergency Operations
Center;
5. Review traffic control plans in affected areas based upon recommendations of Field Services Division
Commanders.
1. Respond to the Department Command Center, and assist in monitoring police activities and the evaluation of
incoming information, unless directed otherwise by the Chief of Police;
3. Maintain constant communications with the Field Command Post and the City Emergency Operations Center;
4. Review traffic control plans in the stricken areas, based on the recommendations of the Field Services Division
Commanders;
6. Ensure that staffing of Major Crimes personnel is sufficient for investigation of the duration of the event and for
investigation requests/requirements in the other divisions.
F. Field Services Division Commanders, not involved in the incident Division of occurrence, will have command over the
regular police activities within their areas of responsibility to ensure that normal patrol functions are accomplished.
1. Respond to the Incident Command Post and ensure that all Memorandums of Agreement (MOA) or Memorandums
of Understanding (MOU) that have been developed between other city departments and or civic organizations are
activated involving:
g) Ensure that the Departmental S.C.O.P.E. plan call-out is exercised at minimum annually
h) Prepare a memorandum to the Office of the Chief of Police identifying any discrepancies in the annual
S.C.O.P.E. plan and suggestion(s) for improvement within 30 days
1. Have primary responsibility for the implementation of the Department’s mass arrest and prisoner first aid
operations in accordance with established procedures;
2. Provide Training building security and video/photograph recording teams during mass arrests;
3. Arrange for the emergency vehicle repair and transportation needs of the Department, or other duties at the
direction of the Training Division Commander or the Assistant Chief of Police - Executive Bureau;
a) Have the responsibility to equip and train all sworn personnel in line operations, riot control
tactics.
b) NIMS ICS 100, 200, 700, 701, 702, 703, 800 and ICS 300 & 400 training will be administered to
all Basic Recruits and the appropriate NIMS training for supervisors selected for specific staff
positions in the Incident Command Post will be tailored for supervisory In-Service.
B. The Professional Standards Section will provide adequate citizen complaint accessibility as necessary. Professional
Standards personnel may be assigned by the Chief of Police any other duties necessary for the successful completion
of the overall mission.
C. The Public Affairs Office will provide press liaison in cooperation with the Chief of Police from the various
command center locations. The PAO should respond quickly to rumors and misinformation by disseminating
accurate and timely information to media outlets.
D. The Major Crimes Division will be assigned to process prisoners arrested for serious crimes, to assist authorities in
identification of the dead and damage assessment, and other duties as directed.
1. Ensure that staffing of Major Crimes personnel is sufficient for investigation of the duration of the event
and for investigation requests/requirements in the other divisions.
1. Provide for the physical security of the main police headquarters complex, Communications Center, and
essential city offices.
F. Special Investigations Division personnel will be assigned to intelligence-gathering tasks or other duties at the
direction of the Special Investigations Division Commander or the Assistant Chief of Police – Investigative Bureau.
1. Respond to the Department Command Center, and assist in monitoring police activities and the evaluation
of incoming information, unless directed otherwise by the Chief of Police;
3. Coordinate the viewing, deployment, and retention of data for the City Wide Camera system in affected
areas.
4. Assist any officer(s) and family, involved in high profile incidents, with temporary housing, protection, and
due process of law.
1. The Special Events Lieutenant, Sergeant, and two officers will be assigned to the Department Command
Center.
2. Special Operations Units (K-9, SRO, Motorcycles) will be utilized at the incident scene in either a riot
control capacity, or as identified by the Incident Commander.
3. The Special Response Unit may be utilized in either a riot-control capacity, or as an element of the City’s
Disaster Urban Search and Rescue Team.
4. The Special Weapons and Tactics (SWAT) Unit may be deployed to provide cover for field units. The
manner of their deployment should not be such that the Unit is unable to be quickly redeployed to meet
special threats as they arise.
H. Field Services Division personnel shall monitor and enforce all regular police activities within their areas of
responsibility to ensure that normal patrol functions are accomplished.
I. Sergeants assigned to field duty shall normally command a squad of no more than seven officers and shall report
directly to the Incident Command Post for duty assignment.
A. Personnel assigned to the Incident Command Post shall provide the following:
2. Establishment of a communications link with the Emergency Operations Center and the Department
Command Center.
a) Safety Officer – will be responsible for the overall safety of emergency responders assigned to the
incident and often acts as an advisor to the IC. See addendum for duties
b) Liaison Officer - provides in-depth contact with staff from outside agencies and may step in for the
IC during busy moments at and around the command post but often operates very near, but not
within, the command post. See addendum for duties
c) Information Officer – The Crime Stopper Officer or designee will respond to the Incident
Command Post and develop specific times to brief the media with current, accurate, and authorized
information about the emergency. See addendum for duties
d) Operations Officer – is responsible for managing and performing all actions on scene. Operations
personnel may perform a wide variety of on-scene tasks including fighting fire, rescuing and
treating victims, managing hazardous materials, and anything else necessary and practical to
resolve the emergency. See addendum for duties
f) Logistics Officer - manages procurement and distribution of assets related to the incident. See
addendum for duties
g) Finance Officer - deployed at large incidents where financial support, reimbursement, and/or
administrative services are needed. See addendum
1. Incident Command Post operations shall include facilitating the Incident Commander’s duties and
responsibilities, as follows:
A. The Incident Commander, at the scene of a major police incident, shall establish a Field Communications Post
whenever one of the following conditions exists:
1. When the number of personnel or units assigned to the incident is large enough that coordination through a
Field Communications Post is necessary.
2. When the incident is of such severity that constant communication with the Department Command Center is
desirable.
B. The Field Communications Post should be established either at or near the Incident Command Post, to enable secure
telephone contact between the Incident Command Post and the Department Command Center.
C. Whenever a Field Communications Post is established, the Chief Dispatcher will be notified immediately. The
Communications Center on-duty Supervisor shall allocate the frequency (or frequencies) necessary for handling the
incident, and make the necessary adjustments in assigning frequencies for policing the remainder of the City.
D. A Field Communications Officer shall be assigned by the Incident Commander to remain at the Field
Communications Post, and shall be constantly available for communications.
A. Staging Areas
1. The Incident Commander may elect to establish a Staging Area. The location of such staging area
will normally be near or adjacent to the Incident Command Post, but may be located elsewhere, as
site availability, security, accessibility, or other factors may dictate.
d) Providing a secure area for parking of law enforcement personnel’s private vehicles.
1. The Department Staging Area will normally be activated only during a Stage II or III Alert, or at
the discretion of the Chief of Police or his/her representative. The Department Staging Area will be
located at the designated Departmental facility or at any other site, selected by the Chief of Police
or his/her representative.
2. The mission of the Department Staging Area is to provide a central location for:
a) The personnel function of accounting and processing incoming and relieved members;
A. Effective command and control are dependent upon prompt, accurate, and complete information. During
Emergency Operations or large-scale occurrences, all personnel shall have a primary responsibility to
communicate all pertinent information upward to the next higher level of authority.
B. Situation Reports - A periodic Situation Report shall include the following information:
C. Situation Reports may be included on a Little Rock Police Department Officer’s Report Form (5600-02)
and shall be forwarded and/or communicated to the Department Command Center, at appropriate intervals,
by the Incident Commander. Situation Reports may be communicated by computer link-up, when available,
and a copy of that communication retained by the Incident Commander.
D. After Action Report - At the conclusion of every incident in which ICS is implemented, Homeland Security
Advisor shall ensure that a comprehensive after action report is completed and forwarded to the Office of
the Chief of Police within ten (10) business days. The After Action Report shall detail the ICS protocol and
address any deficiencies. The Homeland Security Advisor shall be responsible for the completion of a
documented analysis of ICS incidents as well as all interagency training and rehearsals triennially.
E. Units having equipment designated for use in emergency operations will inspect that equipment for
operational readiness, and retain documentation of that readiness inspection.
A. In accordance with the City Emergency Operations Plan, the City Manager may declare a state of disaster
and activate the Little Rock Disaster Urban Search and Rescue Team.
B. The Special Response Unit (SRU), acting under the command of the SRU Lieutenant and the oversight of
the affected assigned Field Services Division Commander, will provide the police response portion of the
Little Rock Disaster Urban Search and Rescue Team.
C. The City of Little Rock Emergency Control Group, operating from the Emergency Operations Center, will
coordinate the activities of the various City Departments (i.e. fire, engineering, police, etc.) providing
search and rescue personnel and equipment.
D. The Special Response Unit will provide that portion of the search and rescue function which best suits its
training and equipment (i.e. crowd control, protective services, etc.).
E. The Law Enforcement Coordinator (i.e. Chief of Police) will coordinate the activities of the Special
Response Unit with the needs identified by the Emergency Control Group.
A. The use of outside agencies will be consistent with state and federal laws, the City of Little Rock
Emergency Operations Plan, and any mutual aid agreement that may be in force.
1. Requests for Arkansas State Police support should be made through the City Emergency
Operations Center to the State Office of Emergency Services.
2. Upon initiation of a Stage II or III Alert, the Chief of Police or his/her representative may confer
with the ranking on-duty officer of the Arkansas State Police to coordinate the assistance to be
provided by Arkansas State Police personnel.
1. In the event the Arkansas National Guard is requested, the official request will be made by the
chief executive officer of the City of Little Rock (i.e. the Mayor).
2. The request will be made through the State Office of Emergency Services, who will provide liaison
between the City of Little Rock and the Governor’s Office.
3. Upon making his/her decision, the Governor may have the State Office of Emergency Services
contact the Mayor or the Governor may contact the Mayor himself/herself.
4. When National Guard troops are assigned to an area within the City for the purpose of assisting in
the preservation of law and order and/or the protection of life and property, they will be under the
command of, and directly responsible to, their military commanders. The authority of the Chief of
Police or any other Department Commanders will not extend to such troops. However, the Chief of
Police or his/her representative will advise the military commanders as to the specific needs of the
City, and recommend areas in which the military can most appropriately be used in support of the
civil authorities to restore order. National Guard personnel will be utilized for support roles and
not actively engaged in riot control measure at the scene. Support roles include but are not limited
to: establishing an emergency operations center for intelligence, social media and technical
support; providing security for identified critical buildings and or/infrastructure; processing and
security of prisoners and other duties as approved by the Military Commanders.
1. In case of intervention by Federal troops, the military commander will cooperate to the fullest
possible extent with the Governor, or other civil authorities and forces, unless such cooperation
interferes with the accomplishment of his/her Federal mission.
2. Military personnel assigned to a problem area may recognize the authority of the Chief of Police,
and assist in mutually restoring the area to normalcy; or, if circumstances warrant, sole command
of the area may be assumed by the military commander.
1. Mutual Aid will be requested in accordance with Arkansas Statute, 12-75-119 Statewide Mutual
Aid System.
2. Requests for aid from the Little Rock Police Department shall be made by the Chief of Police or
his/her designee.
3. Should another agency request aid outside business hours, the Shift Commander will be
responsible for LRPD response. Notification will be made up the chain as soon as possible. The
Office of the Chief of Police will make notification to the City Manager.
A. The Homeland Security Advisor will coordinate an annual training exercise involving departmental
personnel and will assist the Training Division to ensure that agency personnel are trained and updated as
needed in the Incident Command System.
B. Department personnel will participate annually in a training exercise which may include a tabletop, actual
exercise, or exercises involving multiple agencies.
1. A documented evaluation of the training will be completed by the ranking supervisor attending the
exercise.
2. A copy of the evaluation shall be forwarded to the Homeland Security Advisor for inclusion in
his/her triennial analysis.
2. Each Division Commander will assign officers to be trained as drivers for the Mobile Command
Vehicle. The Little Rock Police Department Training Division will be responsible for driver
training and will ensure that each assigned officer has an understanding of the operation and set-up
of the Mobile Command Vehicle.
C. All Sworn Officers of the Little Rock Police Department will receive NIMS Certification for first
responders, which will be facilitated by the Training Division.
A. All information related to suspicious incidents and criminal intelligence relating to criminal and homeland
security will be documented and immediately forwarded to the Special Investigations Division Intelligence
Unit, who will investigate and forward the information to the FBI Joint Terrorism Task Force (JTTF).
B. The Special Investigations Division Intelligence Unit will maintain relationships with outside agencies for
the purpose of exchanging information relating to suspected acts of terrorism.
C. The Special Investigations Division Intelligence Unit will provide awareness information and contact
information for reporting suspected terroristic acts by the public.
I. General
A. The purpose of this Order is to establish procedures for handling stolen and recovered motor
vehicles and other vehicle related offenses.
B. “Vehicle” means any craft or device self propelled, designed for transportation of people or
property across land, water, or through the air (A.C.A. § 5-36-101).
C. All stolen vehicle reports will be completed by the Communications Division after the information
is verified by a police officer.
II. Procedure
2. The officer will verify all pertinent information pertaining to the person and vehicle.
4. The officer will then call the Communications Center and supply them with the
information needed to generate a police report.
2. After information is received from the officer, Communications operators will conduct a
preliminary investigation to determine the status of the reported vehicle. The investigation
will include:
c) The Communications operator will call the contract wrecker companies and
city impound lot to determine if the vehicle has been impounded. The
Communications operator will determine the location of impoundment
(contract wrecker lot or City impound lot) where the vehicle can be located
and the location from where it was towed. When describing the vehicle, the
Vehicle Identification Number will be used, if known.
d) Check the repossession log to determine if the vehicle had been repossessed.
e) Check private property tow log to determine if vehicle has been towed.
3. Inform the complainant that an Attempt to Locate (ATL) report will be filed if:
a) The vehicle license or VIN are not available. Instruct the complainant to call
Communications and provide those numbers as soon as possible.
b) The vehicle is not stolen but is only being driven without the consent of the
owner. The complainant will be instructed to obtain a warrant for the
driver’s arrest and contact the appropriate Special Assignment Detective
Unit.
c) The preliminary investigation does not clearly indicate the vehicle is stolen
or being driven without owner’s consent. The report will be forwarded to
the Special Assignment Detective Unit for additional investigation and
determination of the vehicle status.
6. Enter the vehicle into the local and NCIC systems and forward to the Records Technician
for additional processing.
1. A field officer or detective who becomes aware that a motor vehicle has been stolen shall:
f) If the vehicle is stolen during the commission of another offense the incident
type shall reflect the original incident type and theft of property (i.e.
burglary/theft of property, aggravated robbery/theft of property.
2. A field officer or detective who becomes aware of circumstances that would indicate that
a motor vehicle reported as Driving Without Owner’s Consent will not be returned to its
owner shall:
3. Communications Center personnel that receive a supplement report changing the status of
a vehicle from Driving Without Owner’s Consent to stolen shall:
a) Check the impound lot to determine if the vehicle has been impounded.
b) Check the Repossession and Private Tow logs to determine if the vehicle
has been repossessed or has been towed from private property.
c) After all checks have been made, the Communications Center personnel will
verify that the vehicle is in the local system, enter the vehicle into the State,
N.C.I.C. system and give a broadcast to all officers.
1. Communications Center Personnel are generally responsible for taking Driving Without
Owner’s Consent (DWOC) reports. “Driving Without Owner’s Consent” as defined by
this Order shall mean any person who drives a vehicle, not his/her own, without consent
of the owner, with intent to temporarily deprive the owner of his/her possession of the
vehicle, without intent to steal the vehicle. Comparable State Statute A.C.A.5-36-108.
a) If a victim comes to any police facility, the Desk Officer, or other available
officer, will make a DWOC report as appropriate.
2. Procedure
a) Ask the caller if they are the owner of the vehicle. If the caller is not the
owner, take the report, find out who the owner is, and list both persons on
the report. Indicate on the report why a person other than the owner is
making the report.
b) Ask the caller if the person who has the vehicle had permission to drive it.
If the totality of the circumstances indicate the vehicle will not be returned,
it then becomes a stolen vehicle.
c) Ask the caller if there is a possibility that the person will return the vehicle
within 72 hours.
A. Reported and recovered in City - Officers or detectives in the field who recover a motor vehicle
which was reported stolen in our jurisdiction shall:
1. Request Communications notify the owner of the vehicle’s recovery to determine if the
owner wishes to pick up the vehicle at the scene or have the officer store it. The officer
should advise Communications of the vehicle’s condition and suitability for operation.
2. Contact the Field Services Division detective to determine their desire to meet the owner
at the scene or at a later time. A Field Supervisor will make a determination if Detectives
and/or Crime Scene personnel should be requested to respond for processing or whether
the vehicle should be held for processing at a later time.
3. Obtain proper identification from the person who picks up the vehicle, if storage is not
required. Store the vehicle according to guidelines provided in Departmental General
Orders.
4. Obtain information from the secondary radio operator concerning the original stolen
report to generate a supplemental report for the vehicle’s recovery.
a) Document in the supplement narrative who the vehicle was released to,
location where the vehicle was recovered, condition when recovered, and
list any obvious missing parts.
b) If the vehicle was taken in a robbery or burglary, the type incident on the
Supplement Report should reflect this, not auto theft or stolen auto.
5. The recovering officer or detective shall call communications with the necessary
information to complete a supplement report for deletion. Facsimile (FAX) transmissions
will not be accepted.
6. If the recovering officer or detective personally completes the supplement for deletion, he
or she shall deliver the supplement to Communications prior to the end of his/her shift.
B. Other agency stolen vehicles recovered in City - When an officer or detective in the field recovers
a motor vehicle stolen from another jurisdiction, he/she shall:
1. Inform the secondary radio operator of the vehicle’s condition and request appropriate
computer generated numbers identifying the stolen vehicle recovery.
2. Request the secondary radio operator to contact the reporting agency by computer
terminal to confirm stolen status, storage instructions, date of theft, and agency case
number.
3. Complete an Offense Report titled “Other Agency Stolen” including the information
received from the reporting agency.
4. Submit the report to a supervisor for approval. The report is not taken to
Communications.
A. It is the policy of this Department that owners of recovered stolen vehicles will be notified as soon
as possible.
B. Procedure - In order to reduce errors, potential cost and embarrassment to the Department, officers
that recover stolen vehicles shall:
2. Document contact or the inability to contact the owner or the reporting agency in the
supplemental report narrative, noting both the date/time and number of attempts made.
3. Annotate any storage report or towing company paperwork to show whether the owner or
reporting agency was or was not notified.
4. A copy of the supplement report will be delivered or faxed to the appropriate Special
Assignments Detective Unit. Available detective personnel will continue to attempt to
notify the owner.
5. The City Impound Lot has agreed to supply the Department with a daily storage log,
reflecting all vehicles towed at police request during the last 24 hours. All investigators
having cases involving stolen vehicles will check the vehicle impound log in the Field
Services Divisions detective offices to see if the vehicle has been impounded.
6. Daily storage reports will be delivered to the desk officer who will forward the reports to
the appropriate Special Assignments Detective Unit. The desk officer will also run the
registration checks on the stolen vehicles and provide a printout to the towing company
(as required by ACA 27-50-1206).
7. The Records Technician will pick up stolen reports daily (except weekends) from
Communications. Two copies of the stolen reports and stolen supplements will be made.
One set of reports will be delivered to the Special Assignments Detective Unit. The other
set, without supplements, will be delivered to the Crime Analysis Unit.
8. The Records Section will make copies of Driving Without Owner’s Consent, Abandoned
Vehicles, and vehicles impounded during arrest reports. Those copies will be forwarded
to the Impound Lot.
9. The Special Assignments Unit Detective assigned to the investigation will have the final
responsibility to notify vehicle owners. In order to ensure a minimum number of errors,
the detective shall check on a daily basis:
c) Case assignment log for any other owners not yet notified; and,
10. Every reasonable effort shall be made to notify owners of recovered vehicles and
reporting agencies to include telephone calls, NLETS messages, letters or hand delivered
messages.
2. Towing and storage fees of vehicles which were towed in error by the authority of a Little
Rock Police Officer;
3. The vehicle owner shall be responsible for towing and storage fees in all other cases;
4. Disputes over towing or storage fees will be directed to the Division Commander, of the
involved division for a recommendation. The Bureau Commander will make a final
decision as to the disposition of the disputed fees.
I. General
A. The City of Little Rock is committed to the development, implementation, and continuation of
appropriate victim/witness services. It is the desire of our agency to develop a better rapport
between law enforcement professionals and those persons within our society, who have been
directly affected by crime. By so doing, we help to ensure that a witness or victim’s interests are
protected and that they are treated with fairness, compassion, and dignity.
B. Victim Services Program – A program of the Little Rock Police Department designed to establish
and maintain a positive working relationship between the Police Department and other assistance
sources with regard to victim/witness assistance programs.
C. Victim - A person who suffers physical, financial, or emotional harm as the direct result of a
felony or misdemeanor crime against persons. Also regarded as victims are the spouse, child,
parent, or legal guardian of a homicide victim. This definition excludes any person involved in a
crime as a perpetrator or accomplice.
1. The Victim Services Coordinator will report to the Major Crimes Division Violent
Crimes Unit Sergeant.
2. The Victim Services Coordinator will supervise the Victim Services Specialists, which
will collectively comprise the Victim Services Program Staff.
1. Ensure that the Little Rock Police Department complies with laws pertaining to crime
victims and witnesses; and,
2. Ensure that there is a response to all inquires from interested persons concerning victim
assistance.
II. Objectives
A. The objectives of the Victim Services Program are to provide services to those crime victims
whose cases are never referred for prosecution and to provide services to crime victims during the
preliminary investigation stage.
B. Subject to the appropriate application of the provisions of the State of Arkansas Victim’s Bill of
Rights, all victims have rights that include:
2. Notification of victims of court proceedings and critical events in the criminal justice
process;
6. Assistance with the return of property, other than contraband, when it is no longer needed
as evidence;
7. Intervention with victim’s employer in order to minimize loss of wages and other benefits
resulting from court appearances;
1. 24-hour crisis intervention for homicides, rapes, and severe domestic violence cases;
2. Contact with victims within 24 to 72 hours after the crime has been reported, each victim
will be assigned a staff member to act as an advocate;
5. Provide officers with informational cards for distribution to victims during initial contact.
This card provides the victim of necessary information regarding the status of their case
and referral numbers for service providers;
6. Network and collaborate with service providers throughout Little Rock area to provide
such services as rental assistance, food, clothing, and other short-term needs;
7. Network with providers that specialize in hearing impaired, visually impaired and
language barriers;
8. Follow-up contact with victim within 10 days and depending on the severity of the
incident, once a week. Volunteers will make telephone reassurance calls to check with
the victim;
10. Assist in scheduling line-ups, interviews and other required appearances at the
convenience of the victim/witness and at the option of the agency, providing
transportation, if feasible;
13. Provision of information from the Attorney General’s office regarding the Crime
Reparations Fund and assist with application if needed;
15. Provision of victim notification upon arrest and during post-arrest processing of the
suspect;
16. Provision of services to families and personnel of the LRPD who have suffered line of
duty injuries or death; and,
17. Assist the Training Division with academy and in-service training regarding the Victim
Services Program.
B. The Communications Center shall be the link between law enforcement and the Victim Services
Staff regarding victim/witness assistance offered by police, fire and ambulance personnel. The
Victim Services Staff will be available for 24-hour on-call assistance. Communications Center
personnel shall alert the on-call Victim Services Staff member for homicides, rapes, and severe
domestic violence cases. Officers shall remain at the scene of an incident until Victim Services
staff has completed their interviews.
C. The Communications Center shall provide referral information, available 24 hours a day,
regarding area services offered by other governmental or private sector organizations for
victims/witnesses in need of medical attention, counseling, and emergency financial assistance.
IV. Responsibilities
A. The Victim Services Coordinator shall administer and coordinate the Victim Services Program.
Responsibilities include:
1. Ensure that the Little Rock Police Department is aware of the Victim Rights Laws;
2. Ensure that there is a response to all inquiries from interested persons concerning victim
assistance; and,
1. Cause each crime report to be screened to ensure that each victim of a criminal attack is
aware of victim assistance and related community services available within the service
area;
4. In those instances where a victim or witness has specific credible reasons to fear
intimidation or further victimization determine appropriate assistance using the following
factors:
1. Ensuring all new employees (both sworn and non-sworn) are informed of existing
community victim/witness assistance programs through basic and field training;
3. Ensuring sworn personnel and non-sworn personnel receive training in Victim Services
Program and the role of law enforcement in providing assistance.
F. All personnel (sworn and nonsworn) shall ensure the confidentiality of records and files of
victims/witnesses to the extent consistent with applicable law.
G. Public Affairs Officer will work closely with the Victim Services Coordinator to govern the
agency's efforts to periodically inform the public and the media of existing and new victim/witness
programs.
A. In the case of a homicide or suicide/attempted suicide, or cases of serious injury resulting from a
crime against persons, a member of the Major Crimes Division shall be responsible for notifying
the next of kin. The detective may request a Victim Services staff member accompany him for the
notification.
B. In the case of a fatality or serious injury accident, the Police Chaplain or personnel designated by a
Field Services Division supervisor shall be responsible for the notification.
C. Request for notification of next of kin in the case of a serious illness shall be at the discretion of
the Shift Supervisor.
D. When the next of kin resides outside Little Rock, the law enforcement agency in the area of
residence shall be contacted by terminal message. The agency shall be requested to make the
notification and a contact name and number with this department will be provided for the next of
kin.
E. Notification requests initiated by other agencies should include a terminal confirmation and all
required information for the next of kin, including a contact person within that agency. The
Communications Center shall contact a Field Services Division Shift Commander, who shall
designate an officer to give notification.
F. The Police Chaplain should be available to accompany officers when contacting the next of kin for
notifications.
G. All notifications shall be carried out in a prompt, courteous, and considerate manner.
A. This Order deals with the death or serious injury of personnel in the following categories:
b) Accidental; or,
c) Other causes.
2. Natural causes;
1. The purpose of this Order is to implement procedures when a member of this Department
is killed or seriously injured in the line of duty. It is preferred that other members of the
Department notify Departmental personnel, if at all possible, instead of by the media.
2. Notification;
a) Family
(c) Parents;
(2) The supervisor making the notification shall stay with the next of kin,
acting as department liaison, until such time as he is relieved of such
responsibility by the family, department or by his own determination.
He shall have additional officers at his disposal as circumstances
dictate. The supervisor may utilize the Police Chaplain, but the
Chaplain will have additional duties and responsibilities.
b) Upon determination of an officer’s death or serious injury, the first officer on the
scene shall immediately notify;
(1) Communications;
(3) Other on duty units as immediately as necessary for securing the scene.
c) The first supervisor on the scene shall be responsible for the integrity of the
scene as enumerated in General Order 302.V.B.
d) The Field Services Division Shift Commander shall be responsible for notifying
all Division Commanders, Chaplains, Assistant Chiefs and the Chief of Police.
Division Commanders shall be responsible for notifying personnel under their
command through their chain of command.
3. Hospital Procedures
(5) Family liaison and officers acting in a support role to the family; and,
b) At least one officer shall be assigned security of the area. He shall allow access
to:
e) The Public Affairs Officer shall coordinate media releases at the hospital, the
incident scene and Department headquarters.
4. Assistance
a) The Victim Services representative shall assist the family with referrals for:
(1) Transportation;
d) The Victim Services representative is not required to, but may assist the family
in obtaining additional benefit information (life insurance, will and probate court
requirements, etc.).
5. Funeral
(2) The Honor Guard shall report to the Commander for their duty hours
and assignments and shall be detached from their normal duties until
their assignment is completed.
b) The Honor Guard Commander shall assign four members of the Honor Guard to
be on-duty at all times the body is available for public view or visitation.
(1) One team of two members shall be stationed with the deceased officer,
one team of two members shall be in relief, and the two teams shall
rotate assignments every quarter-hour during their shift.
(2) The relief team shall be responsible for incidental duties at the place of
visitation as they arise.
(3) The Honor Guard shall be utilized during the funeral and graveside
services to honor the deceased.
(2) Members of the Color Guard shall report to the Color Guard
Commander for their duties and duty hours and shall be detached from
their normal duties until the conclusion of the memorial services.
e) The liaison officer shall assist the family in making specific funeral
arrangements, if they so desire. Considerations should include:
(1) The funeral home (some funeral homes supply funeral services, caskets
and grave sites for officers killed in the line of duty which the family
may or may not choose to use);
(2) Clergy;
C. Funeral Categories
1. With the consent of the employee’s family, the following classifications of funerals are
authorized by this Order:
(c) Color guard and presentation of the Flag of the United States
of America to the next of kin;
(c) Color guard and presentation of the Flag of the United States
of America to the next of kin;
c) Departmental
2. Nothing in this Order shall limit the family from including fraternal and/or military
observances to which an employee is entitled.
3. Assistance to other agencies. - When other agencies request funeral escort assistance
from this Department, the Traffic Services Commander shall coordinate those efforts.
When additional resources are required, the Office of the Chief of Police shall coordinate
those efforts.
4. Order of Service and Protocol - The funeral classifications listed above shall adhere to the
following funeral service guidelines, taking into consideration the classification
limitations and the family’s wishes:
b) All uniformed officers will attend in Class A uniforms, which includes head
coverings.
c) Inside the Chapel or Sanctuary, officers will pay their respects with covered
head and thereafter, upon being seated or standing in a standing-room-only
situation, shall remove their head covering until conclusion of the indoor
service. Honor Guard members shall wear head covering throughout the service.
d) Officers shall exit the service in a military manner, with little conversation while
inside the building in which the service is held.
e) Officers will not smoke or use tobacco products indoors, nor in sight of the
general public outdoors, throughout the time of the services.
g) The Assembly shall be called to attention and shall render a salute when ordered
by the Commander of the Service upon removal of the casket from the building
in which the service was held.
h) The funeral procession shall proceed from the funeral service to the place of
internment with marked police units in the lead. All units acting as escort shall
utilize full emergency equipment and units in the procession not acting as escort
shall use emergency lights in addition to headlights as required by city ordinance
and state law governing funeral processions. Units working traffic assignments
along the route of the procession shall render a salute to the hearse and the
family as they pass.
(3) Clergy,
(4) Hearse,
(5) Pallbearers,
(6) Family,
(8) Dignitaries,
j) Officers at the place of internment prior to the arrival of the procession will
render a salute to the hearse and the family as they pass.
k) Prior to removing the casket from the hearse, officers will assemble and the
Commander of the Service will bring the Assembly to attention; they will render
salutes as the Commander orders during the graveside ceremonies. (Uniformed
officers will have heads covered throughout the graveside services.)
l) At the conclusion of remarks by the clergy, the Color Guard will proceed with
the flag ceremony. At its conclusion, the flag will be presented to the Chief of
Police (or his designate) who will present it to the next-of-kin.
n) In instances where fraternal or other ceremonies are observed, they shall follow
the rifle salute unless protocol demands they be observed elsewhere. In those
instances, the Commander of the Service shall coordinate with their dignitaries
prior to the service.
a) The City of Little Rock and the Little Rock Police Department consider their
employees and families as their greatest assets. To assist employees and families
during times of grief, the City offers the Employee Assistance Program as an
employee benefit. Employees and employee families are qualified to use this
service at no charge.
b) The Little Rock Police Department also has a Chaplaincy program available to
employees and their families. Employees are urged to utilize the Employee
Assistance Program and/or the services of the Police Chaplain.
A. A juvenile runaway is defined as any person under the age of eighteen who, “has absented himself
from his home without sufficient cause, permission, or justification.”
B. Runaway Reports - This Department will receive reports of juvenile runaways from any parent,
guardian or school official who has charge of the juvenile and has reason to believe the juvenile
has run away. The runaway may be reported as soon as he is found to be missing; it will not be
necessary to wait for a set period of time before filing a runaway report.
A. An Offense Report will be completed on all juveniles who are reported missing, lost or runaway.
B. An Offense Report will be completed on all adults who are reported as missing.
1. Ensure that the last known location from which the party is missing or has run away is
within the city limits of Little Rock; and,
2. Ensure that a report of the incident has not been taken by another jurisdiction.
a) If another agency has already taken the initial report and the information has
been entered into A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C., the officer will generate a Little Rock
Police Department Offense Report with “Attempt to Locate” as the incident
type, and will indicate the circumstances and the reporting agency’s incident
number.
b) If another agency has taken the initial report and the information has not been
entered into A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C., the officer will contact that agency’s detective
unit responsible for their investigation and advise that this Department will
initiate the report and enter the information into A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C.
3. Complete an Offense Report containing all information necessary for the submission of
the report and all information on the NCIC Person Supplement Form (LRPD-5600-05) as
can be obtained from the person reporting, friends and/or relatives.
D. At the conclusion of the field officer’s investigation, the officer will immediately obtain
supervisory approval of the Offense Report and the NCIC Person Supplement Form (LRPD-5600-
05) and will personally deliver these documents to the A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C. Records Technician.
(The A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C. Records Technician is located in the Technology Support Section of the
Headquarters Division. His/her work schedule is Monday through Friday, 0700-1530.) It is the
officer’s responsibility to personally deliver the original two documents.
1. If the A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C. Records Technician is not on duty, the officer will take the
original report and the NCIC Person Supplement Form (LRPD-5600-05) to the
Communications Center. Officers will not fax the reports in lieu of personally delivering
them to the proper personnel. Upon receipt of the original report and the NCIC Person
Supplement Form (LRPD-5600-05) the A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C. Records Technician or
Communications Center personnel will date/time stamp receipt of both documents, check
all computer systems for any additional information and enter that information on the
NCIC Person Supplement Form (LRPD-5600-05). Once all information available on the
person is documented, then enter the information into N.C.I.C. and the local Records
Management system. The original report and the NCIC Person Supplement Form (LRPD-
5600-05) will be forwarded to the Records & Support Division. A copy of the Offense
Report and the NCIC Person Supplement Form (LRPD-5600-05) shall be forwarded to
the appropriate Detective Unit for assignment. Major Crimes Division personnel will be
responsible for the proper follow-up investigation.
E. All Missing Persons and/or Runaway reports and any supplemental information must be entered
into the appropriate computer system(s) immediately after the conclusion of any initial
investigation and supervisory approval [State Statute §12-12-205].
III. Runaway and Missing Persons Reports Taken Outside Little Rock City Limits
A. When a person is reported as a runaway or missing from a location within the city limits of Little
Rock and reported by a party located inside Pulaski County (i.e., missing from a relative’s house,
school function, etc.), the following procedures will be followed:
1. A patrol unit will be dispatched to take the initial report of a missing person or runaway.
Field officers will be responsible for obtaining all necessary information including the
information necessary to complete NCIC Person Supplement Form (LRPD-5600-05) for
entry into the Records Management system and A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C.
2. The officer will immediately determine the location from where the individual is missing
or has run away and will be responsible for checking the immediate area. Depending on
the circumstances, the officer may request the Communications Center to dispatch a unit
to the last known area within the city limits, in an attempt to locate the person.
3. The “Incident Address” will be the location in Little Rock where the person was last
seen. An address outside the city limits will not be used, (example, an address within
Pulaski County, but outside the city limits, where the officer responded to take the
report).
B. When a person is reported as a runaway or missing from a location within the city limits of Little
Rock and reported by a party located outside Pulaski County (i.e., missing from a relative’s house,
school function, etc.), the following procedures will be followed:
1. The call taker will transfer the reporting party to the Major Crimes Division for initial
reporting purposes. The detective shall obtain all necessary information including the
information necessary to complete NCIC Person Supplement Form (LRPD-5600-05) for
entry into the Records Management system and A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C. and notify a Major
Crimes Division supervisor. If circumstances warrant, the supervisor should request a
patrol unit be sent to the last known location in an attempt to locate the individual.
2. If a detective is not available, the initial report will be taken by the Communications
Center.
c) The Shift Commander will determine if a patrol unit should be sent to the last
known location in an attempt to locate the individual.
d) The original Offense Report and the NCIC Person Supplement shall be checked
by the Communications Supervisor for accuracy and completeness and matched
against the N.C.I.C. entry and any discrepancies shall be corrected before the
documents are forwarded to the Records & Support Division for copying and
distribution.
1. Determine the facts of the incident and notify the Major Crimes Division and advise them
of the circumstances;
3. Explain to the parents of the runaway that they may contact Pulaski County Juvenile
Justice Center if they wish to obtain a Juvenile in Need of Supervision Order but that this
decision is optional and not mandatory for a runaway investigation to be initiated.
1. A criminal investigation until a determination can be made as to the location and physical
well being of the runaway.
2. Police Officers and Investigators will use all available resources in an effort to document
and locate all reports of runaways.
C. When a member of the Major Crimes Division is assigned a runaway case, the detective shall:
1. Confirm the runaway information in both the Records Management system and
A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C. systems is current, if he is still missing. It is not necessary for a
Juvenile in Need of Supervision Order to be obtained for the runaway to be entered into
these systems.
D. Located Runaways
a) Assess the juvenile’s condition for purposes of Emergency Custody and proceed
if the juvenile meets the criteria for emergency custody in accordance with these
General Orders; or,
b) Release the juvenile if the officer has no other legitimate reason to detain or
arrest the juvenile.
3. If it is determined that the juvenile is a runaway and our Department is the authority, the
officer shall:
b) Transport the juvenile to the Major Crimes Division if the officer is not able to
make contact with a parent or guardian, or release the juvenile to his parents or
guardian if he has no other legitimate reason to detain or arrest the juvenile;
c) Generate a Supplemental Report using the original incident number from the
runaway report indicating that the juvenile was located and to whom he was
returned;
e) Deliver a copy of this Supplement Report to the Major Crimes Division. The
detective assigned to the case will be responsible for ensuring the information is
deleted from all systems.
a) Direct the Communications Operator to notify the agency that this Department
has contact with the juvenile.
b) Release the juvenile to the parent or guardian if the reporting agency can contact
them and they can respond to pick up the runaway in a reasonable amount of
time, or transport the juvenile to the Major Crimes Division if it is a lengthy
period of time before a parent or guardian can be contacted or can respond.
5. A juvenile who is being held only as a runaway cannot be held in a Detention Facility.
1. Where evidence or circumstances indicate the possibility of foul play being involved in a
missing person or lost child incident, officers will comply with the following procedures:
a) Contact the person reporting and any possible witnesses and obtain as much
information as possible (physical and clothing description, last known location
and time last seen, any persons the victim was seen with, etc.);
e) Notify the Public Affairs Officer. The Public Affairs Officer in conjunction with
the Major Crimes Division Supervisor will evaluate the urgency of releasing the
information to the news media and/or activate the Morgan Nick Alert Plan; and,
f) Take steps to notify a parent, relative or guardian of the missing person or lost
child if it is apparent that they are not already aware of the situation.
(1) Additional units may be sent to the area to assist in the search at the
discretion of a supervisor. The number of units involved and the scope
of the search should be determined in consideration of such factors as
the missing person’s or lost child’s age, time of day, weather
conditions, known medical history, and any other factors, which may
be determined.
1. Where evidence and circumstances indicate that no foul play has taken place in a missing
person or lost child incident, officers shall comply with the following procedures:
a) Respond to the scene and obtain the pertinent information from the complainant;
b) Notify the on duty Major Crimes Division Supervisor. The detective supervisor
will monitor the incident to determine the need for initiating a criminal
investigation;
d) Conduct a search of areas where the missing person or lost child may be located,
including but not limited to, the missing person’s or lost child’s residence, the
immediate area of the residence, school or bus stop and the location of friends or
businesses in the area; and,
2. Additional units may be sent to the area to assist in the search at the discretion of a
supervisor. The number of units involved and the scope of the search should be
determined in consideration of such factors as the missing person’s or lost child’s age,
time of day, weather conditions, known medical history, and any other factors which may
be determined.
A. A media alert bulletin will be issued by the Little Rock Police Department when an adult person
with alzheimer’s, dementia or other mentally disabling conditions is reported missing and the
missing person meets the criteria established for such cases.
1. The incident must involve a confirmed adult missing person, 18 years of age or older.
2. The missing person must have Alzheimer’s, dementia, or other mentally disabling
conditions that would impair the person from returning to their place of safety without
assistance.
4. Request for activation must be made as soon as possible after the missing adult is
reported.
1. The responding officer will determine if the criteria exist to warrant a media alert.
2. If the criteria for a media alert bulletin are evident, the responding officer will notify a
Field Services Division supervisor and a Major Crimes Division supervisor who will
respond to the scene. The Major Crimes Division supervisor will verify that a media
alert incident does, in fact, exist.
3. The Major Crimes Division supervisor will contact Communications and have them
notify the Public Affairs Officer who will activate the media alert bulletin.
2. If the person listed as “Missing” or “Runaway” is the victim of a criminal offense where
the person is recovered, the detective who was assigned to the “Missing
Persons”/”Runaway” case shall generate the appropriate cancellation and clearance
request on the Detective Remarks Screen (screen 24) with the date, time and employee
number of the detective who gathered the information and shall forward a copy of screen
24 to the A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C. Records Technician or the Communications Center for
immediate removal from all systems. In no event shall the “Missing Person”/”Runaway”
case file be transferred to another detective without the person being cleared as a
“Missing Person”/”Runaway” from all appropriate files.
B. If any unidentified child is located, every attempt will be made to locate a parent or guardian to ID
the child. If a parent or guardian cannot be located, the child will be transported to the Major
Crimes Division. Major Crimes Division personnel will contact the Division of Children and
Family Services.
2. Pursuant to the National Child Search Assistance Act of 1990, the Department is required
to verify and update all records, including medical and dental records of Missing and or
Runaway juveniles within 60 days from the original date of entry into NCIC. If any
additional information is gathered, this updated information shall be documented on the
Detective Remarks Screen (screen 24), with the date, time and employee number of the
detective who gathered the information. A copy of screen 24 shall be forwarded to the
ACIC/NCIC Records Technician for modification of information in the NCIC record. In
the event the inquiring detective is unsuccessful in an attempt to contact the victim,
person reporting, complainant, etc., the case detective must make a determination based
upon best information and knowledge available whether or not to retain the entry in the
N.C.I.C. file. The case detective who checks the validation sheets shall place his/her
initials, employee number, date and time of contact on the validation document and shall
return the validations within 10 working days from date of receipt to the ACIC/NCIC
Records Technician.” (Title 42 USC, Chapter 72, Section 5780)
A. The Little Rock Police Department has adopted the use of mobile video/audio recording
systems in order to accomplish several objectives. These objectives include, but are not limited
to:
2. The enhanced ability to review probable cause for arrest, arrest procedures, officer
and suspect interaction, and evidence for investigative purposes; and,
3. This General Order provides guidelines for the use of mobile video/audio recording
equipment.
B. In this Order, “MVR” shall mean all elements of the mobile video/audio recording equipment.
Wherever the operation of the MVR is referenced, such operation includes both the audio and
video capabilities of this equipment (wireless body microphone and vehicular equipment).
C. MVR equipment will be assigned and deployed at the direction of the Chief of Police.
Generally, installation will include, but not be limited to, patrol district, pool, and supervisory
vehicles, and vehicles from specialized units such as START, the Tactical Section and the
Warrants Unit.
1. For the purposes of this Order, “Sergeant” shall mean the Sergeant supervising any
police officer using MVR equipment. In the absence of a Sergeant, this shall mean the
individual assigned this supervisory responsibility.
D. For the purposes of this Order, “Lieutenant” shall mean the Lieutenant commanding any unit,
watch, or section in which MVR equipment is used. In the absence of a Lieutenant, this shall
mean the individual assigned this command responsibility.
A. The Technology Support Lieutenant will be responsible for ensuring that all MVR equipment
is properly installed and maintained and that appropriate personnel are trained in the operation
of the MVR equipment. The Division Commander will be responsible for ensuring that all
MVR equipment is properly maintained on vehicles within their area of responsibility.
2. A Sergeant may authorize the use of a vehicle in which the MVR equipment is
inoperable; however, this authorization will be noted in writing in advance of using
the vehicle and will be submitted along with all documentation requesting repairs to
the vehicle coordinator in that Division.
a) If the district car’s MVR equipment is inoperable and a pool car is available
with operating MVR equipment, the pool car will be utilized. The only time
a vehicle should be used without MVR equipment is when no other vehicle is
available in their Division.
B. The Technology Support Lieutenant will be responsible for responding to all requests for
access to MVR storage as provided by this Order.
C. Supervisors on a monthly basis will randomly review digital video files to assist in periodic
assessment of officer performance, determine whether MVR equipment is being fully and
properly utilized and identify material that may be appropriate for training.
D. Officers and/or Sergeants will be responsible for the operation of MVR equipment as
prescribed by this Order.
E. Tampering with or disabling MVR equipment, shielding, or taking any other action, which
interferes with the proper operation of MVR equipment is cause for disciplinary action.
F. Unusual or exceptional incidents related to law enforcement activities generate the interest of
many. However, officers and/or Sergeants shall not afford individuals outside the parameters
of law enforcement the opportunity to review a segment of any tape without prior authorization
of the Office of the Chief of Police or their designee.
A. Specific information concerning the actual physical operation of MVR equipment will be
provided to appropriate personnel through training conducted by the Training Division with
input from the Technology Support Lieutenant and is not included as a part of this Order.
1. MVR equipment will be installed so that the DVR equipment will automatically begin
recording when the wireless microphone is activated, the vehicle's blue lights are
activated, or the vehicle's siren is activated.
2. MVRs are equipped with a G-Force indicator that will automatically begin recording
whenever preset levels of G-Forces are encountered.
3. The MVR equipment will be manually activated to start recording prior to exiting the
patrol vehicle to record all traffic stops, pursuits, enforcement actions, calls for
service, prisoner transports, field contacts, and interviews.
4. Personnel will not be required to activate the MVR equipment to capture non-law
enforcement actions such as, but not limited to meal breaks, stops at convenience
stores, or fueling operations.
6. Personnel will confirm automatic and manual MVR activation and verify that the
wireless microphone is working at the beginning of the tour of duty.
C. Officers and/or Sergeants will ensure the proper alignment, focusing and positioning of MVR
equipment to provide quality documentation.
D. MVR equipment, including the wireless microphone, will be activated during all traffic stops,
pursuits, and enforcement actions, including calls for service, prisoner transports, field contacts
and interviews. The officer and/or Sergeant will ensure that the wireless microphone remains
activated at all times during citizen contact to provide narration with the video.
1. In addition to the requirements listed above, MVR equipment may also be utilized to
document crime and accident scenes or other events such as where evidence or
contraband is collected or where the documentation of a suspect’s actions may prove
useful to further prosecution.
2. MVR equipment will not be used to intentionally record statements made by persons
who are in a police vehicle and who are not in custody and who are not in the
presence of a police officer and/or Sergeant, unless those persons are aware that their
statements and conversations are being recorded.
4. Officers and/or Sergeants must be aware that even though the video record may be
unrevealing, an audio record is transmitted from the wireless body microphone
whenever the MVR equipment is activated.
5. Officers and/or Sergeants will not deactivate the MVR equipment until the recorded
contact is complete.
6. On all reports, tickets and citations initiated while the MVR equipment was activated,
officers and/or Sergeants will write “MVR” in the narrative to denote that the
equipment was in use. If the MVR equipment malfunctioned, during the recorded
incident, the malfunction will be noted in the narrative of the report.
E. Officers may deactivate MVR video and wireless microphone equipment during non-
enforcement activities such as during meals and other breaks for private conversations not
related to police incidents. Officers may not deactivate the MVR video and wireless
microphone equipment at anytime during an active police incident
1. Intentional deactivation during incidents where the use of the MVR equipment is
required by this Order may be cause for disciplinary action. Obstructing, shielding,
or any act of interference with the MVR equipment is not permitted.
2. Officers and/or Sergeants will not cease recording an event, situation, or other
circumstance solely at the demand of anyone. Officers and/or Sergeants will inform
those who ask that video/audio recording equipment is in use.
F. Proper care of MVR equipment installed in vehicles is the responsibility of the officer and/or
Sergeant assigned to the vehicle. Officers and/or Sergeants will inspect the MVR equipment
at the beginning of the tour of duty; any problems with the MVR equipment will be referred to
a Supervisor immediately.
G. MVR microphones with cords: The remote microphone, cord, pouch and battery pack are
assigned to the MVR equipped vehicle. This equipment will be turned in at the end of the tour
of duty with the vehicle keys. Supervisors will ensure that remote microphones are utilized with
the appropriate vehicle. The remote microphone cord also functions as the antenna for the
wireless microphone. Officers will ensure that at least 10 inches of remote microphone cord
remains exposed in order to ensure proper remote microphone range. The remote microphone
cord will not be wrapped around the microphone at any time.
H. MVR microphones without cords: The remote microphone and pouch are assigned to the MVR
equipped vehicle. This equipment will not be taken from the vehicle. The microphone will be
placed in the charging cradle in the vehicle at the end of the tour of duty. It is the responsibility
of the officer or supervisor assigned to the vehicle to sync up the microphone with the
appropriate vehicle at the beginning of the tour of duty.
I. In the event of a critical incident, i.e. when an officer and/or Sergeant is disabled, the first
officer and/or Sergeant on the scene, may play the video digital file on the monitor in the
vehicle to obtain any necessary information.
J. The digital MVR (FS-CAM) was designed with two safety features that prevent the system
from running the vehicle battery so low that it would not be able to start the vehicle. If the
ignition switch is in the off position, the digital MVR will shut itself off after 45 minutes of
operation or if it senses low voltage in the vehicle battery. This should be considered normal
operation for the digital MVR system.
A. Video data files will be managed in a manner that complies with these General Orders and IT
protocol. Secure video data file storage facilities and duplication equipment will be established
and maintained in each Division in which MVR equipment is utilized.
1. Video data files will be maintained on a server location in each of the Field Services
Divisions for a period of 120 days.
2. The server will be set to purge files from the server once the file has been held for 120
days. Video data files will be purged automatically to ensure space is available on
the server for new video data files.
3. Access to the video server will be limited to Field Services Supervisors, Internal
Affairs Investigators, and those individuals designated by the Chief of Police.
B. The following naming convention will be utilized whenever a video data file is copied or
transferred:
1. The video data file will be identified by the Division, type incident, the incident
number or file number associate with the video data file and the radio call ID of the
unit recording the incident. File names will be in all capitals and spaces will be
replaced with underscores. Strict adherence to this naming convention will allow files
to be easily located.
(6) Training – TR
(7) Headquarters HQ
(1) DT_PURSUIT_07-12345_2X52
(2) SW_FORCE_07-12346_1X80
(3) SW_COMP_07-12347_3Y90
C. Officers and/or Sergeants will notify a Supervisor in the event that a video data file may
contain material the officer and /or Sergeant believes might be helpful in Department Training.
The Supervisor will evaluate the video and, if appropriate, forward through the Chain of
Command to the Training Division Commander with a copy of the video with a written account
of the incident. The Training Division Commander will determine whether video records are
incorporated into training as appropriate.
D. Sergeants will ensure that CD/DVD copies of the video data file are included in supervisory
review files required by the General Orders.
1. In the event that an officer and/or Sergeant determines that a video data file is needed
as evidence in support of an arrest or for other investigative purposes, the officer
and/or Sergeant will notify a Supervisor no later than the end of the tour of duty when
the video data file is downloaded to the video server.
2. The Supervisor will review the video data file and will make a final determination as
to whether the video data file will be utilized as evidence.
E. All DWI arrests will require the arresting officer's supervisor or, in his absence, the supervisor
on duty to create two copies of the MVR video file(s) of the police vehicle that initiated the
stop and all other police vehicles involved in the apprehension of the suspect. The video
copies will be forwarded, along with the original B.A.C. package to Front Desk Officer before
the officers’ end of shift. In the event that the video system of the primary vehicle malfunctions
or the vehicle is not equipped with a video recording system, the officer will document this
information on an Officer’s Report (Form 5600-2). The original Officer’s Report will be
included with the BAC package.
A. Video data files are to be considered Departmental documents intended only to further the law
enforcement and management functions of the Department.
B. All requests for access to or for copies of video data files will be forwarded through the Chain
of Command to the Office of the Chief of Police.
1. The Office of the Chief of Police will establish whether a particular video data file or
a portion of a video data file is subject to disclosure and will ensure that the
Department responds to all requests in a lawful manner.
C. Requests for copies of video data files from other law enforcement agencies, or governmental
entities, will also be forwarded to the Office of the Chief of Police for review and response.
D. Civilians requesting copies of video data files will be directed to the Office of the Chief of
Police.
E. No video data file will be copied or otherwise distributed, disseminated or released for use
outside the Department, unless authorized by the Office of the Chief of Police.
F. The procedures specified in this Section are not required for video data file copies which may
be included in case files submitted to the Prosecuting Attorney’s Office or copies taken to court
as evidence by officers and/or Sergeants.
G. The Division Commander will be responsible for the retrieval of video data files to be copied
from the video data server.
I. General
A. The purpose of this Order is to provide immediate response procedures for Little Rock Police
Officers to stop suspect(s) who pose a threat to human life.
B. To provide guidance to supervisors and personnel in order to maintain order and restore a safe
environment. First responders should make every effort to;
II. Definitions
A. An Active Aggressor is defined as one or more subjects who participate in a random or systematic
homicidal spree by demonstrating their intent to continuously harm others. The subject’s
overriding objective appears to be mass murder rather than other criminal conduct such as
robbery, kidnapping, etc. This definition includes any assault with a deadly weapon capable of
causing mass homicide such as explosive devices, a knife, etc.
B. Contact Team is a team of officers whose primary objective is to locate the active aggressor and
isolate, distract and neutralize him/her.
C. Rescue Team is a team of secondary responders whose purpose is to locate and assist the
casualties of the assault and establish a Casualty Collection Point for responding medical
personnel.
D. Casualty Collection Point (CCP) is a room capable of holding all victims with injuries that
require medical attention. A series of rooms next to each other may be used if the casualties
exceed available space. The CCP is established to assist responding medical personnel with
triaging, treating, and transporting injured victims.
III. Procedures
a) Verbally check in with the Communication Center and establish a primary radio
channel for entry personnel.
c) Assess the situation, and determine the most appropriate course of police action
geared toward the location of the threat.
f) Select appropriate entry points for the primary entry officer(s) and advise
responding units of safe approach routes.
g) Establish a Contact Team and enter the involved structure with the overall
objective to isolate, distract, and neutralize the aggressor. Preventing the
suspect(s) from committing further acts of harm to human life is the primary
concern of the contact team. Any SWAT Unit officers who respond will assume
roles on contact teams and/or rescue teams that are best suited for their
specialized training and equipment.
h) While moving through the structure, officers should identify and communicate
locations of victims needing medical attention and locations of any suspected
explosive devices to secondary responding officers and Communications. They
should also continually update their location and location of the threat, if
known.
i) If practical and absent continued shooting, officers should treat any massive
hemorrhaging that may result in the immediate loss of life.
j) If not in uniform, officers will wear an outer garment that identifies them as a
police officer.
k) Multiple contact teams may be deployed, depending on the scope of the incident.
Their deployment will be communicated and coordinated with the other teams,
to prevent incidents of friendly fire.
d) Assistance to victims may not be immediately possible, if the suspect(s) has not
been contained.
e) Establish a Casualty Collection Point (CCP) for injured victims. Little Rock
Fire Department and MEMS personnel may be utilized in rescue efforts and
treating of injured victims.
f) Maintain security for the CCP and other cleared areas of the structure.
1. If the incident turns into a hostage or barricaded suspect situation, the SWAT Unit and
Crisis Negotiations Team will be notified and respond.
2. Until the SWAT Unit assumes control of the incident, the responding officers should:
d) Create an Immediate Action Plan in the event the suspect begins killing victims,
surrenders, releases the hostages, or creates any other situation that requires
immediate response by officers.
C. Incident Command.
1. The first officer on scene, who is not part of a contact team, shall be the Incident
Commander, until relieved by higher authority. Nothing precludes the initial responding
supervisor from deploying as part of a contact team. An Incident Command Post will be
established (per G.O. 308 & 312), and may be expanded to create a Unified Incident
Command, that will incorporate other responding entities. Multiple personnel may be
needed in the Command Post to monitor secondary radio channels, coordinate with the
Communications Center and other responding entities, request additional resources, etc.
2. Continually monitor the incident and evaluate the need to deploy additional contact
teams or rescue teams. Rescue teams will be deployed as soon as possible (“area that is
cleared, but not secure”) to facilitate treatment of injured and minimize the loss of life.
These efforts will be coordinated with Little Rock Fire Department and MEMS personnel.
Additional personnel will be deployed to establish a secure inner perimeter around the
target structure.
3. Ensure notifications have been made to the on-duty Shift Commander, appropriate
Division Commander, Major Crimes Division personnel, CSSU and Public Affairs.
5. Upon conclusion of the incident, if deployed, the SWAT Unit will perform a final
clearing of the building to account for all persons and locate and mark any weapons,
explosives or dangers. These efforts will be coordinated with the Little Rock Fire
Department Bomb Squad, if needed. In the absence of the SWAT Unit, the Incident
Commander will direct a thorough search and the entire structure to ensure that all
persons are accounted for and that all weapons and/or booby traps are located, disabled
and removed from the premises.
1. The School Resource Officer assigned to a particular school will obtain and/or update
annually, a Critical Incident Packet for that school. Communications will maintain the
master copy of each school Critical Incident Packet. School Resource Officers assigned
to a particular school will maintain a paper and digital copy of the Critical Incident
Packet, and make it available to the Command Post. The packet will contain, at
minimum, the following items:
a) Layout/floor plan of school,
b) List of all school employees, school room numbers and building assignments,
c) Evacuation points/sites,
j) Names of individuals with master keys and location of any emergency keys,
2. Fusion Camera System – the Little Rock School District has a closed circuit camera
system, also known as the Fusion Camera System, which is installed in most of the
schools in the District. The Little Rock Police Department has been allowed to view
1. The radio channel held by the first officer(s) on scene will be restricted for
communication between deployed officers and the Command Post. All other incident
related radio traffic will be on a secondary radio channel.
2. Communications will advise all responding personnel to report to the Command Post for
assignments. This includes any personnel responding from other entities. A designated
person in the Command Post will establish a secondary line of communication with the
Communications Center to facilitate passing of information to deployed officers from
callers who may still be inside the target structure.
3. Communications will pass on any information available from the Fusion Camera System
(Little Rock School District) and other intelligence sources to the Command Post.
A. The Division Commander, or his/her designee, in charge of SWAT will document an annual
review of policy and training needs.
I. Policy
A. It is the policy of the Little Rock Police Department to ensure that a consistently high level of
service is provided to all community members, including those who are deaf or hard-of-hearing.
B. The Department has specific legal obligations under the Americans with Disabilities Act and the
Rehabilitation Act. All employees, both civilian and sworn, will comply with these policies and
will fulfill their legal obligations as follows:
1. People who are deaf or hard-of-hearing are entitled to an equivalent level of service as
others.
2. The Department will make every effort to ensure that its officers and employees
communicate effectively with people who are deaf or hard-of-hearing.
D. This General Order is consistent with and is intended to comply with the U.S. Department of
Justice policies promulgated on October 11, 2002.
A. In-compliance with the Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA), employees of this Department will
provide to individuals with disabilities appropriate auxiliary aid and services necessary to ensure
effective communication.
2. “Auxiliary aid and services” include but are not limited to:
c) Use of assistant listening devices (to amplify sound for persons who are hard of
hearing); or
B. Employees shall keep in mind that an individual’s failure to comply with or respond to verbal
orders may be the result of their inability to hear or understand clearly the orders, rather than an
act of defiance.
C. Upon determining that an individual being detained has a hearing impairment, employees shall
first attempt to communicate with the individual through use of written communication, lip
reading, sign language or a combination thereof.
1. All written communications should be kept simple and to the point using basic
vocabulary.
D. Interpreters will be used in criminal and non-criminal situations when written communication is
ineffective and it is essential to establish effective communication to ensure a thorough
investigation.
1. After consulting with an individual with a hearing impairment and determining that an
interpreter is needed, the officer will immediately notify a supervisor and advise him/her
of the circumstances.
2. The supervisor will evaluate the situation and the need for an interpreter.
3. Once the decision is made to obtain the services of a qualified interpreter, the supervisor
will notify the Communications Center.
4. The requesting officer will document the incident on an officer’s letter form and forward
it through their chain of command to the Administrative Services Manager to ensure
proper processing of all charges incurred. An invoice, if available, will be attached. A
copy of the letter and any invoice will be retained in the case file.
E. Officers must use good judgment and determine, on an individual basis, how to handle each
situation to protect the rights of disabled persons.
F. Officers will employ the same procedures as described above when confronted with situations that
involve a language barrier which might endanger any evidence produced or violate a detainee’s
rights during questioning.
G. The type of aid that will be required for effective communication will depend on the individual’s
preferred method of communication, and the nature, importance, and duration of the
communication at issue.
3. The more lengthy, complex, and important the communication, the more likely it is that a
qualified interpreter will be required for effective communication with a person whose
primary means of communication is sign language or speech reading. For example:
a) If there has been an incident and the officer is conducting witness interviews, a
qualified sign language interpreter may be required to communicate effectively
with someone whose primary means of communication is sign language.
H. To serve each individual effectively, primary consideration should be given to the communication
aid or service that works best for that person.
1. Officers must ask persons who are deaf or hard-of-hearing what type of auxiliary aid or
service they need.
2. Officers must defer to those expressed choices, unless there is another equally effective
way of communicating, given the circumstances, length, complexity, and importance of
the communication, as well as the communication skills of the person who is deaf or
hard-of-hearing.
A. The Little Rock Police Department is not required to provide a particular auxiliary aid or service
if doing so would fundamentally alter the nature of the law enforcement activity in question, or if
it would cause an undue administrative or financial burden.
1. If the Department has limited financial resources and providing a particular auxiliary
aid would cost a large sum of money, the Department head may determine that it would
be unduly costly and constitute an undue financial burden (note: the Department’s
budget as a whole must be considered). In this situation, the most effective means of
communication not involving an undue burden must be used.
2. Individuals who are deaf or hard-of-hearing will not be charged for the cost of an
auxiliary aid or service needed for effective communication.
B. The input of an individual who is deaf or hard-of-hearing and is involved in an incident is just as
important to the law enforcement process as the input of others. Officers must not draw
conclusions concerning an incident unless they fully understand and are understood by all those
involved, including persons who are deaf or hard of hearing.
A. The Little Rock Police Department Communications Center will maintain a list of at least two (2)
sign language and oral interpreting services who are available on-call 24 hours per day and
willing to provide qualified interpreters as needed.
2. Accordingly, an interpreter must be able to sign to the deaf individual (or interpret
orally to the person who does not use sign language) what is being said by the hearing
person and to voice to the hearing person what is being signed or said by the deaf
individual.
3. The interpreter must be able to interpret in the language the deaf person uses and must
be familiar with law enforcement terms and phrases.
B. These services will be chosen after thorough screening of the quality and skill of its interpreters,
its reliability, and in accordance with the City of Little Rock’s Contract Services Guidelines.
C. The Administrative Services Manager will ensure that a list of these contract agencies is updated
and provided to the Communication Center annually.
A. In situations when a non-disabled person would have access to a telephone, officers will provide
persons who are deaf or hard-of-hearing the opportunity to place calls using a teletypewriter
(TTY, also known as a telecommunications device for deaf people, or TDD).
B. Employees will also accept telephone calls placed by persons who are deaf or hard-of-hearing
through the Telecommunications Relay Service.
A. Officers must review and have a working knowledge of “Techniques for Handling Situations
Involving People Who are Deaf or Hard-of-Hearing.” This document reviews how officers should
communicate effectively in the types of situations officers will encounter. These situations include
but are not limited too:
B. The Training Division will be responsible for the training of “Techniques for Handling Situations
Involving People Who are Deaf or Hard-of Hearing” and will maintain appropriate
documentation to ensure that all Departmental employees are familiarized with this General
Order and supporting material.
I. Policy Statement
A. It shall be the responsibility of the City of Little Rock Police Department to provide liaison
assistance to the immediate survivors of an officer who dies in the line-of-duty, whether
feloniously or accidentally, while an active member of the department, to include the clarification
and comprehensive study of survivor benefits, and to provide tangible and intangible emotional
support during this traumatic period of readjustment for the surviving family.
B. The purpose of this policy is to provide direction for the City of Little Rock Police Department to
provide appropriate emotional care for the seriously injured, ill or deceased employee’s family. If
the incident is the line-of-duty death of a police officer, funeral arrangements are to be decided by
the family of the officer with their wishes taking precedence over those of the agency.
1. Although this policy is intended to address the line-of-duty death or injury of police
officers, many provisions, including death notification and family assistance, may be
applicable to any agency employee or retired employee (uniformed and non-uniformed)
regardless of whether or not the death is duty related.
1. This team will be appointed by the Chief of Police and will consist of a Department
Liaison Officer, a Notification Officer, a Hospital Liaison, a Family Liaison Officer, a
Public Affairs Officer, a Benefits Coordinator, a Police Department Chaplain, an Honor
Guard member, a Traffic Services supervisor, and a Victim Services Program
representative.
2. The Public Affairs Office will provide Communications an up-to-date Family Support
Team call out list.
D. In this General Order, “Line-of-Duty Death” shall mean any action, felonious or accidental, which
claims the life of a City of Little Rock Police Officer who is performing work-related functions
while on or off duty.
E. In this General Order, “Survivors” shall mean immediate family members of the deceased officer;
spouse, children, parents, siblings, fiancé, and/or significant others.
F. In this General Order, “Beneficiary” shall mean those designated by the officer as recipients of
specific death benefits.
G. In this General Order, “Benefits” shall mean financial payments made to the family to insure
financial stability following the loss of a loved one.
I. In this General Order, “Community Service Network” shall mean area businesses, churches and
organizations providing services and assistance to family members or survivors of officers killed
or injured in the line of duty.
A. Upon determination of an officer’s death or serious injury, the first officer on the scene shall
immediately notify Communications, his immediate supervisor, and other on-duty units as soon as
is necessary to secure the scene.
B. The first supervisor on the scene shall be responsible for the integrity of the scene as enumerated
in General Order 302.V.B.
C. The Field Services Division Shift Commander shall be responsible for notifying the Chief of
Police, the Assistant Chiefs, the Family Support Team and all Division Commanders, as well as,
his other notification responsibilities. Division Commanders shall be responsible for notifying
personnel under their command.
D. Initial notification should include the officer’s name, seriousness and type of injuries, the time of
occurrence, the location of occurrence, the type of call or circumstance, suspect information, and
the location of the victim (name and location of hospital or morgue).
E. As soon as possible after all accurate information is compiled; the Public Affairs Officer shall
disseminate information to all members of the Department.
A. The notification plan will be formulated using the most recent confidential Survivor Notification
Sheet provided previously by the officer. This Notification Sheet will be kept in Communications
and in the Office of the Chief of Police.
B. The name of the deceased officer will never be released to the media before immediate survivors
living in the area are notified.
C. If there is knowledge of a medical problem with an immediate survivor, medical personnel will be
dispatched to the residence to coincide with the death notification.
D. Notification will always be made in person and never alone. The Chief of Police (or his
representative), or a member of the Family Support Team will act as the informing officer. If the
above-suggested persons are not readily accessible, the officer’s shift commander will
immediately dispatch a supervisory officer to notify the officer’s family. If possible, surviving
parents will be afforded this same courtesy of personal notification. If the opportunity to get the
family to the hospital prior to the demise of the officer presents itself, do not wait for the
appropriate delegation to gather.
E. If the family wants to go to the hospital, they should be transported via departmental vehicle
unless they desire other transportation.
A. The following department personnel are authorized to respond to the hospital when
necessary:
B. At least one supervisor shall be assigned security of the area. He shall allow access to those
authorized above, to medical personnel, and to family and persons authorized by the family.
C. A Family Support Team member shall coordinate efforts with the hospital security/administrative
staff in securing appropriate areas for family, friends, department personnel and media access and
security for those areas.
D. The employee’s immediate supervisor will take control of the employee’s personal property and
City property in the employee’s possession. If the employee’s personal property is not needed for
evidential purposes, it may be released to the family. The remainder of the property will be stored
in the Department’s property section or it will be turned over to the Crime Scene Search Unit as
circumstances dictate. Additional city property assigned to the employee shall be obtained from
his locker, desk or residence at a later date unless it is necessary for the investigation of the
offense in which the employee is directly involved. If the employee’s supervisor is not available to
take possession of the property, a supervisor appointed by the Division Commander will be
responsible for the property.
F. The Public Affairs Officer shall coordinate media releases at the hospital, the incident scene and
Department headquarters.
A. A Hospital Liaison will be appointed to act as information liaison for medical personnel to the
family of the officer and fellow police officers. The Hospital Liaison will ensure that pertinent
information on the officer’s condition is relayed on a timely basis. They shall also make the family
and fellow police officers aware of hospital policy about visitation with the injured officer and/or
visitation with the body following the demise, and explain why an autopsy is needed.
B. The Hospital Liaison will see that the family is updated on the incident as soon as the family
arrives at the hospital.
C. Family Support Team members will be present the entire time the family is at the hospital and
should arrange whatever assistance the family may need at that time.
D. The people who made the initial notification should be among those at the hospital.
E. Idle promises should not be made to the family at this time, i.e., “We’ll promote him/her
posthumously.” “We’ll retire his/her badge.”
F. Arrangements will be made by the Family Support Team members for transportation of the family
back to their residence.
G. The Hospital Liaison will be responsible for arrangements of the medical bills, relating to the
services rendered to the deceased officer, to be sent to the appropriate governmental agency for
payment. The family should not receive any of these bills at their residence address.
A. The Department Liaison Officer position is normally assigned to a Division Commander because
of the need to effectively coordinate resources throughout the Department. Responsibilities
include the following:
B. Although the Family Liaison Officer should know the deceased officer and be aware of the family
relationships, the officer should not be so emotionally involved with the loss that he/she would
become ineffective. The liaison officer must know that this is not a decision-making position. This
is a role of facilitator between the family and the Little Rock Police Department. The Liaison
Officer is responsible for the following:
1. Ensure that the needs of the family come before the wishes of the Department.
2. Meet with the family and tell them what his/her responsibilities will be during this time.
3. Meet with the family regarding funeral arrangements. Since most officers have not
prearranged their wishes for the handling of their own funeral, the family will most likely
need to decide all aspects of the funeral. The Department should only make the family
aware of what they can offer in the way of assistance if the family decides to have a
"line-of-duty funeral".
4. Know all information concerning the death and the continuing investigation to answer
family questions.
6. See that the survivors are afforded recognition and will have proper placement arranged
for them during the funeral and funeral procession.
7. See that the survivors are briefed on the funeral procedure (i.e., 21-gun salute, presenting
of flag, playing of taps, etc.).
C. The Public Affairs Officer will be designated to handle the media throughout this traumatic ordeal.
In the unlikely event that the family should decide to accept an interview, this officer will attend
and screen all questions presented to the family so as to not jeopardize upcoming legal
proceedings.
D. Family Support Team members will be responsible for seeing that the home is prepared for the
influx of visitors following the funeral. Food and household needs will be provided for through the
Community Support Network. Family Support Team members will be available to screen phone
calls and remain at the residence during this time.
E. The Community Support Network will provide a list of alternate churches with seating capacities
large enough to accommodate attendance at the funeral. Remember, the Department should only
make the family aware of the alternative. It is the family's choice.
F. Departmental vehicles and drivers will be made available to the family if they desire transportation
to and from the funeral home. Any departmental vehicles used in the transportation of family
members will bear the "Honor Guard" magnetic signs.
G. Family Support Team members will be responsible for providing the family access to other public
safety survivors or other support groups (Concerns of Police Survivors, Survivors of Homicide
Victims, Compassionate Friends, Parents of Murdered Children, etc.).
H. The Little Rock Police Department will send Family Support Team members on routine residence
checks by the survivor's home for 6-8 weeks following the tragedy. These same members will
ascertain from the survivor if any harassing phone calls are being received.
A. The Benefits Coordinator will gather information on all benefits/funeral payments available to the
family. The Department Liaison will ensure that this officer has the Department's full support to
fulfill the responsibility to the survivor to coordinate all death benefits/payments (i.e., insurance
policies, outstanding debts, etc.). This officer should be completely responsible for filing
appropriate paperwork and following through with the family to insure that these benefits are
being received.
B. A Family Support Team member should visit with the surviving family to discuss the benefits they
will receive within a few days following the funeral. A prepared printout of the benefits/funeral
payments due the family, listing named beneficiaries, contacts at various benefits offices, and
when they can expect to receive the benefit should be given to the family. This same explanation
procedure should be repeated within a month following the death since the initial contact is
clouded by the emotional numbness of the family during the first benefits meeting. Check once
again in about six months to be sure the family is receiving/has received every possible payment.
C. If there are surviving children from a former marriage, the guardian of those children should also
receive a printout of what benefits the child/children will be receiving.
E. If criminal violations surround the death, the family will be informed of all new developments
prior to any press release.
F. If there will not be any court proceedings surrounding the circumstances of the officer's death, at
the earliest opportunity, the Department will relay all details of the incident to the family.
A. With the consent of the employee’s family, the following classifications of funerals are authorized
by this Order:
a. This classification is reserved for employees whose death occurred in the line of
duty by felonious criminal action, accident, or other causes as approved by the
Chief of Police.
iii. Color guard and presentation of the Flag of the United States of
America to the next of kin;
iii. Color Guard and presentation of the Flag of the United States of
America to the next of kin;
3. Departmental
a. This classification shall be reserved for employees not enumerated in the above
categories and members of the immediate family of active or retired uniformed
employees.
B. When other agencies request funeral escort assistance from this Department, the Traffic Services
Commander shall coordinate those efforts. When additional resources are required, the Office of
the Chief of Police shall coordinate those efforts.
C. The funeral classifications listed above shall adhere to the following funeral service guidelines,
taking into consideration the classification limitations and the family’s wishes.
D. Nothing in this Order shall limit the family from including fraternal and/or military observances to
which an employee is entitled.
A. All members will maintain an excellent personal appearance. Uniforms and equipment must be in
good condition.
B. Uniforms
2. Members of the Honor Guard and pallbearers will wear white gloves.
C. Funeral Services
1. The Honor Guard Commander shall be Commander of the Service. He shall issue all
commands for members of the Department (the Assembly or Detail) in attendance and all
personnel shall follow his orders relating to the rendering of hand salutes, calls to
attention, and rest.
1. Inside the Chapel or Sanctuary, officers will pay their respects with covered head
and thereafter, upon being seated or standing in a standing-room-only situation, shall
remove their head covering until conclusion of the indoor service. Honor Guard members
shall wear head covering throughout the service.
2. Officers shall exit the service in a military manner, with little conversation while
inside the building in which the service is held.
3. Officers will not smoke or use tobacco products indoors, nor in sight of the general public
outdoors, throughout the time of the services.
4. The Assembly shall be called to attention and shall render a salute when ordered by
the Commander of the Service upon removal of the casket from the building in which the
service was held.
5. The funeral procession shall proceed from the funeral service to the place of interment
with marked police units in the lead. All units acting as escort shall utilize full emergency
equipment and units in the procession not acting as escort shall use emergency lights in
addition to headlights as required by City Ordinance and state law governing funeral
processions. Units working traffic assignments along the route of the procession shall
render a salute to the hearse and the family as they pass.
a. Escort units;
b. Honor Guard;
c. Clergy;
d. Hearse;
e. Pallbearers;
f. Family;
g. Chief of Police;
i. Staff Officers;
k. City Employees;
m. Escort units.
7. Officers at the place of interment prior to the arrival of the procession will render a salute
to the hearse and the family as they pass.
8. Prior to removing the casket from the hearse, officers will assemble and the
Commander of the Service will bring the Assembly to attention; they will render salutes
as the Commander orders during the graveside ceremonies. (Uniformed officers will have
heads covered throughout the graveside services).
9. At the conclusion of remarks by the clergy, the Color Guard will proceed with the
flag ceremony. At its conclusion, the flag will be presented to the Chief of Police (or his
designate) who will present it to the next-of-kin.
10. While the assembly is at attention and saluting, music will be performed by bugle
and/or bagpipes and a rifle salute will be volleyed.
11. In instances where fraternal or other ceremonies are observed, they shall follow the
rifle salute unless protocol demands they be observed elsewhere. In those instances, the
Commander of the Service shall coordinate with their dignitaries prior to the service.
12. At the conclusion of the ceremonies, the Commander of the Service shall dismiss the
assembly.
D. Honor Guard
1. Prior to the services, members of the Honor Guard will assemble at a location near the
service (church, funeral home, or cemetery) for inspection by the Honor Guard
commander.
E. Pallbearers
1. If pallbearers are requested by the family, they will be selected by the Honor Guard
Commander with the family’s approval.
2. Pallbearers will be under the direction of the Honor Guard commander. They will report
to the funeral home as directed for instructions and seating arrangements.
A. The procedures outlined shall be followed in most cases. Any changes made necessary by a
shortage of manpower, the unusual size of the funeral, the type of service, the physical
arrangement of the place of service or for any other reason shall be made by the Department
Liaison Officer. Any additional honors to be accorded to deceased members or employees of the
Department or to deceased members of other law enforcement agencies shall be at the discretion
of the Chief of Police.
A. Abatement Procedures
1. Definition: In an effort to foster greater community relations within the City of Little Rock,
officers of this Department shall initiate the necessary procedures to abate known nuisance
locations. Common nuisance, specified in § 5-74-109 et seq., are defined as any premises,
building or place used to facilitate the commission of a continuing series of three (3) or more
criminal violations of Arkansas law. All such places, including any shop, warehouse,
dwelling house, building, boat, airplane, or any place whatever, used for the purpose of
unlawfully selling, storing, keeping, manufacturing, using, or giving away any controlled
substance, precursor, or analog specified in § 5-64-101 et seq., shall be a common nuisance.
This section shall apply as well to a public nuisance, specified in § 16-105-303 et seq., which
is defined as a dance hall or other local business in which, or around which there are public
disturbances, the unlawful drinking of intoxicating liquors, quarrels, affrays, or general
breaches of the peace are frequent. All such common or public nuisance places are subject to
abatement procedures. (Note: This section does not apply to City Code violations (i.e., weed
lots, abandoned vehicles, etc.). Abatements under these circumstances shall be referred to
Code Enforcement for proper handling.)
2. Authority: The Special Investigations Division shall be responsible for the follow-up
investigation of all reported nuisance places.
c) Submit the officer’s report along with a copy of the incident report to an
immediate supervisor for approval by the Chain of Command up to the Division
Commander;
d) Once approved, the Division Commander will forward the reports to the Special
Investigations Division Commander who will review and assign the reports to
the appropriate unit for investigation.
4. The SID investigating unit shall be responsible for conducting a thorough investigation
concerning the report and pursue abatement pursuant to and consistent with the SID
Divisional Operating Procedures outlined in Section 5100-3.
I. Purpose
A. To establish Departmental procedures for response to calls for service at the Mexican Consulate,
3500 South University Avenue.
B. To establish guidelines coinciding with federal and state mandates concerning immunity from
arrest.
C. To establish procedures for the notification of the proper authorities upon the detention of foreign
nationals.
II. General
A. Definitions:
2. Consular immunity is a lesser degree of immunity and privileges. Consular officers are
those members of consular posts who are recognized by both the sending and the host
country as fully authorized to perform the broad array of formal consular functions. They
have only official acts or functional immunity and their personal inviolability is quite
limited. Official acts immunity pertains in numerous circumstances. No law enforcement
officer, State Department officer, or diplomatic mission or consulate is authorized to
determine whether a given set of circumstances constitutes an official act. This is an issue
which may only be resolved by the court with subject matter jurisdiction over the alleged
crime.
a) Consular officers may be arrested and incarcerated pending trial only if the
offense is a felony and that the arrest is made pursuant to a decision by a
competent judicial authority and a warrant issued by an appropriate court;
a) On a practical level, failure of the authorities of the United States to respect fully
the immunities of foreign diplomats and consular personnel may complicate
diplomatic relations between the United States and the sending country. It may
also lead to harsher treatment of U.S. personnel abroad, since the principle of
reciprocity has been integral to diplomatic and consular relations.
4. Sovereign Soil: By treaty, the Mexican Consulate building located at 3500 S. University
Avenue, is considered sovereign Mexican soil. Entrance to the building by members of
the Little Rock Police Department shall be by “invitation” only. The building is divided
into two separate sections. The entry area is the public waiting area. Adjacent to the
waiting area is a secured customer service window and Consular offices, which contain
official documents belonging to the government of Mexico. Entry into the secured area
by a member of the Little Rock Police Department shall be by invitation only and will
require a Consulate staff member escort.
B. A publication titled Diplomatic and Consular Immunity – Guidance for Law Enforcement and
Judicial Authorities has been obtained from the Diplomatic Security Service at the U.S.
Department of State. Much of the information contained of this General Order comes from that
publication.
C. A detailed publication on Consular Notification and Access has been obtained from the
Department of State for future reference. The Special Investigations Division, Intelligence Unit
will retain copies of this publication. This publication can also be located on the Internet at:
http://travel.state.gov/consul_notify.html.
A. Consular employees will have in their possession an identification card bearing a photo, personal
information and consular mission. The ID card is issued by the United States Department of State
and will also bear the official seal of the State Department. Printed on the back of the card is a
brief statement of the bearer’s criminal immunity. Career consular officers, such as those assigned
to the Consulate in Little Rock, are entitled to immunity for official acts and shall not be liable to
arrest or detention pending trial except on a warrant for a felony offense.
2. Supervisors will have access to copies of Consular identifications and may also use the
information contained in Diplomatic and Consular Immunity – Guidance for Law
Enforcement and Judicial Authorities.
A. Per the Department of State and by International treaty, the Consulate building should be
considered sovereign Mexican Soil. When responding to calls at this location, police may freely
exercise arrest powers in the parking lot only.
B. A field supervisor will respond to any calls for service at the consular building or in the event
arrests are made on the consulate parking lot.
1. Per Consulate protocol, a security guard will be stationed at the front door during
business hours.
a) All officers are to receive “permission” from the Consul General or Consulate
Security Director to enter the facility.
c) The building is divided into two distinct areas, a public area and an adjacent area
housing a secured customer service booth and Consular offices. Officer entry
into the secured area requires an escort by a member of the Consulate staff.
d) In the case of “hot pursuit” and the subject(s) enter the Consulate building,
officers will not enter the building, but officers will immediately establish a
perimeter and contact a supervisor.
2. After business hours, officers responding to calls or observing criminal activity requiring
entry into the building must await the arrival of a member of the Consular staff prior to
making entry into the building.
a) In the case of an active intruder, officers will establish a perimeter and await
arrival of a consulate representative before entry may be made.
3. All contacts, calls for service or incidents at the Consulate will be documented and copies
forwarded to the Office of the Chief of Police, Special Investigations Division,
Intelligence Unit by the end of shift.
V. Traffic Violations
A. When a person believed to have diplomatic immunity is stopped for a moving violation and
properly identifies themselves, officers may issue that person the appropriate traffic citation.
Issuance of a traffic citation does not constitute an arrest or detention.
1. Consular officers will be issued a driver’s license through the State Department.
2. Any citations issued to Consulate officers will be documented on an incident report and
copies of all paperwork will be forwarded to the Special Investigations Division,
Intelligence Unit by the end of shift.
3. The Intelligence Unit will be responsible for notifying the State Department of traffic
violations by Consular officers.
B. Driving While Intoxicated: Of primary consideration in a DWI incident is assurance that the driver
does not endanger himself or the public.
1. A Supervisor will be contacted as soon as the officer realizes the subject is a consular
member.
2. The Supervisor will be responsible for arranging transportation for the individual or
release him to a sober responsible party who agrees to take responsibility for the subject.
Members of the Intelligence Unit will be contacted and will respond to the Major Crimes
Division to facilitate communication between LRPD, the Mexican Consulate and the U.S.
State Department.
4. If the Consular Officer agrees to testing, officers will follow our standard procedure with
respect to the administration of a field sobriety test and /or the Breathalyzer.
b) Upon completion of the paperwork the subject will be transported to the Major
Crimes Division for immunity status verification and release.
5. Should the Consular Officer decline to take the Breathalyzer, he will be transported to the
Major Crimes Division for verification of immunity status, completion of paperwork and
release.
6. The Supervisor will be responsible for contacting the appropriate on-call Mexican Consul
with details of the arrest and the location of the individual.
7. The Supervisor will be responsible for arranging transportation for the individual or his
release to a sober responsible party who agrees to take responsibility for the subject.
8. Copies of all completed paperwork will be forwarded to the Office of the Chief of Police
and Special Investigations Division, Intelligence Unit by the end of shift.
A. Foreign Nationals
1. Whenever an officer arrests, or otherwise detains, any individual who is not a citizen of
the United States, the officer shall immediately inform the individual of his right to have
his government notified concerning the arrest or detention.
2. The arresting officer will contact the Special Investigations Division, Intelligence Unit
and provide all pertinent information. The Intelligence Unit shall maintain a copy of the
State Department publication, Consular Notification and Access which lists all consulates
and/or embassies, and will be responsible for the proper notifications.
a) All contacts and notifications will be documented on the arrest report or citation.
b) The foreign national will be advised that his consul has been notified.
3. In the case of certain countries, notification must be made without delay, regardless of
whether the arrestee/detainee so wishes. In these cases, the arrestee/detainee has no
choice regarding notification. The Intelligence Unit will maintain a liaison with the State
Department and shall keep such lists, as are necessary, to make the appropriate
determination, as to whether notification is mandatory.
4. Foreign consular officials have the right to visit their arrested or detained nationals,
unless the arrestee/detainee objects to such visits. In the event that foreign consular
officials indicate a desire to make such a visit, the Intelligence Unit will be notified. The
Intelligence Unit will advise the State Department and will assist both the foreign
consular officials and the State Department in arranging the visits.
5. In the event that a foreign national is arrested or detained at a time when no Intelligence
Unit personnel are on-duty, Communications personnel will be directed to contact the on-
call Intelligence Unit detective by cell phone and/or home phone, and the detective will
contact the arresting officer without delay.
A. Officers will not arrest suspected illegal aliens for unauthorized or illegal entry into this country.
Remaining illegally in this country is a civil violation for which officers have no arrest authority.
B. Officers will not hold suspected illegal aliens for the Border Patrol. Information concerning a
suspected illegal alien can be forwarded to the Border Patrol.
C. Officers may arrest any person for violations concerning the transporting and harboring of illegal
aliens. Arrests must be based on probable cause and occur in the officer’s presence.
D. Officers, who have arrested an illegal alien for other criminal offenses, may contact the Border
Patrol for follow-up on the suspect’s entry status.
ATTACHMENT #1
NOTIFICACION CONSULAR
CONSULAR NOTIFICATION
FOREIGN NATIONAL’S OPTION - SPANISH
Como no ciudadano de los Estados Unidos, que está siendo arrestado o detenido, tiene usted el derecho
de pedirnos que notifiquemos acerca de su situación a los funcionarios consulares de su país aquí en los
Estados Unidos. También tiene derecho de comunicarse con los funcionarios consulares de su país.
Entre otras cosas, un funcionario consular de su país puede ayudarle a obtener asesoramiento legal,
ponerse en contacto con su familia y visitarle en el lugar de detención. Si desea que notifiquemos a su
oficina consular, usted puede pedir esta notificación mientras esté en nuestra custodia. ¿Desea que
notifiquemos ahora a los funcionarios consulares de su país?
Sí No
(Yes) (No)
Signature/Firma: __________________________________________________
Date/Fecha: ______________________________________________________
Translation: As a non-U.S. citizen who is being arrested or detained, you are entitled to
have us notify your country's consular officers here in the United States of your situation.
You are also entitled to communicate with your consular officers. A consular officer may be
able to help you obtain legal representation, and may contact your family and visit you in
detention, among other things. If you want us to notify your consular office, you can
request this notification while in our custody. Do you want us to notify your consular officers
at this time?
Officer: __________________________________________________
*Copies of all arrest paperwork must be faxed to The Special Investigations Division – Intelligence Unit by the end of shift.
I. Purpose
A. To provide procedures to be followed by this Department in the event of the escape of an animal
from the Little Rock Zoo or intrusions by humans into dangerous animal enclosures.
A. It is the responsibility of the Zoo’s Emergency Response Team to handle animal emergencies on
Zoo grounds. The Emergency Response Team will recapture, immobilize or terminate an animal
utilizing the specialized equipment, munitions and training at their disposal whenever an animal is
on Zoo grounds and within the Zoo’s perimeter.
B. If a dangerous animal escapes onto Zoo grounds causing a threat to the public, the Zoo’s
Emergency Response Team will immediately respond and the Zoo will commence the appropriate
plan to close, partially close, lock down and/or evacuate the Zoo grounds. A call will be placed to
9-1-1 and Communications will immediately dispatch a patrol unit and a patrol supervisor, who
will respond to a location outside the Zoo’s perimeter as designated by a member of the Zoo’s
Emergency Response Team.
1. The responding units will arrive at the Zoo without lights, sirens, or loudspeakers.
2. The responding units will stand by at the designated location outside the Zoo’s perimeter
until contacted by Zoo personnel. The supervisor will serve as a liaison for the
Department until the incident is concluded.
a) The supervisor will contact the Zoo’s Manager on duty between the hours of
0800-1700.
b) After 1700 hours, the supervisor will contact after-hours Zoo personnel.
(2) A radio can be used on the Zoo’s channel (A1) until cell phone
communication has been established.
c) Communications and the supervisor responding will monitor the City Common
channel, for information purposes only, until the incident is concluded.
3. If the Zoo staff determines it is necessary to evacuate humans from all or part of the Zoo,
the supervisor assigned may request additional officers to respond to the scene.
4. Officers will only enter Zoo grounds when requested by Zoo personnel.
A. The Zoo’s Emergency Response Team is responsible for handling emergencies involving
unauthorized human intrusion into animal environments. In many situations, Zoo staff may be able
to rescue a human without having to use immobilization drugs or firearms and this Department
may or may not be notified.
B. In the event that the Department is requested to respond, a call will be placed to 9-1-1 and
Communications will immediately dispatch a patrol unit and a supervisor to a location specified by
Zoo personnel. The supervisor will make contact with the appropriate personnel and assess the
situation. Officers will only enter Zoo grounds when requested by Zoo personnel.
1. When the Zoo’s Emergency Response Team is engaged, officers will not enter into
animal enclosures to assist with control or termination of animals, or the rescue of
unauthorized persons inside the habitat.
2. If the Zoo’s Emergency Response Team is unavailable to respond, officers may enter the
grounds and animal enclosures to rescue the unauthorized person(s).
a) Though every effort should be made to corral and separate the animal(s) from
the intruder and other human beings prior to extraction, officers may take any
action necessary, including the use of deadly force against the animal, to protect
human life.
A. Should a dangerous animal escape Zoo grounds into the community, a 9-1-1 call will be placed by
Zoo personnel as soon as the escape is discovered. Communications will dispatch a patrol unit and
a supervisor to the scene. Responding officers will be responsible for the following:
2. Assisting with the search, recapture, immobilization and/or termination of the animal.
B. As the Zoo’s Emergency Response Team has specialized training in specific animal behavior and
methods of animal control and capture, the officers and the Zoo’s personnel will form teams for a
search of the area when possible and meet at a location in the area where the animal was last seen.
C. Responding officers should be aware that the Zoo’s Emergency Response Team will be dressed in
civilian clothes and will be armed with weapons loaded with both tranquilizers and live
ammunition. Personnel with tranquilizer guns will wear a yellow vest, and firearms team
personnel will wear an orange vest.
D. Officers are authorized to destroy any animal presenting a clear and immediate danger to any
person outside of the Zoo grounds.
A. The purpose of this policy is to set guidelines and regulate the use of the video surveillance system also
known as the City Wide Crime Camera System by personnel of the Little Rock Police Department. The
policy is only intended to regulate the use of overt video surveillance systems utilized in public areas.
The objectives of this program include, but are not limited to:
B. In this Order, “Crime Camera System” shall mean all elements of the City Wide Crime Camera System
equipment.
C. City Wide Crime Camera System viewing equipment will be assigned to each Division as designated by
the Chief of Police. Installation and deployment of all equipment will fall under the responsibilities of
the Special Investigations Division Intelligence Section-Technical Intelligence Unit. All cameras and
viewing centers will be deployed at the direction of the Office of the Chief of Police.
D. For the purpose of this Order, “Supervisor” shall mean personnel of the rank of Sergeant or above
supervising any police officer using the Crime Camera System. In the absence of a supervisor, this shall
mean the individual assigned to the operation and supervision of the equipment during a given time.
II. Responsibilities
A. The Little Rock Police Department will be responsible for the overall control and security of video
surveillance systems designated as the sole property of the Department. The Special Investigations
Division Commander will be responsible for the overall control and security of the City Wide Crime
Camera System. This policy does not apply to other camera systems the Department may have access
to but does not control. These would include systems such as school district cameras, traffic control
cameras, cameras owned by private entities or cameras controlled by other law enforcement agencies
or city departments. The Department will not be responsible for the shared monitoring of any private
camera systems nor allow private citizens shared monitoring of Police Department systems. This rule
will not apply to sharing images with other law enforcement agencies. Any law enforcement agency
wishing to engage in sharing images must adhere to this policy.
B. Numerous court cases have been decided regarding the police use of video surveillance. The most
significant of these was Katz v. United States, 389 U.S. 347 (1967), which held that people have a
Fourth Amendment right to privacy in those areas where there is a reasonable expectation of privacy.
This case set the standard that allows recording of events that occur in public spaces where there is not
a reasonable expectation of privacy. The Little Rock Police Department believes the use of video
surveillance cameras can withstand legal scrutiny provided the cameras are focused on public areas
and the images, both real and stored, are not disseminated improperly. Title 1 of the Electronic
Communications Privacy Act of 1966 (16 U.S.C. Section 2510) restricts the ability of police
departments to capture audio signals without a warrant. The Crime Camera System used will not have
the ability to capture or record audio. The Little Rock Police Department will comply with all
applicable local, state and federal laws regarding the use of surveillance cameras.
A. The following principles will govern the procedures that will be utilized with the City Wide Crime
Camera System.
1. Personnel monitoring the Crime Camera System will be appropriately supervised and trained
in the responsible use of the system. Any deviation from this policy may result in disciplinary
action and/or criminal or civil liability.
2. Supervisors in charge of personnel assigned to monitor the cameras will be thoroughly trained
in all applicable laws and best practices regarding the appropriate use of the Crime Camera
System. Supervisors will perform random audits of the monitoring personnel to ensure
procedures are being followed. These audits will consist of both real time monitoring and
retrieving stored data for review.
3. Data obtained and stored will be used exclusively for legitimate law enforcement purposes.
4. Monitoring will be in compliance with all existing racial profiling prohibitions and sexual
harassment policies. Unless observing specific suspects with known descriptions, personnel
will not monitor or record based on specifics of race or gender classifications.
5. Monitoring is prohibited in areas or spaces not open to the public and where persons have a
reasonable expectation of privacy.
6. The cameras will be mounted in an overt posture and clearly marked with the word “Police”
and a visible blue light.
7. The storage of images will be on a secure server in a secured area with restricted access. Only
authorized personnel will have access and be permitted to retrieve images from the Crime
Camera System. The storage system server will retain images for a period of ten (10) days.
Images will be purged on a daily basis to ensure space is available to capture new data.
8. The retention of and storage of this data as evidence will be in accordance with Departmental
policy. Any images retrieved and stored for investigative purposes will follow standard
evidentiary procedures and retention requirements in place per the Rules of Criminal
Procedures and Departmental policy. If the images are transferred to other electronic media
devices (thumb drives, DVD’s, external hard drives) they will be stored as evidence and placed
in the Property Room per Departmental policy.
9. All external requests for access to or for copies of video data will be forwarded through the
Chain of Command to the Office of the Chief of Police. The release of images will be governed
by all applicable Freedom of Information laws. Some images may be exempt from release
under the open records laws if they deal with detection, investigation or prosecution of a
crime.
IV. Procedures
A. The following procedures will be utilized with the City Wide Crime Camera System.
1. At the beginning of each shift, the supervisors will check to ensure the system is working and
recording properly.
2. Review of camera images at remote locations, such as desktop computers, will be restricted
and require password access.
3. Crime Camera System cameras will not be used to target any specific group of persons or
person because of race, gender, religion, disability, sexual orientation, national origin or
other classifications protected by law. The only exceptions are to observe suspected criminal
activity or when a specific suspect description is known.
4. A log will be maintained by monitoring personnel to record events where the cameras were
used in the initiation or furtherance of an investigation, to observe suspicious activity, direct
officers to a location, or any other use determined significant by the supervisor in charge. This
log will specifically note any arrests resulting from camera activity.
5. Personnel assigned to monitor the cameras are expected to use the equipment in a proactive
fashion and actively attempt to detect suspicious or criminal activity.
I. Purpose
The purpose of this policy is to provide employees of the Little Rock Police Department with
guidelines for application and use of license plate readers (LPR), management of LPR data, and
maintenance of LPR equipment.
It is the policy of the Little Rock Police Department to use license plate readers to enhance law
enforcement’s ability to detect violations of law, recover stolen property, locate missing persons,
apprehend fugitives, assist in investigations, and other tasks in accordance with procedures and
guidelines set forth in this policy. Additionally, data captured from LPRs will be used properly as
defined herein.
III. Definitions
LPR System: The LPR and all associated equipment and databases.
Hot List: Any database that contains lists of license plate numbers that are of interest to police
personnel, such as those associated with vehicles and/or license plates that have been stolen,
wanted for specific crimes, or those that are associated with, or may assist with the identification
of, suspects involved in criminal activity. This will also include data held by the Office of Motor
Vehicles, the Arkansas Crime Information Center including without limitation the Arkansas Crime
Information Center’s Missing Persons database, the National Crime Information Center, and the
Federal Bureau of Investigation Kidnapping and Missing Persons database.
LPR Data: Data obtained by an LPR from license plates that were read by the device, including
potential images of the plate and the vehicle on which it is displayed, the date and time, and
information regarding the location of the police vehicle in which the LPR is installed, and any
other data captured by or derived from any automatic license plate reader system, and, which may
be stored on the department’s computer servers.
Hit: LPR read matched to a license plate that has previously been uploaded on a departmental
“Hot List”.
IV. Procedures
A. General
1. Only authorized LPR systems owned or provided by the department shall be used.
2. LPR will be used only by employees who have been trained in the operation and use of the
LPR System.
3. Mobile LPRs will be assigned to the Field Services Divisions, but will be available upon
request to provide assistance to other divisions.
B. Equipment
2. Any malfunctions or operational issues with the LPR system will be reported to
a supervisor. The supervisor will contact the Technology and Equipment
Section and a Help Desk ticket will be submitted to the Little Rock Information
Technology (LRIT) Department if needed.
b. Download the most current data file of stolen and “of interest”
vehicles containing all the current ACIC information if not downloaded
automatically by the LPR system.
c. Manually add any license plate numbers that are “of interest” but not
included in the file downloads.
C. LPR Operation
1. LPRs may be used during regular patrol duties, special operations or details
such as high crime area patrols, STEP activities, directed patrols, assisting in
criminal investigations, and other activities as approved by the Chief of Police,
or his designee.
2. Upon receiving a “hit”, the mobile LPR operator will visually verify the
displayed information matches the subject license plate (i.e. correct letters,
numbers, state of issue, and any other verifiable information).Upon verifying the
alert is valid, the mobile LPR operator shall take appropriate action based upon
the type of hit in accordance with training, policy, and law.
D. LPR Data
1. All LPR data will be uploaded to the LPR servers periodically based upon the
system parameters but at least once per month.
a. LPR data will be maintained no longer than seven (7) days on the
mobile LPRs, fixed LPRs, or 150 days on the LPR server, and then
automatically purged by the system.
(1) Any LPR data that involves a hit, from which an enforcement action, an
investigation, or a prosecution resulted, will be added to the case file
and maintained therein until no longer needed.
(2) LPR data kept for the reasons stated above will be destroyed at the
conclusion of an investigation that does not result in criminal charges
being filed or upon completion of any criminal action undertaken in the
matter involving the captured plate data.
2. The Crime Analyst of the division of which the LPR is assigned shall compile monthly
statistical data to be included on the monthly Divisional Report. The Crime Analyst shall
forward a complete report every six (6) months to the Crime Analyst Supervisor. The
Crime Analyst Supervisor shall combine the reports for all the Divisions into a report for
the general public to review. The Crime Analyst Supervisor shall forward this report to
the Public Information Officer.
a. The statistical report shall be kept in the Public Information Office for eighteen
(18) months and be accessible to the public upon request.
(2) The names of all lists against which captured plate data were checked;
ii. The number of matches that upon further investigation did not
correlate to an alert;
(4) LPR operators will be required to submit an Officer’s Report at the end
of each shift that will include this information required for this report
that occurred on the officer’s shift. This officer’s report will be turned
in to their supervisor for review. The supervisor will forward the
report to the Crime Analyst in their division.
3. LPR data maintained on the LPR servers will be accessed for criminal justice reasons
only, by those employees authorized by the Chief of Police, or his/her designee, and who
have been issued a username and password for access.
4. LPR Data captured by the department’s LPRs may be shared with other law enforcement
agencies if evidence of an offense is indicated.
A. The purpose of this General Order is to establish guidelines and procedures for officers who
receive requests for a U Visa Certification (Form I-918, Supplement B). This General Order also
specifies the certifying officials designated by the Chief of Police who will sign Form I-918,
Supplement B.
B. It is the policy of this police department that the Assistant Chief of the Executive Bureau, the
Assistant Chief of the Investigative Bureau and the Captain of the Major Crimes Division are
designated to issue U Visa Certification on behalf of the Chief of Police by completing Form I-
918, Supplement B.
C. It is also the policy of the Little Rock Police Department to assist immigrant crime victims with
their U Visa applications if they cooperate with agency officials.
II. Definitions
A. “Qualifying criminal activity” is defined by statute to be “activity involving one or more of the
following or any similar activity in violation of Federal, State, or local criminal law.” The statute
also includes the attempt, conspiracy, or solicitation to commit any of the crimes listed below:
B. “Any Similar Activity” refers to other criminal activity when the similarities are substantial and
the nature and elements of the criminal activity are comparable.
III. Procedures
Upon request for a U Visa certification and before completing a Form I-918, Supplement B (a request for a
U Visa certification), the certifying official shall have verified the following:
1. A victim of a criminal activity (listed in Part II-A above) that took place in the United States
or its territories or occurred outside the United States but violates U.S. extraterritorial law;
or
B. The noncitizen has been, is being, or is likely to be helpful to the investigation. This department’s
policy describes the victim as being helpful when he/she:
2. Demonstrates cooperation during the detection or investigation of that criminal activity, even
if the investigation is not completed.
C. When a certification is based on a prior investigation or a criminal case that has been closed or
suspended, or when a statute of limitations has passed, the certification shall be completed after the
above verification has been conducted.
D. No request for certification will be accepted unless it is made on the proper U.S. Citizenship and
Immigration Services form (Form I-918, Supplement B) and has been completed by the referring legal
entity (such as a private attorney, nonprofit organization, or victim).
E. The request for certification shall be completed within 30 days from the time it was presented to this
department.
F. All requests for Form I918, Supplement B certifications presented to this Department shall be
forwarded to the designated certifying officials.
G. The certifying official may contact the VAWA Unit of the U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services to
report the U Visa applicant’s failure to continue cooperating with the Department only when the
failure to cooperate is considered unreasonable. To determine whether failure to cooperate is
unreasonable, officials should review and consider the victim’s history of abuse and victimization, and
any threats the victim has experienced or is experiencing.
Department policy authorizes its members to distribute to any crime victim who may be a noncitizen an
informational flyer describing immigration relief and services available to immigrant crime victims.
I. General
A. This Order establishes Departmental guidelines for the appropriate treatment of transgender,
intersex and gender non-conforming (TIGN) individuals who come into contact with members of
the Little Rock Police Department.
B. The Little Rock Police Department is committed to working with all diverse communities which it
serves, including the transgender community, with fairness and dignity. Employees of the Little
Rock Police Department shall interact with all citizens, including the transgender community in a
manner that is professional, respectful, and courteous. Employees shall not exhibit any bias,
prejudice or discrimination against a TIGN individual or group.
II. Definitions
Adopted Name: Non-birth name that a transgender individual uses in self-reference (this may or may not be
the individual’s legal name).
Cross-Dresser: A term that refers to people whose dress is typically associated with the opposite sex.
Gender Identity or Expression: The actual or perceived identity or behavior of a person as being male or
female.
Intersex: A group of conditions where there is a discrepancy between the external genitalia and the internal
genitalia (testes and ovaries).
Sexual Orientation: An individual’s enduring romantic, emotional and/or sexual attraction to individuals of
a particular gender.
Transgender Individual: A person whose gender identity differs from his/her assigned gender.
Transsexual: A person whose personal sense of his/her gender conflicts with his/her anatomical sex at birth.
Female-to-Male (“FTM”): A person who transitions from “female to male,” meaning a person who was
assigned female at birth, but identifies and lives as a male. An FTM individual should be addressed using
the masculine pronouns (e.g. he, him, his), regardless of surgical status.
Male-to-Female (“MTF”): A person who transitions from “male to female,” meaning a person who was
assigned male at birth, but identifies and lives as a female. An MTF individual should be addressed using
the feminine pronouns (e.g. she, her, hers), regardless of surgical status.
A. Employees shall address transgender individuals by the individual’s adopted name, even if the
individual has not received legal recognition of the adopted name. In addressing or discussing a
transgender individual, employees shall use the pronouns appropriate for that person’s gender
identity (e.g. she, her or hers for MTF; he, him or his for FTM). If employees are uncertain about
which pronouns are appropriate, then the employee should respectfully ask the individual.
B. Employees shall not use language that a reasonable person would consider demeaning or
derogatory, in particular, language aimed at a person’s actual or perceived gender identity, gender
expression or sexual orientation.
C. When a person self-identifies as being a transgender person, employees shall not question this
identity except for articulable reasons, i.e., the person’s gender being related to a crime.
D. Employees shall not disclose an individual’s TIGN identity to other arrestees, the public or non-
departmental employees, absent a proper law enforcement purpose.
A. Calls for service or complaints generated by transgender individuals shall be addressed and
investigated in a manner that is consistent with all departmental policies. No employee shall fail to
respond to a call for service based on the gender identity or gender expression of the caller.
B. Employees shall not consider a person’s gender identification as reasonable suspicion or prima
facie evidence that the individual is or has engaged in a crime.
A. Employees shall continue to use standard practices and procedures when conducting field
interviews, pat downs or investigative contacts in a manner that does not unreasonably endanger
themselves or another person.
B. Employees shall not stop, detain, frisk or search any person in whole or in part for the purpose of
determining that person’s gender or in order to call attention to the person’s gender expression.
This limitation does not prevent an officer from following established department procedures
relative to ensuring the proper processing of suspects.
C. Employees will document a transgender individual’s legal name and legal gender on all legal
documents, including but not limited to: citations, information reports, affidavits, or arrest reports.
If the individual utilizes a name other than their legal name, it should be documented as an AKA or
in the alias section.
A. Whenever possible, a transgender prisoner shall be transported alone. Employees shall ensure that
additional units are called in order to assist with transporting additional transgender individuals.
VII. Searches
A. Transgender persons shall not be subject to more invasive search or frisk procedures than non-
transgender persons.
B. All searches of the transgender suspect’s person shall be conducted by two (2) employees of the
gender requested by the transgender suspect, whenever possible. If two (2) employees of the
preferred gender are not available, the search shall nonetheless be conducted by two (2) available
employees. If the suspect does not specify a preference, then the search shall be conducted by
employees of the same gender as the transgender suspect’s gender expression (e.g. FTM prisoner,
expressing no preference, should be searched by a male employee).
C. Requests to remove identity-related items such as prosthetics, clothing, wigs and cosmetic items
shall be consistent with requirements for the removal of similar items for non-TIGN suspects.
B. In the event that a government-issued identification card is unavailable, the following criteria will
be used to determine the gender:
C. In the event that there is uncertainty regarding the appropriate classification of a suspect’s gender,
a supervisor shall be consulted for further guidance on the appropriate classification.
CRIMINAL INTELLIGENCE
I. Purpose
A. It is the purpose of this policy to establish procedures regulating the collection, storage and
distribution of criminal intelligence information relating to criminal and homeland security
activities by members of the Little Rock Police Department. This policy shall apply to all
members of the Little Rock Police Department.
II. Policy
A. The Little Rock Police Department recognizes that intelligence gathering is an essential
element in the duties of any law enforcement agency. When intelligence is gathered, the
information is used to prevent crime, pursue and apprehend offenders, and obtain evidence
necessary for conviction. It is the policy of the Little Rock Police Department to gather
information directed toward specific individuals or organizations where there is reasonable
suspicion (as defined in 28 C.F.R. part 23, section 23.3 c) that the individuals or
organizations may be planning or engaging in criminal activity, and to gather the
information with respect for the rights of those involved, and to disseminate it only to
authorized individuals as defined. While criminal intelligence may be assigned to the
Special Investigations Division, all members of the Little Rock Police Department are
responsible for reporting information that may help identify criminal conspirators and
perpetrators.
III. Procedures
B. Members of the Little Rock Police Department and departmental equipment may be used
as necessary for the collection of raw data, strategic intelligence, tactical intelligence and
support for overt and covert law enforcement operations. Criminal Intelligence shall in no
way be used to collect information for any reasons not specifically related to crime or
suspected criminal activity.
C. To ensure the legality and integrity of its operations, information is only to be gathered
relative to legitimate investigative objectives relating to the control and prevention of
criminal conduct, and activities that present a threat to the community.
E. Evaluation of Information
F. File Status
a) Open
G. Classification of Intelligence
a) Restricted
b) Confidential
c) Classified
d) Unclassified
1. Access to the inquiry function of the CrimeNtel database shall be limited to those
persons authorized by the Special Investigations Division Commander.
1. The purpose of the review and purge or review and validate or purge, is to keep
the criminal intelligence information being stored as current and valid. Inaccurate
information or information determined to no longer comply with 28 CFR part 23
must be deleted from the CrimeNtel database.
2. Review and Validation process. 28 CFR part 23 allows a five (5) year retention
of criminal intelligence. The Special Investigations Division will conduct a
review and validation annually. During the review and validation, criminal
intelligence records will be reviewed to determine whether the information can be
updated and the submission re-substantiated.
3. New information can be added to a file that would re-substantiate the reasonable
suspicion at any time and the file could be validated and the retention period
extended.
NARCAN
I. Purpose
A. It is the purpose of this policy to establish procedures for the carry and use of Narcan
(Naloxone) in an effort to treat opioid overdoses.
II. Policy
A. It is the policy of the Little Rock Police Department to provide its officers access to Narcan,
in the form of a nasal spray, for the purpose of treating another officer who may
inadvertently be exposed to opioids or to any person they may encounter suffering from a
possible opioid drug overdose or exposure.
III. Definitions
A. Narcan: A brand name of Naloxone, a medication used to block the effects of opioids,
especially in overdose.
B. Opioids: Opium like compounds that bind to opioid receptors of the body. Examples of
opioids include but are not limited to: hydrocodone, oxycodone, morphine, codeine, heroin,
and fentanyl.
IV. Procedures
A. Safety
1. Officer and scene safety should be the first priority when responding to a potential
overdose or exposure call. When interacting with any overdose victim, officers
shall exercise universal precautions, ensure the victim is in a safe location, and
remove any potential weapons or dangerous items from the victim’s reach.
Officers should remain alert to the effects of Narcan in the event the victim
becomes hostile or violent.
2. Used Narcan vials shall be turned over to the responding MEMS unit for proper
disposal or packaged in a plastic needle tube, marked with a biohazard label, and
submitted to the Property Room for disposal.
3. Proper care should be taken when storing Narcan kits in vehicles. Narcan kits are
never to be stored in direct sunlight, exposed to extreme heat or allowed to freeze.
Officers shall not leave the kits in their vehicles while they are on vacation or any
extended leave.
B. Use of Narcan
d) Gurgling noises
e) Vomiting
g) Pinpoint pupils
4. Narcan nasal spray may be administered if the officer believes the victim has
overdosed on opioids, or has overdosed on opioids in combination with other
drugs, is unresponsive from apparent drug use but uncertain if opioids were
involved, or appears to have symptoms consistent with opioid exposure.
5. Narcan will be administered into the nostrils of the victim via an atomizer attached
to the Narcan vial. Narcan dosages should be administered in 4.0 mg increments.
6. An initial dose of 4.0 mg will be given to the victim in one nostril. If the victim
does not show a positive response within 3 to 5 minutes, an additional dose of 4.0
mg should be given.
7. If there is still no response from the victim, the same dosage method may be
administered into the other nostril.
10. If the victim is breathing, or starts to breathe, place them in a recovery position.
11. Remain with and monitor the victim until medical personnel arrive and assume
responsibility.
12. Notify medical personnel of any observations and actions taken prior to their
arrival, including the number of Narcan doses administered and the approximate
time each dose was given.
V. Reporting
A. When an officer administers a dose of Narcan to any person, the officer shall notify a
supervisor and complete a Narcan Use Form.
1. This form will be completed in addition to any necessary Incident Report. In the
event an Incident Report is not necessary, the Narcan Use Form will suffice to
document the incident.
C. The completed Narcan Use Form will be forwarded to the Training Division for the
monitoring, evaluation and analysis of Narcan usage.
VI. Replacement
A. The Training Division will be responsible for issuing and storing Narcan dosage units.
B. In the event an officer discovers a Narcan kit is expired or damaged, the officer shall
immediately notify his supervisor who will take the kit out of service. The officer shall
return the expired or damaged kit to the Training Division Quartermaster as soon as
practical for replacement.
VII. Training
A. Training for officers for the usage of Narcan will be administered through the Training
Division prior to being issued Narcan.
B. Annual refresher training will conducted by the Training Division in the usage of Narcan.